diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-27 12:25:29 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-27 12:25:29 -0800 |
| commit | 93a1afe5cd42d44aa277e3f11afafc0c10814d8b (patch) | |
| tree | 604c36778ee9c2e6860c1499b6d2e54f62ca8361 | |
| parent | 37eb7970be58ec89f6127768558c2de2eea2efef (diff) | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/60456-0.txt | 9336 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/60456-0.zip | bin | 142436 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/60456-h.zip | bin | 756204 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/60456-h/60456-h.htm | 9924 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/60456-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 99895 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/60456-h/images/cover2.jpg | bin | 101108 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/60456-h/images/frontis.jpg | bin | 100880 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/60456-h/images/p076.jpg | bin | 100252 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/60456-h/images/p226.jpg | bin | 100263 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/60456-h/images/p300.jpg | bin | 100783 -> 0 bytes |
13 files changed, 17 insertions, 19260 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c6d7b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #60456 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/60456) diff --git a/old/60456-0.txt b/old/60456-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index a3edff0..0000000 --- a/old/60456-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9336 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of From Office Boy to Reporter, by Howard R. Garis - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org/license - - -Title: From Office Boy to Reporter - The First Step in Journalism - -Author: Howard R. Garis - -Release Date: October 8, 2019 [EBook #60456] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FROM OFFICE BOY TO REPORTER *** - - - - -Produced by David Edwards and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - - - - - Illustration: “NOW THEN, YOU NEW BOY--WHAT’S YOUR NAME?” - _From Office Boy To Reporter_ - - - - - FROM OFFICE BOY - TO REPORTER - - OR - - THE FIRST STEP IN JOURNALISM - - BY - HOWARD R. GARIS - - AUTHOR OF “THE WHITE CRYSTALS,” “THE ISLE OF BLACK FIRE,” - “WITH FORCE AND ARMS,” ETC. - - _ILLUSTRATED_ - - New York - GROSSET & DUNLAP - Publishers - - - - - COPYRIGHT, 1907 - - BY - CHATTERTON-PECK COMPANY - - _From Office Boy to Reporter_ - - - - -PREFACE - - -MY DEAR BOYS:-- - -I have tried to write for you a story of newspaper life and tell how a -boy, who started in the lowest position,--that of a copy carrier,--rose -to become a reporter. The newspaper covers a wide field, and enters -into almost every home, telling of the doings of all the world, -including that which takes place right in our midst. - -There are many persons in the business, which is an interesting and -fascinating one. I have been actively engaged in it for nearly sixteen -years, and I have seen many strange happenings. Some of these I have -set down in this book for you to read, and I hope you will like them. - -There are many things which I had not the time or space to tell about, -and which may be related in other books of this series. There have -been written many good stories of newspaper life and experiences. I -trust I may have added one that will appeal especially to you boys. If -I have, I will feel amply repaid for what I have done. - - Yours with best wishes, - HOWARD R. GARIS. - - January 10, 1907. - - - - -CONTENTS - - - CHAPTER PAGE - - I. FORECLOSING THE MORTGAGE 1 - - II. BAD NEWS 9 - - III. LOOKING FOR WORK 18 - - IV. LARRY AND THE REPORTER 26 - - V. LARRY SECURES WORK 36 - - VI. LARRY MAKES AN ENEMY 46 - - VII. THE MISSING COPY 53 - - VIII. PETER IS DISCHARGED 62 - - IX. LARRY GETS A STORY 70 - - X. LARRY MEETS HIS ENEMY 79 - - XI. LARRY HAS A FIGHT 87 - - XII. A STRANGE ASSIGNMENT 95 - - XIII. UNDER THE RIVER 104 - - XIV. LARRY’S SUCCESS 113 - - XV. LARRY GOES TO SCHOOL 121 - - XVI. LARRY AT A STRIKE 130 - - XVII. TAKEN PRISONER 139 - - XVIII. HELD CAPTIVE 148 - - XIX. LARRY’S MOVEMENTS 156 - - XX. BACK AT WORK 165 - - XXI. LARRY ON THE WATCH 173 - - XXII. TRAPPING A THIEF 181 - - XXIII. BAD MONEY 189 - - XXIV. A QUEER CAPTURE 197 - - XXV. A BIG ROBBERY 205 - - XXVI. THE MEN IN THE LOT 214 - - XXVII. LARRY IS REWARDED 222 - - XXVIII. THE RENOWNED DOCTOR 233 - - XXIX. THE OPERATION 241 - - XXX. THE FLOOD 249 - - XXXI. DAYS OF TERROR 257 - - XXXII. THE FLOOD INCREASES 265 - - XXXIII. DYNAMITING THE DAM 273 - - XXXIV. UNDER WATER 281 - - XXXV. THE RACE 290 - - XXXVI. LARRY SCORES A BIG BEAT 298 - - XXXVII. LARRY’S ADVANCEMENT 306 - - - - -FROM OFFICE BOY TO REPORTER - -CHAPTER I - -FORECLOSING THE MORTGAGE - - -“Now then,” began the shrill voice of the auctioneer, “we’ll start -these proceedin’s, if ye ain’t got no objections. Step right this way, -everybody, an’ let th’ biddin’ be lively!” - -“Hold on a minute!” called a big man in the crowd. “We want to know -what the terms are.” - -“I thought everybody knowed ’em,” spoke Simon Rollinson, deputy -sheriff, of the village of Campton, New York State. “This here farm, -belongin’ in fee-simple to Mrs. Elizabeth Dexter, widow of Robert -Dexter, containin’ in all some forty acres of tillable land, four acres -of pasture an’ ten of woods, is about to be sold, with all stock an’ -fixtures, consistin’ of seven cows an’ four horses, an’ other things, -to th’ highest bidder, t’ satisfy a mortgage of three thousand dollars.” - -“We know all that,” said the big man who had first spoken. “What’s the -terms of payment?” - -“Th’ terms is,” resumed Simon, “ten per cent. down, an’ the balance in -thirty days, an’ the buyer has t’ give a satisfactory bond or----” - -“That’ll do, go ahead,” called several. - -“Now then, this way, everybody,” went on Mr. Rollinson. “Give me your -attention. What am I bid to start this here farm, one of the finest in -Onondaga County? What am I bid?” - -There was a moment’s silence. A murmur went through the crowd of people -gathered in the farmyard in front of a big red barn. Several wanted to -bid, but did not like to be the first. - -As the deputy sheriff, who acted as the auctioneer, had said, the farm -was about to be sold. It was a fine one, and had belonged to Robert -Dexter. With his wife Elizabeth, his sons, Larry, aged fifteen, a -sturdy lad with bright blue eyes and brown hair, and James, aged eight, -his daughters, Lucy, a girl of twelve, afflicted with a bad disease of -the spine, and little Mary, just turned four, Mr. Dexter had lived on -the place, and had worked it successfully, for several years. - -Then he had become ill of consumption. He could not follow the hard -life. Crops failed, and in order to get cash to keep his family he was -obliged to borrow a large sum of money. He gave the farm as security, -and agreed, in case he could not pay the money back in a certain time, -that the farm should be forfeited. - -He was never able to get the funds together, and this worry, with -the ravages of the disease, soon caused his death. Mrs. Dexter, with -Larry’s help, made a brave effort to stand up against the misfortune, -but it was of no use. She could not pay the interest on the mortgage, -and, finally, the holder, Samuel Mortland, foreclosed. - -The matter was placed in the hands of the sheriff, whose duty it is to -foreclose mortgages, and that official, being a busy man, delegated -the unpleasant task to one of his deputies or assistants, who lived in -the town of Campton. The sale had been advertised for several miles -surrounding the village, and on the date set quite a crowd gathered. - -There were farmers from many hamlets, a number of whom brought their -wives and families, as a country auction is not unlike a fair or -circus as an attraction. There they were sure to meet friends and -acquaintances, and, besides, they might pick up some bargains. - -“Who’ll make the first offer?” called Mr. Rollinson. “The upset or -startin’ price is fifteen hundred dollars, an’ I’ll jest go ahead with -that. Now who’ll make it two thousand?” - -“I’ll go seventeen hundred,” called a short stout man in the front row. - -“Huh! I should think ye would, Nate Jackson. Why, seventeen hundred -dollars wouldn’t buy th’ house an’ barn. You’ll hev t’ do better than -that!” - -“I’ll say eighteen hundred,” cried a woman who seemed to mean business. - -“Now you’re talkin’!” cried Mr. Rollinson. “That’s sumthin’ like. Why, -jest think of th’ pasture, an’ woodland, an’ cows an’ horses an’----” - -“I’ll make it two thousand dollars,” said a third bidder. - -“I’m bid two thousand,” cried the deputy sheriff. “Who’ll make it -twenty-two hundred?” - -Then the auction was in full swing. The bidding became lively, though -the advances were of smaller amounts than at first. By degrees the -price crept up until it was twenty-nine hundred dollars. - -“I’ve got to git at least thirty-one hundred to pay th’ mortgage an’ -expenses,” the auctioneer explained. “If I don’t git more than this -last bid Mr. Mortland will take the property himself. Now’s your last -chance, neighbors.” - -This seemed to stimulate the people, and several offers came in at -once, until at last the bid was $3,090. There it seemed to stick, no -one caring to go any higher, and each one hoping he might, by adding -a few dollars more, get possession of the property, which was worth -considerable above the figure offered. - -While the auction was going on there sat, in the darkened parlor of the -farmhouse, Mrs. Dexter and her three younger children. With them were -some sympathizing neighbors, who had called to tell her how sorry they -were that she had lost the farm. - -“What do you intend to do?” asked Mrs. Olney, winding her long -cork-screw curls about her fingers. - -“I’m sure I don’t know,” Mrs. Dexter said. “If we have to leave here, -and I suppose we will, I think the only thing to do is to go to my -sister. She lives in New York.” - -“Let’s see, she married a Jimson, didn’t she?” asked Mrs. Peterkins, -another neighbor. - -“No, her husband’s name is Edward Ralston,” replied Mrs. Dexter. “He is -a conductor on a street car, in New York. My sister wrote to me to come -to her if I could find no other place.” - -“That would be a wise thing to do,” spoke Mrs. Olney. “New York is such -a big place. Perhaps Larry could find some work there.” - -“I hope he can,” said Larry’s mother. “He is getting to be a strong -boy, but I would rather see him in school.” - -“Of course, knowledge is good for the young,” admitted Mrs. Peterkins, -“but you’ll need the money Larry can earn.” - -“I’m goin’ to earn money when I go to New York!” exclaimed James. “I’m -goin’ to the end of the rainbow, where there’s a pot of gold, an’ I’m -goin’ to dig it up an’ give it all to mommer.” - -“Good for you!” exclaimed Mrs. Olney, clasping the little fellow to -her and kissing him. “You’ll be a great help to your mother when you -grow up.” - -“Kisses is for girls!” exclaimed James, struggling to free himself, -whereat even his mother, who had been saddened by the thought of -leaving her home, smiled. - -“Will--will you have any money left after the place is sold?” asked -Mrs. Peterkins. - -“I hope it will bring in at least a few hundred dollars above the -mortgage,” answered Mrs. Dexter. “If it does not I don’t know what I’ll -do. We would have to sell some of the house things to get money enough -to travel.” - -Outside, the shrill voice of the auctioneer could be heard, for it was -summer and the windows were open. - -“Third an’ last call!” cried Mr. Rollinson. - -“Oh, it’s going to be sold!” exclaimed Mrs. Dexter, with a sound that -seemed like a sob in her throat. “The dear old farm is going.” - -“Third an’ last call!” the deputy sheriff went on. “Last call! Last -call! Going! Going! Gone!” - -With a bang that sounded like the report of a rifle, Mr. Rollinson -brought his hammer down on the block. - -“I declare this farm sold to Jeptha Morrison fer th’ sum of thirty-two -hundred and seventy-five dollars,” he cried. “Step this way, Mr. -Morrison, an’ I’ll take yer money an’ give ye a receipt. Allers -willin’ t’ take money,”--at which sally the crowd laughed. - -“Only thirty-two hundred and seventy-five dollars,” repeated Mrs. -Dexter. “Why, that will leave scarcely anything for me. The sheriff’s -fees will have to be paid, and some back interest. I will have nothing.” - -She looked worried, and the two neighbors, knowing what it meant to be -a widow without money and with little children to support, felt keenly -for her. - -“Mother!” exclaimed a voice, and a lad came into the room somewhat -excitedly. “Mother, the farm’s sold!” - -“Yes, Larry, I heard Mr. Rollinson say so,” said Mrs. Dexter. - -“It wasn’t fair!” the boy went on. “We should have got more for it!” - -“Hush, Larry. Don’t say it wasn’t fair,” said his mother. “You should -accuse no one.” - -“But I heard Mr. Mortland going around and telling people not to bid on -it, as the title wasn’t good,” the boy declared. “He wanted to scare -them from bidding so he could get the property cheap.” - -“But he didn’t buy it,” said Mrs. Dexter. “It went to Mr. Morrison.” - -“Yes, and he bought it with the money Mr. Mortland supplied him,” Larry -cried. “I saw through the whole game. It was a trick of Mr. Mortland’s -to get the farm, and he’ll have it in a few weeks. Oh, how I wish I was -a man! I’d show them something!” - -“Larry, dear,” said his mother reprovingly, and then the boy noticed, -for the first time, that others were in the room. - -“Of course I haven’t any proof,” Larry continued, “for I only saw Mr. -Mortland hand Mr. Morrison some money and heard him tell him to make -the last bid. But I have my suspicions, just the same. Why, mother, -there will be nothing left for us.” - -“That’s what I was telling Mrs. Olney and Mrs. Peterkins,” said Mrs. -Dexter with a sigh. “I don’t know how we can get to New York, when -railroad fares are so high.” - -“I’ll tell you what we must do, mother!” exclaimed Larry. - -“What, son?” - -“We must sell the furniture.” - -“Oh, I could never do that.” - -“But we must,” the boy went on. “We cannot take it with us to New York, -and we may get money enough from it to help us out. It is the best -thing to do.” - - - - -CHAPTER II - -BAD NEWS - - -“I believe Larry is right,” said Mrs. Olney. “The furniture would only -be a trouble to you, Mrs. Dexter. Now would be a good chance to sell -it, while the crowd is here. You ought to get pretty good prices, as -much of the stuff is new.” - -“Perhaps you are right,” assented the widow, “though I hate to part -with the things. Suppose you tell Mr. Rollinson, Larry.” - -The boy hurried from the room to inform the auctioneer there was -more work for him, and Mrs. Dexter, with her two friends, came from -the parlor, for they knew the place would soon be overrun by curious -persons looking for bargains. - -Mr. Rollinson, anxious to make more commissions, readily undertook to -put the furniture up for auction. With the exception of a few articles -that she prized very highly, and laying aside only the clothes of -herself and children, Mrs. Dexter permitted all the contents of the -house to be offered for sale. - -Then, having reached this decision, she went off in a bedroom and cried -softly, for she could not bear to think of her home being broken up, -and strangers using the chairs and tables which, with the other things, -had made such a nice place while Mr. Dexter was alive. - -Larry had hard work to keep back the tears when he saw some article of -furniture, with which were associated happy memories, bid for by some -farmer. - -When, at length, Mr. Rollinson reached the old armchair, in which Mr. -Dexter used to sit and tell his children stories, and where, during the -last days of his life he had rested with his little family gathered -about him, Larry could stand it no longer. He felt the hot scalding -tears come to his eyes, and ran out behind the big red barn, where he -sobbed out his grief all alone. - -He covered his face with his hands and, as he thought of the happy days -that seemed to be gone forever, his grief grew more intense. All at -once he heard a voice calling: - -“Hello, cry-baby!” - -At first Larry was too much occupied with his troubles to pay any -attention. Then someone called again: - -“Larry Dexter cries like a girl!” - -Larry looked up, to meet the laughing gaze of a boy about his own size -and age, with bright red hair and a face much covered with freckles. - -“I’m not a cry-baby!” Larry exclaimed. - -“You be, too! Didn’t I see you cryin’?” - -“I’ll make you cry on the other side of your mouth, Chot Ramsey!” Larry -exclaimed, making a spring for his tormentor. - -Chot doubled up his fists. To do him credit he had no idea that Larry -was crying because he felt so badly at the prospect of leaving the farm -that had been his home for many years. Chot was a good-hearted boy, but -thoughtless. So, when he saw one of his playmates weeping, which act -was considered only fit for girls, Chot could not resist the temptation -to taunt Larry. - -“Do you want t’ fight?” demanded Chot. - -“I’ll punch you for calling me names!” exclaimed Larry, his sorrow -at the sale of his father’s armchair dispersed at the idea of being -laughed at and called a cry-baby. - -“You will, hey?” asked Chot. “Well, I dare you to touch me!” - -“I’ll make you sing a different tune in a minute!” cried Larry, rushing -forward. - -Then, like two game roosters, both wishing to fight, yet neither -desiring to begin the battle, the boys faced each other. Their eyes -were angry and all tears had disappeared from Larry’s face. - -“Will you knock a chip off my shoulder?” demanded Chot. - -“Sure,” replied Larry. - -Chot stooped down, found a little piece of wood and carefully balanced -it on the upper part of his arm. - -“I dare you to!” he taunted. - -This time-honored method of starting hostilities was not ignored by -Larry. He sprang forward, and with a quick motion sent the fragment of -wood flying through the air. Then he doubled up his fists, imitating -the example Chot had earlier set, and stood ready for the fracas. - -But at that instant, when, in another second Chot and Larry would have -been involved in a rough-and-tumble encounter, James, Larry’s little -brother, came running around the corner of the barn. He seemed greatly -excited. - -“Larry! Larry!” he exclaimed. “They’re sellin’ my nice old rockin’ -horse, an’ my high chair what I used to have when I was a baby! Please -stop ’em, Larry!” - -Larry lost all desire to fight. He didn’t mind if all the boys in -Campton called him cry-baby. He had too many sorrows to mind that. - -“Don’t worry, Jimmie,” he said to the little fellow. “I’ll buy you some -new ones.” - -But little James was not to be comforted, and burst into a flood of -tears. Chot, who had looked on in some wonder at what it was all about, -for he did not understand that the household goods were being sold, -unclosed his clenched fists. Underneath a somewhat rough exterior he -had a warm heart. - -“Say,” he began, coming up awkwardly to Larry, “I didn’t know you was -bein’ sold out. I--I didn’t mean t’ make fun of ye. I--I was only -foolin’ when I said ye was a cry-baby. Ye can have my best fishhook, -honest ye can!” - -“Thanks, Chot,” replied Larry, quick to feel the change of feeling. “I -couldn’t help crying when I saw some of the things dad used to have -going under the hammer. But I feel worse for mother and the others. I -can stand it.” - -“Are ye goin’ away from here?” asked Chot, for that anyone should leave -Campton, where he had lived all his life, seemed too strange a thing to -be true. - -“I think we will go to New York,” replied Larry. “Mother’s sister lives -there. I expect to get some work, and help support the folks.” - -“I wish I was goin’ off like that!” exclaimed Chot. “They could sell -everything in my house, an’ everything I’ve got, except my dog, if -they’d let me go t’ New York.” - -“You don’t know when you’re well off,” spoke Larry, who, in the last -few months, under the stress of trouble, had become older than his -years indicated. - -By this time James, who saw a big yellow butterfly darting about -among the flowers which grew in an old-fashioned garden below the -barn, rushed to capture it, forgetting his troubles. Larry, whose -grief-stricken mood had passed, returned to the house, to find it a -place of confusion. - -Men and women were in almost every room, going through and looking at -the different articles. The loud voice of the auctioneer rang out, and -Larry felt another pang in his heart as he saw piece after piece of -furniture being knocked down to the highest bidder. - -The boy found his mother in the bedroom, where she had sought a quiet -place to rest. - -“Have you really made up your mind to go to New York, mother?” Larry -asked. - -“I think it is the best thing to do,” was the answer. “We can stay with -your aunt Ellen until I can find some work to do.” - -“Are you going to work, mother? I hate to think of it. I’ll work for -you.” - -“I know you will do what you can,” replied Mrs. Dexter, “but I’m afraid -boys do not earn much in big cities, so we will need all we both can -get. It is going to be a hard struggle.” - -“Don’t worry!” exclaimed Larry, assuming a cheerfulness he did not -feel. “It will all come out right, somehow, you see if it doesn’t.” - -“I hope so,” sighed Mrs. Dexter. - -The auctioneering of the goods went on rapidly, and, toward the close -of the afternoon, all that were not to be kept were disposed of. Mr. -Rollinson cried his last “Going! Going! Gone!” brought his hammer down -for the last time with a loud bang, and then announced that the sale -was over. - -“Where’s your mother, Larry?” he asked of the boy. - -“I’ll call her.” - -In a few minutes Larry had brought Mrs. Dexter to where the deputy -sheriff waited for her in the parlor. - -“Wa’al, everthing’s sold,” Mr. Rollinson began. “Didn’t bring as much -as I cal’lated on, but then ye never can git much at a forced sale.” - -“How much will I have left after all expenses are paid?” asked Mrs. -Dexter. - -“Allowin’ for everything,” said the auctioneer, figuring up on the back -of an envelope, “you’ll have jest four hundred and three dollars and -forty-five cents, the odd cents bein’ for some pictures.” - -“It is very little to begin life over again on,” said Mrs. Dexter. - -“But it’s better than nothin’,” said Mr. Rollinson, who seldom looked -on the dark side of things. “Now I made the sale of these household -things dependent on you. You can stay here two weeks if ye want t’, an’ -nothin’ will be taken away. Them as bought it understands it.” - -“I would like t’ get away as soon as possible,” said the widow. - -“Wa’al, there’s nothin’ t’ hinder ye.” - -“Then I shall start for New York day after to-morrow.” - -“All right, Mrs. Dexter. I’ll settle up th’ accounts an’ have all th’ -money ready by then.” - -Mr. Rollinson was as good as his word. On the third day after the sale, -having written to her sister that she was coming, but not waiting for a -reply, Mrs. Dexter, with Larry, Lucy, Mary and James, boarded a train -for the big city where they were all hoping their fortunes awaited -them. Little James was full of excitement. He was sure they were going -at last to the end of the rainbow. Mary was delighted with the new and -strange sights along the way. Larry was very thoughtful. As for Lucy -her spine hurt her so that she got very little enjoyment from the trip. -But she did not say anything about it, for fear of worrying her mother. - -It was a long journey, but it came to an end at last. The train reached -Hoboken, on the New Jersey side of the Hudson River, and, though -somewhat bewildered by the lights, the noise and confusion, Larry -managed to learn which ferryboat to take to land them nearest to his -aunt’s house, who lived on what is called the “East Side” of New York. - -The trip across the river on the big boat was a source of much delight -to the younger children, but Mrs. Dexter was too worried to be -interested. Lucy was very tired, but Larry kept up his spirits. - -Once landed in New York, in the evening, the confusion, the noise, the -shouts of the cabmen, the rattle of the cars, the clanging of gongs and -the ringing of bells, was so great that poor Mrs. Dexter, who had been -so long used to the quiet of the country, felt her head ache. - -By dint of many inquiries Larry found out which car to take and, -marshaling his mother and the children ahead of him, he directed them -where to go. A long ride brought them to the street where Mrs. Ralston -lived. - -Here was more confusion. The thoroughfare swarmed with children, and -the noise was almost as great as down at the ferry. A man directed -the travelers to the house, which was an apartment or tenement one, -inhabited by a number of families. Larry, his mother, and the children -climbed the stairs to the third floor, where Mrs. Ralston lived. A -knock on the door brought a woman who was surprised at her visitors. - -“Does Mrs. Ralston live here?” asked Larry, thinking he might have made -a mistake. - -“She did, but she moved away yesterday,” was the answer. - -“Moved away?” - -“Yes, didn’t you hear? Her husband was killed in a street-car accident -a few days ago, and after the funeral Mrs. Ralston said she could not -afford to keep these rooms. So she moved away. I came in last night. -Are you relatives of hers?” - -“I am her sister,” said Mrs. Dexter, and then, at the news of Mr. -Ralston’s death, coming on top of all the other troubles, the poor -woman burst into tears. - - - - -CHAPTER III - -LOOKING FOR WORK - - -“Now there, don’t you worry one mite,” said the woman who had come -to the door. “I know jest how you feel. Come right in. We haven’t -much room, but there’s only my husband, and he can sleep on the floor -to-night. I’ll take care of you until you can find some place to stay. -Bring the children in. Well, if there isn’t a little fellow who’s jest -the image of my little Eddie that died,” and the good woman clasped -James in her arms and hugged him tightly. - -“I’m afraid we’ll be too much trouble for you,” spoke Larry, seeing -that his mother was too overcome to talk. - -“Not a bit of it,” was the hearty reply. “Come right along. I was jest -gittin’ supper, an’ there’s plenty for all of you. Come in!” - -Confused and alarmed at the sudden news, and hardly knowing what she -did, Mrs. Dexter entered the rooms where she had expected to find her -sister. She was almost stunned by the many troubles coming all at once, -and was glad enough to find any sort of temporary shelter. - -“I’m Mrs. Jackson,” the woman went on. “We’re a little upset, but I -know you won’t mind that.” - -“No indeed,” replied Mrs. Dexter. “We are only too glad to come in.” - -The apartment, which consisted of four small rooms, was in considerable -confusion. Chairs and tables stood in all sorts of positions, and there -were two beds up. - -“We’ll manage somehow,” said Mrs. Jackson. “My goodness! The potatoes -are burning!” and she ran to the kitchen, where supper was cooking. - -While she was busy over the meal her husband came in, and, though he -was much surprised to see so many strangers in the house, he quickly -welcomed them when his wife explained the circumstances. Supper was -soon ready, and the travelers, except Mrs. Dexter, ate with good -appetites. Then, after she had told something of her troubles it was -decided that the two younger children should sleep in a bed with their -mother. Lucy shared Mrs. Jackson’s room, and Larry and Mr. Jackson had -beds made up on the floor in the parlor. - -“We’ll pretend we’re camping out,” said Mr. Jackson. “Did you ever -camp, Larry?” - -“Sometimes, with the boys in Campton,” was the reply. “But we never -stayed out all night.” - -“I have when I was a young man,” said Mr. Jackson. “I used to be quite -fond of hunting.” - -Larry was tired enough to fall off to sleep at once, but, for a time, -the many unusual noises bothered him. There was an elevated railroad -not far off, and the whistle of the trains, the buzz and hum of the -motors, kept him awake. Then, too, the streets were full of excitement, -boys shouting and men calling, for it was a warm night, and many stayed -out until late. - -At length, however, the country boy fell asleep, and dreamed that he -was engineer on a ferryboat which collided with an elevated train, and -the whole affair smashed into a balloon and came shooting earthward, -landing with a thump, which so startled Larry that he awoke with a -spring that would have rolled him out of bed had he not been sleeping -on the floor. - -It was just getting daylight, and Larry at first could not recall where -he was. Then he sat up, and his movement awakened Mr. Jackson. - -“Is it time to get up?” asked the latter. - -“I--I don’t know,” said Larry. - -Mr. Jackson reached under his pillow, drew out his watch, and looked at -the time. - -“Guess I’d better be stirring if I want to get to work to-day,” he -remarked. Then he began to dress and Larry did likewise. Mrs. Jackson -was already up, and breakfast was soon served. - -“Make yourselves at home,” was Mr. Jackson’s remark, as he left the -house to go to the office where he was employed. - -Mrs. Dexter insisted on helping Mrs. Jackson with the housework, and, -while the two women were engaged Mary and James went down to the street -to see what, to them, were many wonderful sights. Lucy, whose spine -hurt her very much because of the long journey, remained in bed, and -Larry made himself useful by going to the store for Mrs. Jackson, after -receiving many cautions from his mother not to get lost in New York. - -Mrs. Dexter was worrying over what she should do. She wanted to find -her sister, but she realized that if Mr. Ralston was dead his widow -would not be in a position to give even temporary shelter to Mrs. -Dexter and her family. She knew her sister must have written to her, -but the letter had probably reached Campton after Mrs. Dexter had left. - -“Why don’t you take a few rooms in this house?” suggested Mrs. -Jackson. “There are some to be had cheap on the floor above, and it’s -a respectable place. Then you will have time to hunt up your sister. -Maybe the janitor knows where she moved to.” - -“I believe I will do that,” said the widow. She knew what little money -she had would not last long and she wanted to make a home for her -children where they could stay while she went out to work. - -When Larry returned Mrs. Dexter talked the matter over with him, for -she had come to depend on her son very much of late. The matter was -decided by their engaging four rooms on the floor above. They were -unfurnished except for an attractive gas range on which cooking could -be done. - -“I’m afraid I wouldn’t know how to work it,” said Mrs. Dexter. - -“I know,” said Larry. “Mrs. Jackson showed me this morning.” - -From a secondhand store some beds, a table, and a few chairs were -purchased, and thus, on a very modest scale, compared with their former -home, the Dexters began housekeeping in New York. - -They ate supper in their new rooms that night. The younger children -were delighted, but Mrs. Dexter could not but feel that it was a poor -home compared to the one she had been compelled to leave. Larry saw -what was troubling his mother. - -“Don’t worry,” he said. “I’ll soon be working and we will have a better -place.” - -“I wish I was strong enough to work,” said Lucy in a low tone, her eyes -filling with tears as she thought of her helplessness. - -“Don’t you wish anything of the kind!” exclaimed Larry. “I’m going to -work for all of us.” - -He made up his mind to start out the first thing in the morning and -hunt for a job. He carried this plan out. After a simple breakfast -which was added to by some nice potatoes and meat which Mrs. Jackson -sent up, Larry hurried off. - -“Be very careful,” cautioned his mother. “Don’t let anyone steal your -pocketbook.” - -Larry thought a thief would not make a very good haul, as he only had -twenty-five cents in it, but he did not say so to his mother. - -The boy did not know where to start to look for work. He had had no -experience except on a farm, and there is not much call for that sort -of labor in the city. Still he was strong, quick, and willing, and, -though he didn’t know it, those qualities go a great way in any kind of -work. - -Larry started out from the apartment house, and walked slowly. He had -the address of his new home written down, in case he got lost, but he -determined to walk slowly, note the direction of the streets, and so -acquaint himself with the “lay-out” of the big city. - -He had two plans in mind. One was to go along the streets looking for a -sign “Boy Wanted.” The other was to look at the advertisements in the -newspapers. He resolved to try both. - -Purchasing one of the big New York daily newspapers, which bore on -the front page the name _The Leader_, Larry turned to the page where -the dealer who sold it to him had said he would find plenty of want -advertisements. There were a number of boys wanted, from those to run -errands to the variety who were expected to begin in a wholesale house -at a small salary and work their way up. In nearly every one were the -words “experience necessary.” - -Now Larry had had no experience, and he felt that it would be useless -to try the places where that qualification was required. He marked -several of the advertisements that he thought might provide an opening -for him, and asked the first policeman he met how to get to the -different addresses. - -The bluecoat was a friendly one, who had boys of his own at home, and -he kindly explained to Larry just how to get to the big wholesale and -retail places that needed lads. - -But luck seemed to be against Larry that day. At every place he went he -was told that he was just too late. - -“You’ll have to get up earlier in the morning if you want to get a -job,” said one man where he inquired. “There were ten boys here before -breakfast after this place. This is a city where you can’t go to sleep -for very long.” - -Larry was beginning to think so. He had tried a number of places that -advertised, without success, when he saw a sign hanging out in front of -a shoe store. It informed those who cared to know that a boy was needed. - -Larry made an application. Timidly he asked the proprietor of the store -for work. - -“I hired a boy this morning about seven o’clock,” was the reply. - -“Your sign is out yet,” spoke Larry. - -“I forgot to bring it in,” said the man. - -He did not seem to think it minded that he had caused disappointment -to one lad, and might to others. Larry walked from the place much -discouraged. - - - - -CHAPTER IV - -LARRY AND THE REPORTER - - -It was now noon, and Larry, who had a healthy boy’s appetite, began to -feel hungry. He had never eaten in one of the big city restaurants, and -he felt somewhat timid about going in. Besides, he had only a quarter, -and he thought that he could get very little for that. He also felt -that he had better save some of the money for car-fare, and so he made -up his mind that fifteen cents was all he could afford for dinner. - -He walked down several streets before he saw a restaurant that seemed -quiet enough for him to venture in. - -The place was kept by an old German, and while it was neat and clean -did not seem to be very prosperous, as Larry was the only customer at -that particular hour. - -“Vat you want, boy?” asked the old man, as Larry entered. “I don’t -have noddings to gif away to beggars. I ain’t buying noddings. You had -better git out.” - -“I’m not selling anything and I’m not a beggar,” said Larry sharply. “I -came in here to buy a meal,--er--that is a small one,” he added as he -thought of his limited finances. - -“Ach! a meal, eh!” exclaimed the German, smiling instead of frowning. -“Dot’s different alretty yet! Sid down! I have fine meals!” - -“I guess I only want something plain,” spoke Larry. “A cup of coffee -and some bread and butter.” - -“We gif a plate of soup, a piece of meat, coffee und rolls yet by a -meal,” said the restaurant keeper, and Larry wondered how much such a -meal would cost. “It’s fifteen cents alretty,” the German went on, and -Larry breathed a sigh of relief, for he was very hungry. - -He had gone, by chance, into one of the cheap though good restaurants -of New York, where a few cents buys plenty of food, though it is not -served with as much style as in more expensive places. - -The restaurant keeper motioned Larry to sit down at one of the -oilcloth-covered tables, and then, having brought a glass of water, -hurried away. Soon his voice was heard giving orders, and in a little -while he came back, bringing a bowl of hot soup. Larry thought he had -never tasted anything so fine. - -By this time several other persons had come into the place and the -German was kept busy filling orders. A young woman came out from the -rear of the shop to help him and she served Larry with the rest of his -meal. When he had finished he was given a red square of pasteboard, -with the figures “15” on it, and he guessed that this was his meal -check and that he was to pay at the desk, over which a fat woman -presided. It was near the door, and walking up to it Larry laid down -his quarter, getting his ten cents in change and going out. - -He felt that he was getting on in the world, since he had eaten all by -himself in a public restaurant, and he was encouraged now to go on with -his search for work. A meal often puts a strong heart into a man, or -boy either, for that matter. - -“Now for a job!” exclaimed Larry as he started off briskly. - -He consulted the paper which he still had and went to several -places that had advertised. But that day must have brought forth an -astonishing crop of boys out of work, or else all places were quickly -filled, for at every establishment where Larry called he was told that -there was no need for his services. - -Signs of “Boy Wanted” became “as scarce as hen’s teeth,” Larry said -afterward, which are very scarce indeed, as no one ever saw a hen with -teeth. About four o’clock in the afternoon he found himself at the -junction of Fifth Avenue and Broadway, where the big Flatiron Building, -as it is called, stands. Larry had walked several miles and he was -tired and discouraged. - -The day, which had been pleasant when Larry started out, had become -cloudy, and a dark bank of clouds rolling up in the west indicated that -a thunderstorm was about to break. As Larry stood there, amid all the -bustle and excitement of the biggest city in the United States, he felt -so lonely and worried that he did not know what to do. He thought of -his mother and the children at home, and wondered whether he would ever -get work so that he could take care of them. - -Suddenly, from out of the western sky, there came a dazzling flash of -lightning. It was followed by a crashing peal of thunder, and then -the storm, which had been gathering for some time, burst. There was a -deluge of rain, and people began running for shelter. - -Larry looked about, and, seeing that many were making for the open -doorway of the Flatiron Building, on the Fifth Avenue side, ran in that -direction. He had hardly reached the friendly shelter when there came -a crash that sounded like the discharge of a thirteen-inch gun, and a -shock that seemed to make the very ground tremble. - -At the same time Larry felt a queer tingling in the ends of his -fingers, and several persons near him jumped. - -“That struck near here!” a man at his side exclaimed. - -“Guess you’re right,” another man said. “Lucky we’re in out of the -wet.” - -By this time the rain was coming down in torrents, and several more -persons crowded into the lobby of the big building. Larry stayed near -the door, for he liked to watch the storm and was not afraid. - -Suddenly, down the street, there sounded a shrill whistle, mingled with -a rumbling and a clang of bells. - -“It’s a fire!” cried several. - -“Lightning struck!” exclaimed one or two. - -“It was that last smash!” said the man Larry had noticed first. “I -thought it did some damage. Here come the engines!” - -Up Fifth Avenue dashed the steamers, hose carts, and hook-and-ladder -wagons. - -“There’s the fire! In that building across the street!” someone said. - -Larry looked and saw, coming out of the top story of a big piano -warehouse on the opposite side of Fifth Avenue, a volume of black -smoke. A number of men, unmindful of the rain, ran out to see the -firemen work, and after a little hesitation Larry, who did not mind a -wetting, followed. - -It was the first time he had ever seen a fire in a big city, and he -did not want to miss it. He worked his way through the crowds that -quickly gathered until he was almost in front. There he held his place, -not minding the rain, which was still falling hard, though not as -plentifully as at first. - -He saw the firemen run out long lengths of hose, attach them to the -steamers, which had already started to pump, and watched the ladder men -run out the long runged affairs up which they swarmed to carry the hose -to the top stories, where the lightning had started the fire. - -Then the water tower was brought into play. Under the power of -compressed air the long slender pole of latticed ironwork rose high, -carrying several lengths of hose with it. Then the nozzle was pointed -toward the top windows, and soon a powerful stream of water was being -sent in on the flames, that were making great headway among wood and -shavings in the piano place. - -The street was filled with excited men who were running back and forth. -Many of them were persons who had come from near-by buildings to see -the fire. Some were from the burning building, trying to save their -possessions. The firemen themselves were the coolest of the lot, and -went about their tasks as if there was nothing unusual the matter. Soon -the police patrol dashed up and the blue-coats piled out and began to -establish fire lines. Larry, like many others, was forced to get back -from the middle of the street. - -The boy, however, managed to keep his position in the front rank. He -watched with eager eyes the firemen at work, and never thought how wet -he was. - -“It’s going to be a bad blaze,” remarked a man near Larry. “The fire -department’s going to have its hands full this time.” - -It certainly seemed so, for flames were spouting from all the windows -on the top story and the one below it. More engines dashed up, and the -excitement, noise, and confusion grew. - -In front of Larry a big policeman was standing, placed there by the -sergeant in charge of the reserves to maintain the fire lines. The -officer had his back toward the crowd, and enjoyed a good vantage -point from which to watch the flames. A young fellow, with his coat -collar and trousers turned up, and carrying an umbrella, worked his way -through the crowd until he was beside Larry. - -“Let me pass, please,” he said, and then, slipping under the rope which -the police had stretched, he was about to pass the policeman and get -closer to the fire. - -“Here, come back, you!” the officer exclaimed. - -“It’s all right; I’m a reporter from the _Leader_,” said the young -fellow, and he turned, showing a big shining metal star on his coat. - -“Go ahead,” spoke the policeman. “You’ll have a good story, I’m -thinking.” - -“Anybody hurt?” asked the reporter, pausing to ask the first question -that a newspaper man puts when he gets to a fire. - -“Wouldn’t wonder. Saw the Roosevelt Hospital ambulance taking a man -away when we came up. Jumped from the roof, I heard.” - -“Gee! I’ll have to get busy! Say, it ain’t doin’ a thing but rain, is -it? I can’t take notes and hold my umbrella too, and I certainly hate -to get wet. I wish I had a kid to manage the thing for me.” - -“I’ll hold the umbrella for you,” volunteered Larry, quick to take -advantage of the situation, and realizing that, by aiding the reporter, -who seemed to be a sort of favored person at fires, he might see more -of the blaze. - -“All right, kid, come along,” spoke the newspaper man, and, at a nod -from the policeman to show it was all right, Larry slipped under the -rope and followed the reporter, who made off on a run toward the -burning building. Many men wished they were in Larry’s place. - -“Come on, youngster. What’s your name?” asked the reporter of Larry. - -The boy told him. - -“Mine’s Harvey Newton,” volunteered the newspaper man. “We’ll have to -look lively. Here, you hold the umbrella over me, while I make a few -notes.” - -Larry did so, screening the paper which the reporter drew from his -pocket as much as possible from the rain. Mr. Newton, who, as Larry -looked at him more closely, appeared much older than he had at first, -made what looked like the tracks of a hen, but which were in reality -a few notes setting down the number of the building, the height, the -size, the location of the fire. Then the reporter jotted down the -number of engines present, a few facts about the crowd, the way the -police were handling it, and something of how the firemen were fighting -the blaze. - -“This is better than getting wet through,” Mr. Newton said, as he -returned his paper to his pocket and waited for new developments. - -“Say, why don’t you bring the city editor out with you when you cover -fires?” asked another reporter, from a different paper, addressing Mr. -Newton, and noticing Larry’s occupation. - -“I would if he’d come,” replied Mr. Newton. “Don’t you wish you had an -umbrella and a rain-shield bearer?” - -“Don’t know but what I do,” rejoined the other, who was soaking wet. -“Say, this is a corker, ain’t it? Got much?” - -“Not yet. Just arrived.” - -Suddenly, with a report like that of a dynamite blast, the whole top -of the building seemed to rise in the air. An explosion of oils and -varnishes used on pianos had occurred. For an instant there was deep -silence succeeding the report. Then came cries of fear and pain, -mingled with the shouts of men in the fiercely burning structure. - -“I’ll need help on this story!” exclaimed Mr. Newton. “I wonder---- -Say, Larry,” he went on, turning to the boy, “can you use a telephone?” - -“Yes,” replied Larry, who had used one several times at Campton. - -“Then call up the _Leader_ office. The number’s seventeen hundred and -eighty-four. Ask for the city editor, and tell him Newton said to send -down a couple of men to help cover the fire. Run as if you were in a -race!” - - - - -CHAPTER V - -LARRY SECURES WORK - - -Larry handed over the umbrella and darted toward the sidewalk. He -wiggled his way through the crowd, and went back to the lobby of the -Flatiron Building, where he had noticed a telephone booth. Dashing -inside he took off the receiver, and gave central the number of the -_Leader_ office. Then the girl in the exchange, after making the -connection, told him to drop ten cents in the slot, for the telephone -was of the automatic kind. In a few seconds Larry, in a somewhat -breathless voice, was talking with the city editor of one of New York’s -biggest newspapers. - -“What’s that?” Larry heard the voice at the other end of the wire ask. -“Newton told you to call me up? Who are you? Larry Dexter, eh? Well, -what is it? Big fire, eh? Explosion? Fifth Avenue and Broadway? All -right. I’ll attend to it.” - -Then, before the city editor hung up the receiver of his instrument -Larry heard him call in sharp tones: - -“Smith, Robinson! Quick! Jump up to that fire and help Newton. -Telephone the stuff in! We’ll get out an extra if it’s worth it!” - -Then came a click that told that the connection was cut off, and Larry -knew that help for his friend, the reporter, was on the way. - -The boy hurried from the booth and ran again toward the crowd that -was watching the fire. There were more people than ever now on the -scene, but Larry managed to make his way through them to where the same -policeman stood that had let himself and the reporter through the lines -once before. Larry resolved to find his new friend. He slid close up to -the officer. - -“I’m helping Mr. Newton, the reporter for the _Leader_,” the boy said -to the bluecoat. - -The policeman looked down, recognized Larry, and said: - -“All right, youngster, go ahead. Only get a fire badge next time or -I’ll have to shut you out.” - -But Larry was not worrying about the next time. He was rejoicing that -he had gained admittance through the lines, and was close to the fire, -which was now burning furiously. - -More engines arrived with the sending in of the third alarm, and -several ambulances were on the scene, as a number of men had been hurt -in the explosion. Within the space made by the ropes there was plenty -of room to move about, but there was much confusion. Larry spied Mr. -Newton as close to the blaze as the reporter could get. Then he saw -him dart over to an ambulance to which they had carried a wounded man. - -Larry ran after his new friend, and found him getting the name of the -injured piano worker, who was badly burned. The poor fellow was being -swathed in cotton and oil by the ambulance surgeon, but the reporter -did not seem to think of this. He asked the man for his name and -address, got them, and jotted them down on his paper, which was now -quite wet, since he had furled the umbrella. - -“Back on the job, eh?” questioned Mr. Newton, stopping a moment in his -rush to notice Larry. “Did Mr. Emberg say he’d send me some help?” - -“Mr. Emberg?” asked Larry. - -“Yes. The city editor you telephoned to?” - -“Oh yes, I heard him tell someone to ‘jump out on the fire.’” - -“Then they’ll come. Now, youngster, let’s see--what’s your name? Oh -yes,--Larry. Well, I’m going to have my hands full now. Never mind -about holding the umbrella. But drop in the _Leader_ office and see -me some day, say about five o’clock in the afternoon, after we go to -press.” - -“All right,” said Larry, dimly wondering how he was to get home, since -he had spent his last ten cents for the telephone. But Mr. Newton was -thoughtful to remember that item, and taking a quarter from his pocket -he handed it to Larry. - -“That’s for the message and your trouble,” he said. - -Larry was glad enough to take it, though he would have been satisfied -with ten cents. - -“Don’t forget to call and see me!” said Mr. Newton. - -The next instant there came loud cries of warning, and looking up Larry -saw the whole upper front of the building toppling outward, and ready -to fall over. - -“Back! Back for your lives!” cried police and firemen in a shrill -chorus. - -Larry turned and ran, as did scores of others who were in the path of -the crumbling masonry. A moment later the crash came. Then followed a -rush of the frightened crowd, in which Larry was borne from his feet -and carried along, until he found himself two blocks from the fire. - -He turned to make his way back to within the fire lines, but found it -too hard a task, as the crowd was now enormous. Then he decided to give -it up as a bad job, and go home. Inquiry of a policeman showed him -which car to take, and an hour later he was in the small apartment, -where he was met by his mother and the children, who were much alarmed -over his absence. - -“No luck, mother,” Larry said, in answer to a look from Mrs. Dexter. -“But I earned fifteen cents, anyhow, by helping at a fire.” - -“Helping at a fire?” - -Then Larry told his experience to the no small wonderment of them all. - -“Maybe Mr. Newton will help me get a job,” he said hopefully. - -“I wish he would,” said Mrs. Dexter. “I have some work to do, Larry,” -she added. - -“You, mother?” - -“Yes, a lady on the floor above does sewing for a factory. It happened -that one of the women who works in the place is sick, and our neighbor -thought of me. I went to the shop, and I got something to do.” - -“But I don’t like to have you work in a shop, mother,” objected Larry. - -“I am to do the sewing at home,” went on Mrs. Dexter. “I cannot earn -much, but it is better than nothing, and it may improve in time.” - -“Maybe I can get a job diggin’ gold somewhere,” put in James. “If I do -I’ll give you a million dollars, mommer.” - -“I’m sure you will,” said his mother, giving him a hug. - -“Maybe I could sew some,” spoke Lucy, from the chair where she was -sitting, propped up in cushions. - -“I’d like to see us let you!” exclaimed Larry. “You just wait, I’ll get -a job somehow!” - -But, though he spoke boldly, the boy was not so certain of his success. -He was in a big city, where thousands are seeking work every hour, and -where opportunities to labor do not go long unappropriated. But Larry -was hopeful, and, though he worried somewhat over the prospect of the -little family coming to grief in New York, he had not given up yet, by -any means, for this was not his way. - -Late that night Larry went out and bought a copy of the _Leader_. On -the front page, set off by big headlines, was the story of the fire and -explosion. The boy felt something of a part ownership in the account, -and was proud to think he had helped, in some small measure, to provide -such a thrilling tale. - -For the fire proved a disastrous one, in which three men were killed -and a number seriously hurt. The papers, for two days thereafter, -had more stories about the blaze, and there was some talk of an -investigation to see who was responsible for having so much oil and -varnish stored in the place, which, it was decided by all, was the -cause of the worst features of the accident. - -During those two days Larry made a vain search for work. But there -never seemed to be such a small number of positions and so many boys to -fill them. - -The third day, after a fruitless tramp about the city, Larry found -himself down on Park Row, near the Post Office. He looked at one of the -many tall buildings in that locality, and there staring him in the -face, from the tenth story of one, were the words: - - New York Leader. - -“That’s my paper,” Larry thought with a sense of pride. Then the idea -came to him to go up and see Mr. Newton, the reporter. It was nearly -five o’clock, and this was the hour Mr. Newton had mentioned. Larry did -not exactly know why he was going in to see the reporter. He had some -dim notion of asking if there was not some work he might get to do. - -At any rate, he reasoned, it would do no harm to try. Accordingly -he entered the elevator, and asked the attendant on what floor the -reporters of the _Leader_ might be found. - -“Twelfth,” was the reply, and then, before Larry could get his breath, -he was shot upward, and the man called out: - -“Twelfth floor. This express makes no stop until the twenty-first now.” - -Larry managed to get out, somewhat dizzy by the rapid flight. - -Before him the boy saw a door, marked in gilt letters: - - _City Room._ - -“I wonder where the country room is,” mused Larry. “I guess I’d feel -more at home in a country room than I would in a city one.” - -Then the door opened and several young men came out. - -“Did you get any good stories to-day?” asked one. - -“Pretty fair suicide,” was the answer. “How’d you make out?” - -“Pretty decent murder, but they cleared it up too soon. No mystery in -it.” - -Rightly guessing that they were reporters, Larry approached them and -asked for Mr. Newton. He was directed to walk into the city room, and -there he saw his friend, with his feet perched upon a desk, smoking a -pipe. - -“Hello, youngster!” greeted Mr. Newton. “Been to any more fires?” - -“No,” said Larry with a smile. “That one was enough.” - -“I should say so. Well, you helped me considerable on that. We beat the -other papers.” - -“Beat them?” asked Larry. - -“Yes, got out quicker, and had a heap better story, if I do say it -myself. You helped some. Want to go down and see the presses run?” - -“I came in to see if there was any chance of getting work,” answered -Larry, determined to plunge at once into the matter that most -interested him. “My mother and I and the rest of the family came to New -York a few days ago, and I need work. Is there any chance at all of a -job here?” - -“Well, if that isn’t luck!” exclaimed Mr. Newton, without any apparent -reference to Larry’s question. “Say,” he called to someone in the next -room, “weren’t you asking me if I knew of someone who wanted to run -copy, Mr. Emberg?” he asked. - -“Yes,” replied the city editor, coming out into the reporter’s room. -“Why?” - -“Nothing, only here’s a friend of mine who wants the job, that’s all,” -said Mr. Newton, as if such coincidences happened every day. - -“Ever run copy?” asked the city editor, after a pause. - -“I--I don’t know,” replied Larry, wondering what sort of work it was. - -“It’s like being an office boy in any other establishment,” said Mr. -Newton. “You carry the stuff from the reporters’ desks to the editors’ -and copy readers’, and you carry it from them,--that is, what’s left of -it--to the tube that shoots it to the composing room.” - -“I guess I could do it, I’m pretty strong,” replied Larry, whereat the -two men laughed, though Larry could not see why. - -“You’ll do,” said the city editor pleasantly. “I’ll give you a trial, -anyhow. When can you come in?” - -“Right now!” exclaimed Larry, hardly believing the good news was true. - -“To-morrow will do,” said the editor with a smile. “We’re all through -for to-day. Come in at eight o’clock to-morrow morning.” - -“I will!” almost gasped Larry, and then, as the two men nodded a kind -good-night, he sped from the room. - - - - -CHAPTER VI - -LARRY MAKES AN ENEMY - - -Larry thought he would never get home that evening to tell the good -news. He fairly burst into the room where his mother was sewing and -cried out: - -“Hurrah, mother! I’ve got a job!” - -“Good, Larry!” exclaimed Mrs. Dexter. “I’m so glad. What is it?” - -Talking so rapidly he could hardly be understood, Larry narrated all -that had occurred on his visit to the newspaper office. - -“I’m to go to work to-morrow morning,” he finished. - -“Will they give you a thousand dollars, Larry?” asked little James, -coming up to his brother. - -“I’m afraid not, Jimmy. I really forgot to ask how much they pay, but -it will be something for a start, anyhow.” - -“Maybe they’ll let you write stories for the paper,” went on James, who -was a great reader of fairy tales. - -“Oh, wouldn’t that be fine!” spoke Lucy. - -“They don’t have many stories in newspapers,” said Larry, who had begun -to consider himself somewhat of an authority in the matter. “At least -they call the things they print stories, for I heard Mr. Newton say he -had a good story of the fire, but they’re not what we call stories. -I wish I could get to writing, though; but I’m afraid I don’t know -enough.” - -“Why don’t you study nights?” suggested Lucy. “I’ll help you.” - -“I believe I will,” replied Larry, for his sister had been very bright -in her studies before the spinal trouble took her from school. “But -first I want to see what sort of work I have to do. My, but I’m hungry!” - -“We were waiting with supper for you,” said Larry’s mother. “I’ll get -it right away.” - -Then, while Mrs. Dexter set the table and started to serve the meal, -Larry took little Mary on his knee and told her over again the story -of the big fire he had seen, a tale which James also listened to with -great delight. The little boy declared it was better than the best -fairy story he had ever read. - -Half an hour before the appointed time next morning Larry was at the -office of the _Leader_. Neither the city editor, the copy readers, -nor any of the reporters were on hand yet, but there were two boys in -the room. At first they paid no attention to Larry, but stood in one -corner, conversing. One of the boys, a rather thin chap, with a face -that seemed older than it should have on a boy of his size, took out a -cigarette and lighted it. - -“If Mr. Emberg catches you, Peter, you’ll get fired,” cautioned the -other fellow, who had a shock of light hair, blue eyes, and seemed a -good-natured sort of chap. - -“A heap I care for Emberg,” was Peter Manton’s reply. “I can get -another job easy. The _Rocket_ needs a good copy boy. Besides Emberg -won’t be here for an hour,” and he began to puff on his cigarette. - -Larry advanced further into the room, and, at the sound of his steps, -the other boys turned quickly. Peter was the first to speak. - -“Hello, kid,” he said rather familiarly, considering Larry was as old -and about as large as himself. “What do you want?” - -“I’m waiting for Mr. Emberg,” replied Larry. - -“Lookin’ for a job?” sneered Peter. “If you are you can fade away. We -got all the help we need. What right you got buttin’ in?” - -“Mr. Emberg told me to come here and see him,” said Larry quietly, and -then he sat down in a chair. - -“Look a-here,” began Peter, crossing the room quickly and coming close -to Larry, “if you think you can come in here and git a job over my head -you’re goin’ to get left. Do you hear?” - -Larry thought it best not to answer. - -“I’ve a good mind to punch your face,” went on Peter, doubling up his -fist. He seemed half inclined to put his threat into execution when the -door suddenly opened and Mr. Newton walked into the city room. - -“Hello, Larry!” he exclaimed cordially. “You’re on time, I see.” - -“Yes, sir,” replied the new copy boy. - -At the sight of the reporter Peter had dropped his cigarette to the -floor and stepped on it. At the same time he slunk away from Larry, -though the look in Peter’s face was not pleasant. - -“Who’s been smoking cigarettes?” asked Mr. Newton, sniffing the air -suspiciously. “Don’t you boys know the orders?” - -While it was permitted for the men in the room to smoke there were -stringent rules against the boys indulging in the habit. - -“There was a feller come in to see the editor,” replied Peter. “He was -smokin’ real hard. But he didn’t stay long. I guess that’s what you -smell.” - -Mr. Newton gave a quick look at Peter, and then at the still -smouldering cigarette end on the floor. However, if he had any -suspicions he did not mention them. - -Several other reporters came in now, and there was much laughter -and joking among them. Some had work to do on the stories they had -been out on the night before, and soon half a dozen typewriters were -clicking merrily. - -Mr. Emberg arrived about half-past eight o’clock and began sending the -men out on their different duties, or assignments as they are called in -a newspaper office. He greeted Larry with a smile and told him to wait -until the morning’s rush was over, when the lad would be told what his -work was. - -Larry was much interested in watching and listening to all that went -on. He heard the men talking about fires, robberies, suicides, and -political matters. The place seemed like a hive full of busy bees -with men and boys constantly coming and going. Larry felt a thrill of -excitement when he realized that he was soon to have a part in this. - -In about half an hour, when most of the men had gone out to various -places, some to hospitals, some to police stations, some to the courts, -and some to fire headquarters, the room was comparatively quiet. - -“Now then, you new boy--what’s your name?” began Mr. Emberg, motioning -to Larry. “Oh yes, I remember it now, it’s Harry.” - -“No, sir, it’s Larry,” corrected the new boy. - -“Oh yes, Larry. Well, I’ll tell you what you are to do.” - -Thereupon the city editor instructed Larry how, whenever he heard -“Copy!” called, to hurry to the desk, get the sheets of paper on which -the articles for the paper were written, and carry them to a room down -the hall. There he was to put them in a sort of brass tube, or carrier, -drop the carrier into a pipe, and pull a lever, which sent compressed -air into the pipe and shot the tube of copy to the composing room. -There it would be taken out and set up into type. But Larry’s duties, -for the time, ended when he had put the copy in the tube. - -There were many other little things to do, and errands to run, Mr. -Emberg said, but Larry would pick them up in time. - -“Now then, Peter,” called Mr. Emberg--“or never mind, I guess you had -better do it, Bud,” to the tow-headed office boy. “You show Larry -around a bit, so he’ll know where to go when I send him.” - -“Come ahead,” said Bud with a smile. - -As they passed Peter, who seemed to be sulking in a corner, Larry heard -him utter: - -“You wait, Larry, or whatever your name is, I’ll fix you for buttin’ in -here. You’ll wish you’d never come.” - -“Don’t mind him,” said Bud. “He’s afraid he’ll lose his job.” - -“Why?” asked Larry. - -“Oh, he’s made two or three bad mistakes here lately, and I guess he’s -afraid they got you in his place. But don’t let that worry you, only -look out for Pete, that’s all, or he may do something you won’t like.” - -“I will,” replied Larry, as he followed his friend to learn something -about the mysteries of a big newspaper office. - - - - -CHAPTER VII - -THE MISSING COPY - - -Bud first showed Larry how to work the pneumatic or compressed-air -tube. Around it stood several other boys who seemed to be quite -busy. Now and then one would dash in with a bunch of paper, grab a -tube, stuff the copy in, and yank the lever over. A hissing, as the -imprisoned air rushed into the pipe, told that the copy was on its way -to the composing room. - -“Where are those boys from; other papers?” asked Larry. - -“Gosh, no!” exclaimed Bud. “No boy from another paper would dare come -in here; that is while he worked for another paper. We’d think he was -trying to get wind of some exclusive story we had. Those boys are from -the different departments. One carries copy from the state department, -another from the sporting room, and another from the telegraph desk.” - -Then Bud briefly explained that there were several editors on the -paper. One took charge of all the news in the city, and this was Mr. -Emberg. Another handled all the foreign news that came in over the -telegraph. Still another took charge of all matters that happened in -the state outside of the city and the immediate surrounding territory. -Then there was the sporting editor, who looked after all such things as -football and baseball games, racing, wrestling, and so on. Each editor -had a separate room, and there were one or two boys in each department -to carry copy to the tube room, whence it was sent up to the printers. - -“But our room’s the best,” finished Bud, with an air of conscious pride. - -Larry was shown where the offices of the different editors were, so -that he would know where to go if sent with messages to them. He was -also taken to the composing room. - -There he stood for a while bewildered by the noise and seeming -confusion. A score of typesetting machines were at work, clicking away -while the men sat at the keyboards, which were almost like those of -typewriters. Larry saw where the tubes with copy in them bounced from -the air pipe into a box. From that they were taken to a table by a boy, -whose face was liberally covered with printer’s ink. - -There a man rapidly numbered them with a blue pencil, and gave the -sheets out to the compositors. - -“Sometimes you have to come up here for proofs of a story,” Bud -explained. “Then go over to that man there,” pointing to a tall thin -individual, “and repeat whatever Mr. Emberg or whoever sends you, says. -You see there are several different kinds of type in the heads of a -story and each story is called according to the kind of a head it has.” - -“I’m afraid I’ll never learn,” said Larry, who was beginning to feel -confused. - -“Oh yes, you will. I’ll explain it all to you. You probably won’t have -to go for proofs for several days. You’ll only have to carry copy.” - -They stayed up in the composing room for some time, and every second -Larry wondered more and more how out of so much seeming confusion any -order could ever come. - -Boys with long galleys, like narrow brass pans that corresponded in -size to columns of the newspaper, and set full of type, were hurrying -with them to a big machine where they were placed on a flat table, and -a roller covered with ink passed over them. Then a boy placed a long -narrow slip of paper on the inky type, passed another roller over it, -and lifted off the paper. - -“That’s what they calling pulling or taking a proof,” said Bud. “But -come on now, we’ll go back to the city room and rush copy. I guess -there’s some by this time.” - -There was quite a bit, for a number of stories had been handed in by -the reporters, had been looked over by Mr. Emberg, his assistant, or -the copy readers, and were ready for the compositors. Peter had been -kept busy running back and forth and was in no gentle humor. - -“I’ll fix you for this,” muttered Peter to Larry and Bud. “I’ll get -even for running off and letting me do all the work. You jest wait an’ -see wot I do!” - -He spoke in a low tone, for he did not want the city editor to hear. - -“Cut it out,” advised Bud with a grin. “I was sent to show Larry about -the plant and you know it. Besides, if you try any of your tricks I -know something I can do.” - -“What?” asked Peter. - -“Who was smoking cigarettes?” asked Bud in a whisper. - -“If you squeal on me I’ll--I’ll do you up brown,” threatened Peter. - -“It will take two like you,” boasted Bud. - -“Well, I can get somebody to help me,” sputtered Peter. - -“Copy!” called Mr. Emberg at that instant, and, at a nod from Bud, -Larry sprang forward to carry it to the tube. It was his first actual -work in the newspaper office, and quite proud he felt as he put the -story in the case and sent it up the pipe. - -From then on all three boys were kept busy, for as the morning wore -on several reporters came in with stories, long or short, that they -had gathered on their various assignments, and these were quickly -corrected and edited, and ready for the typesetters. - -Back and forth, from the city room desk to the pneumatic tube, the -three boys ran. Larry noticed that Peter was in the sulks and that he -did not seem to care very much about doing the work. Once or twice he -lagged down the hall instead of hurrying back from the tube after more -copy as he should have done, once Mr. Emberg remarked sharply to him: - -“Peter, if you don’t want to work here, there are lots of other boys I -can get.” - -“My foot hurts me,” whined the boy, as he limped slightly. - -“Why didn’t you say so before?” inquired the city editor. “If it is -very bad you can go home and come in to-morrow.” - -“Oh, it’s not as bad as that,” replied Peter, fearing lest he should be -found out in his deceit. “I guess I can stand it.” - -Meanwhile Larry was kept on the jump. He soon got the knack of his -duties and resolved to make himself as useful as possible. With this -in view he kept close watch on the desk, and, as soon as he saw Mr. -Emberg, the assistant city editor, or any of the readers, fold up copy, -preparatory to handing it to one of the boys, Larry hurried up without -waiting for the cry “Copy!” - -“That’s the way to do it,” said Mr. Emberg encouragingly, as he -noticed Larry’s remarkable quickness. - -“Don’t be so fresh,” muttered Peter on one of these occasions, as he -passed Larry in the long and deserted hall. “There’s no use rushin’ so, -and the union won’t stand for it. I’ll punch your head if you don’t -look out!” - -“I’m going to do my work right, and I don’t care what you say!” -exclaimed Larry. “And if there’s any head punching to be done, I can do -my share!” - -“Um,” grunted Peter. “I’ll get square with you all right!” - -It was now noon, and the paper went to press for the first edition -shortly after one o’clock. So there was considerable excitement and -hurry in all the departments, to get the important news set up and -ready to be printed. - -Reporters were hurrying in and out, the readers and editors were using -their pencils rapidly, correcting and changing copy, and the three boys -in the city room were kept on the jump all the time. - -Shortly before one o’clock a reporter came in all out of breath. - -“Man--killed--himself--in--the--Post Office just--now!” he gasped. - -“Quick!” shouted Mr. Emberg. “We’ve only got ten minutes to catch the -edition. Write as fast as you can. Short paragraphs. Here, one of you -boys bring me the sheets as fast as Mr. Steifert finishes them.” - -The reporter sat down to a typewriter, rapidly inserted a piece of -paper and began to click out copy so fast that Larry wondered how he -could see the keys. - -“I’ll carry the sheets to Mr. Emberg,” said Bud to Larry, “and you get -ready to rush them to the tube.” - -This was done. As soon as Mr. Steifert had one paragraph written he -pulled it from the machine and handed it to Bud, who ran with it to the -city editor. The latter quickly glanced at it, corrected one or two -slight errors, and passed it over to Larry, who fairly raced down the -hall. - -When he came back another page was ready, and this was kept up until -the story was all upstairs. Then Mr. Emberg proceeded to write a head -for it and Larry carried that copy to the tube. - -“Just made that in time,” said the city editor, as Larry came back. -“Now, Mr. Steifert, get ready a better and longer story for the next -edition. You can take a little more time.” - -Matters became more quiet in the office after the first edition had -gone to press. There were to be two more editions, and there still -remained plenty of work to do. Once or twice Larry was sent to get -proofs from the composing room and luckily he made no errors. - -It was getting on toward four o’clock when the last edition was getting -ready to close. - -“Copy!” called Mr. Emberg, holding out a bunch of paper and not looking -up to see who answered his summons. - -Larry ran and grabbed it and sped down the hall. Halfway down he was -met by Peter, who also had some papers in his hand. - -“I’ll put that in the tube for you,” said Peter. “I’ve got some more to -go in.” - -At first Larry hesitated. Then, thinking perhaps Peter wanted to make -up for his recent unkind remarks, Larry gave him the copy and returned -to the city room. - -A little later the big presses began thundering in the sub-cellar, and -soon the first copies of the last edition were off and a boy brought -several to the city room. - -“Here! What’s this?” cried Mr. Emberg suddenly, after a hasty glance -over the paper. “Where’s that story about Alderman Murphy?” - -“I handed it to you,” said one of the reporters. - -“I know you did, Reilly. I handled it and put a display head on it. -It went up in time, but it isn’t in. Who took that copy?” he asked, -turning to the three boys who stood to one side of the room. No one -answered for a second or two. - -“It was written on yellow paper,” went on Mr. Emberg. - -“I--I did,” replied Larry, wondering what was going to happen. - -“What did you do with it?” - -“I--I gave it to Peter,” faltered Larry. - -“You did not!” cried the other office boy, in an angry voice. - - - - -CHAPTER VIII - -PETER IS DISCHARGED - - -“Yes, I did,” replied Larry firmly. “I started down the hall with it -as soon as Mr. Emberg gave it to me. You stood near the tube with some -other copy and you said you’d send mine up for me.” - -“How about that, Peter?” asked Mr. Emberg. - -“I--I don’t remember anything about it,” said Peter. “I sent up my own -copy; that’s all I’m supposed to do.” - -“No, it is not,” said the city editor. “You are supposed to do what we -are all doing here, work for the interests of the paper, no matter in -what way. Larry did wrong if he let anyone else take any copy that was -intrusted to him. Never do it again, Larry. When you get copy put it in -the tube yourself. Then you will be sure it goes upstairs.” - -“But he asked me for it,” said the new boy, feeling quite badly over -the matter. - -“No matter if he did.” - -“I didn’t do it. He’s just tryin’ to get out of it,” spoke Peter. - -“We’ll soon see who’s to blame,” came from the city editor. “You boys -come with me.” - -Secure in the sense that he was right, Larry followed. As for Peter -he would a good deal rather not have gone, only he dared not disobey. -Up to the composing room Mr. Emberg led the two boys. There he asked -the boy whose duty it was to take copy from the tubes whether he had -received any on yellow paper, for it was on sheets of that hue that the -missing story was written. - -“No yellow copy came up this afternoon,” said the tube boy. “The last -batch I took out was a story about the new monument, and that was all.” - -“That’s the copy you took, Peter, about the same time I sent the story -about Alderman Murphy up,” said Mr. Emberg. - -“I don’t know nothin’ about no yellow copy,” said Peter sullenly. - -“I’ll inquire in the copy room downstairs,” said the city editor. With -the boys following him, he went to the apartment where the pipe was -located, in which the copy was sent upstairs. It was the duty of one -boy to remain here all the while the paper was going to press to see -that the machinery was in order. - -“Who sent up the last copy, Dudley?” asked Mr. Emberg. - -“Peter Manton,” replied Dudley. “There was some other fellow that ran -in the last minute, but Peter took the copy from him and said he’d -send it up.” - -“What kind of copy was it?” asked the city editor. - -“On red--no--it was on yellow paper,” replied Dudley. - -“And did you see Peter put it in the pipe?” asked Mr. Emberg. - -“No, sir. I didn’t look at him closely. I had to turn on a little more -compressed air then, and I was too busy to take much notice.” - -“Peter, you never sent that copy up!” exclaimed the city editor -suddenly, turning to the sulking office boy. “You are up to some trick. -Tell me what you did with it.” - -“I didn’t----” began Peter. - -But Mr. Emberg, with a quick motion, leaned forward and tore open -Peter’s coat. Out on the floor tumbled a number of yellow sheets of -paper. Mr. Emberg picked some of them up. - -“There’s the missing copy,” he said. “Peter, you can go downstairs, get -what money is coming to you, and go. We don’t want you here any more.” - -“All right,” growled Peter sullenly. - -He turned to leave. As he passed Larry he muttered in a low turn: - -“This is all your fault. Wait until I get a chance! I’ll pay you back -all right, all right!” - -Then, before Larry could answer, Peter shuffled down the hall. And -that was the end of Peter on the _Leader_, though it was by no means -the last Larry saw of him. - -Thus the first day of Larry’s life on a big newspaper came to a close -and it was with considerable pride that he started for home. He felt he -had done well, though he had made one or two mistakes. He was a little -worried about what pay he was going to get, and he had a little fear -lest he might be paid nothing while learning. - -His fears were set at rest, however, when, as he was going out of the -door, Mr. Emberg called to him. - -“Well, Larry, how do you like it?” - -“First-rate,” said Larry heartily. - -“I forgot to tell you about your money,” the city editor went on. “You -will get five dollars a week to start, and, as you improve, you will be -paid more. Perhaps you’ll become a reporter some day.” - -“I’d like to, but I’m afraid I never can,” said the boy wistfully. - -“Why not?” - -“I haven’t a good enough education.” - -“It doesn’t always take education to make a good reporter,” said Mr. -Emberg kindly. “Some of our best men would never take a prize at -school. Yet they have a nose for news that makes them more valuable -than the best college educated chaps.” - -“A nose for news?” asked Larry, wondering what sort of a nose that was. - -“Yes; to know a good story when they hear about it, and know how to go -about getting it. That’s what counts. I hope you’ll have a nose for -news, Larry.” - -“I hope so,” replied the boy, yet he did not have much anticipation. - -He was thinking more about the five dollars he was to earn every week -than about his prospects as a reporter. He knew the money would be much -needed, and he resolved to do all he could to merit a raise. - -There was much rejoicing in the humble home that night when Larry told -about his salary. Mrs. Dexter also had good news, for the firm for -which she sewed had given her a finer grade of work, at which she could -earn more money. - -“We’ll get along fine, mother,” said Larry. - -“Ain’t you afraid that mean boy Peter will hurt you?” asked little -James, who had listened to Larry’s recital of the discharge of the -other office boy. - -“No, I guess I can take care of myself,” said Larry, feeling of the -muscles of his arm, which were not small for a lad of his age. “And how -are you, Lucy?” the boy went on, going over to where his sister was -propped up in a big chair. - -“I think I’m a little better,” the girl said with a brave attempt at -a smile. Yet a shadow of pain crossed her face, and Larry knew she -was suffering but did not want to tell, so as to keep her mother from -worrying. - -“You wait,” whispered Larry. “When I get money enough I’m going to get -you a big chair that you can wheel yourself around in. Then I’m going -to have some big doctor cure you. You just wait, Lucy,” and he gave her -hand a gentle pat. - -“Thank you, Larry,” said his sister. Somehow it made the pain a little -easier when her brother sympathized with her, and she resolved to be -brave and say nothing at all of how she suffered. - -That night, when all save Larry and his mother had gone to bed, Mrs. -Dexter brought out a box of papers and began sorting them over. - -“What are they, mother?” asked the boy. - -“Old documents that are of no use,” said his mother. “I thought I would -burn them up and get them out of the way. I need the box to keep my -thread and sewing materials in.” - -She began piling the papers up on the table, making two bundles; those -she intended to keep and those she wanted to put in the fire. - -“There’s a lot of old deeds,” she said. “I guess they might as well go, -since we no longer own the property.” - -Larry glanced at them. They were mostly for the farm up in Campton -which the sheriff had sold. One document, however, caught Larry’s eye. - -“Hello,” he said. “What’s this? ‘Property in the State of New York, in -the locality known as the Bronx.’ I say, mother, what’s this?” - -“Oh, that’s a deed to some land your father took a good many years ago -in settlement of some money a man owed him. It’s no good though.” - -“Why not?” - -“Because your father had it looked up. It’s nothing but a piece of -swamp land. He was swindled on that deal.” - -“Maybe it will be good some day,” said Larry. “I heard some of the -reporters talking in the office to-day about the Bronx. There’s a river -there. It’s quite a ways out, and the reporters hate to be sent there -on stories. But maybe some day, when New York grows bigger, the land -will be valuable.” - -“I’m afraid not,” said Mrs. Dexter with a sigh. “You might as well burn -the deed up.” - -“No, I’ll save it,” said Larry. “It will not take up much room, and I -may find a use for it.” - -“Very well,” spoke his mother. “But these other papers you had better -destroy.” - -Larry looked them over, and, seeing they all referred to the farm they -had recently left, and which they no longer had a claim on, he tossed -them into the fire. The other deed, however, he carefully put away. -Though he did not know it, the time was coming when it would prove of -great worth to him and his mother. - -Larry reported early for work the next morning. He was more busy than -the day before, and the calls of copy seemed constant. He ran back and -forth until it seemed that his feet were chunks of lead and his legs -like sticks of wood. Yet he did not flag, and more than once Mr. Emberg -nodded pleasantly to him to show that he appreciated the boy’s attempts -to please. - -Of course Larry made mistakes. He sometimes got the wrong proofs and -took the right ones to the wrong places. But he was good-natured when -told of his errors, and more than one man on the paper, busy as they -all were, took an interest in him, and did much to help him. - - - - -CHAPTER IX - -LARRY GETS A STORY - - -There were few prouder boys in the big city of New York than Larry -when, at the end of his first week, he carried home his wages. The five -dollars seemed a small gold mine to him, and he handed the cash to his -mother with the remark that some day it would be more. - -“You’re doing very well,” said Mrs. Dexter. “I shall not worry now.” - -“I’m goin’ to work to-morrow,” spoke James. “I can sell papers. I seen -littler boys than me sellin’ ’em.” - -“I guess we will not have to start you in right away,” spoke Larry. -“There’s time enough.” - -“Couldn’t you get me some work to do?” asked Lucy with a smile, as -she sat propped up in the big chair. “I could direct envelopes or -something.” - -“You just get well and strong and maybe we’ll talk about work,” said -Larry, for he could not bear to think of his sister suffering. - -“I’m afraid I’ll never be any better,” said the girl a little sadly. - -“Yes, you will!” exclaimed Larry, turning away to hide the tears in -his eyes. “I read in our paper to-day of a big doctor that’s coming -from Europe to cure people that have the same kind of spinal disease -you have.” - -“But it costs an awful lot of money,” sighed Lucy. - -“I’ll earn it!” said Larry determinedly. - -During those days came a letter for Mrs. Dexter which had been sent -to Campton from New York and then returned to the metropolis. The -communication was from her sister and told about Mrs. Ralston’s -bereavement and stated that the widow had decided to pay an extended -visit to some of her husband’s folks who lived in another state. - -“I hope she finds a good home,” said Larry’s mother, and that evening -penned a letter to Mrs. Ralston, telling of the changes that had -occurred in the Dexter household. - -Larry began his second week of work with better spirits than he had the -first. He began to feel confidence in himself. Another boy had been -hired to take Peter’s place and Larry lost some of the feeling of being -the “cub” copy boy, as the newest arrival on a paper is called. - -He was rapidly learning many things that were destined to be useful to -him. He could go after proofs now and make no errors, for he had come -to distinguish the different kinds of type in which the headings of the -stories were printed. There were the big “horse heads,” with three -lines of very black type. Then there were the ordinary “display heads,” -of two lines, of not quite such heavy letters. Then came “lap” heads, -smaller still, “twelve points,” or type about half an inch high, and so -on down to the small single-line heads, that were put on only the least -important articles. - -Larry began to have some idea of the necessity of being quick and -accurate. He saw that, even near last-edition time, when everything was -on the rush, the reporters and editors kept cool, and, though they had -to work fast, they made every motion count. - -The boy came to admire the coolness of the veteran reporter who could -write a story with a boy standing at his elbow grabbing each page -of copy as it was finished and rushing it to the editor, and thence -upstairs. - -“I’m going to be a reporter,” Larry decided one day, when he had been -on the paper three weeks. “I’m going to study and fix myself for a -place on the _Leader_.” - -He began to see the importance that a really good and conscientious -reporter holds in a community. He heard the newspaper men telling of -the well-known public men they interviewed, the events of the day -they took part in, and all this fired his ambition to be one of the -_Leader’s_ reporters. - -He spoke to his mother about it that evening and said he was going to -attend night school. - -“There’s a teacher in one of those schools who lives on the floor -above,” said Mrs. Dexter. “I heard his wife talking to Mrs. Jackson the -other day, and she mentioned it. His name is Professor Carlton.” - -“I’m going up and ask him about it,” decided Larry, who, of late, had -been getting in the habit of doing things quickly, as they did in the -newspaper office. - -Professor Carlton was at home, and Larry, after introducing himself, -stated the object of his call. - -“What do you want to study for?” asked the teacher. - -“To be a reporter,” replied Larry. - -“I’m afraid it will take more than study to make you that,” said Mr. -Carlton. “You have to have a ‘nose for news’ I’m told.” - -“I know,” said Larry, nodding gravely, “that’s what Mr. Emberg, the -city editor, says.” - -“Then you’re on a paper now?” asked Mr. Carlton. - -“Only a copy boy,” replied Larry. - -“Many a copy boy has risen to be a reporter, though,” was the teacher’s -answer. “I hope you will. But about the evening schools. You see this -is summer, and the schools do not start until September. That’s two -months off.” - -“I don’t want to wait as long as that,” said Larry. “I want to be -earning more money as soon as I can.” - -“Perhaps I can help you,” said the instructor, who had taken an -interest in the lad. “I have little to do nights, and we might make a -class of one, with you for the pupil and me for the teacher, say three -evenings a week. You would learn more rapidly then, and be ready when -the evening schools opened in the fall.” - -“I’m afraid I couldn’t pay for the lessons,” said Larry. - -“Never mind about the pay,” said the professor. “I’ll be only too glad -to help a boy that wants to help himself.” - -So it was arranged. Larry had a good common school education, but -there were many things he was ignorant of that the boys of his age, in -the city, were instructed in. So, under the direction of Mr. Carlton -he applied himself to his books evenings, and made good progress, -everything considered. - -“If I can only develop that ‘nose for news,’” Larry thought with a -sigh. He imagined it was some magic gift that comes to only a favored -few. And so, in the main, it does, but at heart every boy is a -reporter, for if he doesn’t tell his chum or the family at home the -different things he sees during the day he’s only half a boy. And -telling the things one sees is, after all, the beginning of reporting, -for that’s all a newspaper does, only on a larger scale. - -Like many another thing that one wants very much and which often comes -unexpectedly, Larry’s chance came when he had no idea it was so close -at hand. - -He had been on the _Leader_ a month now and was getting well acquainted -not only with the editors and men on the staff, but the different ways -of doing things, from the time a reporter brought a story in until it -came out in the paper. - -One hot August morning as Larry was on his way to work, he saw quite a -crowd at the entrance to the Brooklyn Bridge, caused by a breakdown on -one of the cars. He paused for a few minutes, as he was a little ahead -of time. As he did so he noticed, on the outer edge of the throng, a -handsomely dressed woman. In her hand she carried a large silver purse, -through the open meshes of which could be seen a green roll of bills. - -Suddenly a roughly dressed youth grabbed the purse, pulled it from the -lady’s hand with a savage yank, and bolted down a side street. - -“Thief! Robber! He’s stolen my money!” the woman cried. - -Instantly the crowd forgot all about the breakdown on the bridge and -raised a cry of: - -“Stop thief!” - -“There he goes!” - -“Catch him!” - -“Police!” - -“Which way did he go?” asked a policeman, coming up on the run. - -“Down there!” exclaimed Larry, pointing down a street that ran parallel -with the bridge abutments. - -The fleeing youth was running at top speed, but he made one mistake. He -looked behind to see if anyone was after him, and did not see an ash -barrel that stood in his path. He stumbled over this and went down in -a heap, covered with cinders. He got up, however, before the policeman -was near enough to grab him and started off again. - -At that moment, however, from a side street there came a small cart, in -charge of an Italian, and bearing a heap of peanuts and a roaster at -full steam. - -Before the thief could check his flight he had crashed, full tilt, into -the Italian’s cart. Right into the midst of the pile of peanuts he -went, upsetting the vehicle and landing with it on top of him in the -middle of the street. - -With a shrill cry the Italian threw himself upon the man he supposed -had purposely brought his wares to grief, and thief and peanut vendor -were in the midst of a fight when the policeman came rushing up, and -grabbed his prisoner. The youth still held the purse, an odd-shaped -affair, in his hand. - - Illustration: “I’VE GOT YOU! COME TO THE STATION HOUSE” - _From Office Boy to Reporter_ Page 77 - -“I’ve got you!” exclaimed the officer. “Come to the station house.” - -“Not without a fight!” exclaimed the youth, aiming a blow at the -officer. - -The policeman drew his club, and it looked as if there would be a -battle royal, when another officer came up and the two bluecoats soon -subdued the youth. As they started to march him to the station house, -in the basement of the city hall, which was near by, the Italian -demanded to know who was going to pay for his peanuts. - -“You can come to the sergeant and make a complaint against him if you -like,” spoke the officer who had made the capture. - -The Italian, leaving his cart in charge of a friend who happened along, -trailed after the policemen and their captive. A big crowd gathered, -and the woman whose purse had been stolen, and who was almost in -hysterics over her loss, was located and invited to go to the police -station to tell her story and make a charge against the thief. - -Larry had been in the van the whole time, as had a score of other boys -determined to see the thing through. - -“This will make a good story or I’m mistaken,” he thought. “I’ll get -all the particulars I can and tell Mr. Emberg. It’s something out of -the ordinary too,” and though the affair might have been tragic, he -could not help laughing as he thought of the fleeing youth covered -first with ashes and then with peanuts. - -A big throng trooped after the officers, and Larry was beginning to -wonder how he was going to get into the police station to learn the -names of the prisoner and the woman, for he knew the crowd would not be -allowed to enter. - -“I’ll run ahead and get in before they do,” thought Larry. “Then I’ll -be there when they come in.” - -So, taking a short cut, he reached the station house ahead of the -throng. - -“Well, what is it, boy?” asked the sergeant, looking over the desk. - -“I’m from the _Leader_,” announced Larry boldly as he had heard Mr. -Newton tell the policeman that day at the fire. “A thief has just been -arrested down the street. The officers are bringing him here, and I -want to get the story.” - -“Pretty young to be a police reporter, aren’t you?” asked the sergeant -with a smile. - -“Oh, I’m not a regular reporter yet,” said Larry, not wishing to sail -under false colors. “I’m just learning.” - -“I knew it,” replied the sergeant with a smile, for he was acquainted -with most of the _Leader’s_ police reporters. “But make yourself at -home, and get all the story you want.” - -Then came a confusion of sound as the throng approached the outer doors -of the station house. - - - - -CHAPTER X - -LARRY MEETS HIS ENEMY - - -Into the main room of the police station came the two officers, their -prisoner, the woman, and the Italian. Some of the crowd tried to -follow, wild with excitement, but the doorman closed the heavy portal -in their faces and several policemen on reserve duty came from the -assembly room to aid in preserving order. - -“Now then,” said the sergeant briskly. - -The officers lined their man up in front of the brass railing and the -sergeant behind the desk began asking the prisoner’s name. - -“Ain’t got none,” was the laconic remark. - -“I know him,” put in one of the officers. “He’s Patsy Dolliver. Lives -down at Mulberry Bend and he’s a bad egg, if ever I knew one. Ain’t -you, Patsy?” - -Finding that it was useless to try and hide his identity, Patsy -admitted his name, and then his age, residence, and a few other facts -were noted down concerning him. The officer told his story. - -The woman also related how Patsy had grabbed her purse, and the Italian -told in excited language about his lost peanuts. - -All the while Larry was making notes of names and residences, including -that of the woman whose purse had been so nearly lost. - -“I’ll hold you for a hearing before the judge,” the sergeant announced -to the prisoner. “You’ll have to come in the morning as witnesses,” -he added to the woman and the peanut man. “Lock him up, Jim,” to the -doorman, indicating Patsy; and the remarkable incident was closed for -the time being. - -But Larry, with the facts in his possession and a lively recollection -of what had taken place, hurried to the _Leader_ office. - -“I just wish I could write it, but I don’t s’pose I can, yet,” he said. -“But I can tell one of the reporters and he can fix it up.” - -He found Mr. Newton there ahead of him, and to the reporter Larry in -breathless tones told what had happened. - -“Good!” exclaimed Mr. Newton. “You just tell that to Mr. Emberg -himself. He’ll be glad to know you are so wide-awake. One of the men -will write for you. Perhaps it will be a beat for us.” - -“Oh, but some of the other papers will be sure to hear of it,” said -Larry. - -“They may get something about it, but not many reporters are around -that early. The cops who made the arrest will go off duty and there -will not be many to tell the details of the chase. That’s the best part -of it. We may not get a beat in one sense of the word, but we’ll have -the best story.” - -When Mr. Emberg came in, Larry, after a few minutes of hesitation, got -up courage enough to advance and tell the story. - -“Well, you certainly had your eyes open,” said the city editor. - -“I thought it would make a good story,” said Larry. - -“So it will. You know what’s news all right, youngster!” - -And that was the best praise Larry had that day. - -“Here, Newton,” went on Mr. Emberg, “you fix Larry’s story up. Give it -plenty of space and throw in lots of fun.” - -Then Larry told his friend the story of the stolen pocketbook from -beginning to end. Mr. Newton became infused with Larry’s enthusiasm -at the description of the upsetting of the ash barrel and the peanut -stand. He made many notes and then sat down at a typewriter and began -to make his fingers fly as rapidly as he possibly could. - -Larry could hardly wait for the paper to come out that afternoon, so -anxious was he to see “his story,” as he called it. There it was, -right on the front page, under a display head: - - THIEF MEETS WITH MISHAP - - Steals a Purse, Is Buried Beneath a - Shower of Ashes and Upsets a - Peanut Cart - -Then came the story, almost as Larry had told it himself with all the -energy he could throw into it, but dressed up in true reportorial -style. Larry was as proud as if he had written it himself. - -“Who got the thief story?” he heard several reporters ask, after the -first edition came out. - -“Our new member, Larry Dexter,” said Mr. Newton, pointing toward the -copy boy. “Look out, fellows, or he’ll beat us at our own game.” - -“Well, it’s a good yarn all right,” said one of the men. “Wish I had -seen it.” - -None of the other papers had anything like the story. They all had a -mention of the occurrence, but most of them dismissed it with a few -lines, embodying the mere police report of the matter, for unless there -is the promise of something big in a police item some reporters content -themselves with what the sergeant gives them. This time Larry had been -instrumental in securing what was almost as good as an exclusive item. - -At the end of that week Larry found an extra dollar in his pay -envelope. He went to Mr. Emberg, thinking a mistake had been made and -that he had been given too much. - -“That’s for bringing in that story,” said the city editor. “It was -worth that and more to us. You’ll get six dollars a week now instead of -five dollars. You’ll find it pays to keep your eyes and ears open in -this business.” - -“I’m going to be a reporter some day,” said Larry. “I’m studying nights -now.” - -“Good!” exclaimed Mr. Emberg. “I’ll help you all I can, and if there’s -a chance you shall have it. You have proved that you have a nose for -news, which is something a number who think they are real reporters -have not,” and Larry felt prouder than ever. - -It was several days after this that Mr. Emberg called Larry to him. -At first the boy feared he had made some blunder and was about to be -censured, but the smile on the city editor’s face soon reassured him. - -“I am going to give you a new line of work for to-day,” said Mr. -Emberg. “I hope you will make out as well as you did with your story.” - -“I’ll try,” said Larry. - -“And I think you’ll succeed,” said Mr. Emberg. “I want you to go over -to the Aldermanic Chamber in the City Hall. There’s an important -hearing being held there to-day by the Legislative Committee on life -insurance matters. Mr. Newton is covering it for us. You’ll find him -there at the reporters’ table, and as fast as he has any copy ready you -are to bring it over.” - -Larry thought this was rather easy work and wondered why the city -editor laid so much stress on it. - -“You’ll have to be very quick,” went on Mr. Emberg, “for we want to get -as much in the regular editions as possible. You must be very careful, -too, about the copy. There will probably be a number of boys from other -papers there, and sometimes they play tricks. If they could make you -lose your copy, or get it away from you so as to delay us, they would -do it and their papers would be glad of it. So be careful of the copy -Mr. Newton gives you.” - -“I will,” said Larry, and he made up his mind that if any rival tried -to interfere with him he would have a fight on his hands that would -make him wish he had not bothered our hero. - -The Aldermanic Chamber was filled with men when Larry reached it. He -could hardly wiggle his way to the door, and was stopped by several -policemen on guard who wanted to know what right he had to enter. But -Larry had but to mention that he was from the _Leader_, and show a card -with his name on, signed by Mr. Emberg, to gain admittance. Whereat -Larry felt that newspapers were of much importance, as far as gaining -entrance into public place was concerned. - -He saw a number of men with pencils and paper in front of them -seated around a big table, and rightly guessed that they must be the -reporters. Then he caught a glimpse of Mr. Newton and managed to make -his way to a place behind his friend’s chair. - -“I’m glad you are going to chase copy to-day,” said Mr. Newton. -“There’s going to be a hot time, and I need a boy I can depend on.” - -Larry sat down on the steps which surrounded the platform where the -committee members were to take their places. The room was noisy with -talk and full of bustle and excitement. Men were coming and going, -their arms filled with books and papers. Uniformed messengers were -entering and leaving. - -Larry looked on either side of him and saw that he was not the only -boy present. There were scores of lads from other papers, each one -in attendance on some reporter and waiting to carry copy. The crowd -increased, and Larry was beginning to wonder how he could get in and -out of the doorway, which was choked with the throng. - -Just then he looked down at the end of the room near the entrance. He -saw someone regarding him with a malicious grin. It was Peter Manton, -the former copy boy of the _Leader_. - -Larry saw Peter lean over and whisper to a boy who stood near him, and -then the two gazed at Larry. In a few minutes Larry saw Peter beginning -to work his way up toward him. - -“I wonder if he’s going to make trouble?” thought Larry. He found out a -second later. - -“Wait till I git you outside!” exclaimed Peter. “I’ll fix you for -having me discharged!” - -Larry was about to make reply when someone shouted “Silence!” The -meeting was about to start. - - - - -CHAPTER XI - -LARRY HAS A FIGHT - - -Larry was too interested in the proceedings for a while to pay any more -attention to Peter. The latter had moved back to where he was at first, -and though he occasionally glared at Larry the latter did not look -his way more than once or twice. The reporters were all making their -pencils fly, there was no time to take notes, and they had to write out -the story as it went along. - -“I’ll have some copy in a minute,” Mr. Newton whispered to Larry. - -The boy stood up to stretch his legs, for he was stiff from sitting so -long. He buttoned his coat up ready for a struggle through the crowd to -reach the door. - -“There,” said Mr. Newton, folding up his papers, and handing a bunch to -Larry. “Come back as soon as you take them to the office.” - -Larry thrust them into his pocket and started to make his way to the -door. With a little feeling of uneasiness he noticed that Peter, also, -had started out, accompanied by the boy to whom he had been whispering. -Larry, after a somewhat tight squeeze, managed to get out of the door. -He found himself in a long corridor, that was almost deserted, for the -usual loungers around the City Hall had crowded into the chamber to -hear what was going on. Remembering his orders to hurry, Larry started -on a run. He saw nothing of his enemy Peter and concluded the latter -had gone for good. - -Suddenly, as Larry was passing a particularly dark place in the -corridor, a foot was thrust out. He stumbled over it, tried to recover -his balance, and then went down in a heap. - -“Quick now!” he heard a voice exclaim, and he recognized Peter’s tones. -“Git the copy out of his pocket while I hold him!” - -“I will! Grab his hands!” another boy exclaimed, and then Larry felt -someone land on his back as he lay prostrate, and grasp his wrists. At -the same time a hand stole into his inside pocket. - -Though he was somewhat stunned by the fall, Larry rapidly regained his -senses. He realized that Peter and the other boy were trying to get the -copy, either to make him lose his job for his carelessness, or else to -have the _Leader_ at a disadvantage. And Larry was inclined to believe -it was a spite against himself rather than a plot against the _Leader_ -that Peter was carrying out. - -Recovering from the first shock there came a fierce desire to fight -Peter, to attack him and prevent him from carrying out his plan. -Though taken at a disadvantage Larry did not lose his presence of mind. -He was a lad of considerable strength, which his country life had -greatly increased. - -With a sudden motion Larry arched his back, wrenched free his hands -from the grip of Peter, and sent the latter rolling to one side. - -“Look out or he’ll git away!” he heard Peter cry. - -Larry rose, felt in his pocket to see that the copy was still safe, -and then sprang to the rear so as to get a wall at his back. Then he -waited for the attack, which he knew would soon begin. At first he -almost wished some help would come, but the corridor remained deserted. -In fact it was not the main one, and was seldom used. Then, as he got -his breath and recovered from the first surprise, Larry rejoiced in the -coming contest. - -That the two boys did not mean to let him go without a struggle was -evident. In the half light he could see them whispering together. Then -they advanced both at once, like the cowards that they were, to take an -unfair chance. - -Larry clenched his fists, spread his feet apart, braced himself, and -gritted his teeth. - -“Come on!” he cried. - -And come on the two lads did. They made a rush at Larry that almost -overwhelmed him for a few seconds. He felt blows all over him. - -With his right arm half crooked, as a guard, Larry let out with his -left. At first he struck blindly, for he could not see his antagonists -well. He felt his fist land on someone’s face, and, by the cry that -resulted, knew he had hit Peter. - -“Give it to him!” cried the former copy boy of the _Leader_. - -Larry was struck on the cheek and once on the nose. The blows seemed to -give him new strength. Striking out with both fists, he sailed at his -tormentors, landing several hard thumps on faces and bodies and getting -several in return. - -Then came numerous hard blows from the other boys, and Larry was almost -beaten to his knees. He began to feel a little weak from a heavy blow -in the stomach and his head was dizzy. He feared he would fall and that -the boys would steal his copy. - -The thought of this nerved him to double energy. Straightening up -through a shower of blows, he made a sudden dash forward, hitting out -with all his force. He felt his fist land on the chin of one of the -lads. - -An instant later there was the thud of a fall, and the boy with Peter -cried: - -“I’ve had enough! He knocked me down!” - -“I’ll fix him!” Peter cried, and he sailed into Larry harder than ever. - -But the fight was more even now. The other boy had received punishment -enough to last him for a while and he sneaked off into a dark corner -to nurse his hurts. But Peter kept it up, for he felt he had a grudge -against Larry and intended to pay it off. - -Blows were struck in quick succession. Twice Larry received hard knocks -on the face, for Peter was no unscientific fighter, having been trained -in the school of the New York streets. On the other hand, Larry was -stout of arm, firm on his legs, and was long-winded. So, when our hero -saw that he had but one antagonist left his spirits rose and he was -almost glad of the chance to thrash Peter. - -Once, aiming a hard left-hander at Peter, Larry slipped and went down -in a heap. Without regard for the rules of sport Peter sprang on him -and began hitting the prostrate lad. - -This made Larry more than ever angry and exerting all his strength he -turned over and got Peter down. Then Larry struggled to his feet. - -“Get up!” he cried to Peter. “I’ll fight you fair!” - -“Come on, Jim!” called Peter to his friend. “We can do him now. He’s -winded.” - -“Oh, I am, eh?” asked Larry. “I guess you’ll find I can use my fists a -bit yet!” and he waited for the oncoming of the two. - -All this while the fight had been conducted quietly though none the -less fiercely. Being in a seldom-used part of the building it was not -heard or it would have been interrupted long before. - -Now the two advanced at Larry again. He braced himself for the blows -he knew would come. And come they did, for the two went at him again, -hot and heavy. An unexpected blow from Peter’s fist, landing on the -point of Larry’s jaw, made him feel dizzy. He felt as if he was going -to topple over. Yet before he fell he resolved to give something in -return. So, with a powerful half swing he struck out, straight at -Peter’s face. - -He felt the blow land, and saw Peter reel. Then Jim closed in on him -and Larry felt that the odds were too unequal. He was afraid his -precious copy would be taken from him. - -Suddenly there sounded a step on the marble floor of the corridor. - -“Here, you lads! What do you mean by fighting in the City Hall?” a -gruff voice asked. - -Larry looked up, to see a big policeman approaching. The boy conquered -his inclination to topple over and braced himself. Peter and Jim, at -the sight of the bluecoat, took to their heels. - -“Were they both goin’ at ye at once?” asked the officer, seeing that -Larry did not flee. - -“They tried to do me up,” said Larry. - -“Ye didn’t make out so bad,” went on the policeman with a smile. “I saw -that last blow ye landed. It was a dandy. What was the trouble?” - -“Oh, one of ’em had a quarrel with me,” replied Larry, not caring to go -into details, “and he had a friend to help him.” - -“Well, run along now, an’ don’t let me catch ye fightin’ agin,” said -the officer, trying to speak severely. “If I do I’ll arrest ye. But,” -he added, his admiration of Larry’s powers overcoming his instincts of -duty, “that was a fine blow ye landed, all right.” - -Larry lost no time in hastening to the office of the _Leader_. He was -tired and panting from the fight and the excitement of it, but in spite -of this he ran all the way and reached the city room out of breath. - -At first he felt inclined to tell Mr. Emberg about the matter. Then he -thought better of it, determining to fight his own battles. So, having -delivered the copy, he hurried back for more, finding Mr. Newton had a -bunch of it ready for him. - -Larry was not molested on this trip, and he noticed that Peter was not -among the copy boys, nor was Jim. They evidently did not dare return, -fearing Larry would inform the policeman of their actions. - -All that day, until the last edition went to press, Larry rushed back -and forth with copy from the Aldermanic Chamber to the city room. He -was very tired when night came. - -“Why, Larry!” exclaimed his mother when he reached home. “How did you -get that big lump over your eye? And your cheek is cut!” she added. - -“Oh, another boy and myself had a little difference of opinion,” said -Larry. - -“I hope you weren’t fighting,” came from Mrs. Dexter. - -“Well I--I--er had to defend myself against two of ’em,” said Larry. -“It wasn’t exactly a fight, I guess.” - -“I’m sure I’d worry if I knew you had fought.” - -Larry did not want to deceive his mother, but he knew that to tell her -the circumstances would only worry her, so he passed the matter over -lightly. - - - - -CHAPTER XII - -A STRANGE ASSIGNMENT - - -The insurance investigation lasted for several days and Larry was kept -busy carrying copy for Mr. Newton. On the second day Peter Manton -reappeared, with a large discolored spot over his right eye where Larry -had hit him. The former office boy on the _Leader_ did not glance at -Larry, but, on the contrary, seemed anxious to escape observation. Jim -did not come back. - -“I’m not afraid of him,” thought Larry. But he decided it would be -better to run no risks of being late with his copy, so he determined to -avoid an encounter with Peter. - -With this end in view Larry used the main corridor in going and coming -from the chamber. That was filled with people on various errands and -Larry had no fear that Peter would try to stop him. In fact Larry was -not physically afraid at all, but he felt he owed the paper a duty to -avoid anything that would cause trouble. - -But Peter showed no desire to make any. He kept out of Larry’s way and -seemed to be content with attending to his own work of rushing copy -for the reporter he was aiding. - -Larry was not sorry when the last day of the investigation came. The -novelty had worn off, and it was rather tiresome sitting and listening -to questions and answers. The only relief came when he went out with -copy and came back. The reporters, also, were weary of the grind. - -“Well, Larry,” remarked Mr. Newton on the afternoon of the final -hearing. “I think we’re entitled to a holiday. What do you say?” - -“I don’t believe we’ll get it,” said Larry with a smile. - -“Maybe not a day off, but any kind of work will be a holiday after what -I’ve been through. I’d like to report even a missionary meeting for a -change.” - -For some time thereafter Larry was kept busy in the office. He proved -himself very useful, and every day was learning more about the -business. Meanwhile he was not neglecting his studies at home, in -preparation for the night school. - -With the professor he plodded over the books, learning to become a -better reader, more proficient in arithmetic and in writing. Then too, -he began to study history, for the teacher told him it was necessary, -if he was to write about things modern, to know what had happened in -the past. - -So Larry not only dipped into the happenings of the past in this -country but what had taken place in others. It was hard work. After -a long day at the office, to sit down and tackle dry subjects was -something few boys would care about. It would have been easier to go -off to a bowling alley or to the theater. But Larry, though he wanted -to do those things, felt that he owed it to himself and his mother to -try and advance himself. And advancement he realized could only come by -learning more than he already knew. - -One day, early in September, Mr. Emberg called Larry to him and looked -the boy over critically. - -“You seem pretty strong and healthy,” the city editor said. - -“I guess I am,” replied Larry, wondering what was coming next. - -“How would you like to take a trip under the Hudson River?” asked Mr. -Emberg. - -Larry did not know what to say. Occasionally the city editor joked, and -the boy thought this might be one of those times. - -“I don’t believe I could swim that far,” Larry said at length. “That -is, not under water.” On the surface, splashing about, Larry knew he -would be at home, though he had never thought of tackling the big -stream. - -“I guess you won’t have to swim,” went on the city editor. - -“What do you mean then?” asked Larry. - -“I’m going to send you on a trip with Mr. Newton,” Mr. Emberg went on. -“You’ll have to start in half an hour.” - -“All right,” responded Larry. He had formed the habit of not asking -many questions, for he had found in the newspaper business it was best -to follow orders and to hold oneself in readiness for anything that -might turn up. Larry had no idea where he was going, but Mr. Emberg -soon enlightened him. - -“You know they have been digging a tunnel beneath the Hudson River, so -as to bring passengers from Jersey City over to New York without using -the ferry,” the city editor went on. Larry did, for he had read of the -project in the paper. “Well,” resumed Mr. Emberg, “one of the tubes is -about finished. All that remains is to cut through a thin brick wall, -or bulkhead, as it is called, and one can walk from New York to New -Jersey under the bottom of the river. - -“The company in charge of the tunnel work has invited a number of -newspaper men to make the first trip to-day, when the bulkhead will be -cut through and the first complete passage under the historic river -will be made. Mr. Newton is to go along to represent the _Leader_.” - -“But what am I to do?” asked Larry. - -“You’re going to help us get a beat I hope,” said the city editor. - -Larry’s eyes brightened. He saw himself on the road to becoming a -reporter. - -“You see,” Mr. Emberg went on, “the company in charge of the work is -not exactly sure that their plans will succeed. So they have asked a -number of newspaper men to go along on the trial trip. But they have -been very quiet about it and no other paper than ours--at least I hope -so--knows what the real purpose of the trip is. Most of the reporters -think it is only a jaunt to see how the work has progressed. There have -been a number of such. - -“So carefully have the builders laid their plans that they think, once -all the reporters are down in the big tube, they cannot get out to -say whether the thing is a success or a failure, in time to reach the -afternoon papers. As for the morning papers, if the thing is a failure -it will be so covered up by the engineers, that the reporters will -never know it. - -“Now my plan is this! I want you to go along with Mr. Newton. You will -be his assistant, for each invitation admits two. If the thing should -succeed, which I think it will, we want to know it this afternoon; not -to-morrow. And if it does succeed, it will only be known to those down -in the tube. - -“The only way we could find out in the office would be to have some -word from those in the tube or tunnel. The only way we can get word is -for someone to come back from the tube. Mr. Newton could not leave, -for, if he did, after the wall had been cut through, his absence would -be noted, and other reporters would rush out. Then we would not score a -beat. - -“But if you could go along, note what takes place, and then, when -the chance offers, get away unnoticed and come out of the tube to a -telephone on the surface, we could get the news ahead of anyone else. -Do you think you can do it?” - -Larry hesitated. It was a pretty big contract for a small boy, but he -resolved to try it. - -“I’ll do it!” he said. - -“I knew you would,” said Mr. Emberg. “It’s almost time for you and Mr. -Newton to start.” - -The reporter came up a few minutes later, nodded to the city editor, -and said: - -“Well, are we going to try it?” - -“With Larry’s help we are,” was the answer. - -“Come along then,” said Mr. Newton, as though taking a trip under the -Hudson River was one of the most ordinary things in this busy world. - -Larry put on his hat and, after a friendly nod from Mr. Emberg, left -the office. The reporter and copy boy went down Broadway to the big -Trinity building, adjoining the church of that name, and went to -the office of the company that was building the tunnel. There they -found a crowd of reporters; one from almost every newspaper in New -York. The men were ushered into a finely fitted up room, and told to -make themselves comfortable until the president of the company, Mr. -Lackadon, was ready to escort them. - -“Keep a quiet tongue,” advised Mr. Newton to Larry. “None of the others -know what is up.” - -Larry nodded. Then he listened to what the other newspaper men had -to say. Few of them knew what their assignment was, except that they -were to come and report something about the tunnel that had been in -construction for some time. - -“All ready, gentlemen!” announced a voice, and the president of the -concern appeared in the room. - -“Where are we going?” asked several reporters of evening papers. “We’d -like to send up a few lines about the story.” - -“It’s a sort of a secret,” said the president with a smile. “If any of -you want to back out, now’s your chance.” - -No one ever heard of a newspaper man backing out, so no one moved. - -“Come on,” said the president. - -He led the way to the big express elevators and soon the crowd of -reporters were on the ground floor. They went out the rear entrance -and, by way of a number of back streets, to a dock on the New York side -of the Hudson River where a steamer was in waiting. - -“Keep close to me,” said Mr. Newton to Larry. - -Once aboard the craft little time was lost. It steamed to the Jersey -City side of the river, and there, disembarking, the reporters and the -officials of the company who accompanied them walked through the yards -of a railroad until they came to a group of small buildings. - -“This is the mouth of the shaft that leads down to the level of the -tunnel,” said the president, pointing to a small structure. - -Almost as if in a dream Larry followed Mr. Newton. Entering the -building he found himself in the midst of a lot of machinery. - -“Get on the elevator,” said a voice. - -Larry stepped on a wooden platform, which soon began to sink. The -others were crowded about him. In a few minutes they found themselves -at the bottom of a shaft fifty feet in diameter and sixty feet deep. As -they landed, right in front of them yawned a black hole. - -“The tunnel,” said the president, with a wave of his hand. - -There was a murmur of astonishment from most of the reporters, for they -had never seen the big tube before. - -“Now that I have you all here,” the president went on, “I want to tell -you that we propose, for the first time in the history of the world, to -walk under the Hudson River!” - -There was a chorus of remonstrances, for the reporters for the -afternoon papers did not like missing a chance for a story, and they -realized they could send no word now. - -“If the trial succeeds,” went on the president, “we will cut through -the brick wall that separates the east from the west end of the tunnel. -I think it will succeed as all but a very thin portion of the wall is -gone. All that remains is to turn on a hydraulic jack that will cut -down the rest, and the tunnel will be an assured fact.” - -“Can’t we send word to our papers?” asked several reporters. - -“I’m afraid not,” was the answer of the president. “Those on the -morning papers, of course, can tell what happens, but the evening ones -will have to wait until to-morrow.” - -“We’ll see about that,” whispered Mr. Newton to Larry. “Keep close to -me, and when I give you the word you skip back the way we came, tell -the man at the elevator you want to get out, and reach the surface as -soon as possible. When you do, ring up the office, and tell Mr. Emberg -all you have seen.” - -“All right,” whispered Larry. - -“Forward!” cried the president. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII - -UNDER THE RIVER - - -The tunnel under the Hudson River was begun several decades ago. It was -started from the New York side, a little south of Christopher Street, -and continued out under the bed of the river for some distance. Then -the company failed and they built a brick wall, twenty-four feet thick, -at the end of the tube they had dug. It remained in that condition for -many years, until a new company was formed. This concern took up the -work where the others left off. - -There were two tubes, each circular, and about twenty-four feet in -diameter, dug under the river. They were separated by a wall of earth, -and each tube was lined with heavy cast iron. In cutting the tube a -big thing like an exaggerated apple corer was pushed through the earth -sixty feet below the surface of the river bed by hydraulic force. To -prevent the water from rushing in, the shield was kept filled with -compressed air at a heavy pressure. - -Up to within a few days this compressed air had been used in the -tunnel, but when the reporters started through the tunnel was near -enough completion to render it unnecessary. The heavy cast iron lining -was all in place, except where the brick wall was, and it only remained -to cut through the masonry, establish communication from one end to the -other, fit a few pieces of cast iron into place, and the tunnel would -be established. The cutting through of the wall was the event of great -importance, and really marked the completion of the first stage of the -work. Hence every reporter felt the need of getting a good story about -it. - -“We’ll try to beat ’em,” whispered Mr. Newton to Larry as the party -started forward. - -The tunnel was cut in a slanting or downward direction at first. It -began several hundred feet back from the edge of the river and, when it -was actually below the bed of the stream it was level. - -It was quite dark in the big tube, save here and there where electric -lights gleamed. Most of the party walked, but there were small cars, -hauled by a cable, for the use of the directors and officials of the -construction company. - -Through the tube they went. In spite of the heavy lining, sustaining -thousands of pounds of pressure, some water leaked in. It splashed down -in big drops, and felt like rain. Once a drop fell on Larry’s lips, and -it tasted salty, just as the lower Hudson River does. Then he began -to realize that he was in a queer place, under the bed of one of the -largest rivers in the United States. It hardly seemed possible that he -was walking under the historic stream that Henry Hudson, in the _Half -Moon_, discovered so many years ago. - -As the party progressed, the president explained the workings of the -machinery, and stated that when the concrete lining had been placed -over the iron, there would be no leakage. - -“Where are we now?” asked one of the reporters. - -“Right under the middle of the river,” was the president’s reply. -“Above us are the big ferryboats. The ocean steamers are sailing, and -the tug boats are darting to and fro.” - -“What if the tunnel should break?” asked the same newspaper man. - -“None of us would be left to tell what happened,” was the reply. “The -water would rush in and--that would be the end of us.” - -Larry shivered, though it was hot in the tube. - -“But we didn’t build this tunnel to break,” the president went on. “You -are as safe as if you were in your offices.” - -“I wish I could believe that,” a young reporter remarked, with -something like a shiver. - -Here and there the gloom was lighted by an incandescent lamp. The -cable, pulling small cars, in which the officers and directors of the -company rode, while the rest walked, slid along on the grooved wheels. -The way was obstructed by huge pieces of iron, being some extra ones -of those that formed the inner lining of the tunnel. - -With occasional jokes, which a reporter makes even at a funeral, the -party proceeded. Now and than a halt would be made while the president -explained some technical point. - -Finally the party came to a stop. It was quite dark and the few lights -only seemed to make the gloom deeper. - -“What’s the matter?” asked Mr. Newton. - -“We’ve come to some sort of a wall,” another reporter replied. “It -seems they have to cut through this before we can go any further. Gee! -But I wish I had time to send something about this to my paper. It will -be a dandy story.” - -“I guess there aren’t any telephones under the Hudson,” said Mr. -Newton, nudging Larry in the ribs. - -“No, but there may be some day. Well, I suppose I’ll have to make a -story for to-morrow, but the morning papers will have the best of it.” - -Mr. Newton did not reply, and Larry thought that perhaps the other -reporter might be mistaken. He began to see what a fine thing it would -be to beat the other papers. The whole party had now halted. There was -a sort of inclined platform of boards built from the floor close to the -roof of the tunnel. - -Up this the members of the party walked until they came to a level -place where they stood together. Overhead was the iron-ribbed lining -of the big tube. It had only recently been put in place and, as it was -not water tight, moisture from the river came through quite freely. - -Big drops splashed down almost like rain, and it was salt rain at that. - -“I guess I’ll have to get a new suit out of the office, for mine’s -spoiled,” said one of the newspaper men. - -“And my hat’s gone to grass,” remarked another, as he contemplated his -straw headgear. - -“You want to be ready to slip back soon now,” whispered Mr. Newton -to Larry. “They’re going to try the hydraulic ram on the brick wall. -As soon as they start it I’ll let you know. Then you can slip down -as quietly as possible, make your way back through the tunnel, go up -to the surface, and telephone to Mr. Emberg. He has the story almost -written, for he knows something about the tunnel. All he wants to know -are a few particulars which you can give him.” - -Larry nerved himself for the coming effort. There seemed to be a sort -of uneasiness in the crowd, for some of them did not know what was to -come. They were tired of being kept in the dark. - -“We are now going to start the hydraulic ram,” said the voice of the -president. “It will cut through the brick wall and then we will step -through the hole into the other part of the tunnel, thus completing -the trip from New Jersey to New York. Let me call your attention to the -fact that this trip is made, not like the partial one of a year ago, -through the northern tube under compressed air. We have so far advanced -that we do not need to maintain an air pressure any longer for safety.” - -“All ready,” called one of the engineers. - -There was a little shifting in the crowd. Men in red shirts and big -rubber boots began fumbling at some pipes and machinery. - -“Here she goes!” cried someone, and Larry prepared himself to start on -the back trip at a signal from Mr. Newton. - -There was a rending, crashing, tearing sound. The brick wall began to -crumble under the powerful force of the plunger worked by water power. -Then came a dull thud, and silence. - -“What’s the matter?” cried the president. - -“I’m sorry to say the ram’s broken,” replied the engineer. - -“Cut the wall down with crowbars and pickaxes then,” cried the -president. - -“I regret, gentlemen,” he went on, “that we will have a little delay. -The wall was thicker than we thought. We cut away as much as we dared -and we depended on the ram to do the rest. It has failed us. But we -will soon have a passageway through, and you will have been the first -party to walk under the river without the use of compressed air, which -is something of an achievement.” - -“Oh, for a chance to telephone the paper!” exclaimed several reporters. -But they knew there was no opportunity. - -“Now’s your time!” whispered Mr. Newton to Larry. “Hurry back, and as -soon as you can get to a telephone tell Mr. Emberg all that you have -seen and about the failure of the ram to work. I’d go, only if I leave -the other men will notice it and they’ll try the same trick.” - -Slipping through the crowd, Larry started back. He was not noticed -amid the excitement. He could hear the blows which the laborers were -beginning to rain on the brick wall and the thud of them sounded like -thunder in the tunnel. Down the sloping planks he went until he found -himself on the floor of the tube. - -Then he began to run as fast as possible on the uneven surface and -through the semi-darkness. Several times he stumbled over big sections -of the iron lining and once he fell into a puddle of water. He got up, -not minding the smart of his cut hands, and kept on. - -The tunnel made a slight turn a few hundred feet back from where the -wall was being cut through and this curve hid the throng from Larry. -Now he was all alone in the big shaft and he began to experience a -feeling of fear. Suppose some accident should happen? If the roof -should cave in? Or he should fall, strike his head, and be rendered -unconscious? - -All these things Larry thought of as he hurried on. But he tried to -forget them and to think only of getting to the surface and telephoning -the news. The fact that the hydraulic ram had failed to work made the -story all the better for newspaper purposes. - -Larry’s one real fear was lest he might not be able to get through the -air lock. This was a sort of double opening leading into the tube at -the western end. There was no air pressure in it however, but the lock -remained and had to be entered through small openings. - -When the party had reached this, in going through the tunnel, they -found the opening so narrow that but one could pass through at a time. -Workmen had been stationed there to help, as the doors which formerly -closed the lock were still in place and were heavy affairs. If one of -them should happen to be closed Larry felt that his mission would prove -a failure. - -He kept on as fast as he could walk. He was glad when he came to an -electric light, for it made the tube seem less lonesome. But the lights -were few and when he had left one behind Larry began to wish the next -one would gleam out. - -When he felt the floor of the tube beginning to take an upward turn -Larry knew he was approaching the end, and, also, the air lock. - -“I hope the men have left it open,” he said to himself. - -He was almost running now. Suddenly something black loomed up in front -of him, as he could see by the glare from a near-by electric lamp. He -put out his hand and touched something cold and hard. - -“It’s the air lock!” he exclaimed. “And the door is shut!” - - - - -CHAPTER XIV - -LARRY’S SUCCESS - - -For a little while Larry felt a sense of bitter disappointment. After -all his effort and the plans of Mr. Emberg and Mr. Newton, to have -the venture fail was, he thought, a hard thing. And fail it seemed -the scheme must, since unless he could soon get to the surface and -telephone the news, it would be too late for the day’s paper and the -others would have it to-morrow. Then the _Leader_ would not score “a -beat.” - -The boy went close to the big iron door and examined it as well as he -could in the dim light. It was a massive affair with ribs of steel and -swung on heavy hinges. It was built to withstand heavy pressure, though -there was none on it now. It was fastened by means of a peculiar catch -that was operated from within. - -Larry passed his fingers around the edge. He began on the side where -the hinges were, since he could not see very well. Not a crack was to -be felt. Then, as his hand came around on the other side, he gave a -start. He was aware of a slight opening. - -“The door is not shut tight!” he cried. “Maybe I can open it!” - -He felt around until he came to a place where the opening was widest. -As he had discovered the door was not quite shut tight. He put his -fingers into the crack and pulled with all his force. - -The big plate of iron never moved. He might as well have tried to pull -down the side of the tunnel. The door was rusty on the hinges, and, -even had it swung freely the very weight of it was too much for a boy. - -“I guess I’ll have to give up!” thought Larry. - -He moved back a bit, rubbing his hands where the edges of the iron had -cut them slightly. As he did so his foot hit against something and he -nearly stumbled to the floor. He saved himself by putting out his hand, -which came in contact with something cold. - -By the touch of it Larry knew it was a crowbar. He grasped it with both -hands and pulled it from the crack in the wall where some workman had -left it. - -“Maybe I can pry the door open with this,” he said. “Luck seems to be -coming my way after all.” - -The bar was heavy, but Larry strained at it until he had inserted the -wedge-like edge in the crack between the door and the side of the air -lock. - -“Here goes!” he exclaimed. - -He pressed on the bar with all his strength. It did not budge. - -“I guess it’s tighter than I thought,” gasped the boy. - -Once again he pushed until his arms trembled with the strain. Again and -again, throwing himself forward, he forced the bar away from him. - -Then, just when he was ready to give up in despair, he felt the iron -lever give slightly. So little was the movement he half doubted whether -it had moved. But as he pressed harder and harder he felt it sway, and -then he knew he had started the door to swinging. - -“I must keep at it!” he panted, “or it will get stuck again.” - -Then with all his strength he pushed until, in the half-light, he saw -the crack opening wider and wider until the door was half open and -there was space enough for him to slip through. - -“Hurrah!” cried Larry faintly. “Now to see if the other door is open,” -for the air lock had two portals. - -He dragged the bar with him as he stooped to go through the small -opening. The air lock was about ten feet long, constructed entirely -of steel and iron, and was about as big around as a hoisting engine -boiler. Larry had to bend almost double as he went through it. -Fortunately he found the other door open, and a few seconds later he -was out in the tunnel again. - -“Now for a telephone,” he cried as he sprang forward on the run. - -Just ahead he could see a big patch of light that indicated where the -round shaft led from the surface of the earth down to the floor of the -tunnel. The going was easier now and the air was better. Larry soon -reached the foot of the shaft. - -He found a number of workmen there. They were covered with dirt and -water and Larry knew they had been working in the tunnel. - -“Where’d ye come from, boy?” asked one of them. - -“I was with the party that went through a little while ago,” Larry -answered. “One of the men sent me back for something.” - -He did not say what it was, for fear some of the men might not think it -proper for him to telephone the news to his paper. - -“Want to go up?” asked the man in charge of the elevator. - -Larry nodded. The man motioned for him to get on the movable platform -which was about all the hoist was, and then gave the signal to start. - -In a few moments the boy was at the surface. He made his way out of -the engine room at the mouth of the upright shaft and hurried across -the railroad yards in the direction he had come. On the way in he had -noticed an office where there was a telephone and he made for this. - -The man in charge gave permission for the boy to use the instrument, -though he stared somewhat in surprise at Larry, who was covered with -dirt and water. - -“Fall in the river?” he asked. - -“No, I came through the tunnel,” replied the boy. - -Then he rang up central, was soon connected with the _Leader_ office, -and a few seconds later was telling Mr. Emberg what had happened. -The city editor, who was familiar with the work, and the prospective -battering down of the brick wall, could easily understand the situation -from Larry’s description. A few details sufficed and then, with a -hurried “Good-bye,” Mr. Emberg rang off, having told Larry to come back -to the office. - -“Are you a reporter?” asked the man in the railroad office, as Larry -hung up the receiver. - -“No, I’m only a copy boy,” was the answer. “But I’m going to be a -reporter some day. I am helping one of our men to-day.” - -“Well, I should say you would be a reporter,” the man went on, for he -had listened to what Larry was saying over the wire. “That was pretty -slick on your part. The _Leader’s_ an all-right paper!” - -“Glad you think so,” replied Larry. “How much for the telephone charge?” - -“Nothing,” replied the man. “Glad to have you use it for such a big -piece of news. So the tunnel is really cut through, eh?” - -“It will be in a few minutes, I guess,” replied Larry. - -Then he started for the _Leader_ office, first having borrowed a brush -from the railroad man, and cleaned some of the mud from his clothes. -Before he got back to his office Larry heard the boys on the streets -crying: - -“Extra! Extra! Full account of the opening of the big Hudson River -tunnel!” - -Larry bought a _Leader_ and there, on the front page, under a big -heading, was an account of the trip he, Mr. Newton, and the others had -made that afternoon, and which was not yet finished. This time the -press was a little ahead of the happening and the _Leader_, through -Larry’s success, had scored a big beat. - -Arriving at the office Larry found everyone but Mr. Emberg had gone -home, for it was quite some time past the regular edition hour. - -“You’re all right, Larry!” the city editor exclaimed. “It’s a fine -story. Have any trouble?” - -“Only a little,” said Larry modestly, for he did not want to boast of -opening the door that had given him so much trouble. - -“It’s a good story! It’s a beat!” said the city editor half to himself. -“They tried to keep it quiet, but we beat ’em at their own game. That -fact about the hydraulic ram breaking was a fine feature.” - -Larry sat down in a chair, for he was tired. Then Mr. Emberg, who -seemed for a time to have forgotten that he was present, noticed him. - -“You can go home, Larry,” he added. “You’ve done enough to-day.” - -“I thought I’d stay until Mr. Newton came in,” said the boy. “I’d like -to hear how the thing ended.” - -“All right, I’m going to stay myself,” said the city editor. He began -looking over some proofs on his desk in readiness for the next day’s -paper. In half an hour Mr. Newton arrived. - -“Hello, Larry!” the reporter exclaimed. “Did we do ’em? Well, I guess -yes! How about it, Mr. Emberg?” - -“You and Larry certainly covered yourselves with glory,” spoke the city -editor. “First thing we know Larry will be out getting news himself.” - -“Well, I guess the other papers will sit up and take notice,” went on -Mr. Newton. “Not one of the other men got a line in to-day and they’re -half wild. It took quite a while for the men to cut through the wall. -Then there was a lot of speech-making over the importance of the affair -and we finished the journey, walking all the way from New Jersey to -New York, under the river, though I can’t exactly say it was without -getting wet, for the tunnel leaked like a sieve after we got through -the wall.” - -“It was a good piece of work,” commented Mr. Emberg. Then with a nod to -Larry and Mr. Newton he went out. The reporter and the copy boy soon -followed and, that night, Larry astonished his mother, sisters, and -brother with the wonderful tale of going under the river. - -“It’s dess like a fairy ’tory,” said little Mary. - -“Did you find any gold?” asked Jimmy, his eyes big with astonishment. - -“No,” said Larry with a laugh, “I wish I had.” - -“And didn’t you see any goblins?” asked Lucy with a smile. - -“Nary a one,” was Larry’s reply. “Though some of the workmen looked -like ’em in the darkness with their rough clothes and big boots on.” - -“I’m afraid it was a dangerous place,” spoke Mrs. Dexter. “I don’t -believe I want you to be a reporter, Larry, if they have to take such -risks.” - -“Oh, it isn’t often they have to go into such places,” replied Larry. -“There was no danger. And think of being able to say you have been -under the Hudson River! It’s like being a discoverer.” - -“Well, I’m glad you’re home safe,” said his mother. “Now we’ll have -supper.” - - - - -CHAPTER XV - -LARRY GOES TO SCHOOL - - -It was with some surprise that Larry found a dollar extra in his pay -envelope Friday afternoon, for it was on that day that the assistant -cashier used to come around with the salaries. There was a five-dollar -bill and two one-dollar bills, and Larry, who since his first raise had -been getting six dollars a week, thought a mistake had been made. - -He went to Mr. Newton at the first opportunity and told him about it, -asking his advice. - -“You’d better speak to Mr. Emberg about it before you hand the extra -money back,” said the reporter, with a smile. - -“Eh? What’s that?” asked Mr. Emberg, when Larry, in hesitating tone, -mentioned the matter. “An extra dollar, eh? Well, that’s all right, -Larry. That’s a reward for your good work in the tunnel. I heard -yesterday about you opening the door. Some of the workmen who knew it -was closed found it opened, and knew you must have done it. I want to -say that the _Leader_ appreciates such efforts. And the only way we -can show appreciation is by giving people more money. So you’ll get -seven dollars a week now. I hope it will be much more in time.” - -Larry glowed with pleasure, more at the kind words than at the increase -in wages, though, of course, that was very welcome. - -“My, you’re getting rich,” said Lucy that night when, at the supper -table, he told of his good fortune. - -“I mean to be, some day,” spoke Larry confidently. “I want to be rich -enough to hire that big doctor that’s coming to New York soon, so he -can cure you.” - -“I’m afraid there’s no hope for me,” replied Lucy, turning her head so -as to hide her tears. Her pain had been worse lately, though she had -not complained. - -Mrs. Dexter was much rejoiced over her son’s advancement, for every bit -of money was needed. She could not earn a great deal, and there was -much food to buy as well as clothing for the children. She had saved -about one hundred dollars of the money she had had when she came to New -York, but this she had put away in case of sickness. - -It was now about the middle of September. Larry had kept up his studies -with the professor and had made good progress. - -“The night schools open next week,” said Mr. Carlton one evening, after -he and Larry had closed the books. “I suppose you are going to start -in.” - -“Yes, sir,” said Larry, “and I’m very much obliged for the help you -have given me.” - -“I was only too glad to do it,” replied the professor. “I hope you will -get on well in your classes. If you need help come to me.” - -Larry learned from the professor the proper night school to apply at on -the evening the term opened. It was some distance from the house where -Larry lived. He started off with well wishes from his mother. - -He found quite a crowd of boys around the doors, for the school had not -yet opened. The youngsters were skylarking, laughing, shouting, and -playing tricks. It was almost like a day school, Larry thought, except -that the boys were bigger, for all of them worked in the daytime. Some -came from a desire to educate themselves, but a number were obliged to -attend under the factory laws. These laws provided that if a boy went -to work too young he must make up for it by attending night school. - -It was these latter lads who seemed to be making the most fun. They -evidently did not care much about the lessons. - -“Here comes another!” cried a voice, as Larry walked down the street -toward the school. “Let’s make him run the gauntlet!” - -“Line up!” shouted several, and they formed a narrow path, with boys -on either edge of the sidewalk, making a lane which Larry would have to -pass through. At first he did not appreciate what was up, but when he -saw the lads raise bundles of books or papers, and prepare to hit him -as he passed along, he knew what was coming. - -It was fashioned after the gauntlet the Indians used to force their -prisoners to run through, only in the olden days death was often the -end of the game. Here it was mainly for fun, though sometimes very -rough. - -“Soak him now!” cried several as Larry reached the head of the line and -started through the lane of boys. - -At first Larry hesitated. Then he realized that if he turned back the -boys might call him a coward. And he felt that if he was to go to -school with them it would be an unpleasant thing to bear that name. So -he resolved to run the gauntlet, come what might. - -Shielding his head with his upraised arms he entered the lane. Thick -and fast the blows rained on him. Most of them came from bundles of -paper and did not hurt much. As books, however, came down on Larry’s -head they made him wince. But he only joined in the shouts of glee and -made up his mind not to care. - -“He’s game all right!” cried several of the older lads. “Soak him, -fellers!” - -“Whoop!” yelled the crowd, with as much vim as did ever the Indians -shout over the discomfiture of a captive. - -Larry was halfway down the line. He got some pretty hard knocks there, -as the bigger lads were at that point. One blow sent his hat sailing -from his head. He was about to stoop and pick it up, but someone yelled: - -“Go ahead; we’ll save it for you!” - -On he ran. He began to wish he was at the end of the lane, which seemed -to be getting longer instead of shorter. The blows came thicker and -were harder. In fact they all seemed to be from bundles of books now, -as few of the remaining boys had paper. But Larry was not going to back -out. - -The excitement was growing, as several other luckless ones had been -made to take the dreaded journey. This took some attention away from -Larry, for which he was thankful. Now he was within a few lads from the -end of the line. Several vigorous blows were given, making Larry’s arms -and head sting with pain. Then, just as he was about to emerge from the -gauntlet, someone put out a foot and tripped him. Larry threw out his -hands and saved his head from hitting the pavement, but his palms were -cut by the fall. - -He staggered to his feet, anger in his heart, and a desire to tackle -the boy who had tripped him so unfeelingly. - -“That’s a mean trick!” exclaimed several of the boys. - -“Who did it?” asked Larry. - -“I did!” exclaimed a boy on the end of the line. “What of it?” - -Larry turned and saw grinning at him Peter Manton, the rival office boy. - -“If you want to fight say so,” sneered Peter, advancing toward Larry. - -Larry was nothing of a coward. He was not afraid of Peter, and felt -that if he gave him a good drubbing, which he was confident he could, -from his experience in the City Hall, it would only be what Peter -deserved. - -A crowd of boys, scenting what always is an attraction, regardless of -the right or wrong of it, made a circle about the two. The gauntlet was -forgotten in the prospect of something more exciting. Larry clenched -his fists and advanced with firm footsteps. - -At that instant the school bell rang and the doors were thrown open. -Several teachers came out to form the boys in line, and a policeman, -one being always on duty at the evening schools, made his appearance. - -“Come now, steady! No scrappin’!” exclaimed the officer. “Yez’ll all go -in quiet an’ orderly like or I’ll tap yez one or two wid me sthick!” -and he swung his night baton with a suggestive air. - -“Form in line!” exclaimed the teachers. - -The crowd about Larry and Peter dispersed. The boys had no desire to be -caught aiding a fight the first night of school, since many of them had -their fathers to reckon with and did not want to be expelled. - -As for Larry he felt that he had a just cause for a battle with Peter. -The latter, however, did not stay to see the outcome of his challenge. -As soon as there was an excuse he broke away from the encircling crowd -and made for the open door. Perhaps he had too good a recollection of -Larry’s sturdy fists the time they had met in the City Hall corridor. - -At any rate the fight was off for that night, though Larry determined -he would pay Peter back the first chance he got. Into the different -rooms the boys crowded. The teachers, with a skill born of long -experience, soon separated them into classes. - -Larry was somewhat surprised, when, with a number of other boys, he had -marched into a room, to see, seated in it, half a score of men. He then -learned for the first time, that a number of grown persons, who had had -no chance to study when they were young, attended the night schools. -They were trying to learn more so as to get better positions. There -were quite a few foreigners also, whose main object was to learn the -English language. - -The teacher in Larry’s class put the boys through a rough and ready -examination. To Larry’s delight he found he was able to answer with -ease the test questions. This was because of his preliminary study with -the professor. - -The teacher, seeing he was a bright boy and well grounded in the -rudiments, passed him on to a higher class, where Larry settled down -for the term. - -Thus began his first night at evening school, a strange experience for -him. There was little studying done at the initial session. The boys -were enrolled and then, after a short lecture by the teacher, who urged -the lads to study, the class was given a lesson to prepare for the next -night and then dismissed. - -Tired and aching from his experience, with somewhat of a feeling of -anger against his old enemy Peter, and with his head filled with -thoughts of the new life opening before him, Larry went home. He found -his mother and Lucy still up, anxious to hear how he had made out. - -Larry related to them his experiences, telling of the gauntlet only as -a game and making light of his hurts. - -“Aren’t they pretty rough boys, Larry?” asked his mother. - -“No rougher than many others,” replied Larry, bound to stick up for -those with whom he was to associate. - -He studied some of his lessons that night. Then he took his spelling -book with him to the office, thinking he would get a chance during the -spare hours of the day, or at lunch time, to go over the exercises. - - - - -CHAPTER XVI - -LARRY AT A STRIKE - - -Larry’s desire to get a little study in during his spare moments was -the cause of some trouble between him and the office boy who had taken -Peter’s place. This lad’s name was Tom Mead, and he was much the same -type of a youngster as Peter was. Not that he was bad, but he was up to -sharp tricks, and he did not like to work when he could get out of it. - -Bud Nelson was, by right of long service, the head office boy in the -city room. Larry came next, and then Tom. - -Things had been pretty lively in the _Leader_ office for the past -week, as there was an election on and there were many stories for the -reporters. This made much more copy than usual, and, consequently, more -trips from the city room to the pneumatic tube. - -The boys had fallen into the habit of taking turns with rushing the -copy, which went up in batches, so that the work would be more evenly -divided. At Larry’s suggestion there were three chairs in a row. When -one boy took some copy, to the tube he came back and took the end -seat. The boy who had been immediately behind him had, in the meanwhile -moved up one seat to be ready for the next batch. Thus they had to run -only a third as often as before, and the work was shared evenly. - -When it came his turn to take the rear seat, which insured him several -minutes of quietness, Larry would take out his lesson book and study. -This did not seem to meet with the approval of Tom, who had a dislike -for “book-worms” as he called them. - -“Regular sissy-boy,” he said of Larry, though he did not venture to -call our hero that to his face. - -One afternoon, when Larry had hurried to the tube with a bunch of copy -he came back, expecting to take the last seat, which had been occupied -by Tom. He found the latter still in the end chair, and the boy showed -no signs of moving up. - -“Move ahead,” said Larry, in a low tone. - -“Move yourself!” exclaimed Tom. “I’ve got as good a right here as you. -I’m tired of chasing copy while you read books. I’m going to take a -rest.” - -“I’m studying, not reading,” said Larry. “Besides I carry my share of -copy. It will be your turn in a minute.” - -“Copy!” called Mr. Emberg, and Bud, who had moved to the first chair, -jumped up and ran for it. - -“It’s your turn next,” said Larry to Tom. - -“I don’t care if it is,” was the answer. - -“Copy!” cried Mr. Emberg’s assistant. - -Tom did not leave his seat. - -“It’s your turn,” repeated Larry. - -“I don’t care if it is!” exclaimed Tom. “Go with it yourself if you’re -in such a hurry.” - -“Copy here!” was the cry. “Come, what’s the matter with you boys? Going -to sleep?” - -Mr. Emberg, wondering at the delay, looked up. He saw Bud returning to -the room, and, being aware of the understanding among the boys about -their turns, looked to see what the hitch was between Larry and Tom. - -“Whose turn is it?” asked the city editor. “Be quick about it. Don’t -stand there all day. The paper has to come out.” - -“It’s his turn!” exclaimed Larry. - -“Well, he’s always readin’,” growled Tom. “I’m tired of runnin’ with -his copy.” - -“I’m not always reading!” declared Larry, determined to have justice -done. “It was my turn to take the last seat, but he wouldn’t move up -for me.” - -“He’s always got a book in his pocket,” growled Tom. - -“Whose turn is it?” demanded Mr. Emberg, coming over to where the boys -were and addressing Bud. - -“I think it was Tom’s,” said Bud. - -“Well, then I’ll go,” growled the newest office boy, with no very good -grace. - -“What book are you reading?” asked Mr. Emberg of Larry. - -“I wasn’t reading, I was studying,” was Larry’s answer as he produced -his speller and handed it to the city editor. - -“Um!” remarked Mr. Emberg. “Spelling, eh? Well, you’ll need it in the -newspaper business. But don’t neglect your work to study, Larry.” - -“No, sir,” replied the boy, yet he felt that Mr. Emberg was not -displeased with him. “And I want you boys to stop quarreling about this -carrying of copy,” the city editor said. “Each one must take his turn.” - -“Squealer!” whispered Tom when he came back, and he slyly shook his -fist at Larry. “I’ll fix you!” - -So Larry seemed to have made two enemies in a short time. But he knew -that he had done no wrong and he felt that it was not his fault. As for -being afraid of either Peter or Tom, such a thought never entered his -head. - -Larry was beginning to be of much service around the _Leader_ office. -He was quick to understand what was wanted, and none of the other boys -could go to the composing room and get a proof as rapidly as he could. -He took a pleasure in his work, and never shirked the carrying of copy. - -Occasionally he was sent out with the reporters who had to go some -distance away to cover stories, to bring back their copy. He liked this -sort of work. Best of all he liked to go with Mr. Newton, for this -reporter, being one of the oldest and most valuable men, had important -assignments, and usually went to some interesting place. - -It happened that there was a strike on one of the lines of electric -cabs operated by a private company in the upper part of the city. From -a small affair the matter grew to be a large one, since the strikers -would not work themselves, nor did they want to let men called in to -fill their places take out the vehicles. - -The result was a war between the union and non-union factions. Matters -grew so hot that the police had to be called out several times, for -a cab operated by a “scab,” as the non-unionists were called by the -strikers, was likely to be stoned, upset, and the occupants injured. -The strike grew in size until the whole electric cab system was -involved. - -Most of the trouble centered around the headquarters of the cab -concern, pretty well uptown, and there were several rows between the -strikers, the non-unionists, and the police. - -“I think you had better cover that strike,” said Mr. Emberg to Mr. -Newton one day. “You’ll have to remain on the scene all day. I’ll -send a boy up with you and you can send your copy down. Telephone if -anything big happens, otherwise write the story as it goes along and -send it in. Make it interesting, for the people like to read about such -things. What boy do you want?” - -“I’ll take Larry,” said Mr. Newton. “He’s quick and smart.” - -“That’s the reason I like to have him in the office,” said the city -editor. “But go ahead, take him with you. And you’ll have to keep an -eye out for him and yourself too. The strikers are in an ugly mood, and -they have little use for the papers.” - -“I’ll look out,” said Mr. Newton. - -Larry went uptown to the office of the cab concern. In order to have a -headquarters near the scene of battle Mr. Newton arranged to have the -use of a little store near the cab stables. There was a telephone in -it, and a small table where the reporter could write. - -Larry and Mr. Newton reached the place about nine o’clock in the -morning. No sooner had they arrived than there was a fight between the -union and non-union forces. Several of the former attacked a cab taken -out by a new man. They pulled him from the seat and then, turning on -the power full, allowed the motor vehicle to run wild about the streets. - -Several persons had narrow escapes from being injured and two horses -were knocked down by the big cab with no one to guide it. Another horse -ran away from fright. The police reserves were sent for, and altogether -there was considerable excitement. - -Mr. Newton wrote a lively story of the happening, and sent Larry -back to the office with it. Then he sat down in the store to await -developments. They were not long in coming, for, pretty soon, the -strikers upset a cab. So, when Larry got back, there was another batch -of copy waiting for him. - -“Plenty of stories!” cried Mr. Emberg. - -Newsboys brought several copies of the _Leader_ around to the -headquarters of the cab firm that afternoon, and the story of the -morning’s happenings was eagerly read by the strikers. - -They did not seem to like the frank manner in which Mr. Newton had -described their doings and there were several murmurs against the -“capitalistic press.” - -“There’s the reporter what done it!” exclaimed a big striker, pointing -to Mr. Newton, who had stepped from the store to see how matters were -coming on. - -“Let’s soak him!” cried several. - -There was a movement in the crowd, but the police were on the lookout -for trouble and made the men disperse, at which there was more -grumbling. - -“Aren’t you afraid?” asked Larry of the reporter. - -“Not a bit,” was the reply. “I’m used to having trouble. I’m not afraid -of them.” - -The strike was worse the next day, and so many violent acts -were committed that extra policemen had to be sent for. Several -strike-breakers were attacked as they tried to run the electric cabs -and were quite badly hurt. Mr. Newton wrote vivid stories about the -occurrences, and the _Leader_ had a strong editorial, condemning the -strikers. - -This made the union men more angry than ever at the _Leader_, and they -seemed to think Mr. Newton was the chief one on whom they could vent -their ill feeling. They shook their fists at him whenever he appeared, -and once a stone was hurled through the air at him, narrowly missing -his head. - -“You’d better look out,” some of the policemen advised him. - -Larry had plenty of copy to take down that day, and made three trips. -The last two times he noticed as he was going up the stairs of the -elevated road, where he took a train that brought him close to the -_Leader_ office, three men regarding him closely. Once he heard one of -the trio say: - -“That’s him!” - -However, he did not think they meant him, and so he gave the matter -no more consideration. He took the story to the office and came back -for more. There was quite a bunch of copy waiting, as several incidents -had occurred that Mr. Newton had preferred writing about instead of -telephoning. - -As Larry was going up the stairs to the train with this last batch of -copy he saw the three men again. - -“Now’s our chance!” one of them cried. - -Two of them made a grab for the boy, for the stairs were screened in -from observation, and no one was in sight. - - - - -CHAPTER XVII - -TAKEN PRISONER - - -At first Larry thought they were perhaps only trying to play a joke -on him. He involuntarily moved to one side, but, as he did so, one of -the men grasped him by the coat collar. Larry began to struggle, but -another of the men clasped him about the arms, and a hand was placed -over the boy’s mouth to prevent any cry issuing. - -“Whistle for the cab!” the shortest of the men whispered, and a shrill -note came from the lips of someone. - -Larry felt himself lifted up and borne down the stairs. He heard a -confused noise and then a loud explosion. It subsequently developed -that some of the strikers set off a bomb at that time. This drew a big -crowd near the scene of the explosion and the vicinity of the elevated -railroad steps was almost deserted. - -A carriage drove rapidly up to the foot of the steps. Larry, struggling -against he knew not what, was unable to free himself. He was bundled -into the cab, two of the men followed, and the door was slammed shut. -Then the driver cracked his whip and the horses started off at a -gallop. - -Even then Larry could not believe that the men meant to take him. A -number of explanations came into his mind. He thought he was mistaken -for another person, and again he imagined it might be some prank of -college students, though the men did not look like youths who attended -a university. - -One man had kept his hand over Larry’s mouth, but once they were in -the cab he removed his palm and substituted for it a cloth gag which -effectually prevented the boy from calling out. - -Larry strained his ears to catch anything the men might say, in order -to learn what their purpose was regarding him. In this, however, he was -disappointed, as the men maintained silence. The only sound was the -rumbling of the carriage over the cobblestones. Occasionally this would -cease as an asphalt stretch would be reached. - -“They’ll release me as soon as they find they have the wrong person,” -thought Larry. “It would make a good story if I could find out all -about it and what their real object is.” - -Even in his somewhat perilous position Larry had a thought for his -paper, as all good reporters should have. Now the cab seemed to be -in a less thickly settled part of the city. By glancing through a -small crack in the window shade, Larry could see stretches of field -instead of solid blocks of houses. The men, too, seemed to be less -apprehensive of pursuit, for they began to talk in low tones, though -Larry could not hear what they said. - -At length, however, Larry heard one ask the other: - -“Has he got the papers with him?” - -“Sure,” was the answer from the other man. “I saw him put them in his -pocket. Shall I take them out?” - -“No, we’ll wait for the boss,” was the answer. - -Larry heard and wondered. What papers could the men be referring to? -Clearly they had made a mistake, and must have expected to capture some -other person. - -“I haven’t any valuable papers,” thought the youth. - -Then, with a start, he remembered the bunch of copy with which he had -started for the _Leader_ office when he was caught. He realized that -if it was not soon delivered it would be too late. The thought of this -made him half wild, for he did not want to fail in his mission. - -He began to struggle to free himself with a strength that, for a -moment, took all the power of the men to subdue. Larry kicked with his -feet and struck out with his arms. He tried to get rid of the gag to -call for help, but it was too tightly fastened on. - -For a few minutes there was a lively time in the carriage, but the -driver did not appear to notice it, for he kept his horses going. At -length the men succeeded in getting hold of Larry’s arms and legs and -holding them firmly. - -“Shall I tie him?” asked the shorter of the two men. - -“No, we’re almost there now,” was the answer from the other. “We can -easily hold him until then.” - -“He certainly put up a good fight,” was the other’s comment. “I never -saw such a lad. I hope he doesn’t make another row.” - -“We’ll fix him if he does,” said the tall man. - -Larry was exhausted from his efforts. He saw that it would be of no -use to fight the two men, and so he resolved to remain quiet until he -found a better chance of escaping. At the same time he could not help -wondering what in the world it was all about, and why any men should -want him. He was also much alarmed over his failure to get back to the -office with the copy, but he did not see how he could help himself. - -The carriage containing the boy and his captors now began traveling -over more uneven roads, and Larry rightly guessed that they were in the -upper part of the city, in the section known as the Bronx. - -For perhaps an hour longer the vehicle moved on. Then it came to a -stop. One of the men raised a curtain and peered out. - -“Here we are!” he exclaimed. “We’ll carry him in. Is anyone looking?” - -“Not a person in sight,” was the reply as the other man gazed up and -down the street. “Go ahead.” - -Larry was picked up as if he was a baby and carried from the carriage, -across the sidewalk, and into a dark hallway. During the short trip -across the pavement the boy noticed that it was getting dusk. He knew -then that the last edition of the _Leader_ had gone to press and that -the copy he had in his pocket had not reached the office on time. He -felt like crying, for fear Mr. Emberg and Mr. Newton would think it -was his fault he had failed in his work. They might believe he had -deliberately stayed away. - -But Larry’s regrets at what might have happened were soon dispersed by -what was taking place right around him. He felt himself being carried -upstairs, and he made up his mind that it was useless to struggle any -more. He was in the hands of strong men and it would be better to use -cunning rather than force. He realized that he was near a big city and -that there were plenty of police to ferret out crime of any description -whatever. - -Larry believed that his absence would soon be noticed and that a search -would be made for him. So, though he was much frightened, he resolved -to be as brave as possible and to wait with patience until he was -released. He had no fear that the men would do him any real harm. - -The man carrying him went up four flights of stairs, and Larry knew, -from that, that he must be in some sort of tenement house or some large -factory. The places seemed quiet, and Larry thought if it was a house -it must be a deserted one. - -At this he began to have a little fear. He was afraid of being left -all alone somewhere far from home, for he knew New York was a big -place, and one might be within the city limits, yet miles from any real -population. But the boy did not have long to indulge in fancies. - -The man carrying him set him down rather roughly, and Larry staggered -and would have fallen had not another man, who had followed the first -one, caught him. - -“Easy,” said the second individual. “What are you trying to do to him? -He’s only a boy.” - -“I didn’t mean any harm,” growled the other. - -“Now look here,” began the man who had pleaded for gentler treatment, -turning toward Larry, “we’re going to take that gag out of your mouth. -But mind you if you holler or make a fuss we’ll put it in again. Will -you promise?” - -Larry would have done almost anything in reason to get rid of the rag -that was nearly choking him, so he nodded an assent. - -“That’s the way to behave,” said the man, evidently pleased. “We’ll be -as decent as we can with you, even though the boss did say to give you -all you deserved.” - -He removed the gag, and Larry breathed a long breath of relief. At the -same time he wondered what the man meant by saying he was to be given -all he deserved. - -What did he deserve, anyhow? And who would want to harm him? It was too -much for Larry. He began to think it was all a bad dream and that he -would presently wake up and start for the office. - -“It won’t do you much good if you do holler,” the man went on. “There’s -no one in this old factory and there’s not a house within half a mile. -So if you want to use your lungs, why, go ahead.” - -Larry’s mouth was sore and stiff from the gag. His lips were swollen -and he could hardly speak. Yet he wanted to question the men. - -“Why have you brought me here? What do you want? I never did anything -to you,” he said brokenly. - -“No, I don’t know’s you did,” said the shorter of the two men. “You’re -brought here because the boss told us to, and you’re here because -you’ve been doing harm to our cause.” - -“Harm to your cause? What cause?” asked Larry, feeling sure he must -have been taken for the wrong person. - -“You know well enough,” the man answered. “I have orders not to talk -to you for fear you’ll find out more than would be good for us, so -you’ll have to keep quiet now. - -“We’re going to lock you in this room. You can try and get out if you -want to, only I wouldn’t advise you to try. It’s a good ways from the -ground. We’ll be on hand to stop any attempt. You’ll be well taken care -of for a while until this matter is all settled. If you’re hungry we’ll -get you something to eat.” - -“I’m not hungry,” said Larry, “but what do you mean by bringing me -here? You haven’t any right to do this.” - -“That’s all right,” said the tall man calmly. “You are here, and here’s -where you’re going to stay for a while. The boss will be here, pretty -soon, and you can make some arrangements with him, maybe.” - -“Can I have a drink of water?” asked Larry, whose throat was parched -and dry from the gag. - -“Sure,” said one of the men. “I’ll get you some, and a couple of -sandwiches.” - -He was as good as his word, and presently came back with food and -drink. The water made Larry feel better and he thought he had better -eat something to keep his strength up. - -The two men watched him as he munched the bread and meat. Suddenly -there sounded from below a sharp noise as if a heavy door had been -shut. - -“Hark!” exclaimed one of the men. “What’s that?” - -“Someone’s coming,” said the other. - -Footsteps were heard ascending the stairs. The men looked at each other -and seemed alarmed. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII - -HELD CAPTIVE - - -There came a peculiar rap at the door. First two blows, then a pause, -then three light taps, followed by three raps at long intervals. - -“It’s----” began the tall man. - -“Shh-h!” cautioned his companion. “No names, remember. Let him in.” - -The other opened the door. A well-dressed man entered. - -“Have you got him?” he asked. - -“Sure,” replied the two men at once. They had stood in front of Larry, -so that the new-comer could not see him at first. At this, however, -they moved aside and the well-dressed man got a glimpse of the boy. He -gave a start. - -“That’s not the one!” he exclaimed. - -“Not the one!” cried the tall man. “Sure he’s the one. He’s the one -that was pointed out to us. Besides he has the papers in his pocket. I -saw him put ’em in.” - -“Are you sure?” - -“Of course.” The tall man with a sudden motion plunged his hand into -Larry’s inside pocket and pulled out the bunch of copy. The new-comer -glanced hurriedly at it. - -“It’s the stuff,” he said, “but, all the same, you have the wrong one. -You got the messenger boy. The one we wanted is the reporter who has -been writing all this stuff about the strikers. He’s the one we want to -get even with.” - -At last Larry understood why he had been kidnapped. - -The heads of the strikers, incensed at the articles Mr. Newton had been -writing about them, had determined on revenge. Whether they thought -that by capturing a reporter they could stop the articles from going -into the paper Larry could not guess. It was more likely, he thought, -that the men merely wanted to scare Mr. Newton and make him tone down -the descriptions of the acts committed by the strikers. - -Persons who thought it to their advantage to keep out of the public -notice, Larry knew, often tried to intimidate the reporters assigned to -write them and their doings up, but he had never heard of such a bold -attempt to bring about silence. - -He realized that a plot must have been formed to capture Mr. Newton. -But the men detailed to carry it out had mistaken Larry for the -reporter. - -“What shall we do? Turn him loose?” asked the short man with a nod at -Larry. - -“It’s a bad blunder to make,” spoke the well-dressed man, who seemed to -be in charge. “I don’t see how you came to make it. But we dare not -turn him out yet.” - -“Why not?” - -“Why, he’d give the whole thing away, and the strike’s not half won. As -soon as he got out of here the police would come.” - -“I will not tell on you if you only let me go,” said Larry. “I must get -the copy to the paper. They’ll think I’ve run away.” - -“They’ll have to think it then,” rejoined the leader. - -“I promise I will not tell,” repeated the boy. - -“We can’t trust you,” replied the short man, in hard tones. - -“We’ll have to keep him here for some time,” went on the well-dressed -man. “Then we’ll have to make another try for the real one.” - -Larry felt his heart beating fast at the thought that perhaps Mr. -Newton, all unconscious of danger, might be caught by the men. How he -longed for a chance to warn the reporter! - -“It’s going to be a ticklish job,” rejoined the tall man. - -“Can’t help it,” went on the leader. “We’ll do the best we can. This -place is far enough away. You two men will have to stay on guard. Give -him all he wants to eat, but if he tries to escape--well, you know what -to do.” - -“I guess so,” muttered the short man, with an ugly look at Larry. - -The three men left the room then, but Larry could hear them talking -in low tones in the hall. He stole to a window, hoping there might be -a chance to get away. He found it tightly shut. Besides the casement -was five stories from the ground, and to leap that distance would have -meant death. - -By pressing his face closely against the window pane Larry could see -that, about three windows over, on a line with the one he was looking -from, was a fire escape. If he could only reach that, he thought, he -could get away. But to reach it seemed out of the question. As he stood -looking the two men who had captured him re-entered the room. - -“What were you doing?” the tall one asked him. - -“Looking out of the window,” replied Larry boldly. - -“Be careful you don’t try to get out,” was the rejoinder. “The windows -are all protected by burglar alarm wires. If you open one it will give -the signal, and we’ll catch you before you can go ten feet, so be -careful.” - -Larry said nothing. There was a chair in the room, and he sat down on -it. The tall man made a careful examination of the window. As he had -said there were wires around the frame, but they seemed old and rusty -and Larry half believed they did not work. - -While one of the men remained in the room, the other went out. He came -back shortly with a pile of rags and blankets which he threw in the -middle of the floor. - -“There’s your bed,” he said to Larry. - -It was getting dusk, but Larry had no desire to go to sleep. He was too -worried and anxious over his position and too full of wonder at what -his mother and those on the _Leader_ might think about him. - -The two men left the room, locking the door after them, and Larry was -left alone. He was more frightened than he cared to admit. He half -wished the men would remain with him. - -He went to the window and looked out again. There was nothing to be -seen except a wide expanse of open lots, and there was not a house -within hailing distance. The glass in the windows seemed unusually -thick, and Larry thought that if he tried to break it he might be badly -cut. Besides, smashing the pane would give as loud an alarm as the -ringing of the electric bell. - -Then, tired with his work, and worn out with anxiety, Larry threw -himself down on the blankets, wondering what would happen on the morrow. - -Meanwhile, Mr. Newton was waiting in vain for Larry’s return. He had -quite a bunch of copy ready for the last edition, and, when he knew it -was nearly time to go to press, he went to a telephone and asked what -had become of the boy. - -“Why, he hasn’t been here since the third batch of stuff brought in,” -replied Mr. Emberg. “We thought you might have him up there. What’s the -trouble?” - -Then Mr. Newton told how he had started Larry for the office with an -important part of the story. - -“He’s been hurt in an accident,” said Mr. Newton, “that’s what’s -happened.” - -“Maybe be got tired of the work and left without notice,” suggested the -city editor over the wire. - -“Larry’s not that kind,” spoke Mr. Newton firmly. “You’ll see that -something has happened to him. But say, let someone take the rest of -this story over the wire, and I’ll soon be in.” - -With grave wonder as to what had befallen Larry, Mr. Newton dictated -the story of the strike and the bomb explosion. Then he took a car for -the office, as the strikers had temporarily dispersed. - -On the way down he thought of all sorts of conjectures. The most -reasonable supposition was that Larry had met with an accident--been -hit by a car or cab--knocked unconscious and hurried off to some -hospital. Reaching the office Mr. Newton inquired from the police -whether any such accident had happened. He was told there was none. - -“That’s queer,” he muttered. If he had only known where Larry was -he would have thought it more strange. “I must get out on this case -myself. But first I’ll go to Larry’s home.” - -Mrs. Dexter, who was beginning to be a little worried over the -non-appearance of her son, was more alarmed when Mr. Newton arrived. At -first she thought the reporter had come to bring bad news, but she was -soon told there had been no accident. - -“Maybe a bad man took him off,” said little James. “There’s lots of ’em -in New York.” - -“Well, I guess it isn’t as bad as that,” said Mr. Newton. “We’ll find -him, don’t worry. He’s probably lost his way, and maybe he doesn’t like -to ask, thinking he should be able to find it himself.” - -But, in his own mind, Mr. Newton was satisfied that Larry was not -so foolish. He began to be alarmed. This alarm grew when, the next -morning, no word had been received from the missing boy. Mrs. Dexter -was sure he had been killed, and she worried so that Mr. Newton, who -paid a second visit to the humble home, was afraid lest she should make -herself ill. - -“I’ll find Larry for you!” he said. “I’ve found lots of missing people, -and I’ll get Larry!” - -But, though he spoke confidently, Mr. Newton did not know where to -begin. He made a report of the missing lad to the police, and a -general alarm was sent out. But there are so many of these in the -course of the day, and so little attention is paid to a hunt for -missing persons, in New York, that Mr. Newton had not much hope in this -respect. - -The reporter went back to where Larry had parted from him, and made -careful inquiries. He found one or two who remembered having seen -several boys, more or less like Larry, about the time he disappeared. -But the bomb had exploded that same time, and the attention of everyone -had centered on that. - - - - -CHAPTER XIX - -LARRY’S MOVEMENTS - - -Larry passed a restless night. He slept but little and frequently he -got up to peer from the darkened window. Sometimes he heard voices in -the next room, and he knew the men were on guard. - -“I must keep up my courage,” thought the boy, “someone will surely come -for me. This is New York, and they have lots of police.” - -But Larry forgot that the very size of the city was a factor against -his being found very soon. - -Toward morning he fell into a doze and got a little sleep on the pile -of blankets. He was awakened by one of the men coming into the room. -The fellow had a plate of bread and butter and a cup of coffee. - -“We ain’t going to starve you,” he said, in not an unkind tone. “We -don’t want to hurt you any, but we’ve got to protect ourselves.” - -Larry did not answer. He took the food, of which he was beginning to -feel the need. The coffee warmed him and he felt better after drinking -it. - -“Remember now, no tricks,” the man warned as he prepared to leave. “The -windows are guarded.” - -Left to himself once more, Larry walked over to the window and examined -it. As the man had said there were several wires near the casement, and -they seemed to run into the next room. - -“I don’t believe it is an electric alarm at all,” thought the boy. -“What would they want of a burglar alarm on a window so far from the -ground? I’m going to try and see, anyhow.” - -At first he thought he would raise the window and see if the men rushed -in. - -“No, I have a better plan,” said Larry after a moment’s thought. - -He took from his pocket a bunch of string. He had not yet gotten over -that habit he formed while in the country, for a boy there doesn’t have -as many chances to get cord as does a city chap, so they generally -carry some with them. - -Larry fastened one end of the cord to the lowest wire. Then, unwinding -the string, Larry went to the farthest side of the room, pulling the -twine taut after him. - -“We’ll see if the alarm goes off when I break the wire,” he said. He -knew burglar alarms were constructed on the principle that if one wire -in the circuit was broken by the opening of a door or window, it would -cause a bell to ring. He was now going to break the wire and see what -happened. He thought that by doing it at long distance, by means of the -string, he could fool the men. If the bell did ring, and they rushed -into the room he would be far away from the window, and they would -wonder who had severed the copper conductor of electricity. - -Larry was a little nervous over the outcome of the experiment. He did -not just know what would happen, and he was somewhat afraid of what the -men might do. - -“Well, here goes,” he said in a whisper. - -He gave the cord a sudden jerk, his heart beating so fast and hard that -he could almost hear it. He strained on the cord. It began to stretch -and then, with a suddenness that startled him, it broke in the middle. - -“That wire’s pretty strong,” thought the boy. - -He repaired the break, went back to the far side of the room, and began -to pull steadily on the cord. This time it held and, a few seconds -later, with a sudden and loud snap the electric wire broke. - -For a moment Larry stood in breathless anxiety, waiting to see what -would happen. He half feared that, after all, the electric wire -might lead to an alarm. But, as the seconds passed, and no one came, -Larry realized that the men had been deceiving him. There was no -burglar attachment to the window and he could raise it and not be -discovered. - -“I’d better wait until dusk, however,” the boy thought. “They can’t see -me so well then.” - -Several times during the day the men came back to the room. The tall -one brought Larry his dinner, but had little to say. The boy had tied -the broken wire together, and removed the string, so that no evidences -remained of what he had done. - -He could tell, by the occasional conversation in the room next to him, -that the men were still there, and he knew it would not do to try to -escape while they were so close. His only hope was that they would go -out. And this happened shortly after one of them had brought in a plate -of sandwiches and a glass of milk for the prisoner. - -Larry heard them going down the stairs, and the lad could hardly wait -for them to get all the way down, so anxious was he to open the window. - -Raising the sash proved a harder job than he anticipated and it was -quite a feat for even his sturdy muscles. The window had evidently not -been opened in some time, and stuck. At last, however, Larry raised it. -It was a relief to breathe the fresh air, for the room had been close, -but it was better to feel that he had now a chance to get away. - -Looking cautiously forth from the window Larry could not see anyone. -The ground below was deserted. It was quite dusk now, and he resolved -to make his attempt. - -But now that he had the sash up and could look out, a new difficulty -presented itself. This was the fact that the fire escape platform was -three windows away from the one where Larry was. He did not see how -he was to reach it. There was just one way, he figured, but it was so -dangerous that he hesitated considerably about taking it. - -This was to edge along on the window sills until he had reached the -platform. Once there it would be easy to get to the ground. But the -trip across would be risky. - -Carefully Larry examined the ledges. They were broad and substantial, -and by some chance of architecture the sill of one window nearly met -that of the next. One would need to be very careful in edging along the -narrow ledge. To a fireman the feat would probably have presented few -difficulties, but to an untrained lad it was very great. - -“I’m going to try,” said Larry determinedly. “I must get away from -here, now that I have the chance.” - -He crawled out on the ledge and looked down. Through the half-darkness -he could make out the ground below and a feeling of dizziness caused -him to reel. - -“I mustn’t do that again,” he said to himself, for he remembered the -ill effects of looking down from great heights. “I must keep my eyes in -front of me.” - -Carefully and cautiously he stood erect on the narrow ledge. He found -that the window casings gave a fairly good hold for his fingers as he -edged his way along. Then he began to travel over the dangerous path. -He went a few inches at a time, feeling to make sure that each forward -step was firm before trusting his whole weight on his foot. - -Nearer and nearer he came to the fire escape platform. Now but five -feet separated him, and a few seconds later he was able to leap down on -it. - -He felt that he had now fully regained his liberty, and with a feeling -of thankfulness he began the descent of the iron ladders. Past the -second and third floor windows he made his way and was on the last -ladder when a voice from below cried: - -“Stay where you are! If you come down any further I’ll shoot!” - -Caught! The men, Larry thought, had returned just as he was about to -jump to the ground and run away. Three minutes more and he would have -been safely off. - -“I’ve caught you!” the voice went on. “You will go around trying to rob -places, will you! Didn’t think anyone would see you, I s’pose, but I -happened along, though I can’t see what you could steal in that old -factory.” - -By these words Larry knew he had been stopped by someone other than -the two men. He looked down and saw a short stout figure, in the fast -growing darkness, standing at the foot of the ladder. - -“I’m not a burglar!” ventured Larry mildly. - -“Bless my soul, it’s a boy!” the voice went on. “Well, well, what is -the world coming to when mere lads go out burglarizing!” - -“I’m not a burglar,” said Larry with some spirit. - -“Don’t tell stories, boy!” the man below said. - -“I’m not.” - -“But can’t I see that you are a burglar?” - -“I’m escaping from this building,” Larry went on. - -“Of course, I can see that easy enough,” the man said. “That’s what all -burglars want to do--escape. But I’ve caught you!” - -“Well, I’m coming down,” Larry continued. “If you think I’m a burglar -you can take me to a police station.” - -Indeed Larry would have asked nothing better just then than to be taken -before some friendly bluecoats. - -“All right,” the man continued. “But mind, don’t try any tricks on me! -I’m strong, and I’ll tackle you if you start to fight.” - -“I won’t fight,” spoke Larry mildly. - -Then he continued on down the ladder and finally reached the ground. He -confronted the man, who thought he had effected an important capture. -That individual was a mild appearing, short, stout old gentleman with -white hair and whiskers. He looked at Larry as well as he could in the -darkness. - -“Stand still until I strike a match,” he said. “I want to have a good -look at you.” - -“You don’t look like a very bad burglar,” he said after a close -examination. “But you never can tell nowadays about burglars. Some of -the best looking are the worst thieves. You come along with me.” - -“We’d better hurry,” said Larry, “or the two men might come back and -catch me again.” - -“What two men?” - -Thereupon the boy told his story briefly. - -“Why, you astonish me!” the old gentlemen exclaimed. “To think that -such things can go on in New York. I must write a letter to the papers -about it to-morrow. Come along, young man. We’ll find a policeman at -once and he’ll arrest the gang.” - -This was easier said than done, for the building where Larry had been -held captive was in a lonely and unfrequented suburb of the city. The -old gentleman, who seemed to have forgotten that Larry might possibly -be a burglar, explained that he had been taking a long walk, as was -his custom, when he espied the boy descending the ladder. The two -walked on for some time, more than a mile, in fact, before they saw, -standing under a solitary gas light, a policeman. - - - - -CHAPTER XX - -BACK AT WORK - - -“Here’s a case for you, officer!” exclaimed Mr. Randall, for the old -gentleman had said that was his name. - -“What sort of a case?” asked the policeman, continuing to munch some -peanuts, the shells of which were scattered about him. - -“A most extraordinary case!” - -“All cases are alike to me,” returned the blue coat calmly. “What is -it?” - -“This boy is a burglar I just captured, only he isn’t a burglar at all, -but he’s kidnapped and I saved him!” - -“What?” almost shouted the officer. “Are you crazy or am I?” - -“I guess you and all the policemen in New York must be, to have such -goings-on,” said Mr. Randall. “This boy is kidnapped, I tell you.” - -“Kidnapped, is it?” murmured the officer; “wait a minute, I have some -sort of a report about a kidnapped lad.” - -From his helmet the policeman drew out a paper. He began reading over -a description of a number of missing persons whom the police had been -asked, by their relatives, to help locate. Larry’s case having been -reported by Mr. Newton, had, in the course of the routine, been related -to every officer in the city, from their different station houses. - -“Here we are,” the policeman exclaimed. “Fox terrier, answers to the -name--no, that’s about a lost dog. Oh, this is it--Larry Dexter, -fifteen years old, rather tall, blue eyes, brown hair, etc.” - -“That’s me!” cried Larry. “How can I get home quickest?” - -“Come with me,” the officer said. - -He led the way through a number of streets, until they came to a lonely -trolley car that had reached the end of its route. Into this the -officer, Larry, and the old gentleman got, and soon they were under -full speed. - -“I’ll take you to the station house, so I can make a report of you -having been found,” said the officer, “and then you can go home. Well, -this is a good piece of work.” - -“You don’t think I’m a burglar now, do you?” asked Larry of Mr. Randall. - -“No, no,” said the old man hastily. “That was all a mistake.” - -“What’s that about burglars?” asked the officer. - -Whereupon Larry told how Mr. Randall had mistaken him for a robber as -he was escaping from the factory. - -“We’ll raid that place,” said the policeman, “but I guess they’ll skip -out as soon as they find you’re gone.” - -And this proved to be so. When, after Larry’s arrival at the station, a -note of his having been found was telephoned to police headquarters, a -squad of bluecoats started for the old factory. They found it deserted. - -“I suppose I can go home now?” said Larry, when he had complied with -all formalities. - -The sergeant behind the desk nodded and smiled at the lad. - -“I’ll take you,” spoke Mr. Randall. “I don’t want to see you kidnapped -again before your mother has a chance to look at you.” - -He insisted on going all the way with the boy, and into the Dexters’ -rooms. Such excitement as there was when Larry burst in on them! Mrs. -Dexter was in despair, and Mr. Newton, who was trying to comfort her -with the hope that her son would soon be found, was not succeeding very -well. - -Mrs. Dexter threw her arms about Larry, and hugged him and kissed him -as only a mother can. James and Mary capered about their brother and -Lucy fairly cried for joy. - -“Bless my soul! What a cold I have!” Mr. Randall said, blowing his nose -with unnecessary violence, and, under pretense of it, wiping the tears -from his eyes, which flowed at the sight of Mrs. Dexter’s joy. “Most -extraordinary weather for colds I ever saw, isn’t it?” appealing to Mr. -Newton. - -“It certainly is,” agreed the reporter. - -Larry had to tell his story all over again, and then Mr. Randall had to -relate his share in it. Then Larry had to be told all that had happened -since he was kidnapped, and the clock was striking midnight when they -all got through. - -“Do you think they’ll ever arrest those men?” asked Mr. Randall of Mr. -Newton. - -“I hardly think so,” was the answer. “They are probably far enough off -now. Besides they were only tools in the hand of someone else. The real -criminal is the well-dressed man Larry describes. We may be able to -catch him.” - -“Young man, you’re quite a hero,” the old gentleman exclaimed suddenly, -turning to Larry. “I wouldn’t have climbed across those window sills -for a pile of money.” - -“I wouldn’t have done it for money, either,” said Larry. “But I wanted -to get away. Besides, it was dark and I couldn’t see how far it was to -fall if I had looked down, which I didn’t dare do.” - -“I guess your picture’ll be in the papers to-morrow,” said Lucy to her -brother. - -“I think it would be better to keep all mention of the details of the -matter out of the press,” said Mr. Newton. “That’s a strange thing -for a reporter to say, but this case is different, and concerns the -_Leader_ more than any other papers. The unions are fighting us, and -we must fight them. We can do it best by keeping quiet in this case. -I think I can manage so that little of this will get into the other -papers. - -“The police station you went to is in a lonely part of the city, and -reporters are seldom sent there. The headquarters men will not bother -much with the story, and beyond the mere fact that Larry has been found -I think we will not go into details.” - -This plan was followed and the next day small items appeared in all the -papers, to the effect that the missing boy was at home. - -Larry went back to work that morning, and was warmly commended by Mr. -Emberg for the manner in which he had acted. - -“You not only get news, but you do what is even harder,” said the city -editor, smiling, “you make it.” - -Larry was a real hero in the eyes of the other copy boys, and he had -to tell the story over at least a dozen times before they would be -satisfied. The other reporters, also, were interested in hearing the -details from Mr. Newton. - -Larry was glad enough to be chasing copy again, for he remembered how, -when shut up alone in the room, he had feared he might never more have -a chance at it. - -The cab strike was over three days later, the strikers giving up. Mr. -Newton tried to learn who was back of them, hoping thus to discover the -man responsible for Larry’s kidnapping, but he could not, though he -got several clews that pointed to a certain person. However, proof was -lacking, and without this the reporter could not proceed and cause an -arrest. - -Several days passed. Larry was kept busy, for there was plenty of news, -and there was no lack of copy to run with, proofs to get, and other -errands to do around the office. But Larry was getting to like it more -and more, and was counting on the day coming when he could write a -story. - -He continued at night school. The first feeling of strangeness had worn -off, and the classes had settled down to study. The boys, after the -first night of fun and excitement, did not play any more tricks, and -Larry found them easy to get on with. - -He feared he would have more trouble with Peter Manton, but the latter -did not come near him. He saw his old enemy occasionally, but, as they -were in different classes they did not meet inside the school, and only -once or twice outside, and in the company of crowds of other boys. - -Larry was studying writing, arithmetic, reading, and spelling. He also -took history and geography, and these kept him busy enough. However, he -was bright and quick, and the teacher complimented him on the progress -he was making. He got permission to take his books to the office, and -at odd moments he conned his lessons. - -One night, as Larry was returning from the school, and going up the -stairs that led to his home, he saw, standing in the hallway, beneath -the gas jet that illuminated it, a short man, rather roughly dressed. -The stranger started on seeing the boy, and went quickly into a room -the door of which someone on the inside opened. - -“I wonder what that means,” Larry thought. “That apartment was vacant -yesterday. I wonder if it’s been rented. If it has I don’t like the -looks of the tenants. However, it’s on the floor below us, so I don’t -suppose it makes much difference.” - -Larry asked his mother, before going to bed that night, if she knew -anything about the people in the rooms below. - -“I did not know they had been rented,” said Mrs. Dexter. - -“Maybe they are sneak thieves,” said Larry. There had been a number -of cases of late of men sneaking into tenement houses, and, while the -people were temporarily away from their apartments, ransacking the -places. - -“I think I’ll speak to the janitor about it,” said Larry. “He’ll know -if they have rented the rooms or not.” - -The janitor lived in rooms in the basement, and Larry, after cautioning -his mother to keep her door locked, went downstairs. - -“Yes, I rented the rooms to three men, late this afternoon,” the -janitor told Larry. “They said they were bachelors and didn’t have much -furniture. I didn’t like the looks of the fellows, but I couldn’t say -anything, as they paid cash in advance.” - -“Did they move their stuff in?” asked Larry. - -“Not that I saw,” replied the janitor. “If they did they must have -brought it in hand satchels, for there have been no trucks bringing any -furniture.” - -“Some of them are in the rooms now,” Larry went on. - -“They are, eh!” spoke the janitor. “I don’t like that, but I s’pose -they’ve got a right to go in and out when they please, even if they -haven’t any furniture. Maybe they’re looking the rooms over. It looks -suspicious. I guess they’ll bear watching.” - -“I think so myself,” replied Larry, as he went back upstairs. - - - - -CHAPTER XXI - -LARRY ON THE WATCH - - -As he passed the door of the room which he had seen the stranger enter -Larry paused. He saw a light under the portal where there was a crack -between the sill and the edge of the door. He also heard voices in low -conversation. - -“I’d like to know what you’re up to,” thought the boy. “I’ll bet it’s -no good, from the looks of that one chap.” - -Larry noticed that the room occupied by the men was directly under his -own bedroom. - -“Maybe I can hear something from my room,” Larry thought. - -He returned to his mother’s apartments to tell her what the janitor -had said. He did not mention his own suspicions, for he did not want -to cause any unnecessary alarm. When the others had retired that night -Larry got out of bed, lay down on the floor of his room, and pressed -his ear to the boards. At first he could distinguish nothing. - -Then he heard a low, curious humming sound, like the roar of a railroad -train going through a tunnel, only much fainter. Now and then he could -hear blows struck as though the men were pounding a hammer on a block -of wood. Occasionally he could distinguish the sound of voices, though -the words were a mere jumble. - -“They’re not ordinary lodgers, at any rate,” the boy thought. - -He decided it was useless to listen any more, so he got into bed. He -wished he had a hole or opening from his room to the one below, that -he might see what was going on, and he fell into a doze with half a -determination to make an aperture. - -Larry’s duties at the office the next day kept him very busy. There -was a big fire uptown and several murders and suicides. In fact it was -a “great day for news,” as Mr. Emberg put it. Everyone was busy, from -the reporters to the managing editor. There was much copy to carry, -scores of extra proofs to bring from the composing room, and enough to -keep Larry running so often that by the time afternoon came he was very -tired. - -He did not feel very much like going to night school when evening came, -but he thought that if he did not he might fall behind in his studies, -and this he did not want to do. So he made up his mind he would go to -his class. - -Coming home, as Larry was passing through the almost deserted streets -in the neighborhood of the school, he heard loud shouts. He thought -someone might be chasing a thief, but a few seconds later he heard the -cry: - -“Fire! Fire! Fire!” - -Larry looked around. He saw a man running toward him. Back of him there -was a lurid glow in the sky and a cloud of black smoke was rising. - -“Pull the box!” the man cried to Larry, at the same time pointing to a -red one halfway down the block. - -“All right!” shouted Larry. “I will!” - -He saw that the man, who was quite fat, was hardly able to run any -further. The boy speeded off to the box. The key was in the door, and -the next instant Larry had yanked it open and pulled down the hook. -This was sufficient to set the mechanism inside the box at work, and -send the signal to fire headquarters. Thence it was repeated to every -engine and hook-and-ladder apparatus that was to answer, and, almost -before Larry could run back to where he had seen the blaze, he heard -the rattle of the steamers as they dashed up, the clanging of bells, -the tooting of whistles, the ringing of the horses’ iron-shod feet on -the stones, and the hoarse shouts of men. - -The blaze proved to be a bad one in a big warehouse. Quite a crowd -gathered and Larry stayed to watch the sights. He felt that his mother -would not worry if he did not come right home from school, as she had -often told him he could remain out until ten o’clock if he so desired. - -Soon the streets were filled with trucks and steamers and several -streams of water were spouting out on the blaze. With fascinated eyes -Larry watched the men at work. He saw a number of reporters for the -morning papers chasing here and there. - -Though the blaze was a bad one it had been taken in time, thanks to the -prompt pulling of the box, and so the firemen after considerable hard -work succeeded in getting control of the fire. Thinking he had seen -enough, though he would have liked to remain until the finish, Larry -started for home. - -Pretty soon he left the crowd behind him, and entered a quiet street. -In fact it was so quiet that Larry soon became aware that some person -was walking behind him. He could hear the echo of the footsteps after -his own, and, naturally, he turned to see who was following him. He -could just make out the dark figure of a man. - -At first the boy was a little nervous, fearing someone might be dogging -him for no good purpose. He had heard that men would commit robbery for -a small sum, and, though he only had a little change in his pockets, he -was a little afraid that the man had an object in keeping so closely -behind him. - -“I wish I’d meet a policeman,” thought Larry. - -But, like many other things, officers are not on hand when you want one -most. - -“I wish I could see who it is,” murmured the boy. - -He turned around again, and caught sight of the man just as the latter -came under a street lamp. Larry gave a start. - -“It’s the man who has the rooms under us!” said Larry. “He isn’t -following me; he’s just going home, the same as I am.” - -He felt a sense of relief at this and quickened his pace. He turned a -corner, near a dark building, where the shadows were gloomy, and, as he -did so, a man stepped from the doorway. - -“Is that you?” the stranger asked in a low tone. Larry did not know -what to reply. At that moment the man caught a glimpse of him, and -muttering a hasty “Beg pardon,” he slunk back into the darkness. Larry -hurried on, and, a few seconds later, looking back, he saw the man -again come from the shadows and join the fellow who lived below the -Dexter apartments, and who had been following our hero. - -“Two of ’em,” murmured the boy. “I think they must be up to something, -but I hope they’re not after me.” - -Almost unconsciously Larry quickened his pace, and a little later he -found himself at the apartment house where he lived. The men were -nowhere in sight, and Larry concluded they had either delayed on the -road or else that he had walked much faster than they had. - -No one was up as he let himself into the small flat with his latchkey. -His mother called to him from her bedroom to tell him there were some -crackers and milk in the cupboard, as Larry was often hungry when he -came in. - -“And look out for tacks in your room, Larry,” his mother went on. “I -took the carpet up in there to-day to clean it.” - -“All right, mother,” replied the boy. - -He ate a light lunch, and prepared for bed. He heard the persons living -on the floor below enter their apartment, and then began that curious -roaring sound again. - -“I’d like to know what that is,” Larry murmured to himself. “It’s queer -they should be carrying on some sort of business and only at night.” - -He went on into his bedroom, thinking over the problem. He was recalled -to earth very suddenly as, in his bare feet, he stepped on a loose tack. - -“Ouch!” the boy exclaimed in a whisper as he grabbed his wounded toe in -his hand. “I forgot about the carpet being up. Hello! What’s that?” - -His attention was attracted from the pain of his foot to a streak of -light on the floor of the room. It showed plainly, now that the carpet -was up and the room in darkness, for Larry did not need a lamp to -undress by. - -“That comes from the room below--the room where the strange men are,” -thought Larry. “There must be a hole in the plaster of the ceiling -right under where the hole in my floor is. That’s the reason the light -shines through. I wonder if I can see down.” - -For an instant Larry hesitated. He did not like the idea of spying -on people, but, in this case, he felt that he was justified. There -was something suspicious about the men. The janitor had said they had -brought no furniture, yet they were constantly in the place at night, -and often during the day. - -True, their business might be legitimate and honest, but the -indications were to the contrary, and Larry felt that he owed it to his -mother and himself to see that there was no harm in what the men were -doing. - -So the boy kneeled down on the bare floor, and put his eye to the -crack. At first he could make out nothing, as the space between the -boards in the floor of his room was so small that little of what -was going on in the room down below showed. Larry soon fixed this, -however, by softly cutting away a portion of the board. The hole in the -plaster of the ceiling on the room below was big enough to disclose -considerable. - -When he had the hole made larger, Larry again applied his eye. This -time what he saw startled him. - -There, just below him, and seeming quite close, by reason of a bright -light, were three men. One of them Larry recognized as the man he had -so frequently seen, and the same one who had followed him that evening. -All three were in their shirt sleeves and seemed to be working hard. -They hurried back and forth, carrying something in small pots over to a -long table. All the while came that curious roaring sound. - -Larry wiggled around until he had found a spot where he could get the -best view of all that was going on in the apartment below. Suddenly -there came the sound of a slight explosion. - -“Turn off the gas! It’s getting too hot!” Larry heard one of the men -exclaim. - -He kept a close watch. He saw one of the men dart forward. Then the -fellow came to a stop in front of a small gray object. He seemed to -pull open a little door and, all at once, the room was flooded with a -golden glow of a small gas furnace, the brick lining of which was at -white heat. - -The men pulled something from the interior of the furnace with a -long-handled affair like a rake. - -“Get ready to pour,” he heard one man say. - -“I guess they’re nothing but chemists,” thought Larry. “They probably -have a new invention, and want to get it in working order secretly to -keep it from other people. I guess there’s no mystery about this.” But -Larry did not know what the next development was to be. - - - - -CHAPTER XXII - -TRAPPING A THIEF - - -As he watched he heard the men moving quickly about in the room below. -Then a brighter glow suffused the apartment and Larry, looking through -the crack, saw that one man had what seemed to be an iron pot filled -with a gleaming mass. - -“Steady now!” said someone in a low tone. - -Larry was all impatience to observe what would come next. He strained -his eyes to see better. He drew himself along the floor. - -This last move was an unfortunate one. Larry’s foot scraped along on -the bare boards and his hand moved a chair slightly. In the silence it -sounded quite loud. - -“What’s that?” the boy heard one of the men ask. - -“I don’t know,” was the reply. - -“We’d better cut it out, for to-night,” said another. “I believe -someone is watching us.” - -“Nonsense! who can it be?” remarked a voice. - -“I don’t know, but I have a feeling that we are being observed. -Besides, there are some persons in this house who I firmly believe are -suspicious of us.” - -“You’re getting nervous, old man,” was the remark of one who, from the -peculiar voice, had not before spoken. “But perhaps we had better stop -work for to-night.” - -Then the light died out, and Larry could see no more. He could hear the -men moving about, but, in a few minutes it all became quiet, and there -were no further sounds from below. - -“I wonder what they can be up to, that they don’t want anyone to see; -that they are afraid of having known,” mused Larry. - -Puzzling over these things, Larry finally went to bed. He could not get -to sleep for some time, thinking over what he had seen. He wondered -if he ought to tell Mr. Newton or someone about the matter, and half -resolved to inform his reporter friend of what had taken place. Then -he recollected that he had no proof of anything wrong, and he realized -that to make charges without this, or even a good idea of what the men -were up to, would be foolish. - -“I’ll say nothing about it,” thought Larry, “but I’ll keep my eyes -open. I’m glad there’s a crack in my floor.” - -Then he fell asleep, to dream that he had been captured by the men on -the floor below, who were about to cast him into a fiery furnace for -spying on them. He thought they grasped him by his head and his heels -and were swinging him to cast him into the flames, when he woke up to -find his mother shaking him and saying: - -“Come, come, Larry. It’s almost breakfast time. You’ve overslept -yourself.” - -He got up with a jump and began dressing, glad enough that he was not -going to be burned to death. He ate his breakfast in a hurry and had to -run downstairs and halfway to the car, for fear of being behindhand. - -However, he reached the office just in time. He had to put in another -busy day. In the afternoon he was sent to a hall uptown, where a -meeting was in progress and where one of the _Leader_ reporters was on -an assignment. Larry had to bring back some copy, but as the meeting -was not very important only one trip was necessary. - -The car Larry rode on in coming back to the office was quite crowded, -and he stood on the rear platform. Near him were several rather -flashily dressed young men, who were laughing and joking in loud tones. -Occasionally they would playfully shove one another. - -At first Larry paid no attention to them, but finally he noticed that -the young men seemed to be directing their attentions to an elderly -gentleman who stood in the corner, smoking a cigar. He was well -dressed, and his vest was adorned with a heavy gold watch chain. - -Suddenly one of the young men gave his companion such a hard push as -to send him violently against the elderly gentleman. The latter’s face -flushed. - -“Can’t you chaps stand up straight?” he demanded. - -The one who had collided with him seemed to be unable to regain his -balance for a moment, and leaned heavily against the old man. Finally, -however, he straightened up. Then, turning to the elderly gentleman, -and making a bow as he removed his hat he said: - -“I humbly beg your pardon, sir. I was not aware that I had hurt you. It -was my companion’s fault. I am sure he’ll apologize also.” - -“Certainly, certainly,” exclaimed the other somewhat flippantly. “It -was all my fault, I do assure you, and I am very sorry.” - -“That’s all right,” said the elderly man, much mollified at the polite -manner of the young men. “I suppose it was an accident. The car -sometimes lurches considerably.” - -“No, no, it was not an accident, it was all my fault, and I insist -on apologizing,” went on the man who had first spoken. “I shall feel -offended if you do not let me apologize.” - -All this while Larry noticed that the young man’s hands seemed to -be busy in the neighborhood of the old gentleman’s watch chain. His -companion was crowding close to the latter, while a third man, who did -not seem to be in company of the other two, but who was apparently -engaged in reading a newspaper, held the sheet close under the elderly -man’s chin. - -“Then I’ll accept your apology,” the gentleman remarked, in good humor -again. - -“By Jove! This is my street!” the first young man exclaimed suddenly, -as he made a jump from the still moving car. - -“And mine also,” remarked his companion. - -Larry’s suspicions were aroused, particularly as the two men had seemed -to be handing something to the one who was so industriously reading -the paper. Still he did not like to say anything, though he was almost -certain that the men were pickpockets. He had heard Mr. Newton describe -how such criminals worked on street cars. - -Suddenly the elderly gentleman put his hand into his pocket and gave a -cry: - -“I’ve been robbed! Those fellows took my gold watch! I wondered what -they were up to. Stop the car! I must chase them! My watch is worth -five hundred dollars!” - -He would have leaped from the now swiftly moving vehicle and given -chase to the two thieves, who were now some distance away, had not -Larry, who was watching, put out his hand to detain the old man. - -“Wait until the car stops,” said Larry, at the same time pulling the -bell rope. “You’ll be hurt if you jump off now.” - -“But the thieves will get away!” cried the man. “Police! Help!” - -By this time the car was in an uproar, and the conductor and several -passengers came running out on the back platform. At the same time -the motorman, in response to the signal Larry had given, brought the -electric car to a rather sudden stop. - -“What’s the matter?” asked the conductor. - -“I’ve been robbed! I must chase the thieves!” panted the old gentleman. - -“I’ll help you!” exclaimed the man who had been reading the paper. “I -saw which way they went!” - -He started to leave the car, but Larry, who had a plan in mind, had no -idea of letting this man, whom he supposed to be a companion of the -pickpockets, escape so easily. So the boy slyly put out his foot, and, -as the fellow was about to leap from the platform he tripped, and came -down on his hands. - -“Who did that?” he asked. - -“I did,” replied Larry. - -“What for? I’d give you a good thrashing only I want to catch those -thieves that took this old man’s watch!” - -By this time quite a crowd had gathered, and the man, as well as Larry -and the old gentleman, were hemmed in. At the same time a policeman -sauntered up to see what the trouble was, and Larry felt that he could -now put his plan into execution. - -“I guess you won’t have to chase the thieves very far,” the boy said to -the chap who had been reading the paper. - -“Well, I like your impudence! What do you mean?” demanded the fellow. - -“I think you know something about this robbery,” spoke Larry boldly. - -“I’ll have you arrested for that!” exclaimed the fellow. “Here, -officer, just hold this boy until to-morrow and I’ll make a charge -against him. I shouldn’t be surprised if he took the watch himself. -I’ll be back in a little while.” - -“Just wait a minute,” put in the man who had been robbed. “I don’t -believe this boy took my watch. You may know something of it. If you do -not you’ll not object to being searched.” - -“Search me? Well, I guess not!” the man cried. “I’m going to chase -after those thieves.” - -“Not so fast, my gay bird,” said the officer, coming up through the -crowd. “Let’s see what you have in your pocket, anyhow. I’ve seen you -before. You hang out over on the Bowery.” - -With a quick motion the policeman put his hand in the fellow’s outside -coat pocket. - -“I thought so!” exclaimed the officer. - -He brought to light a gold watch and chain. - -“That’s mine!” cried the old gentleman. “You had it all the while, you -thief!” - -The pickpocket, seeing he was caught, said nothing. He made a sudden -effort to dart through the crowd and get away, but the officer was too -quick for him. - -“No, you don’t!” exclaimed the bluecoat. He blew his whistle and -several other policemen came running up. They soon handcuffed the -thief, and after telling Larry and the old gentleman to follow to the -police station led their prisoner away. - -“Will you come and be a witness?” asked the man who had been robbed, of -Larry. - -“Yes, sir, but first I have to take this copy to the _Leader_ office.” - -“All right, my boy, run along. You have done me a good service to-day, -and I’ll not forget it. I prize that watch very highly. Here is my -card,” and he handed Larry a bit of pasteboard, which the boy was too -confused to look at. “Come to the police station as soon as you can,” -said the old man as he prepared to follow the officers, who were being -trailed by a big crowd of curious persons. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIII - -BAD MONEY - - -Larry was in such a hurry to get to the office with the copy, for -he had been delayed some time, that he did not look at the card the -elderly gentleman had given him until some time later, when he had -explained the news to Mr. Emberg. The city editor sent a reporter to -get the story from the police station. - -“Who was the man whose watch they took?” asked Mr. Emberg. - -“I forgot to look,” replied Larry, pulling out the card and reading it. -“He--was Dr. James Carrolton,” he added. - -“What?” cried Mr. Emberg. - -Larry repeated his remark. - -“Say, this is a big story!” exclaimed the city editor. “We must have a -display on this. Dr. Carrolton robbed the second day he is in New York.” - -He hurried to the telephone, to call up the police station where he -had sent the reporter, and, getting him on the wire, held a hurried -conversation with him. - -“You’re always stumbling on big stories,” said the city editor, coming -back to where Larry stood, wondering what it was all about. - -“How do you mean?” - -“Don’t you know who Dr. Carrolton is?” - -Then a light dawned on Larry. - -“Why--why,” the boy began, “he’s the great English surgeon on hip and -spine diseases that we’ve had so many stories about, and he came over -here to cure a millionaire’s daughter.” - -“Of course,” said Mr. Emberg with a laugh. “I think it will be a good -thing for you, also.” - -“How?” - -“Well, Dr. Carrolton is not only noted for his skill as a surgeon, but -he is one of the most liberal men in the world. He appreciates whatever -is done for him. The way you saved his watch from being stolen----” - -“I didn’t do that for pay!” exclaimed Larry. - -“Of course not,” resumed the city editor. “He knows you didn’t. But -that need not stop him from rewarding you. You’re a lucky boy. He may -give you a hundred dollars.” - -“I don’t want it,” spoke Larry suddenly. - -“What’s that! Let me tell you, a hundred dollars is not to be sneezed -at.” - -“I’d rather he’d cure my sister,” said the boy. - -“Your sister?” - -“Yes, she has a spine disease, just like some of those persons Dr. -Carrolton has cured.” - -“Perhaps he will cure her,” said Mr. Emberg. “Only if he does it will -be worth several thousand dollars, for he charges big fees.” - -“If I had the money no fee would be too big if my sister could be -cured,” said Larry, blinking to keep back the tears. - -“If you get a chance, speak to him about it,” said Mr. Emberg. “Great -men are apt to overlook little things like a fee.” - -“Shall I go to the police station now?” asked Larry, as he remembered -that the physician had told him to be present. - -“Perhaps you had better,” said the city editor. “Don’t be afraid to -speak up, and tell what you know about the case.” - -But there was no need of Larry’s testimony. The police magistrate, -after hearing the story of the officer and the physician, decided to -hold the prisoner for the grand jury. Larry, who was on hand, was told -to be at the courthouse when he was sent for. So he did not have to -give any testimony. - -As he was passing out of the courtroom with a number of other persons, -Larry was spied by Dr. Carrolton. - -“Hi, boy!” the physician exclaimed. “Don’t forget to come and see me. -That was a valuable watch you saved for me!” - -“I’ll come,” promised Larry, anxious to escape from the gathering -crowd. - -Larry watched the famous physician enter a big automobile and dart up -the street in the care of several friends who had come to court, as -soon as they heard the news of his plight. Then the boy left the police -station and made his way home, as there was no further need of his -services at the newspaper office that afternoon. - -“I wonder if I could get him to doctor Lucy,” thought Larry. “If I -could, and she should be cured, I’d be the happiest boy in New York. If -I get a chance I’ll surely speak to Dr. Carrolton about it.” - -When Larry got home that evening he found his mother in much distress. -She had just been out to the store to make a few purchases, and, -returning, still had her hat on. - -“What’s the matter?” asked Larry, as he saw by his mother’s face that -something was wrong. - -“The groceryman said I had tried to pass bad money on him!” exclaimed -Mrs. Dexter. - -“What kind?” asked Larry. - -“A half-dollar.” - -“Tell me about it, mother.” - -“I had considerable change in my pocketbook,” went on Mrs. Dexter. “I -went out to get a small steak for supper and, when I came to pay the -man where we deal, who sells meat as well as groceries, I thought I had -a bill to give him. Instead the largest piece of money I could find was -a half-dollar. - -“I gave it to the clerk and he took it to the desk. In a little while -he came back and said the money was not good. I insisted that it was, -but he said he would call in a policeman to prove it. Then, rather than -have a scene, I said I would pay some other money, and I did so.” - -“Where is the money he said was bad?” asked Larry. - -“Here,” said his mother, taking a coin from her pocketbook and giving -it to Larry. The boy looked at the half-dollar. It seemed bright and -shiny, and had a good ring to it. - -“That seems good,” said Larry. “Maybe the man in the store was too -particular.” - -“He asked the advice of several other men before he said the money was -no good,” said Mrs. Dexter. “So I’m afraid he is right.” - -“It’s too bad,” said Larry. “We work hard enough for our money and it -ought to be good when we get it.” - -“The man said there had been a number of counterfeit pieces in -circulation of late,” went on Mrs. Dexter. “That’s why they have to be -so careful.” - -“But this don’t look like a counterfeit,” spoke Larry. “I’ve seen -several of that kind which the reporters have, and all of them are -worse than this.” - -“Well, the man wouldn’t take it, so I guess it’s no good,” said the -woman. - -“Where did you get it?” asked Larry. “Perhaps that might give us a -clew.” - -“I got it in a peculiar way,” replied Larry’s mother. “Yesterday one -of the men on the floor below us asked me for some change. He said he -had a large bill and wanted very much to get it broken. I had no spare -change and I told him so. - -“Then the man asked me to give him what I had, and he gave me a -ten-dollar bill as security. He asked me to go out and get that -changed, which I did. When I came back he said he had got the change in -the meanwhile from someone else in the house. So there was no necessity -for me giving him any. He paid me what money was due me, and, among the -other pieces, was this half-dollar.” - -“I’ll soon see if it’s good,” said Larry, taking the coin. “I’ll go -around with it to some big place, and they’ll soon let me know whether -it is counterfeit or not.” - -Larry took the money and went to a near-by pawnshop, the proprietor of -which he had done a favor for some time since. The man was a German -Hebrew, and was well acquainted with gold and silver. - -“Is that good?” asked Larry, laying the coin down on the counter. - -“For why you vant to know?” asked the pawnbroker with a smile. He was -always careful what he said and nearly always asked a question before -he answered one. - -“Someone gave it to my mother, and the storekeeper said it was a bad -piece,” replied Larry anxiously. - -“Vich storekeeper?” - -“Mr. Smith on the corner.” - -“And he said it vas bad?” - -“That’s what he did,” replied Larry. “But I’m in a hurry, Mr. Moses. -Can you tell me what I want to know?” - -“For sure I can, mein frient. I only vant to know vat I’m talking -about.” - -He took the half-dollar, bit it between his teeth, and rang it on the -counter. Then he took from a shelf a small bottle. - -“I vill give it the acid test,” he said. - -He dropped a small quantity of liquid on the coin. The metal seemed to -boil where the acid touched it. - -“Well?” asked Larry, rather anxiously. - -“I vouldn’t give you two cents on dis half-dollar,” said the pawnbroker. - -“Then it’s bad?” - -“Like a rotten egg!” exclaimed Mr. Moses. “Don’t let your mudder take -any more of ’em, mein frient.” - -“All right,” replied Larry. “I’ll tell her to be more careful in the -future. I suppose we’ll have to lose this money.” - -“Vere did you got it?” asked Mr. Moses with a cunning look. - -“A man--” began Larry, and then he hesitated. He did not know what -might come from the affair, and he thought it might be better to keep -quiet about it for a while. - -“Yes--yes!” exclaimed Mr. Moses eagerly. - -“A man gave it to her,” replied Larry, and then he went out of the -pawnshop quickly to prevent the proprietor asking any more questions. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIV - -A QUEER CAPTURE - - -Many thoughts occupied Larry’s mind. For some time he had been -suspicious of the men on the floor below him. That they were up to no -good seemed evident, yet he felt that it was wrong to say, without more -proof, that they were up to something bad. They were seldom seen in the -daytime, and, though they moved about rather lively at night, Larry -could see nothing through the crack that he could say was criminal, or -that would bring the men under the law. - -Now, however, that the pawnbroker had told him the money one of the men -had given Mrs. Dexter was bad, Larry began to have new suspicions. - -They were hardly definite enough to warrant his speaking to anyone -concerning them, so he resolved to keep a closer watch. - -“Maybe they have friends who make counterfeit money,” thought Larry, -“and they are trying to dispose of it for them. Maybe--” then he -stopped in his train of thought suddenly. - -“I’ll bet they’re the counterfeiters themselves!” he exclaimed. -“That’s what that strange light meant. That’s what they were doing the -night I watched them. They melt the metal up and pour it into moulds. -Then they try to pass it off for good coins.” - -Larry was so excited by his idea that he walked faster than usual, and, -the first thing he knew, he was nearly two blocks past his house. He -retraced his steps, and found his mother awaiting his return. - -“Well?” asked Mrs. Dexter, “is the money bad?” - -“I’m afraid so,” replied Larry. - -“Then we’ll have to lose it,” said Mrs. Dexter. “I don’t want to ask -the man to take it back. He might say I got it somewhere else.” - -“That’s right, mother,” spoke Larry. “Say nothing about it to the man. -If he offers you any more money, or asks for change, don’t take any or -give any.” - -“Why, Larry? What’s the matter?” - -“I can’t say yet,” replied the boy. “I’ve had my suspicions for some -time, but I want to be sure. I’ll speak to Mr. Newton about it.” - -That night Larry kept a close watch, through the crack in the floor, -on the men below, but their place remained in darkness. None of them -seemed to be at home, and Larry was wishing there was some way of -getting into their apartments so he could see what they were making. - -“Never mind, my chance may come yet,” the boy thought, as he went to -bed, to dream of being captured by a band of counterfeiters who were -about to melt him into a big half-dollar to get rid of him, when he -awoke with a start. - -The sun was shining in his eyes through his window and it was time to -get up and go to work. He found plenty of things to do at the office -that day, and so had no chance to speak to Mr. Newton about the money -matter. He was somewhat surprised to read an item in the paper bearing -on the very subject that was uppermost in his mind. - -There was an account of an investigation that the United States -authorities had started, to discover the source whence a number of bad -coins seemed to be circulating about New York. - -A number of detectives had been detailed on the work of running the -counterfeiters to earth, the article said, and, in the meanwhile, the -public was cautioned to be careful what money was accepted in change. -Bad half-dollars were especially numerous, it was stated. - -Larry felt sure that the men, in the room below his, were the -counterfeiters. He was confirmed in this belief that same day when he -had gone on an errand for Mr. Emberg to police headquarters. - -As he was standing in the main room, waiting for Mr. Newton, to whom -he had been sent with a note, he saw two detectives, whom he knew by -sight, talking earnestly together in a corner. - -Larry did not want to listen to a private conversation, but he could -not help overhearing what the men were saying. He caught the words, -“counterfeiters,” “bad half-dollars,” and then the men mentioned the -number of the house and the street where Larry lived. - -“They’re after the men below our apartment!” thought Larry. “Those men -are counterfeiters, just as I suspected. This will make a fine story -for the paper. I hope it will be a beat!” - -He saw that the detectives were two who were in the habit of figuring -rather prominently in the police reports of the papers. Larry -recollected that Mr. Newton had once said that both the officers were -not as good as some others who did not get half the publicity they -deserved. - -“And they’re the same ones that treated Mr. Newton so mean on that -robbery story,” reflected Larry, referring to the officers in -conversation. “They wouldn’t give him the story. I wish they were not -going to capture the counterfeiters. It’s too good a job for them. They -don’t deserve it.” - -He hardly knew how to act. He knew he must not interfere with the -course of the law, yet he would have been glad to see some other -detectives, who were more friendly to the newspaper men than the two -he heard conversing were, make the capture. Larry realized that to -catch the counterfeiters would mean quite a feather in the caps of the -officers. - -That night Larry kept a closer watch than usual. He could not see -enough to enable him to tell exactly what the men were doing, but he -noticed the golden glow flood the apartment, and he knew the men were -melting something, for he could hear them talking about whether or not -it was hot enough. - -The number of counterfeit coins continued to increase, and the -government inspectors redoubled their efforts to land the gang they -were convinced was working in New York. - -One afternoon, as he was coming from the office, Larry was met in the -hall, just outside the apartment of the men under suspicion, by one of -them. The man regarded Larry for a few seconds and then said: - -“Would you mind doing me a favor?” - -“What is it?” asked Larry, thinking the man might want some more money -changed. In such an event the lad was prepared to refuse. He did not -propose to have bad coins passed on him. - -“Will you come in here and give me your opinion?” asked the man, -holding the door open. - -For a few seconds Larry hesitated. He thought the man might be one of -the counterfeiters who had discovered he was being watched and who had -determined to capture the spy. In such an event Larry felt he would be -safer on the outside. - -Yet he had a boy’s curiosity to see what was in the room about which -the men were so secretive. If he could get a look he felt it might help -him to know what to do. - -The man noticed Larry’s hesitation. - -“You needn’t be afraid,” the stranger remarked. “I know some of the -neighbors regard us a little suspiciously, but our work is such that it -has to be done where no one can see us.” - -“What do you want me to do?” asked Larry. - -“Merely give us your opinion,” spoke the man. “We have an article we -want you to look at and tell us if you think it is good, and will be -generally acceptable.” - -Larry was just going to remark that he was not a very good judge of -counterfeit money, when he happened to think that would not be a wise -remark to make. He saw that the man held the door wide open. There did -not seem to be any other persons in the apartment. Larry resolved to -risk going in. He thought if the men attempted to harm him he could -call loudly enough to bring help. - -“We want to get the idea of a real American boy on the quality of the -work we have done,” the man went on. “Will you please come in?” - -Then Larry resolved to enter. He nerved himself for an ordeal as he -crossed the threshold. - -“This way,” remarked the man, preceding him, and, going into an inner -room, Larry saw before him a pile of bright shining objects. - -He gave a sudden start. The man noticed it and said quickly: - -“Now don’t say a word about it. We don’t want anyone to know we are -doing this. What do you think of them?” - -Larry was much surprised at what he saw. He talked for some time with -the man, and, when he emerged from the apartment, the boy’s face bore a -queer look. - -“I must tell Mr. Newton about this,” he said. “He will be glad to know -of it, and then it will be a chance to do those detectives a turn.” - -Mr. Newton was much excited over what Larry told him next day. - -“Are you sure Detectives Jones and Douglass are on the case?” he asked. - -Larry told what he had overheard at police headquarters. - -“Then I guess they are,” remarked the reporter. “Well, this will be -quite a surprise for them. It will kill two birds with one stone.” - -“What do you mean?” asked Larry. - -“We’ll get a story for the paper out of it and fool the officers -besides.” - -“It will be a queer story,” said Larry, and Mr. Newton nodded. - -For several days after that, the men in the rooms below the Dexter -apartment were busily engaged. Larry no longer kept watch of them. -Instead he kept a careful lookout on persons who loitered about in the -street near the house. One evening at dusk he saw two rather poorly -dressed men who walked up and down several times, and then ventured -into the hallway of the house. - -“I guess they are the detectives in disguise,” thought Larry. “It is -almost time to spring the trap.” - -In accordance with an arrangement he had made he telephoned to Mr. -Newton. - -“So you think it’s time, eh?” asked the reporter. “I’ll come right -over.” - -Mr. Newton joined Larry half an hour later, and the pair went to the -boy’s room, above where the strange men had been working for some time. - -“Are they downstairs?” whispered Mr. Newton. - -“Yes,” said Larry, “and the detectives are hidden in a room across the -hall. I guess they’ll break in any minute now. We can hear them through -the crack. I have made it bigger so we can see well.” - -Larry and the reporter knelt down and applied their eyes to the hole in -the floor. They could observe the men moving about, and could see the -golden glow that filled the apartment. - -Suddenly, as they watched, they heard the sound of crashing wood. - -“They are breaking in the door!” exclaimed Larry. “The detectives are -after them!” - - - - -CHAPTER XXV - -A BIG ROBBERY - - -“Now for some fun!” exclaimed Mr. Newton. “Those detectives will get -the biggest surprise of their lives.” - -“Yes, and it will give you a chance to get back at them for the way -they treated you,” remarked Larry. - -“There goes the door!” cried the reporter, as a louder crash betokened -that the portal had given way. “This will bring everyone in the house -out to see what is going on.” - -Following the crash there came a series of shrill cries from the -apartment below. - -“Come on down!” called Mr. Newton to Larry. “We can see better. Besides -I want Jones and Douglass to notice that I’m on the job when they get -fooled.” - -Larry and the reporter raced downstairs. They saw a number of other -tenants in the building making their way toward the scene of the -disturbance, and the stairway was well crowded. - -“Here we go!” cried Mr. Newton as he passed through the burst-in door. -“Come on, Larry!” - -A strange sight met the gaze of the reporter. On the floor were two of -the men who had been in the habit of working in the rooms. On top of -each of them sat a detective; Jones on one and Douglass on the other. -The men were trying to get up, but the detectives prevented them by -holding their heads close to the floor. - -In the corner was the third man, and in front of him was a third -detective, who had a short club in his hand. Every now and again the -detective would jab the man in the stomach with the billy, causing the -man to double up like a jumping-jack. - -“Keep still!” cried the detective. - -“How can I when you keep tickling me with that club!” exclaimed the man. - -“I don’t care how you do it, only keep still!” the officer repeated, -giving the man another jab. “We’ll show you counterfeiters how to -behave!” - -“Counterfeiters?” the man repeated, apparently in great astonishment. - -“Yes, counterfeiters. You can’t fool us any longer. We’ve got you dead -to rights. We’ll seize your whole plant, and confiscate all the bad -half-dollars you’ve been making. We’ve been watching you for some time. -We know how you melt the metal up and then pour it into moulds!” - -“Counterfeiters! You are crazy!” cried the man. “That boy there,” -pointing to Larry, whom he just then saw, “he knows better than that. -He knows what we make!” - -“I guess you’ve made a mistake this time,” remarked Mr. Newton, coming -forward. “How are you, Jones, and you too, Douglass?” - -“Um!” grunted the detectives, still sitting on their prisoners. “I -guess we know a counterfeiting plant when we see one. You can’t fool -us!” - -“Lift up that sheet,” said the man in the corner, nodding to Larry to -raise a cloth that covered a long table. The boy did so. - -“That’s what we’ve been making, out of melted lead!” the man in -the corner went on, dodging another jab from the detective’s club. -“They’re only toy soldiers for the holiday trade. We make them of old -lead which we melt up, and then we color them. We didn’t want the -other manufacturers to know about it. It’s getting near Christmas -and we’re making up an extra lot to sell on the streets. We’re not -counterfeiters. You’ve made a mistake. I asked Larry to come in the -rooms the other day to get his opinion on whether or not they were -good-looking soldiers, and he said they were fine ones; didn’t you, -Larry?” asked the man. - -Larry nodded in assent. The detectives looked rather foolish. Someone -in the crowd, that had gathered outside the door, began to laugh. Soon -there were several titters. - -“Would you mind letting me up now?” asked the man on whom Detective -Jones was sitting. - -“Me too,” said the other prostrate one. - -“Get up!” growled the detectives, much disgusted at the outcome of the -affair. - -They had expected to discover a counterfeiting plant and had only -succeeded in unearthing an improvised toy shop. Larry’s suspicions had -been dispelled as soon as he entered the place, a few days previous, -but he and Mr. Newton had decided to say nothing of this, as they -wished to play a trick on the officers who had gone out of their way -once to treat the reporter in rather a shabby fashion. - -“This will make a good story,” remarked Mr. Newton so the detectives -would hear. - -“You’re not going to print this, are you?” asked the officers, looking -more foolish than ever. - -“Of course,” replied the reporter. “It isn’t often that you fellows -make mistakes, but when you do it’s only fair to tell of them. I’ll -make a good story out of it.” - -“We’ll get even with you if you do,” growled Jones. “We’ll fix you for -this.” - -“I’m only paying you for what you did to me some time ago,” said Mr. -Newton, as the detectives released their prisoners. The soldier-makers -brushed the dirt from their clothes as the detectives left. - -“I couldn’t imagine what was up,” said one of the toy-men. “The -first I knew those detectives burst the door in. I thought perhaps -they were thieves, but when they threw us down and sat on us, I knew -there must be something strange the matter. The idea to take us for -counterfeiters!” - -“I thought you were myself,” said Larry, “especially when you gave my -mother that bad fifty-cent piece.” - -“That’s so, I nearly forgot about that,” one of the men exclaimed. -“That was an old pocket-piece of mine. I gave it to her by mistake. I -will give her a good one for it right away.” - -“Here it is,” Larry remarked, producing the bad coin, and receiving a -good one. - -“Now that the excitement is over I guess we can go on making lead -soldiers,” remarked the head workman, as he propped up the broken door -and started the furnace. - -“Yes, and we must get to work on the story,” the reporter said. - -“I wonder if the other papers will have it in the morning,” came from -Larry. - -“Not much danger,” replied Mr. Newton. “Jones and Douglass will keep -very quiet about it, since they were fooled.” - -None of the morning sheets had an account of the affair, and that -afternoon the _Leader_ came out with a big display story, telling how -the detectives, hoping for much credit from their performance, had -planned to raid a counterfeiters’ den. Mr. Newton set forth in lively -sentences how the officers had kept watch, and had, with a great show -of authority, burst into the place, only to find that it was merely a -temporary toy shop. - -The story made a hit, and Mr. Emberg was warm in his praise of Mr. -Newton and Larry as well. He said they had conducted the case well. - -“You are doing good work, Larry,” said the city editor. “Keep it up!” - -Whereat Larry blushed like a girl, though he felt ashamed of it. -However, he need not have been, for not a reporter on the paper, from -the oldest down, but who would have liked to have had such a beat to -his credit. - -Larry went home to supper, and then prepared to attend night school. -His mind was in such a whirl over the events of the day that he did -what seldom happened to him; he missed in his lessons. The teacher, who -had taken quite a notion to Larry, was much surprised, but Larry did -not think it wise to tell what made him so careless. He promised to do -better the next night. - -When Larry reached the _Leader_ office a few mornings later he found -considerable confusion evident. A number of reporters were talking -in one corner, and Mr. Newton was conversing with someone over the -telephone in the enclosed booth. - -“What’s the matter?” asked Larry of Bud. - -“Big robbery in some millionaire’s house,” replied Bud. “They just -discovered it. None of the morning papers have it. Lot of gold, -silver, and diamonds taken.” - -“That’ll be a good story,” commented Larry. - -A few minutes later Mr. Emberg came in. In a little while Mr. Newton -had acquainted the city editor with the robbery, a “tip” concerning -which had been received from police headquarters a short time before. - -“It’s Mr. Reynolds’s house,” said Mr. Newton. “The family slept late. -Police think chloroform was used. They found the place ransacked, a -small safe forced, and about twenty-five thousand dollars’ worth of -stuff taken, including the famous Reynolds diamonds.” - -“You’d better jump out on the story,” said the city editor to Mr. -Newton. “Do you want any help?” - -“I don’t know. I guess I can handle it alone. But I might take Larry -along,” he added in a lower tone. “There may be something he can do.” - -“All right,” responded Mr. Emberg. “Get the story in early, and -interview the people. Might get a picture of Mrs. Reynolds, and I’ll -send a photographer to take a snap of the house. Hurry up, now.” - -“Come along, Larry,” said Mr. Newton. “We’ll see if we can solve this -mystery and recover the diamonds.” - -The two started off, followed by the rather envious eyes of some of -the other reporters. It was considered an honor to be assigned to cover -a big story, though professional etiquette forbade any reporter from -saying anything. - -At the Reynolds house they found a number of policemen on guard, to -keep away the curious persons that had gathered as soon as the robbery -became known in the neighborhood. One of the bluecoats attempted to bar -the progress of Larry and Mr. Newton. - -“From the _Leader_,” announced the reporter, as he nodded to another -policeman whom he knew. - -“It’s all right, Jim,” said the latter to the officer who had stopped -Mr. Newton, whereat the reporter and Larry were allowed to enter the -house. Inside they found a number of “plain clothes men,” as detectives -are sometimes called, from the fact that they wear no uniform. - -“Hello, Patsy!” called Mr. Newton familiarly to a short, stout, -bald-headed detective, “what sort of a job have you been letting ’em -pull off on you now.” - -“Looks like a second-story one,” replied the detective. - -“No more a second-story one than you are,” retorted another detective -who stood near, making some notes in a book. “It’s an inside job.” - -“Anyhow, the stuff’s gone I s’pose,” remarked Mr. Newton with a smile. - -“Sure thing,” replied the fat man. - -“What’s a second-story job?” asked Larry of his friend. - -“The police call it that when the thief climbs up on the porch, or, in -some way, enters the second-story windows.” - -“And what’s an inside one?” - -“That’s where some of the servants in the house either take the -valuables or help the thieves by letting them in, or by leaving a -window conveniently open. But come on, we’ll take a look for ourselves. -It’s all right, Patsy, I s’pose,” went on Mr. Newton, speaking to the -short detective. - -“Sure, go ahead, investigate as much as you like,” was the answer. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVI - -THE MEN IN THE LOT - - -“Come ahead, Larry,” said Mr. Newton. - -“Will the people in the house let us?” asked the boy, to whom the idea -of anyone going through a private residence in this free and easy -fashion seemed strange. - -“I guess they won’t mind,” replied the reporter. “You see we newspaper -men have to go ahead and do things. If we waited every time for someone -to give us permission we’d never get any stories.” - -“But maybe they’ll stop us,” objected Larry. - -“You leave that to me,” spoke Mr. Newton. “I’ll make it all right if -anyone objects.” - -With Larry following, he started upstairs, where, as one of the -detectives had informed him, the thieves had made an entrance. As they -were going up they were met by a well-dressed man. - -“Here! Where are you going?” he asked. - -“I’m a reporter from the _Leader_,” said Mr. Newton. “I want to get a -correct account of this robbery.” - -“We don’t want any reporters in here,” said the man sharply. “We don’t -want this thing in the papers at all. You have no right in here. I -order you out!” - -Larry was beginning to get frightened. He had yet to see how a seasoned -reporter meets a rebuff of this kind. - -“I’m very sorry,” began Mr. Newton in a smooth tone. “I’m sure the -_Leader_ doesn’t want to annoy anyone. We are just as sorry as you are -about this robbery, but we are only doing you a service.” - -“How doing us a service?” replied the man. “If you call blazing a lot -of untruths about the matter all over, why I suppose it is.” - -“Pardon me,” interposed Mr. Newton, “but the _Leader_ is not a yellow -journal. It does not publish fakes. It always tries to get at the -truth. Sometimes, as in a case of this sort, where we are refused -information, we have to get it from the next best source. Sometimes, I -admit, we may be given the wrong information. - -“But I’ll tell you how we can help you. You want to recover the -jewelry, of course?” - -“Seeing that we are going to offer a reward for it you might guess so,” -replied the man sarcastically. - -“So much the better,” resumed Mr. Newton. “Now if we publish an account -of the robbery in the paper, and give a description of the jewelry, it -will aid you in recovering it.” - -“I don’t see how.” - -“Because the _Leader_ is read by a large number of persons. They will -see an account of this; they will look over the list of jewelry stolen. -Among others who will see it are pawnbrokers, to whom the thieves, it -is most likely, will offer the stuff for sale.” - -“Well?” - -“No one who reads an account of the crime and a description of the -jewelry will be willing to lend any money on it. They will be on the -lookout, and as soon as any of the stuff is offered them they will -notify the police. Then the officers will come, arrest the men, and -your jewelry will be recovered.” - -“Of course, I didn’t think of that,” said the man. “In that case -perhaps we might give you an account of the affair.” - -“I think it would be best to,” remarked Mr. Newton, with a wink at -Larry. - -“You may follow me,” said the man who had at first objected to the -reporter getting any information. “I’ll show you where the thieves got -in, and then I’ll give you a list of the things that are missing.” - -Larry and Mr. Newton followed the man’s lead. He took them through a -long hall and to the rear of the house. He stopped at a small window -over a porch and said: - -“There’s where they got in. At least so the police think. There are -marks on the window sill.” - -“So there are,” observed Mr. Newton. - -“The thieves evidently climbed up the porch pillars,” said the man. - -“I hardly think so,” returned Mr. Newton. - -“But the police say so,” spoke the man. - -“They’re not always right,” responded the reporter. “I would say they -climbed that tree and, from the low branch dropped on the roof. Then -they opened the window. You can see where the limb has been freshly -broken and where leaves and twigs from the branch have fallen on the -roof.” - -“That’s so, I’d never have noticed that,” said the man. “You ought to -be a detective.” - -“I’d rather be a reporter,” said Mr. Newton. - -“Well, at any rate, they got in,” went on Mr. Robertson, as he said -his name was. “Then they proceeded to help themselves and they got -considerable. Some of the officers think the thieves had help from the -servants or else they would not have gotten in so easily.” - -“This was not an inside job,” said Mr. Newton thoughtfully. - -“What makes you think it wasn’t?” - -“Because if it was the thieves would not go to all the trouble of -climbing a tree to drop on a roof, and then force a window. They would -have it arranged so they could get in easily. This was an outside job, -and the servants knew nothing of it.” - -“I’m glad to hear you say so,” said Mr. Robertson. “I would not like to -think we have dishonest servants. Now, if you will come with me I will -give you a list of what is missing.” - -With a much different manner from that with which he had greeted them -Mr. Robertson led the way to a small study. There he gave Mr. Newton a -list of all the stolen articles and their value. - -“We think the men, or man, must have chloroformed us,” Mr. Robertson -added. - -“Why so?” - -“Because we all slept so late this morning. We all woke up drowsy and -stupid, as if some drug had been used.” - -“Perhaps there was,” said Mr. Newton. “It has been done before.” - -“Now don’t write up too much,” was Mr. Robertson’s parting injunction. - -“No more than is necessary,” replied the reporter. “We’ll have a true -account and a description of the missing jewels.” - -Then, having secured all the information he wanted, Mr. Newton, -beckoning Larry to follow him, went out of the house. - -“I wish you’d go to police headquarters and get a list of the jewelry -as the police have it,” said Mr. Newton to Larry. “I want to compare it -with the one Mr. Robertson gave me.” - -“Will they give it to me?” asked the boy. - -“Just tell them I sent you and it will be all right,” spoke Mr. Newton. - -Larry accomplished his errand successfully, and reported back to the -office of the Leader, where Mr. Newton had said he would meet him. -Larry’s list was somewhat different from that furnished by the family, -as the people had not told the police all of their loss. - -Mr. Newton made a good story of the big robbery. He gave a picturesque -account of how the family awoke, to find themselves in a stupor, and -how, finally, they were roused up and discovered the big robbery. - -Then there was a picture of the robbed house, and several views of the -celebrated Reynolds diamonds, as well as cuts of the more prominent -members of the family. Altogether it made a stirring story, and Larry -wished he could have taken a more active part than he did. However, he -consoled himself with the reflection that, some day, he might be a real -reporter. - -No other paper had as good an account as did the _Leader_, which -statement Mr. Emberg made after the first edition came out. - -“You and Larry deserve credit,” said the city editor to Mr. Newton. - -“I didn’t do much,” said Larry. - -“You helped all right,” put in Mr. Newton. “You did all right.” - -The Reynolds story was the biggest one of the day and there was enough -news in it to carry it on the front page of most of the papers for two -succeeding days. There seemed to be no clew to the thieves, though all -the detectives were working on the case. - -One thing was certain, the jewels, which formed the largest part of the -booty, were gone. They were more prized than anything else that was -taken, according to the family, and a reward of one thousand dollars -was offered for their return. - -A most careful supervision of all the pawnshops in New York and the -immediate vicinity showed that the diamonds and other precious stones -had not been pledged. - -“The thieves are hiding them until this trouble blows over,” said Mr. -Newton. - -“Whereabouts do you suppose they have put them?” asked Larry. - -“I don’t know. If I did I’d go there and get the stuff and claim the -reward,” answered the reporter. - -For several days little was talked of but the robbery. Then other, -newer, and more important news of various kinds came in, and the theft -was, for the time being, forgotten. - -One night, when Larry was coming from evening school, he took a -short cut. It was through a broad field on which had stood a large -warehouse, but which had been burned, leaving a sort of hole in the -ground, filled with rubbish. - -As Larry was picking his way through this, for it was a dark and rainy -night, he thought he saw, off to the left, a moving light. - -“I wonder what that can be,” he thought. - -He looked at the tiny flame, and saw that it had now ceased its motion. - -“Guess I’d better take a look,” he said. “You never can tell what’s -going to happen.” - -He walked cautiously toward the glow. As he drew nearer Larry saw that -there were several men grouped about a lantern that stood on the ground. - -“About here’ll do,” one man said in a low tone. - -“Anywhere so’s we can find it again,” joined in another voice. - -Then Larry could hear the sound of picks and shovels striking the -ground. - -“I wonder what’s up?” he asked himself. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVII - -LARRY IS REWARDED - - -Walking softly Larry approached closer to where the men were at work. -He could not see what they were doing, except that they were making -a hole in the ground. One man stood a little distance back from the -others and held what seemed to be a small box in his arms. - -“Maybe there’s been a murder committed and they’re burying the corpse,” -thought Larry. Then he laughed at his thought. The box the man had -would hardly hold a dead cat. - -The men were working fast now, and seemed anxious to get through. - -“That’s deep enough,” said one. “Get a flat stone to put on top.” - -In his curiosity Larry forgot the caution he had hitherto used. His -foot touched a piece of wood, dislodged it, and rattled it against a -stone. It made quite a noise. - -“What’s that?” exclaimed the man with the box. - -“Someone’s coming,” replied the one with the pick. - -“I’ll see what it is,” the third man said, as he started toward Larry. -But the boy did not wait to note what would happen when the man got -to him. He sped off softly through the darkness, and when he saw a -part of a wall just ahead of him he dropped down behind it. The man -passed him on the run, but did not think of looking behind the masonry. -After looking about him, as well as he could in the darkness, the man -returned. - -“What was it?” asked his companions. - -“A cat or a dog, I guess,” was the reply. “Nobody after us, anyhow. Go -ahead and bury the stuff or, first thing we know, someone will spot us, -and that would never do.” - -“They evidently don’t want whatever they are doing known,” thought -Larry in his hiding place. - -The men worked a little while longer, and then the boy could hear them -throwing back the dirt and packing it down. Soon they finished and -then, blowing out the light, they departed. Waiting a few minutes to be -sure they were out of the way Larry crept cautiously over to where he -judged the men had been digging. - -But, in the darkness he could not find the place. It would have done -him little good if he had, he thought, as he had nothing with which to -throw out the dirt again. - -He resolved, however, to come back the first chance he had next day, -and see if there was anything mysterious in the actions of the three -men. In order to better locate the spot Larry took his handkerchief -and weighted it down on the ground by a stone. - -“This is somewhere near the place,” the boy thought. “I guess I can -easily find it in the daytime.” - -Then he went home. His mother and the others in the family had gone to -bed, and Larry was glad of it, for he did not want to be questioned as -to why he was so late coming from night school. - -Larry hardly slept for wondering what the men had buried. He thought -they might be hiding the evidences of some crime, and then again he -reasoned that perhaps, after all, it might turn out to be nothing more -than a pet dog or bird that had died. - -“I’ll find out though,” Larry thought. “Don’t I wish it was a big -treasure like gold or diamonds! But it’s foolish to think such things -as that.” - -Larry thought the next day would never come to an end. Though he was -very busy at his duties in the _Leader_ office he kept watching the -clock, for he had determined upon a plan of action. - -He made up his mind he would go home as usual to supper, and prepare -to go to his night class. On his way there he would purchase a small -shovel at a nearby hardware store. This he could conceal under his -coat until he got to the lot, and he could then hide it under the -fence. He also got a small lantern that burned a candle, and this he -intended hiding with the shovel. - -Once these two important things were hidden away Larry meant to walk -across the lot just at dusk, before going to school, and see if he -could not locate the place where the men had dug. If he could he would -mark the spot more accurately with his handkerchief and then, coming -home from his class, he could dig in the darkness and no one would be -likely to observe him, as the spot was lonesome and people seldom went -there except in daylight. - -Larry’s plan worked out well. He got the shovel and lantern and hid -them under a fallen wall, in a convenient place. Then he strolled -across the big field, just at nightfall, when it was difficult to -distinguish forms fifty feet away. There was no moon and the sky was -cloudy. - -Larry pretended to be idly walking across the lot. Occasionally he -would stoop, pick up a stone and cast it into the air, as boys have a -habit of doing. He thought if anyone noticed him, they would not attach -any importance to his presence. - -He found his handkerchief where he had left it, but it was not near any -place where the earth seemed to have been recently dug up. - -“I guess I must be a little off the track,” the boy thought. “Let’s -see. If I can find the wall I hid behind, I think I can locate the -place where the men were.” - -After looking about a little Larry found the fallen wall. He recalled -that, as he had stooped down behind it he had seen, over the top, the -spire of a church. And he recalled that the three men were in a direct -line between the stone and the church steeple. - -“Then if I walk out in a straight line from the stone, toward the -church, I ought to come across the place,” said Larry to himself. - -Taking an observation from behind the stone he located the church -spire. Then, walking as straight as possible, he passed out from the -fallen wall. - -“It ought to be about here,” he said. As he spoke his foot sank down -into a soft spot in the ground. Larry lighted the candle and flashed -his lantern on the place. - -“I’ll bet this is it,” he remarked. “Anyway, I’ll mark it.” - -He had prepared a short stake with a piece of white cloth on it as a -guide, and this he stuck in the earth. Then he hurried from the lot to -go to school. - - Illustration: AT THE BOTTOM HE COULD SEE, IN THE DIM LIGHT OF THE - LANTERN, A SMALL BLACK BOX - _From Office Boy to Reporter_ Page 228 - -It would have been better for Larry’s lessons if he had not been -thinking so much of what was buried in the lot. He did not pay proper -attention to what was going on in the class. When he answered questions -with statements such as that Columbus was President of the United -States, that Balboa discovered the Hudson River and that New York was -the capital of Indian Territory, the teacher remarked: - -“Well, Larry, I guess you are still dreaming. You had better wake up.” - -The class laughed and Larry with an effort took his mind from what he -was about to do. Then he made a better record in his studies for that -evening. - -When school was dismissed Larry did not stop, as he sometimes was in -the habit of doing, to chat with his acquaintances. He hurried off to -the lot. As he approached it he took a careful observation. There was -no one in the big field, which seemed dark, gloomy, and lonesome to the -boy. - -He had half a mind to give the whole thing up. He was afraid he would -discover nothing and would have his trouble for his pains. Then, too, -he thought, if there should be something buried there, and the men came -along and discovered him, they might harm him. - -“Well, there’s nothing like trying,” he reasoned. - -Then he crawled under the fence, got his spade and lantern, and walked -to where he had placed the marking stake. It had not been disturbed. -Larry lighted the candle in the lantern, and, placing it where it would -throw an illumination on the spot to be dug up, and would not be likely -to be seen from the street, the boy stuck the spade into the ground. - -It was not easy digging, and before he had gone down two feet his back -began to ache. The men had packed the lower layers of dirt in quite -hard, and there were many small stones encountered. - -With a strong shove from his foot Larry sent the spade down quite a -distance. The sharp edge struck something unyielding and stopped. -Pushing with all his force, Larry could not get it beyond the -obstruction. - -“Maybe that’s the stone they put on top of whatever they buried,” the -boy thought. “I must be getting close now.” - -He enlarged the hole, so as to get his spade under the edge of the -obstruction. When he had done this he placed a corner of his shovel -under the edge of the stone, and pried upward with all his strength. - -Slowly the flat stone began to move. It pried the dirt up with it, and -the boy was almost trembling in his eagerness. Then, with a suddenness -that sent him sprawling on his back, the stone flew out of the hole, -and a shower of dirt fell on Larry. - -He scrambled to his feet and looked into the hole. At the bottom he -could see, in the dim light of the lantern, a small black box. He -grabbed it up, and, only stopping to blow out the candle, he ran at -top speed, leaving the lantern and spade behind him. He wanted to get -home as quickly as possible, and cast aside everything that could -hinder him. - -He never remembered how he passed through the various streets leading -to the apartment. He seemed to be treading on air. Now and then a -sickening dread would come to him that, perhaps after all, the box -contained nothing of value. - -“Is that you, Larry?” his mother asked from her bedroom as he entered. - -“Yes, mother,” he replied, in so strange a voice that Mrs. Dexter came -out in a hurry to see what had happened. When she saw Larry, covered -with dirt, his face pale, and holding in his arms the black box, she -exclaimed: - -“Are you hurt, Larry?” - -“No,” he answered, much excited. “But I want to find out what’s in this -box.” - -It was tied with several stout cords, which Larry cut with his knife. -Then he wrenched off the cover. As he did so he almost leaped back in -astonishment. - -There, in the box, was a blazing pile of jewels. Diamonds there were, -nearly a score, some loose, some set in rings, and, most beautiful, -a large necklace of the sparkling stones. Then there were rubies, -sapphires, and other precious jewels. - -“Larry! Where in the world did you get them?” gasped his mother. - -“I found them!” cried Larry, hardly able to speak, so great was his -emotion. “Some men buried them in a lot and I dug them up!” - -“But whose are they?” - -“I’m not sure,” replied the boy, “but I think they are part of the -jewels stolen from Mr. Reynolds’s house. If they are I’ll get a reward -of one thousand dollars!” - -“Oh, Larry!” - -By this time Lucy, who had been awakened from her sleep, had slipped on -a dressing gown and entered the room. - -“Those are the Reynolds diamonds!” she exclaimed. “That necklace is -just like the one the paper had a picture of.” She caught up the string -of jewels that sparkled like fire in the lamplight. - -“What are you going to do with them?” asked Mrs. Dexter. - -“I think I’ll let Mr. Newton know,” said Larry. “He’ll be able to -advise me.” - -“How can you reach him?” asked Larry’s mother. - -“I can call him up on the telephone. He has one in his house. I’ll ask -him to come right over. This will be a big story for the paper.” - -Mr. Newton was somewhat surprised when Larry called him on the wire. He -wanted to know what it was all about, but Larry did not think it wise -to tell them over the ’phone. - -“You’ll see when you get here,” he said. “It’s a good story.” - -“Then I’ll come at once,” replied the reporter. - -He was soon at Larry’s house, and to say that he was surprised at the -sight of the diamonds is putting it mildly. - -“What will you do next, youngster?” he asked of Larry, with a laugh. -“This is the biggest thing yet. Every detective in the city is wearing -his eyes out looking for these, and here you stumble across them. Well, -I should say it was a story!” - -The reporter agreed to take charge of the jewels over night, as he had -a safe at home. - -“I suppose we ought to return them at once,” he said, “but if we do the -morning papers will have the story ahead of us, and that would never -do. We must get a beat out of this.” - -And they did. The next day the _Leader_ had a big story of the find, -giving Larry due credit. It did not mention, however, that the boy was -working for the paper. The story was held back until the last edition, -and none of the other afternoon sheets had a line about it. - -The jewels were taken to Mr. Reynolds, who, true to his promise, made -out a check for one thousand dollars, which was given to Larry. It was -a long while before the thieves were caught, and their capture was -brought about in a peculiar manner. - -“What will I ever do with the money?” Larry asked. - -“Put it in the bank as the start for another thousand,” said Mr. Newton. - -“I have a better plan than that,” replied the boy. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVIII - -THE RENOWNED DOCTOR - - -Larry’s mother could scarcely believe the good news that the boy -brought her when he showed the thousand-dollar check. It seemed almost -like a dream to all of them, and several times Larry pinched himself to -see if he would not wake up. - -But the check remained firm, and, the next day at the suggestion of Mr. -Newton, the lad deposited it in a savings bank, and received a book -with his name on it, and one thousand dollars on the credit side. - -“What are you going to do with it?” his mother asked Larry several -times. “I hope you will not spend it foolishly.” - -“Don’t worry,” replied Larry. “I’m not going to spend it right away, -but when I do it will be for something worth while,” and he smiled over -some pleasant thought. - -Many persons, on receiving such a large sum, would, if they were as -poor as the Dexters, have at once moved into a better house, bought a -lot of new furniture, and begun to live better. But this did not enter -Larry’s head, though his mother wondered if that was what his plan was. - -She would have liked to have moved into a better house, though they -were fairly well off where they were. True, they had not many articles -of luxury, and sometimes their comforts were few. But Larry was now -earning good wages, and, with what Mrs. Dexter got from her sewing, -they had enough to eat, good substantial clothing, and did not need to -worry over the coal supply, even though winter was coming on. But Larry -was not yet ready to disclose his plans. - -There was much wonder in the vicinity of the apartment where the -Dexters lived over the fact that with so much money they did not move -to better quarters, and several of their neighbors mentioned this. - -“It’s Larry’s money,” said Mrs. Dexter, in answer to these questions. -“He can do what he likes with it, in reason. Of course I would not let -him spend it foolishly, and I know he will not. When he gets ready he -will let me know what he is going to do with it.” - -Then Mrs. Dexter would close the conversation, or turn it into some -other channel. But the neighbors did not cease from wondering and -talking. - -At the office Larry was the envy of all the other boys, and not a few -of the reporters. - -“If I had that money I’d never work again,” said Bud. - -“It wouldn’t last long if you began to spend it,” said Larry. “I’ve got -a special use for that thousand dollars.” - -That afternoon Mr. Newton had to go out on a story. As he was leaving -the city room Mr. Emberg said: - -“While you’re out you might get a picture of Dr. Carrolton. We’ll -run it to-morrow, with the story of that big operation he’s going to -perform.” - -“I’m afraid I will not have time to go there,” said Mr. Newton. “It’s -’way uptown. Perhaps one of the boys or Larry could go.” - -“I guess Larry can get it all right,” said the city editor. “I didn’t -think of him.” - -“Let him come part of the way with me,” suggested Mr. Newton. “I’ll -tell him what to do.” - -So Larry was told to get on his hat and coat, give up carrying copy for -the rest of the day, and go after a photograph of the celebrated doctor. - -“Is he going to perform one of those operations on lame children?” -asked Larry of Mr. Newton, as they were in the elevated train going -uptown. - -“Yes, he’s going to try and cure a bad spinal trouble that a daughter -of Mr. Smyington, the millionaire, is afflicted with,” said the -reporter. “He has been very successful in all the cases he has -undertaken, and he was brought over to this country especially to -operate on this one case.” - -“It must cost a lot of money,” said Larry. - -“Mr. Smyington is paying ten thousand dollars,” said Mr. Newton. - -Larry said nothing, but he sighed in a way that made Mr. Newton wonder -what the boy was worrying about. - -“Ten thousand dollars,” said Larry softly to himself. “That’s an awful -lot of money, and I have only one thousand.” - -“Here’s where you get off and change cars,” said Mr. Newton, after -about half an hour’s riding. “Just go right in the house where Dr. -Carrolton is staying, and if any one asks you what you want, say you’re -from the _Leader_. The physician is partial to newspaper men and I -guess you’ll have little trouble getting a photograph.” - -Larry experienced no difficulty in reaching the rooms of the great -doctor. But there he was met by a secretary, who seemed to be in bad -temper. - -“Tell your business by me,” he said to Larry. “The doctor cannot bother -mit every boy what comes along.” - -Larry explained his errand. - -“Ach! No! No! The doctor will gif out no more photographs,” said the -secretary, who was a German. “He has alretty gif out ten thousand. You -must go away!” - -“But I was told to get a picture,” persisted Larry, who knew that it -is part of a reporter’s duty never to give up. - -“Go away! Go away!” exclaimed the secretary. - -“What’s the trouble?” asked a voice, and, from an inner room came the -great doctor himself. He was smiling kindly, and seemed good-natured. - -“It is one pest of a newspaper poy,” explained the secretary. “He must -have a photograph.” - -“I want one for the _Leader_,” broke in Larry. - -“Ha! Who is this?” exclaimed the physician as he heard the sound of -Larry’s voice. “I seem to have seen you before, my boy.” - -“Yes, sir, I guess you did,” replied Larry. - -“Ha! I remember now, you are the boy who helped to catch the pickpocket -that stole my watch,” the doctor went on. “I was wondering why you -never came to see me.” - -“I have been too busy,” said Larry, which was the truth, though -another reason was that he felt a little bashful about calling on the -celebrated physician. - -“Well, my boy, I owe you considerable for what you did. I prize that -watch very highly. What can I do for you?” - -“I would like to get your picture for the paper,” spoke Larry. “The -city editor told me to be sure and get it.” - -“And you shall have it,” said Dr. Carrolton, in spite of the grumbling -of the secretary. “Here it is, and besides one for the paper I give -you one for yourself,” and the physician took two fine photographs from -the mantle. - -“They are the last you have, Herr Doctor,” objected the secretary. - -“Never mind, Emile,” was the answer. “We can get more. I would do more -than that for this boy.” - -“How--how much do you charge for operations?” blurted out Larry, with -almost a gasp. It was what he had been nerving himself up to ever since -he heard he was to see the doctor. - -“Well, it all depends,” replied the physician, thinking it might be -a boy’s curiosity that prompted the question. “I do nothing else but -these operations, and so I have to charge more than other doctors do -for ordinary cases. Mine are very complicated cures and it sometimes -takes a long time to perfect them. So I have to charge high fees. But I -try to make my charges in accordance with what people can pay.” - -“Could you do one for a thousand dollars?” asked Larry. - -“I suppose so,” said the physician with a smile at Larry’s bluntness. -“Why?” - -“Because that’s all I have,” exclaimed the boy. “I got it as a reward -for finding the Reynolds diamonds. My sister has spine disease and -she suffers very much. I would give the thousand dollars if you could -cure her, and then I could owe the rest of the money to you and pay -you when I earned it. Will you? Please, Dr. Carrolton, please cure my -sister!” - -“Tell me all about it,” said the physician kindly, taking a chair and -drawing up one for Larry. “Where is your sister?” - -Then the boy told him all about Lucy, and how much pain she had, -telling how patient she was. He related the experience with the -diamonds and told about getting the thousand dollars. - -“Please come and cure my sister,” he ended up with. “I know I can’t pay -you what it is worth, but I’ll work hard until I can make it up,” and -he paused to regard the doctor anxiously. - -“I--er--ahem!” said the physician, who seemed to find it hard to -proceed. “I don’t want your money, my boy,” he said at length. - -“Isn’t it enough?” asked Larry in a disappointed tone. - -“It is far too much,” replied Dr. Carrolton. “I have wanted to do -something for you ever since you saved my watch for me. I would rather -have lost ten thousand dollars than that watch, which I prize for the -memories it brings. So you can consider me in your debt to a large -amount. As for your sister, I will come and examine her.” - -“Thank you,” exclaimed Larry. - -“I don’t say I can cure her,” the physician went on, “but I will try, -and, if I can, I will be only too glad to do so in return for what you -have done for me, also because I like you, and I am sure I shall like -your sister, if she is anything like you.” - -“She’s a lot better,” said Larry, hardly knowing whether to laugh or -cry. - -“All right, I’ll write you a letter soon, and tell you when I can come -and see your sister. Now you had better run along, for the paper might -want the picture,” and, shaking hands with Larry, the great doctor -went back to his room, while the boy, almost in a daze over his good -fortune, started back for the office. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIX - -THE OPERATION - - -The next day all the papers told of the impending operation on the -millionaire’s daughter by the distinguished surgeon. His picture was -in many of the publications, including the _Leader_. The operation was -performed that day, and was a success as far as the first stages went. -It would be some time, the stories said, before the plaster casts could -be removed, and then it would be known whether or not the little girl -would ever walk again. - -Larry read every line that was published about the eminent physician -and the operation, for he felt that his sister’s case might be similar -to that of the millionaire’s daughter. He said nothing at home of the -hope he had that Lucy might be made well and strong, for he did not -want to raise expectations that might later be dispelled. When he heard -from Dr. Carrolton he thought that would be time enough to tell his -mother, and to prepare Lucy for the operation and ordeal which she must -go through. - -There were anxious days of waiting for Larry. As he performed his -work at the _Leader_ office he kept track, by means of the various -papers, of Dr. Carrolton’s progress. The physician was traveling over -the country, making cures that were almost marvelous. Larry began to -fear the doctor had forgotten his promise, and was almost beginning -to despair when, one day, there came a letter addressed to “Mr. Larry -Dexter,” with his street number and all on it. Up in one corner was the -eminent doctor’s name. - -Larry’s fingers trembled so much he could scarcely open the envelope, -but he managed to take out the single sheet of paper it contained and -read this message: - - “My Dear Boy: I have not forgotten you, your sister, or the - promise I made. If nothing happens to prevent I shall call at - your house a week from to-day and see the little girl. I hope I - may be able to cure her.” - -Then Larry decided to tell his mother. At first Mrs. Dexter was too -surprised to know what to say. Then, as the full realization of what -the doctor’s visit might mean,--the cure of her daughter,--she could -not help weeping, but the tears were those of joy. - -“Oh, Larry, Larry!” she exclaimed softly. “It is too good to be true!” - -“We must break the news gently to Lucy,” said the boy. “We don’t want -to get her excited, for it might have a bad effect on her nerves.” - -Poor Lucy was frightened and pleased by turns when they told her. She -had long before given up hope of ever being able to walk like other -girls, and had resigned herself to her fate. Now that there seemed to -be a ray of hope she hardly dared indulge in the pleasant thoughts that -came to her. - -“Oh, if I ever could walk right again!” she exclaimed, and her eyes -filled with tears. - -“Oh, Dr. Carrolton can cure you,” said Larry with confidence in his -tone. “I’ve read all about the cases in the papers, and most of them -are lots worse than yours is.” - -“Oh, if I could only walk again, like other girls, and run and play, -and--and go to work,” sighed Lucy, “I would be the happiest girl in all -the world.” - -“You will,” said Larry, and he prayed that what he hoped would come to -pass. - -That week was full of excitement. In the first place, all unexpectedly, -a trained nurse came to the house one day, and said she had been sent -by Dr. Carrolton to prepare Lucy for the operation. - -“Will I have to go to the hospital?” asked Lucy, with fright in her -tone. - -“No, dear,” said the nurse. “Dr. Carrolton has decided that you will be -better off at home. I am going to get you ready.” - -“Will you--will you stay with me when--when he operates?” asked the -girl in a pleading tone. - -“Of course I will, dearest,” said the kind-hearted nurse, putting her -arms around the girl. “Your mother will be here too, and we will take -good care of you, never fear.” - -“Will it hurt very much?” asked Lucy. - -“Not much, dear. It may, a little. Will you mind?” - -“Not--if it makes me well,” replied Lucy. - -The Dexter household was much upset for the next few days. A room had -to be prepared for Lucy, and this the trained nurse arranged. Then came -a man, bringing a strange sort of folding table on which the little -girl was to lie while the great doctor operated on her. Larry could -hardly do his work for thinking of what was to happen, and Mrs. Dexter -was so nervous that she did not know what to do. - -But Lucy proved herself a brave girl. She was cheerful, and even joked -at times, telling Larry she would soon be running races with him. The -younger children did not know what was going on. Kind neighbors cared -for them at times, when there was too much for Mrs. Dexter to do. - -At last came the day for the operation; Dr. Carrolton came in his -carriage, with another physician to help him. All save the nurse and -the doctors were banished from the room where Lucy was taken. - -Mr. Emberg, who had heard of what was going on, excused Larry from work -that day, for he knew the copy boy’s heart would be at home with his -sister. Mrs. Dexter wept at times, and several women friends came in to -comfort her. - -There was an hour of anxious waiting. Then from the room where the -operation had been performed came Dr. Carrolton. - -“Will she--is it--can--” began Larry, but he was excited and stammered -so he could not talk. - -“We hope it will be a success,” said the physician in kind tones. “It -was a bad case. Much worse than I had supposed. But if we can make her -walk again, Larry, my boy, if we can have her run around like other -little girls, we’ll do it!” - -Larry gritted his teeth to keep back the tears that were all too ready -to flow. But he put on a brave front. - -“Thank you, doctor,” was all he could say. - -“Now she must be kept very quiet,” the surgeon said. “The nurse will -stay with her, but she must not be disturbed. I will stop in again this -evening. Now good-bye, and don’t worry.” - -He went out, followed by his assistant, leaving Larry in a sort of -daze. The boy tiptoed to the sick room, and knelt down by the door. -He tried to listen to hear what was going on inside, but there was a -strange ringing in his ears that prevented him. Once he thought he -heard his sister groan, and this so frightened him that he ran away. - -His mother, who had been cared for by the neighbors, who also looked -after James and Mary, came back now, her eyes red from weeping. The -nurse came out of the operating room. - -“She’s sleeping quietly,” she said. “Everything is favorable. Don’t -worry. I think she will get well.” - -“Oh, I’m so glad!” exclaimed Mrs. Dexter. - -Larry went outdoors. In the street he found quite a crowd of persons -who lived in the apartment house, and who, having heard about the -operation, were anxious to know how it had come out. - -They were full of sympathy for the sick girl, and almost overwhelmed -Larry with questions, several women surrounding him and wanting to know -all about how “the poor dear child was coming on.” - -Larry told them as best he could. It would be some time, he said, -before it would be known whether the operation was a success or not, -but they hoped for the best. - -“We’ll all pray for her,” said a motherly old German woman. “We want to -see her runnin’ about with the other children.” - -The days that followed were full of anxiety. The doctor came every day, -bringing words of cheer and comfort. The nurse was very kind, and the -neighbors could not seem to do enough for the family. - -Larry went back to work, as Dr. Carrolton told him there was no -immediate danger nor chance of a change. Lucy had to wear a plaster -cast for several weeks, and not until this could be taken off would it -be known whether she was better. In the meanwhile they could only hope. - -One afternoon, about two weeks later, when the last edition of the -_Leader_ was about to go to press, there came a telegram from a small -village called Stoneville, about fifty miles from New York, to the -effect that the rising waters, caused by a long period of rain, had so -swollen the rivers and streams that a large dam, just above the town, -threatened to break. - -“If that goes there’ll be lots of damage done, and maybe people -killed,” said Mr. Newton, who was in the office at the time. - -“How do you know?” asked Mr. Emberg. - -“Because I spent my vacation in that town once,” replied the reporter. -“It’s in a valley surrounded by hills. The dam is at the upper end. It -is used to make a reservoir for several large mills. If the dam breaks -it’s going to wipe out the village of Stoneville.” - -“Hum,” said the city editor, in a thoughtful tone. “I guess we’d better -cover that. You haven’t anything special on now, have you, Newton?” - -“No, I guess not.” - -“Then I think you had better go there. Start to-night, and wire us back -all the stuff you can. Don’t let the other fellows beat you.” - -“Not if I can help it.” - -“Perhaps you’d better take someone with you. I can send one of the men.” - -“If I take anyone I think I’d rather have Larry,” said Mr. Newton. -“He can run the copy to the telegraph office, he knows how to use the -telephone, and he’ll keep his ears and eyes open for news. Larry will -do first-rate.” - -“Then you can take him,” said the city editor. “I guess his sister is -in no danger now. I’ll find out.” - -Larry hardly knew what to say when the city editor proposed that he -accompany Mr. Newton. - -“I’d like to go,” he said, “if I only knew----” - -“I’ll send you word about your sister every day,” said Mr. Emberg, -guessing what bothered Larry. - -“Then I’ll go,” said the boy. - - - - -CHAPTER XXX - -THE FLOOD - - -Larry went home, all excited over the prospects of his trip. It was the -biggest thing he had yet been assigned to do in newspaper work, and he -felt that it might be the stepping stone to a larger field. - -“You’ll be careful now, won’t you, Larry?” his mother pleaded as she -packed a valise of clothes for him, since Mr. Emberg had said the trip -would probably last several days. - -“I will, mother,” promised the boy. - -“Write every day,” Mrs. Dexter continued, “and let us know how you are -getting on.” - -“Do you think Lucy will be all right?” asked Larry. - -“I think so,” said the nurse, who had come into the room. “Her general -health is much better, though of course we cannot tell about the main -thing; that is, whether she will walk again.” - -Larry went into the room to bid his sister good-bye. Lucy was stretched -out in bed, her limbs and back held rigid by the heavy plaster cast. -She smiled at her brother. - -“So you’re going to run away and leave me?” she said in a joking tone. - -“I’ll come back whenever you send for me,” spoke Larry. - -“When you come back perhaps I’ll be walking around,” said the girl with -a smile. - -Larry bade his mother, sisters, and brother, as well as the nurse, -good-bye, and then went to the railroad station where he was to meet -Mr. Newton. It was raining hard, as it had been for a week past. - -“If this keeps up I’m afraid there’ll be trouble at the dam,” thought -Larry, as he splashed through a big puddle. - -He found the reporter waiting for him. Mr. Newton was attired in a long -rain coat, and he had a big dress-suit case with him, that seemed well -filled. - -“Got any rubber boots?” he asked Larry, as soon as the latter greeted -him. - -“No. Why?” - -“Because you’ll need ’em if this sort of weather keeps up. You wait -here and I’ll go and buy you a pair. What size do you wear?” - -“About six, I guess,” replied Larry. - -Mr. Newton hurried out and returned, bearing a bundle. - -“There you are,” said the reporter. “They’ll keep your feet dry, -anyhow.” - -A few minutes later their train was called and the two went out on the -long platform along which the cars stood. - -“It’s hardly worth while taking a sleeper,” said Mr. Newton. “We’ll get -there about midnight, and I’ve wired for rooms at the only hotel in the -village. Can’t tell whether we’ll get ’em, or not, the way things are.” - -It was a good deal like being a soldier, Larry thought, to be a -reporter on a big paper. You never knew where you were going, nor -when. At one minute you might be engaged in writing up a peaceful bit -of news, and the next be sent far away to report raging floods or big -fires. But Larry liked the excitement, and he felt that there was no -finer or more responsible calling. - -To be a reporter on a big paper meant to be able to command much power, -which, if rightly used, proved of great value. A reporter is, in a way, -his own master, serving only his paper. - -Through the storm splashed the train. The wind howled around it and the -rain beat upon it, but those inside were comfortable and warm. - -Larry and Mr. Newton found seats together and they settled down into -them, to listen to the roar of the storm, and the puffing of the engine -until they came to their destination. Progress was slow, because the -railroad line was not as safe as usual. Once they were delayed an hour -by a lot of sand washing down on the track. The train crew had to get -out and shovel it off. - -Again they came to so sudden a stop that several of the passengers were -thrown from their seats. - -“We hit something that time,” exclaimed Mr. Newton. - -“Felt so,” replied Larry. - -Nearly everyone in the cars piled out in spite of the rain. Larry and -Mr. Newton followed their example. They found that the locomotive had -struck a big rock that had been loosened from a bluff by the rain, and -had fallen down on the track. But for the fact that the engineer saw it -in time, and put on brakes, there might have been a serious accident. -As it was, the pilot of the locomotive was smashed. - -There was a delay of two hours this time before the rock could be -removed, and when the train at last got under way, and pulled into -Stoneville, they were more than three hours behind time. - -“It’s after four o’clock,” said Mr. Newton as he got off the coach and -looked at his watch. “Hardly worth while to go to bed.” - -They found a number of people gathered at the station. - -“What’s going on?” asked Mr. Newton, of a man who was walking up and -down the platform. “Everybody get up early to catch a train?” - -“We haven’t been to bed,” was the answer. “The dam’s liable to give -way any minute, and we’re a sort of guard watch. As soon as she -breaks there’s a man up there near it, who’s going to let us know by -telegraph, so we can get our folks out of the way. There’s a telegraph -instrument in the depot here, and so we’re hanging around for news. -Say, but it’s rainin’ cats an’ dogs, ain’t it?” - -“It certainly is,” replied Mr. Newton. “Where’s the hotel?” - -“Right up that street,” replied the man. “Guess you’ll have trouble -getting rooms, though. Lots of people have gone there for fear their -houses’ll be washed away.” - -“Is it as bad as that?” - -“Yes, and it’ll be worse before many hours. The dam can’t stand much -longer.” - -Protecting themselves as best they could from the storm, Larry and Mr. -Newton made their way to the hotel. As the man had said, they found it -crowded, but a small room had been reserved for them on the strength of -Mr. Newton’s message. - -“You’ll have to put up with what you find,” said the clerk of the -hotel. “We’re crowded for room, and we’ll be more so shortly.” - -“We don’t mind,” spoke Mr. Newton. “We’ll not be in very much, I guess. -The most we’ll want will be meals.” - -“I can promise you them at any rate,” said the clerk. - -They registered, and were shown to their room. The rain was coming -down harder than ever, but in spite of that Larry and his friend lay -down and managed to get a few hours’ sleep. After breakfast, which they -ate in a crowded dining room, where the only conversation was about -the rain and the danger from the dam, they donned their rain coats and -rubber boots and, with umbrellas, went out. - -“Will you tell us where the dam is?” asked Mr. Newton of the first man -he met. - -“Right straight up that street,” was the answer. “Don’t you hear a sort -of roar?” - -“Yes, what is it?” asked the reporter. - -“The water coming through the emergency outlets,” was the answer. “The -flood has not yet risen above the dam, but it will soon.” - -Larry and his friend went in the direction pointed out. They were -not the only ones on the street, for in spite of the downpour scores -of persons were on their way to the dam, to see what had happened -overnight. - -As they came nearer the roar became louder, until as they turned down a -side street leading to the river, they could hear the flood of waters -tearing its way along like a miniature Niagara. Then, a few minutes -later, they came in sight of the big reservoir, fed by a comparatively -small stream in ordinary times, but which had now become a raging -torrent from the overabundance of rain. - -In front of them, in a sort of hollow of the hills, was a vast body of -water. It was about half a mile wide, and backed up for several miles. -The dam was about two thousand feet in length, strongly constructed. In -ordinary seasons the water hardly came to within half-way of the top, -but now only two feet separated the spill-way from the surface of the -muddy swirling water. - -In order to relieve the pressure on the big pile of stone and cement -the men at the dam had opened three emergency outlets. These were big -openings in the face of the dam, considerably below the top. - -Through these the water was rushing with the strength of ten thousand -horses. It spurted out in solid streams and shot into the bed of the -stream below like a geyser. The little river, that ordinarily sufficed -to carry off the overflow of water, was now a vast torrent and was -rushing along with terrific speed. - -Many houses were along its banks and some of these were already in -danger of the flood. The water had reached nearly to the first floors, -after flooding the cellars, and the people had deserted their homes. - -“Well, I would say this was something of a flood,” spoke Mr. Newton -after looking the scene over. “There’s going to be some news here or -I’m mistaken. I must get to work and write a descriptive story.” - -“What can I do?” asked Larry. - -“There’ll be plenty of work for both of us, or I’ll miss my guess. -First you can find out where the nearest telegraph station is, and then -make arrangements to send copy by wire.” - -“There’s a telegraph in the railroad office,” said Larry. - -“That will hardly do for us. It is probably for railroad messages only. -You must find a regular place, where they will take press copy. When -you do, come back to the hotel and I’ll meet you there.” - -After spending a little while looking at the river and reservoir Larry -went on his errand. By inquiring he located a Western Union office, and -made arrangements with the operator. - -“Only I’ll not guarantee anything,” said the man in charge. “No telling -when the wires may go down and out of business. I’ll send stuff as long -as I can, and then I’ll have to quit.” - - - - -CHAPTER XXXI - -DAYS OF TERROR - - -Larry went back to the hotel to report to Mr. Newton. He did not find -him there, and so walked around in the corridor. The men were gathered -in groups, talking of nothing but the storm and the danger. - -“Worst I ever see in fifty years,” said one old man. “I remember the -year Deacon Stout’s old gray mare died the waters riz so high they -floated my barn, by gosh, but that wa’n’t nothin’ to this.” - -“She’s goin’ t’ rage an’ tear things apart,” said his neighbor. - -Other men were saying much the same thing. In one corner Larry saw a -woman crying, while others were trying to comfort her. - -“I can’t help it,” said the weeping one. “The waters washed away our -house and we’ve lost everything we had in the world.” - -“Never mind, it’s lucky you and the children were saved,” spoke some of -those about her. - -“When did the house wash away?” asked Larry, thinking this might be -some news for Mr. Newton to put in his story. - -“A little while ago,” replied one of the women. “It was down quite -close to the river, and these people wouldn’t move out when their -neighbors did. They came near being drowned when the waters rose -suddenly. Men had to rescue them in boats.” - -Larry asked several more questions, getting the name of the rescued -ones, and the location of the house. He wrote the incident up as well -as he could on some paper he procured from the hotel clerk. - -“What’s this?” asked Mr. Newton, when he came in half an hour later, -and Larry handed him the sheets. - -“Just a little something I picked up around the hotel, and thought -might go in the story,” replied the boy. - -“Good for you!” exclaimed the reporter. “You’re the kind of a helper to -have. Did you arrange about the telegraph?” - -Larry repeated what the operator had said, and then Mr. Newton started -to write his story. He used what Larry had given him, fixing it up -a bit, and soon had quite a batch of stuff ready to be telegraphed. -Larry took it over to the office, and, while he was gone, Mr. Newton -continued to write. By the time Larry returned the reporter had another -batch ready. - -“There,” he said as he rubbed his aching fingers, “I guess that will be -enough for to-day unless something breaks loose. Now, after you come -back from the office, we’ll have dinner.” - -During the afternoon Mr. Newton and Larry walked about the town. The -reporter wanted to familiarize himself with the location of various -buildings so if the place was swept away he would be able to write -intelligently about it. - -Toward evening they paid another visit to the dam. They found a bigger -crowd than ever at it, and there was a group of men with lanterns -walking about. - -“What’s going on?” asked Mr. Newton of a man who stood near. - -“Going to try dynamite,” said the man. - -“Not to blow up the dam?” - -“Oh, my, no! Going to try and blow a hole in the side of the hill quite -a ways up the reservoir to see if they can let some of the water out -and relieve the pressure on the dam.” - -“When will they do that?” - -“First thing in the morning.” - -“That will be more news for us, Larry,” spoke Mr. Newton. - -“Are you newspaper men?” inquired the man. - -“Yes, from the New York _Leader_,” replied the reporter and Larry was -proud to be in the same class with Mr. Newton, though he knew he had -not gotten there yet. - -“Well, you’ll have plenty of news soon,” the man continued. - -“How so?” - -“Why, the water’s risen six inches this afternoon. It’s only a foot and -a half from the top of the dam now. Then we just got word that a small -dam up at a place called Meadeville is liable to burst any minute. It -won’t do much damage up there, but the water feeds into this reservoir -and if it gets here, which it’s liable to do to-morrow, why, this whole -thing will go.” - -“I wonder if our hotel’s in any danger?” asked the reporter. - -“No,” replied the man. “That’s on high ground, but the part of the town -to the west of it is in a very dangerous position, if the dam gives -way.” - -“Well, it’s a comfort to know you have a safe place to sleep, at any -rate,” Mr. Newton remarked, “but I’m sorry for the others.” - -Larry and his friend spent some more time looking around, and then -decided to go back to the hotel. The whole town was full of excitement. -Few persons dared go to bed, for fear the calamity would overtake them. -They preferred to sit up and wait for it. A large force of men were -stationed at the dam to give warning in all directions at the first -sign of a break of any kind. - -Larry managed to get a few winks of sleep, but he was too anxious about -the flood, and also worried about his sister, to rest well. As for Mr. -Newton, nothing seemed to worry him, and he slept as well as though at -home. - -The rain let up a bit toward morning, but the heavy clouds and the -unchanged wind showed that the storm was not over. The first thing -after breakfast and getting their mail, including a letter with fair -news for Larry, Mr. Newton went out to the dam. The waters had risen -slightly, and some engineers who had been summoned said that the -pressure on the stone wall was now enormous, and must, unless the flood -went down, burst it. - -“We’ll go and take a look at the place where they’re going to -dynamite,” said Mr. Newton. - -They found a corps of men busy. Red flags placed here and there warned -the people to keep back from the danger zone. The place where the -explosive was going to be set off was near a deep gully, and the men -hoped to drive the waters into it and away from the town and dam. - -“How soon are they going to set it off?” Mr. Newton asked of a man who -had one of the red flags. - -“In about an hour,” was the reply. - -“Then we’ll stay and watch it,” said Mr. Newton to Larry. “I can send -an account of it to the paper. It will make good reading.” - -The preparations went busily on. It began to rain again, but the men -working at the dynamite explosion did not seem to mind it. They were -too interested in the result of the experiment which might mean so much -to all of them. - -At last those bearing the red flags, at a signal from someone in -charge, warned the onlookers farther back. - -“I guess it’s going off now!” said Mr. Newton. “We’d better get away a -bit.” - -They retreated several hundred feet. While they were wondering whether -they were far enough off there came a dull rumble and roar. The ground -seemed to tremble and then, as they looked, they saw a mass of earth -and rocks rise high in the air. - -“There she goes!” exclaimed Larry. - -“Now let’s see if it does any good,” said Mr. Newton. - -They looked to see if the big lake of water would become less as a new -outlet was provided, but it did not. Either the dynamite had not been -placed right, or the men had calculated too much on its power. At any -rate, though a big hole was blown in the hill, near the ravine, there -was still a large piece of earth between the gully and the imprisoned -water. The dynamite had failed to do its work. - -“Come on,” said Mr. Newton to Larry. “We’ll get some stuff off to the -paper and then we can come back.” - -Through the mud and rain they splashed to the hotel. There the reporter -wrote up his story and sent Larry to the telegraph office with it, -about a mile and a half away. - -“I tell you what it is,” said Mr. Newton on Larry’s return, “we’ll have -to get up a new scheme. It takes too long to go from the hotel to the -telegraph office. I wonder how we can save time.” - -“I might run faster,” suggested Larry. - -“No, you run fast enough now. I’m not finding fault with you.” - -“I might hire a bicycle.” - -“How do you mean?” - -“Why, I mean I could get a wheel here, and take the copy in on that. -I could also get out to the dam, and you could follow. Then you could -write the stuff there and I could rush it to the telegraph office right -from the scene.” - -“Good idea!” exclaimed Mr. Newton. “We’ll do it. But can you ride a -bicycle in this weather?” - -“I guess so,” said Larry. “I’m pretty good on one. Besides the roads -are hard, and the rain hasn’t hurt them much.” - -That afternoon Larry made arrangements to hire a wheel, which he -brought around to the hotel. He found that, though it was a trifle -awkward to ride it with a rubber coat and big boots on, he could -manage, but he did not make as fast time as he would have done -otherwise. - -“But it’s better than walking,” said Larry. - -That day, and the one which followed, were anxious ones. The water rose -steadily, but so slowly that it could scarcely be noticed, on account -of being spread over such a large surface. The engineers reported that -the strain on the dam was increasing. - -Many more people whose houses were nearest to the rising waters began -moving out. Appeals for help were sent to nearby towns, and several -boats were brought over to be used in case of emergency. Several small -gasolene boats also came, and one man offered to bring his steam launch -over if the flood continued. - -In the meanwhile the people were filled with anxiety. They could do no -work, and stood around waiting for what they feared would happen. - -Mr. Newton sent off a good account to his paper. That evening he went -down to the railroad station. On the last train in came several young -men, and a number of boys with them. - -“I thought they’d be soon here,” said Mr. Newton to Larry. - -“Who are they?” - -“Reporters from other New York papers. Now we’ll have to hustle for -beats.” - - - - -CHAPTER XXXII - -THE FLOOD INCREASES - - -Late that night, after Larry and Mr. Newton had gone to bed, they were -awakened by a noise and excitement in the street. The rain had let up a -little, and they got out of bed and went to a window. - -“What’s the matter?” called Mr. Newton to a man down in the street. - -“The dam at Meadeville has burst,” was the reply. “Ours will go in -about ten hours!” - -“That means work for to-morrow,” commented the reporter. - -“Hadn’t we better get out now and see what’s going on?” asked Larry. - -“No, it wouldn’t do any good. There’s no immediate danger, or they -would have told us. So we might as well stay in bed and rest up. The -chances are we’ll not get to bed at all to-morrow night.” - -“Not get to bed?” - -“No,” replied the reporter. “When you get to be a real newspaper man, -Larry, you’ll find that your time is the paper’s you work for. You -mustn’t sleep or be awake except in the interests of the sheet. But -when there’s nothing doing, get all the rest you can. You’ll need it -sometimes. Working all night is nothing. That’s fun. It’s being up six -nights out of seven that makes it hard. But we don’t have to do that. -So go back to bed and sleep as well as you can.” - -Larry tried to but he found it hard work. He listened to the rain drops -and thought of what would happen when the big dam burst. This made him -so wide awake that he tried to count the number of drops that fell on a -tin roof, thinking the monotony of this might send him to slumber. - -Finally, after admiring the calm and peaceful manner in which Mr. -Newton dropped off to sleep, Larry found his eyes growing heavy. He -began to dream he was swimming in a flood of waters, and trying to -climb to the top of a big dam, from which he fell back with a shock -that woke him up. - -He aroused himself with a suddenness that startled him, to find Mr. -Newton shaking him vigorously. - -“I didn’t mean for you to sleep so sound you couldn’t wake up,” said -the reporter with a smile. “It’s time to hustle out and see what’s -doing, I guess.” - -“Is it raining yet?” asked Larry. - -“Like cats and dogs. We’re going to have a bad day. But never mind. -There’ll be lots of news.” - -And news there was in plenty. In anticipation of the danger the people -knew would result when the waters from the broken dam at Meadeville -reached them, many inhabitants that had not hitherto moved from their -houses did so now. - -Boats were at a premium, as they were needed to convey the people and -their most valued possessions to high ground. There was a range of -hills back of the town, and there most of those who left their homes -were going. - -By reason of its position about half of the town was in danger of -inundation should the dam break. It was the people living in that -section who were getting out. The others were in comparatively no -danger. Some of these latter gave shelter to those who deserted their -homes, but as it was the better and wealthier section of Stoneville -that was in danger, the inhabitants of the poorer part could not offer -much in the way of accommodations. - -Some got tents which, in spite of the rain, they erected on the hill -tops, and there, with what few things they could take away in boats, -they set up camps. - -Business was suspended. All the men who could joined in and helped -to care for the unfortunates or transport their household goods and -valuables. As soon as he had sent off a story Mr. Newton joined in -this work, and Larry helped him. - -There were many other reporters on the scene now, and some had brought -copy boys or office assistants along to help them. For once in its -history Stoneville found itself of much importance to the outside -world, for the news of the flood was eagerly read. - -When Larry was coming back from the telegraph office with his second -batch of copy, pedaling his wheel along the muddy street, he heard a -voice call: - -“Hello, kid! What you doing here?” - -He looked up to behold his old enemy Peter Manton. - -“I’m working for Mr. Newton,” replied Larry, not feeling any too -friendly. - -“I’m working too,” volunteered Peter, seemingly forgetting that there -was an old score between him and Larry. “I’m on the _Scorcher_. I’ll -bet we beat you fellows all hollow. The _Scorcher_ plays up news in red -type on the front page. It’s a dandy paper.” - -Larry did not reply, but Peter called after him: - -“Where you stopping?” - -“At the hotel,” replied Larry, not caring to be impolite. - -“See you later,” called Peter as he kept on toward the telegraph -office. “Yes, I’ll see you later, and I guess you’ll wish you hadn’t -seen me,” muttered Peter, shaking his fist at Larry’s back. If Larry -could have seen this he might have worried a little, but, as it was, he -did not. - -Getting back to the hotel, Larry found the place filled with excited -men. They all seemed to be talking at once, but all Larry could -distinguish was “dynamite,” “blow it up,” and “save our lives.” - -“What’s the matter?” he asked of Mr. Newton. - -“They are talking of a plan to lower dynamite to the foot of the dam, -and blow a big hole in it to relieve the pressure,” said the reporter. - -“But wouldn’t that be as dangerous as if the dam broke of its own -weakness?” - -“That’s what I think, but some of the others seem to believe the hole, -if they could make it, would serve as a big outlet.” - -“What are they going to do about it?” - -“Nothing. In the first place they haven’t the dynamite, and if they had -it, they couldn’t get anyone to go out on the dam and lower it, for the -thing may give way any minute.” - -“What makes such a crowd here?” - -“A lot more people have deserted their homes, and have come here for -shelter.” - -“Is the danger greater?” - -“They say the dam will go in about an hour.” - -“What are you going to do?” - -“I have a plan,” said Mr. Newton, “and I want you to help me carry it -out.” - -“What is it?” asked Larry. - -“We’ll both go out to the dam,” said the reporter. “We’ll wait there -until it gives way, which it must do now in the course of an hour or -two. I’ll be there and I’ll write up a short account. You’ll jump on -your wheel and hurry to the telegraph office with the copy. We’ll get -it to the office in time for the last edition and beat all the other -papers unless some of them are smart enough to play the same trick, and -I don’t think they will.” - -“That’s a good idea,” commented Larry. “I’ll get my wheel ready.” - -In a little while he and Mr. Newton were starting for the dam. The -storm was only a drizzle now, but it was unpleasant enough. Larry -thought he would never get dried out again, so long had he been wet -through. Mr. Newton said he thought they could both qualify as fishes. - -At the dam they found an immense crowd of people. The angry waters were -a little higher than before, but were still several inches from the top -of the dam. Only the wonderful strength of the masonry saved it. As it -was the engineers said there was an indication of a slight crack which, -if it increased, would mean that the whole thing would go to pieces. - -Raising his umbrella Mr. Newton sat down under it in a place where he -could watch developments. He was well out of harm’s way in case the -dam should break, and the people, also, kept well back. With pencil and -paper ready the reporter waited for what seemed must happen almost any -second. - -“She’s beginning to rise faster!” a man on watch cried. “We’re -beginning to get some of the water from the broken dam above!” - -As he spoke there sounded a dull boom through the vast pile of masonry, -that seemed to indicate it was about to give way. The crowd started as -though shocked by a current of electricity. - -“Is it going?” asked Larry. - -“I’m afraid so,” said Mr. Newton. “Get ready!” - -There was a moment of suspense. The waters swirled and hissed about the -solid wall, as though enraged at not being able to batter it down. Then -the clouds opened and a flood came out of the sky. - -There was a stir in the crowd and several young men came up on the run, -heading for the umbrella over Mr. Newton. - -“Hello, Harvey!” they shouted. “Anything doing?” - -“There will be in a little while,” replied Mr. Newton. “Where have you -fellows been?” - -“Oh, we weren’t sent out until yesterday,” said one. “They thought this -didn’t amount to anything.” - -“I guess they read the _Leader_ then, eh?” asked Mr. Newton, with a -smile. - -“That’s right, throw it into us,” said several. “But we’re here now, -and there won’t be any more beats.” - -“That’s what you think,” said the _Leader_ reporter. - -“Who are they?” asked Larry in a low tone. - -“Men from the other papers,” said Mr. Newton. “Look out for them. They -may be up to some trick.” - -There was a sudden movement in the crowd, and from the midst of the -people a man emerged. He carried a bundle in his hands, and the men -seemed to want to get as far from him as possible. - -“I wonder what’s going on?” said Larry. - -Then a man went past on the run. - -“What’s up?” asked one of the reporters. - -“A fellow has agreed to try and dynamite the dam!” was the answer. -“He’s going to try and blow a hole in the bottom to let the water out.” - -“Gee whiz! That’ll make a story!” said several. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXIII - -DYNAMITING THE DAM - - -The reporters got out their pencils and paper and began to interview -the man. They wanted to know who was going to set off the dynamite, how -many pounds he would use, where he got it, how he was going to use it, -how he would lower it, and what would happen when he had it in place. - -“If you want to know, go ask him,” the man exclaimed at length. “I’m -not going to stay around here. It’s bad enough if the dam breaks, let -alone the dynamite going up!” - -Then he started off on a run, while the reporters, with the exception -of Mr. Newton, stood with pencils poised. - -But it seemed that something was going on in the crowd down at the -western end of the dam. There were men running to and fro, and -preparations seemed to be under way for some undertaking. - -As the reporters and others watched they saw a man run out on the broad -coping on top of the dam. In his hands he carried a package which they -guessed to be dynamite. He seemed to have no fear of the deep waters on -one side of him or the big gully on the other, to which he might fall -and be dashed to death on the rocks. - -With a long rope, around which was a fuse, he lowered the explosive to -the bottom of the big wall of masonry. The idea was to blow a hole in -the rocks under it, and not to injure the dam itself, but to make a -place where the water could escape, in addition to the regular exits. -It was a task of peril and few would have liked to undertake it. - -The crowd almost in breathless silence watched the man lower the -powerful explosive to the bottom of the wall inch by inch. He seemed -like a fly out there on the narrow coping of the dam, and likely to be -swept to his death any minute. - -Mr. Newton, who had learned the brave man’s name from a bystander, -was busy writing a story about him which he intended to send to the -paper. He was on a little hill where he could have a good view of the -operation and yet be out of danger. - -Suddenly the man raised his hand. It was a signal that the dynamite -was in place and that he was about to touch off the fuse. Hundreds ran -back, for, though they were in no danger, they imagined they were. - -The man was seen to stoop over and strike a match. A little puff of -smoke arose. The crowd watched to see him run back and regain solid -ground. But, as it happened, the first match went out. He had to light -another. This time he managed to kindle the fuse. A little puff of -smoke arose on the damp air. The rain came down harder. - -“It may put the fuse out,” said Mr. Newton. - -The man was bending over, watching it. He seemed to be fanning the fuse -to a blaze. Then, all at once, he started on a run toward shore. - -“I guess he’s lighted it,” observed Mr. Newton, looking at his watch. - -There were several anxious minutes of waiting. A thin wreath of smoke -arose from the fuse. The other reporters were scribbling away. - -Suddenly a dull boom sounded. A cloud of rocks and dirt arose from the -bottom of the dam. The waters in the reservoir seemed tremendously -agitated. - -“There’s a hole in the dam!” cried several. - -“No, there isn’t!” said Mr. Newton to Larry. “Here! Take this copy. -It’s another failure! I’ve wired ’em to hold back for an extra. The dam -is liable to go any second now. The explosion only weakened it along -the whole length. Hurry back, Larry.” - -He gave the boy a bundle of copy and Larry, jumping on his wheel, -pedaled off as fast as he could. Several of the other reporters, who -had not thought to provide messengers, started for the telegraph office -on the run. - -“You’re a foxy one, Newton,” they said. “But you wait! We’ll beat you -yet.” - -“You’re welcome to try,” was Mr. Newton’s answer. - -Larry was making good time, in spite of the rain-soaked roads. He -reached the telegraph office some minutes in advance of the other -reporters, and, as the rule is in regard to press dispatches, the first -to come is the first to be served, Mr. Newton’s stuff went over the -wire ahead of the other dispatches. - -“I can’t promise to send much more,” said the operator, as several of -the reporters came into the office. “Just got word that the waters just -above here are worse than ever. Guess I’ll have to vacate here soon.” - -“Where will you go?” asked Larry. - -“I’ll take some of the instruments and set up a temporary office on -the high hill back of the town,” was the answer. “The water can’t get -there, and if you’ll get a boat you may be able to bring me your copy.” - -“I’ll get a boat,” said Larry, with a laugh. “But perhaps it will not -be as bad as you think.” - -“It will be worse,” replied the operator, clicking away at his key. - -Larry started back to where Mr. Newton was. On the way he met Peter -Manton, his old rival, bringing some copy from the reporter for whom he -was working. - -“You think you’re smart with your wheel,” said Peter. “But you can’t -use it much longer. The dam is breaking and you will have to swim.” - -At this news, that the dam was about to give way, Larry put on extra -speed. He wanted to be back in time to get some more copy from Mr. -Newton, who, he knew, would want to send word for the extra. - -As he sped along, and hard enough going it was, he heard a dull boom -over toward the dam. This was followed by excited shouts. Then came a -subdued roar. - -“The dam has gone!” Larry exclaimed. - -An instant later he saw a number of people running toward him, and he -came to a halt. - -“I guess I can’t get down there,” thought the boy. “I wonder where Mr. -Newton is?” - -At that moment he saw the reporter coming toward him on the run. - -“Go back! Go back!” cried Mr. Newton. “The waters are rising fast!” - -“Did the dam break?” asked Larry, wanting to make sure. - -“Of course. A big hole right in the middle. Fortunately a part of it -held, or the flood would be so sudden that we would have had trouble in -getting away. But come on.” - -“Where are we going?” asked Larry. - -“Back to the hotel,” replied Mr. Newton. “We’ll be safe there. I want -to get a line off to the paper.” - -“You’ll have to hurry,” said the boy. “The telegraph operator said if -the dam broke he’d have to leave.” - -“Wait, and I’ll scribble a line now,” said the reporter. He hastily -wrote something on a piece of paper, addressed it to the _Leader_, and -gave it to Larry. - -“Take it on a jump now, Larry, my boy!” he cried, and Larry rushed off -on his wheel. “I’ll meet you at the hotel,” called Mr. Newton after him. - -Larry reached the telegraph office just as the operator was leaving it. - -“Wait a minute!” called the boy. “I have some copy for you.” - -“Can’t wait!” exclaimed the telegraph man. “The water’s rising and I’m -going to get out while there’s time.” - -“This will only take you a second,” said Larry. “It’s got to get to the -_Leader_. It tells about the dam breaking. They’re going to get out an -extra!” - -“Well, I wouldn’t do it for anyone else,” said the operator, “but -you’re a plucky boy to come here with the copy when everyone else is -thinking of getting away, so I’ll send the dispatch for you. After this -you may find me in a temporary office in a tent up on the hill.” - -“I’m much obliged to you,” said Larry, handing over the copy. He waited -until he saw the operator send it off, and then the man, taking some of -his instruments with him, left the office. - -As he did so a small stream of water began to run down the middle of -the street. - -“Flood’s coming!” exclaimed the telegrapher. “You were just in time!” - -Then he began to run, and Larry, abandoning his wheel, did likewise, -for he knew because of the formation of the ground that there might be -deep water there soon. - -The rain had stopped once more, and this time it seemed as if it might -let up for some time, as the clouds grew lighter. But that was too late -to prevent the damage by the rising waters, which continued to increase -in depth. Fortunately most of the people in that section of the town -had been given plenty of warning and had left their homes, taking all -their most valued possessions with them. - -However, there were some who lingered too late, and they were now -fleeing with only a few necessaries. They made for the other side of -the place, where the high ground around the hotel offered a chance for -safety. - -Larry and the operator hurried along, the former aiming to reach the -hotel, and the telegrapher to make arrangements to set up a temporary -office. At the hotel Larry found Mr. Newton, surrounded by a number of -newspaper men, waiting for him. - -“Did you make it?” asked Mr. Newton. - -“Just in time. It was the last message,” said the boy. - -“What’s that, Newton?” asked some of his acquaintances. - -“I just sent a wire about the dam bursting,” was the answer. - -“You don’t mean you’ve got another beat on us?” - -“Well, I guess Larry did the biggest part of it,” replied Mr. Newton. - -“Well, you two are a great team,” said some of the other reporters, -disgusted at being beaten again. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXIV - -UNDER WATER - - -The town was now a scene of wild confusion. The people were nearly out -of their senses with fear, for they were alarmed lest the waters reach -even the high places. Cooler heads did their best to quiet the excited -ones, but it was hard work. - -Boats were plying everywhere, taking people from the second stories -of their houses in some cases, and saving some from possible death by -drowning. The waters, which were now turned into a raging torrent, were -filled with débris brought down from up country. - -Sometimes whole houses or barns would be borne along, and when they -struck a building in Stoneville there was a crash that could be heard -for some distance and the stationary residence would be knocked from -its foundation and carried away. - -The houses of those whom the flood had not reached were thrown open -to the unfortunates. The hotel took in all it could hold, but the -proprietor was obliged to put everyone on short rations, for food was -getting scarce, and the railroad was under water, so no more could be -brought in that way. - -There was plenty of material for newspaper copy now. The reporters, Mr. -Newton included, went out on a tour of investigation, making notes of -what they saw. The men who worked on morning papers were in a quandary -how to get their news off until someone said there was a telegraph -office in the next town, about five miles away over the hills. - -Several of them clubbed together, hired a horse and carriage, and drove -over with their copy. - -“I wonder if I’ll have to do that in the morning,” Mr. Newton said to -Larry. - -“I think I have a better plan,” said the boy. - -“What is it?” - -Then Larry told of how the Stoneville operator was going to open a -temporary office on the hill in a tent. - -“If he does that, in time for us, it will be just the thing,” said Mr. -Newton. “Keep quiet concerning it. Don’t say anything about it to the -other fellows.” - -“Why not?” - -“Because we don’t want them to know it. If they find it out they’ll go -there and file stuff, and ours may be delayed. You must learn, in the -newspaper business, to know everything and tell nothing, especially to -the fellow on the other paper.” - -“I’ll go over the first thing in the morning and find out if he’s -opened his place,” said Larry. - -That night was one of terror. Fortunately there was enough warning -about the bursting of the dam so that most of the people were out -of the way in time, and none was killed. But the property loss was -tremendous. About midnight the waters ceased to rise, but they still -inundated most of the town, and would for some time, since the country -for quite a distance above was covered with the flood. - -Early the next morning Larry got up, dressed, and went downstairs. He -was surprised to find the corridor of the hotel partly filled with -water. - -“What’s the matter?” he asked the clerk. - -“Oh, they tried to drown us out last night,” was the reply. - -“Has the flood reached here?” asked the boy. - -“Take a look out front and you’ll think so,” the man went on. - -Larry looked from the windows. He saw that the street was inundated, -the water being about four feet deep. - -“How am I going to get out?” he asked in dismay. - -“Swim,” said the clerk with a laugh, in spite of the gravity of the -situation. “It’s not very cold. Or you might wait for the flood to go -down.” - -“I haven’t time for that,” said Larry, “and I don’t believe I could -swim as far as I intend to go.” - -“There are some fellows outside with boats, and they may take you where -you want to go,” the clerk said. - -“That’s a good idea,” said the boy. “I’ll try it.” - -He went out on the front steps, through the corridor, which contained -about an inch of water. As he reached the front door a rowboat, -propelled by a big man, shot up. - -“Boat?” asked the man, in the manner of one inquiring whether one would -have a cab. “Take you anywhere for half a dollar.” - -Larry mentioned where he wanted to be landed, and got in the boat. The -oarsman said he would take him as near the place on the hill as he -could go. - -“You’ll have to walk the rest of the way,” the improvised ferryman said. - -“I’m willing,” replied the boy. - -He found that the operator had set up a small tent, and was busy over -his instruments, which he had attached to the telegraph line that -passed over the brow of the hill. - -“How soon can you take messages?” asked Larry. - -“Oh, it’s you, eh?” asked the operator. “You were my last customer in -the old place, and you’re the first one in the new.” - -“Will you soon be ready?” asked Larry. - -“In about an hour,” was the reply. - -The man busied himself over his instruments, connecting them to -batteries he had procured and then adjusting them. Next he climbed a -telegraph pole and “cut in” as it is called on the main line, fastening -the wire from his machines to the regular line. Larry watched him with -interest. - -“I’ll soon be ready for you,” said the man. - -“Then I’ll go back and get some copy,” said Larry. - -He went down to the boat which was waiting for him, and in a little -while found himself back at the hotel. By this time nearly all the -guests were up and the women, especially, were much frightened when -they saw that the place was in the middle of a miniature lake, and that -there was water in the corridor. - -“Don’t be alarmed,” the clerk was saying. “The water is not rising, -and, though it will probably stay here for some time, there is no -danger. We’ll make you as comfortable as we can, but you can’t expect -many comforts.” - -“Have the fires gone out?” asked one man. “My room is cold.” - -“The water has put the fire out in the furnace down in the cellar,” was -the reply, “but we’ve sent for oil stoves, and we’ll be able to give -you a little heat.” - -The clerk’s assurances did much to quiet the excited throng, and -then breakfast was announced, though it was not a very liberal meal. -However, there was plenty of good hot coffee and bread and butter. - -“Where have you been?” asked Mr. Newton of Larry. - -“Looking for a telegraph office,” replied the boy in a low tone, for -there were other newspaper men near by. - -“Did you find one?” - -“I did,” and then Larry whispered that the man would take messages -soon. “Get some stuff ready,” he went on, “and I’ll take it to him -before the other fellows locate him.” - -“Good idea,” said Mr. Newton. “I’ll have a bunch of copy ready in about -an hour.” - -He hurried through the meal and went over to a table, where he began -writing at a rapid rate. - -“How you going to get your stuff off?” asked some of the other -reporters. - -“That’s a secret,” replied Mr. Newton good-naturedly as he went on -describing in vigorous language the scenes in the flooded district, for -much more of the town was under water than had been expected would be -covered. - -All about were men plying here and there in boats, saving household -goods, carrying people hither and yon, and taking provisions from the -centers where food had been collected to the different places where the -people were congregated. There were one or two naphtha launches, and -any number of rowboats. - -Altogether it made a lively and unusual story. Fortunately there was -no loss of life, though there were many narrow escapes. Many head of -stock, and hundreds of horses and pigs in the country section had been -drowned. - -The breaking of the dam Mr. Newton described more fully than in his -first hasty dispatch, and putting in many exciting incidents he had a -story that he felt sure would be read with interest when it was printed -in the _Leader_. - -“Now to get it on the wire ahead of the other fellows,” he remarked to -himself, as he folded up the copy and gave it to Larry. - -“Now don’t let any of the others find out where you are going,” -cautioned Mr. Newton to the boy. “Try and fool them. Have the man row -you in a different direction, and then circle about and get to the -telegraph tent. Do you think you can do it?” - -“I guess so,” replied Larry. “I don’t believe the other reporters know -where the tent is. You can’t see it from the hotel, and they haven’t -gone out very far.” - -“All right,” replied Mr. Newton. “Come back as soon as you can. Here is -some money to pay the boatman with.” - -Larry had donned his rubber boots, but, as it was not raining, he had -no need to hoist his umbrella. It seemed at last that the storm had -ceased, though the waters had not yet begun to recede. - -Larry walked through the damp corridor, trying not to seem in a hurry -or as if he was going anywhere. He thought he had succeeded, but, just -as he was about to get into the same boat he had hired before, he saw -Peter Manton come hurrying out. Peter had a bundle of copy in his hand, -and was, evidently, going to look for a telegraph office. He glared at -Larry. - -“Here’s where we beat you,” sneered Peter. - -Larry wondered whether Peter had discovered where the telegraph office -was. If he knew, Larry thought there would be no use in trying to fool -him by taking a round-about course. If he did not, then there was a -chance of Larry reaching it first and getting Mr. Newton’s copy on the -wire. - -“Row me to the telegraph office,” was the order Larry heard Peter give -to a boatman he had engaged. - -“I don’t know where there is one,” the man said. - -“Well, row about until you find one,” said Peter, with as much airs as -though he was a reporter instead of a copy boy. “When you find it I’ll -send this stuff.” - -The man started off, rowing at random. Larry waited a while, and then, -telling his boatman to send the craft in the opposite direction from -that in which the telegraph tent was, he too started away. - -“We mustn’t let them find out where we’re going,” said Larry. “I must -get to the office first.” - - - - -CHAPTER XXXV - -THE RACE - - -In a little while the boat containing Peter was out of sight around the -corner of the street. Larry thought it would be a good time to start in -the right direction toward the telegraph office. Accordingly he told -the man at the oars to head the craft the other way. - -“I’ll bet they’re up to some trick,” the man said. “The fellow rowing -that boat is a foxy chap. I think he suspects something.” - -“Well, we’ll give him a race if we have to,” replied Larry. - -If Larry had not been so intent on his errand he would have been -interested in the strange sights all about him. The flooded city was -alive with boats rowed or being propelled in all directions. - -The people seemed to have gotten over their first fear, and, though -there was much discomfort, they were making the best of circumstances. -A large number of houses were under water to the second stories, and -the families were living on the upper floors. A corps of men brought -them food and supplies. - -Fortunately the weather was mild for November, and there was little -real suffering. There was not much food, but, now that the waters had -ceased rising, trains were being sent over the railroad bearing goods -of various sorts for the relief of the homeless ones. - -On and on Larry’s boatman rowed him. It was quite a distance to the -foot of the hill on which the telegraph tent was located, and progress -was slow while they were threading their way in and out among the -inundated streets. Care had to be taken, also, not to be struck with -the floating débris that was swirling along on the current. - -“Look behind you,” said the boatman suddenly to Larry, who was in the -stern, facing the oarsman. The boy turned. - -There, coming after them, as fast as the man could bend to the sweeps, -was the boat containing Peter. The craft was forging through the water -at a rapid pace and would be up to them in a short time. - -“They’re following us!” exclaimed Larry’s rower. - -“I guess they’ve found out where the telegraph office is,” said Larry, -“and they’re going to try and get there first.” - -“Then it’s to be a race,” replied Tony, Larry’s man. “Well, Jim Dexter -will find I’m as good a hand at the oars as he is!” With this Tony -braced himself and began taking long strokes that sent the boat through -the water at a good clip. - -“Mind where you steer now,” cautioned Tony to Larry. “Don’t run us on a -log or a floating house and I’ll get you to the telegraph place first.” - -“I hope you do,” replied Larry, as he took a firm grasp of the rudder. -“If the _Scorcher_ beats the _Leader_ I’m liable to lose my job, and so -is Mr. Newton.” - -The other boat was almost up to them now. Larry could hear Peter urging -Jim to greater exertion as the boy sat in the sternsheets and steered, -as Larry was doing. - -“Ten dollars if you beat ’em!” Peter exclaimed as his boat crept up -inch by inch, until it was almost even with Larry’s craft. - -“I don’t need any ten dollars to beat him,” said Tony, with a nod at -Jim. “He and I aren’t any too friendly and I’d like to wallop him, just -for the looks of the thing, to say nothing of helping you out.” - -“Thanks,” spoke Larry. “I haven’t ten dollars to offer you, but I’ve -no doubt Mr. Newton will pay you well if you get me to the telegraph -office first.” - -The race was now on in earnest. The boats were side by side, and not -far apart. Both were headed for the hill, on the summit of which could -be seen the white tent where the telegraph office was located. Peter -had played a trick on Larry, by pretending to be hunting for the place. -As a matter of fact he merely had Jim row about until they saw in which -direction Larry’s boat went. Then he followed. - -They were now pretty well clear of the town, and were going over -flooded fields. The water was filled with logs and stumps of trees, -planks, bits of barnyard wreckage, and occasionally the dead body of -a horse or cow. It required careful steerage to avoid hitting these -objects, and in consequence the speed was not as great as it might -otherwise have been. - -The two men, who were old-time rivals, bent to the oars until the stout -ash handles almost broke. The blades swirled through the water and the -bows made ripples and foam as both craft forged ahead. - -For a while the two boats were almost on even terms. They raced along -not ten feet apart, and so nearly alike did Jim and Tony row that it -looked as if the two were but one craft. But, little by little Tony -began to pull ahead. He put a little more force into his strokes and -took longer ones, while Jim was rowing in a rather ragged fashion. - -Once Jim caught a “crab,” and nearly went overboard. This gave Tony a -big advantage, and he got almost a length ahead. However, he lost this -lead in a little while, for Larry, by some mischance, hit a log a -glancing blow and Tony had to stop rowing in order not to upset. - -“Be careful,” cautioned Tony. “Another one like that and we’ll lose the -race.” - -“I’ll be careful,” replied Larry, ashamed of his error. - -Once again the two boats were about in line. The rowers were tiring, -however, and could not go so fast. Tony, who was an old hand at the -oars, stuck to his task with grim determination, and soon he was half a -length ahead of his rival. - -By this time a crowd of people on the shore, which they were fast -approaching, were aware that something unusual was under way. They came -down close to the water’s edge to see the outcome of the race. The -boats were now a little over a quarter of a mile away from the land. - -“They’re beating us!” exclaimed Peter, as he saw Larry’s boat pulling -steadily ahead. “Can’t you row faster, Jim?” - -“I’m doing the best I can,” was the reply, but Jim gritted his teeth -and tried to get a little more power out of his strokes. It was -seemingly useless, however, for Tony with the regularity of clockwork -was sending his boat through the water at a good clip. - -“I can’t let him beat me!” exclaimed Peter, while an ugly look stole -over his face. “If I don’t get my copy there first I’ll be discharged. -I’ve got to beat him, by fair means or foul.” - -The distance between the boats was fast widening. Larry’s was -three-quarters of a length ahead now. - -“I’ve got to do it!” exclaimed Peter in a low tone. - -Then, with a sudden yank on the tiller ropes, he shifted the rudder so -that the bow of his boat was pointed straight at Larry’s craft. - -“Look out!” cried Tony, who saw the movement. “You’ll upset us!” - -Larry, hearing the shout, turned to see Peter’s boat racing toward him. -He tried to steer out of the way, but there was no chance. An instant -later the two boats came together with a crash. The gunwale of Larry’s -boat was cracked, and the force of the impact was so heavy that his -craft careened until the water came over the other rail. - -“We’re upsetting!” cried Tony, throwing himself to one side in an -endeavor to prevent what seemed certain to happen. - -Nor could he avoid it, for a second later the boat turned turtle, -throwing the two occupants into the water. - -“You did that on purpose!” cried Tony, as he began to strike out -vigorously toward Peter’s boat. - -“It was an accident!” cried Peter, somewhat alarmed at the outcome of -his mean trick. - -“Can you swim?” asked Tony of Larry, who had sunk once, but who soon -bobbed up again. - -“Yes--I--can!” gasped the boy. “I -had--to--kick--my--rubber--boots--off--though!” - -They both struck out for Peter’s boat, expecting that the occupants -would stop and assist them. But this was not Peter’s idea. Jim would -have stopped rowing and gone to the rescue of those in the water, -but Peter steered the boat to one side and the momentum carried it a -considerable distance away. - -“Aren’t you going to help them?” asked Jim. - -“No!” snapped Peter. “You keep on rowing. We must get to the telegraph -office first! I’ve got to beat them!” - -“But they may drown!” - -“No danger. They can both swim, and they can cling to their boat until -we come back. Someone will come out from shore for them. See, some -boats are starting already.” - -This was so, several small craft putting out as soon as those on shore -saw the accident happen. - -“Now you row on!” commanded Peter. “I hired you to take me to the -telegraph office and we haven’t time to stop and rescue people.” - -“Well, of all the mean--” began Jim, and then he stopped. He realized -that Larry and Tony were in no particular danger, but he felt that -they should be taken into his boat. However, he wanted to earn the ten -dollars Peter had promised him. - -“Are you going to leave us?” called Tony. - -“It ain’t my doings,” called back Jim. “He won’t let me stop.” - -“Then he’ll get his stuff to the telegraph office first,” said Larry. -“He’ll beat me!” - -He and Tony were clinging to the keel of their overturned boat. - -“Maybe we can get this right side up and catch them,” suggested Tony. - -“No, it’s too late,” said Larry sorrowfully. “They have too much of a -start.” - -It seemed so, for Peter’s boat was now about a quarter of a mile from -shore, and Jim was rowing fast. - -“Shall we swim in or wait until someone comes out and picks us up?” -asked Tony. - -“Might as well stay here,” replied Larry. “It’s hard swimming in your -clothes.” - -His heart was full of bitterness, both at the mean trick Peter had -played, and at the thought of being beaten, for he knew that there -would not be time for the telegraph operator to send both Peter’s copy -and his also in time for the afternoon paper. The _Leader_ would be -beaten. - -“Hark! What’s that?” asked Tony, as they moved about to get better -positions in grasping the overturned boat. - -“Sounded like a whistle,” said Larry. - -“It was a whistle! A motor boat is coming toward us!” cried Tony. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXVI - -LARRY SCORES A BIG BEAT - - -Larry looked up. There, bearing down on them, was a swift gasolene -launch, one of several that had been doing rescue work about the -flooded town. The man at the wheel had her headed for the upset rowboat. - -“They’re going to pick us up!” cried Tony. - -“But it will be too late,” said Larry. - -“Maybe not, that’s a powerful craft, and maybe they’ll get you to shore -ahead of that little skunk!” spoke Tony. - -“Stand by to be taken off!” cried the captain of the motor boat. - -With a graceful curve the craft swung up to where Larry and Tony clung -to the keel of their boat. The man at the wheel pulled a lever and the -screw reversed, though the engines did not stop. The motor boat slowed -up, and, as it slowly passed by, the two in the water grasped the -gunwale, which was low, and pulled themselves aboard, before the craft -had come to a stop. - -“Saw you upset,” said the motor boat’s captain, “and I headed right for -you.” - -“We didn’t upset, we were run down,” said Tony, “and there goes the -mean chap that did it,” he added, pointing to Peter’s boat. - -“Can you put us ashore in a hurry?” asked Larry. “I must get some press -dispatches to the telegraph office. I want to beat the boy in that -boat. We were beating him, but he ran his boat into ours and upset us. -Then he wouldn’t stop to pick us up.” - -“So you want to get ashore first, eh?” asked the owner of the motor -craft. “What paper are you from?” - -“I’m with Mr. Newton of the _Leader_,” said Larry. - -“What, Harvey Newton?” asked the man. - -“Yes,” said Larry. - -“Well, I’d do a good bit for Harvey Newton,” the captain went on. “He -was at our motor boat races in New York bay last summer, and I found -him a good friend.” - -“Do you think you can get me ashore first?” asked Larry. - -“Well, he’s got a pretty good start,” said the captain, “but I never -saw anything that could beat the _Porpoise_ if you gave her half a -show. We’ll see what we can do. Can you steer while I attend to the -engines?” - -“I guess so,” replied Larry. - -“Better let me,” put in Tony. “I know the lay of the land better than -you do.” - -“Go ahead then,” said the captain. “I’ll speed her up for all she’s -worth.” - -He went back to the stern. The steady chug-chug of the motor, which had -not ceased, was now increased threefold as the captain shifted various -levers, let more gasolene into the cylinders and advanced the spark. -Then, with Tony at the wheel, the _Porpoise_ shot ahead, in an attempt -to beat Peter to the shore. - -How the swift craft cut through the water! A big wave arose on either -side of the bow. The motors were exploding like a battery of gatling -guns as the captain, in the role of engineer, opened the exhaust to -clean out the cylinders. Then, shutting it down, the engine throbbed -like a big turbine wheel under heavy pressure. - -Nearer and nearer to the shore the craft forged. Peter, looking back, -saw that Larry and Tony had been rescued and, in the fast boat, were -bearing down on him. - -“Row! Row!” he cried to Jim. “They’re going to run us down!” - -“Don’t worry, they’re not as mean as you are,” said Jim. - -“Then they’ll beat us ashore!” yelled Peter. - -“I shouldn’t wonder if they did,” was Jim’s cool reply. “I’m doing my -best, but I can’t beat the _Porpoise_. She’s the fastest boat around -here.” - -Peter’s craft was now about three hundred feet from the shore. There -was a big crowd waiting to see the outcome of the affair. - - Illustration: “ROW! ROW! THEY ARE GOING TO RUN US DOWN” - _From Office Boy to Reporter_ Page 300 - -On came the _Porpoise_, going like a race horse. Larry stood behind -Tony, who grasped the spokes of the steering wheel with a firm grip, -and kept the craft in a straight course. - -“Will we beat ’em?” asked Larry in a strained voice. - -“I don’t know! I hope so,” said Tony as he shook his head to get the -water, that was dripping from his hair, out of his eyes. - -The engines seemed to increase their speed. They throbbed like the -heart of an athlete at the end of a two-mile run. Then, as the muffler -was cut out, the explosions came with deafening power. - -Closer and closer to the rowboat came the motor craft. Jim was pulling -with all his strength at the oars. Now his boat was but a hundred feet -from shore. But, like an eagle swooping down, the _Porpoise_ was after -him. - -“Get ready to jump!” called the captain. “Put her broadside to the -shore,” he added to Tony. “We can’t stop without ramming the mud unless -you do.” - -“Aye, aye, sir!” called Tony tersely. - -Then, in a smother of foam, and passing so close that the wash rocked, -and nearly upset the rowboat, the motor craft passed her, and shot up -along shore. - -The captain reversed the screw, and the blades churned up the water -until it seemed that a small volcano was beneath the waves. - -“Jump and run for it!” the owner of the _Porpoise_ called to Larry. - -The boy needed no second bidding. Over the side he went, while the -craft was still moving at good speed. He jumped into about two feet of -water and then, reaching into his pocket to see if his precious copy -was safe, he started on a run up the hill toward the telegraph office. -The crowd set up a cheer, though they did not know what for, except -that there had been a race and someone had won. - -The waves created by the passage of the _Porpoise_ prevented Jim from -rowing steadily, and it was several minutes later before he was able to -land Peter. The boy jumped ashore and started to run after Larry. - -“Here!” cried Jim, catching hold of him. “Where’s my ten dollars?” - -“Pay you when I come back,” said Peter. - -“You’ll pay me now,” said Jim, taking a firm grip on the boy’s -shoulder. “I’ve earned my money and I want it.” - -“There you go!” exclaimed Peter, throwing down a bill and wrenching -himself free. Then he started up the hill after his rival. - -But Larry had too good a start to be beaten now. Straight toward the -tent he dashed, giving but one glance behind to see that Peter was far -in the rear. All he needed to do, he knew, was to get his copy into the -hands of the operator first. The rule of precedence would then prevail. - -“There!” gasped Larry, a few minutes later, as, panting from his run, -he dashed into the tent. “There’s some copy. Rush it!” - -“Looks as if you’d been rushing it,” commented the man, with a glance -at Larry. “Why, what in the world is the matter with it? It’s all wet.” - -“I fell overboard,” said Larry. “But you can read it, can’t you?” - -“I reckon so. Lucky it’s in pencil instead of ink. If it was ink, it -would have run in the water.” - -Fortunately Mr. Newton had used tough and heavy paper to write on, -and Larry had folded the copy tightly and placed it inside a leather -pocketbook, so that, though the sheets were pretty damp, their short -immersion in the water had not harmed them. - -Three minutes after Larry had “filed” his copy Peter came dashing in. -He flung down a package of paper. - -“Here! Get that right on the wire!” he ordered in an insolent tone. - -“You’ll have to wait,” said the operator coolly. “This gentleman had -his in ahead of you, and the rule here is ‘first come first served.’” - -“I’ll give you five dollars if you send mine first,” said Peter. - -“Look here, you little whipper-snapper!” the operator exclaimed. “I -want you to understand you can’t bribe me. I wouldn’t send yours first -for fifty dollars. Now you get out of this tent. You can leave your -copy, and I’ll send it after I get this batch off. But the _Leader_ -stuff goes first!” - -Peter, with an angry glance at Larry, slunk out. - -“I’d like to give him a good switching,” muttered the operator, as he -began to work his telegraph instruments preparatory to getting Larry’s -copy off. “The idea of trying to bribe me!” - -Larry, after seeing that Mr. Newton’s story was safe, turned to go back. - -“What’s your hurry?” asked the operator. “Tell me what happened. I’ll -have to wait a little while until I get a clear wire.” - -Then Larry related the story of the race with Peter, and told of the -latter’s mean trick. - -“Well, I’m mighty glad you beat him,” said the operator. “This story -will set New York by the ears, and your paper will be the only one to -get it. All the wires are down but mine, and it will take me nearly -all the morning to get this stuff off. That will make it too late for -any of the _Scorcher’s_ copy to get to the office in time for to-day. -You’ll score a big beat all right.” - -And so Larry did. He did not learn of it until some days later, -however, as they did not hear from the _Leader_ office until that time, -because of the difficulty in getting messages and mail through. - -That night, in their room at the hotel, Larry told Mr. Newton the story -of the race. - -“You’re too modest,” the reporter declared. “I heard all about it from -my friend of the _Porpoise_. If this don’t result in something nice for -you when we get back I’ll miss my guess. By the way, there’s a letter -for you.” - -“I hope it’s from mother,” exclaimed Larry. “She hasn’t written in two -days.” - -It was a letter from home, and contained good news, for it said that -Lucy was doing finely, and the doctor expected she would soon be well -and able to walk. - -“Hurrah!” cried Larry. “This is better than getting a beat!” - -“They’re both good,” said Mr. Newton, smiling. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXVII - -LARRY’S ADVANCEMENT - - -Almost as rapidly as it had risen the flood went down. The storm -ceased and the waters, finding many places to run to, soon disposed of -themselves. The day after Larry won the race that was to mean so much -to him the part of the town around the hotel was almost free from the -flood. - -“The worst is over,” said Mr. Newton. “We’ll be going back home soon.” - -“We can’t go any too soon to suit me,” said Larry. “I want to see my -mother and Lucy and the others.” - -“I don’t blame you,” spoke the reporter. “I’ll be glad to get back to -New York myself.” - -They remained in Stoneville two days longer, and each day Mr. Newton -sent a graphic story of the flood. The townspeople were returning to -the homes they had deserted. Much damage had been done, but help came -pouring in from every side. - -Trains began to run, and the mails, that had been interrupted, resumed -their service. Larry and Mr. Newton received several copies of the -_Leader_, containing the story which Larry had so successfully raced -to get to the telegraph office. Copies of other New York papers, of -the same date were also received, but none of them had more than a few -lines about the flood and burst dam, while the _Leader’s_ story covered -a whole page under big headlines. - -On the evening of the second day, after the big beat, Mr. Newton -received a telegram from Mr. Emberg. It read: - - “Congratulations to you and Larry. Come home. Associated press - will cover remainder of the story.” - -“Get ready!” exclaimed Mr. Newton to Larry. “We’re going home -to-morrow!” - -Several of the other special correspondents had already left -Stoneville. Some accompanied Mr. Newton and Larry the next morning. - -“Well, you put it all over us,” said one of them to the _Leader_ -reporter. - -“With Larry’s help I did,” replied Mr. Newton. “If I hadn’t had him -along, I never could have done it.” - -“Larry’s all right,” was the immediate and hearty response. - -Larry thought he had never been on a train that moved so slowly. It -seemed to crawl along. A flying machine would have been too slow for -him, so eager was he to get home. - -But at last he arrived in New York. It seemed good to get away from the -sight of dirty brown water, sorrowful people, and the constant rain -that had been his portion for a week. - -“I’ll see you at the office in the morning,” said Mr. Newton. -“Good-night.” - -“Good-night,” called Larry as he ran after a car. - -He reached home. Into the house he burst with: - -“Here I am, mother! How are you? How’s Lucy? How are Mary and Jimmy?” - -“Oh, Larry, Larry!” exclaimed his mother, throwing her arms around him. - -Mary and Jimmy crowded around their brother, clamoring for kisses, -while Jimmy wanted to hear all about the flood. - -“How’s Lucy?” asked Larry again, as soon as he could quiet the -youngster. - -“Doing finely,” replied the nurse, coming into the room. “We have a -surprise for you.” - -“What is it?” asked Larry. - -“Come and show him, Lucy,” said the nurse. - -Then, from her room, came the girl. Not as she had used to walk, -hobbling along like a cripple, but straight and upright. With firm, -though slow step, she approached her brother. - -“Lucy! Lucy!” cried Larry. - -“Oh, Larry!” the girl exclaimed. “Aren’t you glad? I’m well again! I -can walk like other girls! Soon I’ll be able to run!” - -“Really?” asked Larry, hardly able to believe the good news, and trying -hard to keep back the tears. - -“Yes,” the nurse said. “She did much better than we expected. Dr. -Carrolton took the plaster cast off three days ago, but we didn’t send -you any word, for fear of a disappointment. Lucy is entirely cured.” - -There was a happy household in the Dexter apartment that night. Several -neighbors, who had heard the good news, called, and there was general -rejoicing that the sick girl was well. - -“Now tell us all about yourself,” said Mrs. Dexter to Larry. “Your -letters were only notes.” - -“I didn’t have time to write much,” the boy said. - -Then he told them the main things that had occurred since he had been -away. - -“We read all about it in the paper,” said Lucy. “I was proud of you, -Larry.” - -Larry reached the office early the next morning. He found Mr. Newton at -his desk. - -“Want to go off on some more assignments?” asked the reporter. - -“I shouldn’t mind,” replied Larry with a smile. - -One by one the other reporters came in. They laughed and joked with -Mr. Newton. Some of them talked with Larry. - -“Gee! But you had a swell time,” said Bud, gazing at Larry with envious -eyes. - -Mr. Emberg was a little late that morning, and none of the reporters -went out until he came in. When he did arrive he nodded a greeting to -all in general. - -“Glad to see you, Newton,” the city editor said. “Get back all right?” - -“Yes, sir.” - -“You and Larry did good work. Where’s Larry?” - -“Here,” replied the copy boy. - -“Oh!” said Mr. Emberg, with a queer little smile playing over his -features. Then, taking Larry by the hand, the city editor said: - -“Gentlemen of the staff of the _Leader_, let me introduce you to our -latest member, Mr. Larry Dexter.” - -For a moment there was a silence. Larry looked all around on a circle -of smiling faces. - -“What does it mean?” he asked of the city editor. - -“It means that from now on you’re a regular reporter on this paper,” -replied Mr. Emberg. “We’re proud of you, Larry, and this is the only -way we can show it. You’ve earned your advance if anyone ever did. The -work you did at the flood, particularly in scoring the big beat, and -the other things you’ve done, prove that you are a real newspaper man, -which is a rare sort of an individual. Let me congratulate you.” - -He shook hands with Larry, who was blushing like a girl. - -And that was how Larry Dexter rose from a copy boy to be a regular -reporter. Of his further adventures, and he had many, you may read in -the next volume of this series which will be called “Larry Dexter, -Reporter; Or, Strange Adventures in a Great City.” There will be told -of how he went on in his chosen field, and how he made a name and fame -for himself and his paper, and also of how he again brought to light -the old deed for land in the Bronx and found it of great value. - -“Let’s all shake hands with Larry,” called one of the reporters, and -they filed up and gave their best wishes to the former copy boy. - -And here we will leave Larry for the present, wishing him well. - - -THE END - - - - -The Famous Rover Boys Series - -By ARTHUR M. WINFIELD - -Each volume is hailed with delight by boys and girls everywhere. -12mo. Cloth. Handsomely printed and illustrated. - -Price, 60 Cents per Volume. Postpaid. - - THE ROVER BOYS DOWN EAST - Or, The Struggle for the Stanhope Fortune - Old enemies try again to injure our friends. - - THE ROVER BOYS AT COLLEGE - Or, The Right Road and the Wrong - Brimming over with good nature and excitement. - - THE ROVER BOYS ON TREASURE ISLE - Or, The Strange Cruise of the Steam Yacht - A search for treasure; a particularly fascinating volume. - - THE ROVER BOYS ON THE FARM - Or, The Last Days at Putnam Hall - The boys find a mysterious cave used by freight thieves. - - THE ROVER BOYS IN SOUTHERN WATERS - Or, The Deserted Steam Yacht - A trip to the coast of Florida. - - THE ROVER BOYS ON THE PLAINS - Or, The Mystery of Red Rock Ranch - Relates adventures on the mighty Mississippi River. - - THE ROVER BOYS ON THE RIVER - Or, The Search for the Missing Houseboat - The Ohio River is the theme of this spirited story. - - THE ROVER BOYS IN CAMP - Or, The Rivals of Pine Island - At the annual school encampment. - - THE ROVER BOYS ON LAND AND SEA - Or, The Crusoes of Seven Islands - Full of strange and surprising adventures. - - THE ROVER BOYS IN THE MOUNTAINS - Or, A Hunt for Fame and Fortune - The boys in the Adirondacks at a Winter camp. - - THE ROVER BOYS ON THE GREAT LAKES - Or, The Secret of the Island Cave - A story of a remarkable Summer outing; full of fun. - - THE ROVER BOYS OUT WEST - Or, The Search for a Lost Mine - A graphic description of the mines of the great Rockies. - - THE ROVER BOYS IN THE JUNGLE - Or, Stirring Adventures in Africa - The boys journey to the Dark Continent in search of their - father. - - THE ROVER BOYS ON THE OCEAN - Or, A Chase for a Fortune - From school to the Atlantic Ocean. - - THE ROVER BOYS AT SCHOOL - Or, The Cadets of Putnam Hall - The doings of Dick, Tom, and Sam Rover. - -GROSSET & DUNLAP--NEW YORK - - - - -The Putnam Hall Series - -Companion Stories to the Famous Rover Boys Series - -By ARTHUR M. WINFIELD - -Open-air pastimes have always been popular with boys, and should always -be encouraged, as they provide healthy recreation both for the body and -the mind. These books mingle adventure and fact, and will appeal to -every manly boy. - -12mo. Handsomely printed and illustrated. - -Price, 60 Cents Per Volume, Postpaid. - - THE PUTNAM HALL ENCAMPMENT - Or, The Secret of the Old Mill - - A story full of vim and vigor, telling what the cadets did - during the summer encampment. * * * and among other things - their visit to a mysterious old mill, said to be haunted. The - book has a wealth of healthy fun in it. - - THE PUTNAM HALL REBELLION - Or, The Rival Runaways - - The boys had good reasons for running away during Captain - Putnam’s absence. They had plenty of fun, and several queer - adventures. - - THE PUTNAM HALL CHAMPIONS - Or, Bound to Win Out - - In this new tale the Putnam Hall Cadets show what they can do - in various keen rivalries on the athletic field and elsewhere. - There is one victory which leads to a most unlooked-for - discovery. - - THE PUTNAM HALL CADETS - Or, Good Times in School and Out - - The cadets are lively, flesh-and-blood fellows, bound to make - friends from the start. There are some keen rivalries, in - school and out, and something is told of a remarkable midnight - feast and a hazing that had an unlooked for ending. - - THE PUTNAM HALL RIVALS - Or, Fun and Sport Afloat and Ashore - - It is a lively, rattling, breezy story of school life in this - country, written by one who knows all about its ways, its - snowball fights, its baseball matches, its pleasures and its - perplexities, its glorious excitements, its rivalries, and its - chilling disappointments. - -Other Volumes in Preparation. - -GROSSET & DUNLAP--NEW YORK - - - - -Transcriber’s Note: - -Punctuation has been standardised. Hyphenation and spelling have been -retained as they appear in the original publication. Changes have been -made as follows: - - Page 24 - that it would he useless to try _changed to_ - that it would be useless to try - - Page 64 - floor tumbed a number of yellow sheets _changed to_ - floor tumbled a number of yellow sheets - - Page 74 - be only to glad _changed to_ - be only too glad - - Page 90 - knew he had had hit Peter _changed to_ - knew he had hit Peter - - Page 99 - been a number such _changed to_ - been a number of such - - Page 118 - little ahead of happening _changed to_ - little ahead of the happening - - Page 158 - was no burgular attachment _changed to_ - was no burglar attachment - - Page 159 - forth from the window Harry _changed to_ - forth from the window Larry - - Page 226 - I’ll bet’s this is it _changed to_ - I’ll bet this is it - - Page 293 - pits of barnyard wreckage _changed to_ - bits of barnyard wreckage - - First page of book advertisements - By ARTHUR W. WINFIELD _changed to_ - By ARTHUR M. WINFIELD - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's From Office Boy to Reporter, by Howard R. Garis - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FROM OFFICE BOY TO REPORTER *** - -***** This file should be named 60456-0.txt or 60456-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/6/0/4/5/60456/ - -Produced by David Edwards and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions -will be renamed. - -Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no -one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation -(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without -permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, -set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to -copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to -protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project -Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you -charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you -do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the -rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose -such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and -research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do -practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is -subject to the trademark license, especially commercial -redistribution. - - - -*** START: FULL LICENSE *** - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project -Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at -http://gutenberg.org/license). - - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy -all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. -If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the -terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or -entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement -and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" -or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the -collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an -individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are -located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from -copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative -works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg -are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project -Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by -freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of -this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with -the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by -keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project -Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in -a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check -the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement -before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or -creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project -Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning -the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United -States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate -access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently -whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, -copied or distributed: - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org/license - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived -from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is -posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied -and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees -or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work -with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the -work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 -through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the -Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or -1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional -terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked -to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the -permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any -word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or -distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than -"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version -posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), -you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a -copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon -request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other -form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided -that - -- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is - owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he - has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the - Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments - must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you - prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax - returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and - sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the - address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to - the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." - -- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or - destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium - and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of - Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any - money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days - of receipt of the work. - -- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set -forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from -both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael -Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the -Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm -collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain -"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or -corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual -property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a -computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by -your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with -your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with -the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a -refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity -providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to -receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy -is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further -opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER -WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO -WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. -If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the -law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be -interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by -the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any -provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance -with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, -promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, -harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, -that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do -or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm -work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any -Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. - - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers -including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists -because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from -people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. -To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 -and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive -Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at -http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent -permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. -Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered -throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at -809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email -business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact -information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official -page at http://pglaf.org - -For additional contact information: - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To -SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any -particular state visit http://pglaf.org - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. -To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate - - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm -concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared -with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project -Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. - - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. -unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily -keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. - - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: - - http://www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/60456-0.zip b/old/60456-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f603261..0000000 --- a/old/60456-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/60456-h.zip b/old/60456-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0c474d5..0000000 --- a/old/60456-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/60456-h/60456-h.htm b/old/60456-h/60456-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 02a81fe..0000000 --- a/old/60456-h/60456-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9924 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of From Office Boy to Reporter, by Howard R. Garis - </title> - <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> - <style type="text/css"> - body {margin: 3em 10%;} - .chapter, .section {page-break-before: always;} - h1, h2 {text-align: center; clear: both;} - h2 {font-size: 1.4em; line-height: 2em;} - h2 span {font-size: .8em;} - p {margin-top: 1em; text-align: justify; margin-bottom: 1em; text-indent: 1em;} - .p180 {font-size: 1.8em;} - .p160 {font-size: 1.6em;} - .p140 {font-size: 1.4em;} - .p120 {font-size: 1.2em;} - .p110 {font-size: 1.1em;} - - /* General */ - em, cite {font-style: italic; font-weight: normal;} - .noi {text-indent: 0;} - .center {text-align: center; text-indent: 0;} - .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - .mt3 {margin-top: 3em;} - .mt2 {margin-top: 2em;} - .nmb {margin-bottom: 0;} - .nmt {margin-top: 0;} - .indent2 {text-indent: 2em;} - .pl6 {padding-left: 6em;} - .ornate {font-family: "Old English Text MT", cursive, serif; font-size: 1.5em;} - - /* Horizontal rules */ - hr {width: 60%; margin: 2em 20%; clear: both;} - hr.divider {width: 65%; margin: 4em 17.5%;} - hr.divider2 {width: 45%; margin: 4em 27.5%;} - hr.short {width: 6%; margin: 0 47%;} - hr.short2 {width: 10%; margin: 1em 45%;} - hr.full {width: 100%; margin: 1em 0;} - hr.double {width: 100%; margin: 1em 0; border-bottom: 6px double #000;} - - /* Page numbers */ - .pagenum {position: absolute; right: 2%; text-indent: 0em; - text-align: right; font-size: x-small; - font-weight: normal; font-variant: normal; font-style: normal; - letter-spacing: normal; line-height: normal; - color: #999; border-top: 1px solid; border-bottom: 1px solid; - background-color: inherit; padding: .01em .4em;} - - /* Images */ - img {max-width: 100%; width: 100%; height: auto;} - .figcenter {clear: both; margin: 2em auto; text-align: center; max-width: 100%;} - .width400 {width: 400px;} - .caption {font-weight: normal;} - .float-right {float: right;} - .float-left {float: left;} - .clear-both {clear: both;} - - /* Book promotion */ - .container {max-width: 40em; margin: 0 auto;} - - /* Table */ - table {margin: auto; border-collapse: collapse;} - .tdh {font-size: .8em; font-weight: bold;} - td {padding: .3em; vertical-align: top;} - .tdl {text-align: left; margin-left: 0em; padding-left: 1em; text-indent: -1em;} - .tdr {text-align: right; padding-right: 2em;} - .tdr2 {text-align: right;} - - /* Notes */ - ins {text-decoration: none; border-bottom: 1px dotted #dcdcdc;} - .tn {max-width: 30em; margin: 2em auto; background: #fff3da; padding: .5em 1em; border: 1px solid #000;} - li {margin-bottom: .5em;} - - /* Show screen only */ - .hidehand {display: block;} - - @media print { - hr.divider, hr.divider2 {border-width: 0; margin: 0;} - } - - @page {margin: 5em 1%;} - - @media handheld { - body {margin: .5em; padding: 0; width: 98%;} - p {margin-top: .1em; text-align: justify; margin-bottom: .1em; text-indent: 1em;} - hr.divider, hr.divider2 {border-width: 0; margin: 0;} - img {max-width: 100%; width: auto; height: auto;} - .tn {width: 80%; margin: 0 10%; background: #fff3da; padding: 1em;} - a {color: inherit; text-decoration: inherit;} - .container {max-width: 75%; margin-left: 12.5%; margin-right: 12.5%;} - .hidehand {display: none;} - table {width: 94%; margin-left: 2%; margin-right: 2%;} - .float-right {float: right;} - .float-left {float: left;} - .clear-both {clear: both;} - .keep-together {page-break-inside: avoid;} - } - </style> - </head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -The Project Gutenberg EBook of From Office Boy to Reporter, by Howard R. Garis - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org/license - - -Title: From Office Boy to Reporter - The First Step in Journalism - -Author: Howard R. Garis - -Release Date: October 8, 2019 [EBook #60456] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FROM OFFICE BOY TO REPORTER *** - - - - -Produced by David Edwards and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - -</pre> - - -<hr class="divider" /> -<h1>FROM OFFICE BOY<br /> -TO REPORTER</h1> -<hr class="divider2" /> - -<div class="hidehand"> -<div class="figcenter width400"> -<img src="images/cover2.jpg" width="400" height="598" alt="Cover" /> -</div> -</div> - - -<div class="section"> -<hr class="divider2" /> -<div class="figcenter width400"> -<img src="images/frontis.jpg" width="400" height="633" alt="Frontispiece" /> -<div class="caption clear-both">“<a href="#frontis">NOW THEN, YOU NEW BOY—WHAT’S YOUR NAME?</a>”</div> -<div class="float-left"><cite>From Office Boy To Reporter</cite></div> -</div> -</div> - - -<div class="section"> -<hr class="divider2" /> -<p class="center p180">FROM OFFICE BOY<br /> -TO REPORTER</p> - -<p class="center mt2">OR</p> - -<p class="center p120 mt2">THE FIRST STEP IN JOURNALISM</p> - -<p class="center mt3">BY<br /> -<span class="p120">HOWARD R. GARIS</span></p> - -<p class="center">AUTHOR OF “THE WHITE CRYSTALS,” “THE ISLE OF BLACK FIRE,”<br /> -“WITH FORCE AND ARMS,” ETC.</p> - -<p class="center mt3"><i>ILLUSTRATED</i></p> - -<p class="center"><span class="p120">New York</span><br /> -<span class="p160">GROSSET & DUNLAP</span><br /> -<span class="p120">Publishers</span></p> -</div> - - - -<div class="section"> -<hr class="divider2" /> -<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Copyright</span>, 1907<br /> -BY<br /> -CHATTERTON-PECK COMPANY</p> - -<hr class="short2" /> - -<p class="center"><cite>From Office Boy to Reporter</cite></p> -</div> - - -<div class="section"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iii" id="Page_iii">iii</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="preface" id="preface"></a>PREFACE</h2> - -<p class="noi"><span class="smcap">My Dear Boys</span>:—</p> - -<p>I have tried to write for you a story of newspaper life and tell how a -boy, who started in the lowest position,—that of a copy carrier,—rose -to become a reporter. The newspaper covers a wide field, and enters -into almost every home, telling of the doings of all the world, -including that which takes place right in our midst.</p> - -<p>There are many persons in the business, which is an interesting and -fascinating one. I have been actively engaged in it for nearly sixteen -years, and I have seen many strange happenings. Some of these I have -set down in this book for you to read, and I hope you will like them.</p> - -<p>There are many things which I had not the time or space to tell about, -and which may be related in other books of this series. There have<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv">[Pg iv]</a></span> -been written many good stories of newspaper life and experiences. I -trust I may have added one that will appeal especially to you boys. If -I have, I will feel amply repaid for what I have done.</p> - -<p class="center">Yours with best wishes,<br /> -<span class="smcap pl6">Howard R. Garis</span>.</p> - -<p><small>January 10, 1907.</small></p> - - - - -<div class="section"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v">v</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="contents" id="contents"></a>CONTENTS</h2> - -<table summary="Contents"> -<tr> -<td class="tdh tdr">CHAPTER</td> -<td class="tdh tdl"> </td> -<td class="tdh tdr2">PAGE</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">I.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Foreclosing the Mortgage</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#i">1</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">II.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Bad News</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#ii">9</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">III.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Looking for Work</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#iii">18</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">IV.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry and the Reporter</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#iv">26</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">V.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry Secures Work</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#v">36</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">VI.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry Makes an Enemy</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#vi">46</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">VII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">The Missing Copy</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#vii">53</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">VIII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Peter is Discharged</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#viii">62</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">IX.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry Gets a Story</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#ix">70</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">X.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry Meets His Enemy</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#x">79</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XI.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry Has a Fight</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xi">87</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">A Strange Assignment</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xii">95</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XIII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Under the River</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xiii">104</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XIV.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry’s Success</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xiv">113</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XV.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry Goes to School</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xv">121</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XVI.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry at a Strike</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xvi">130</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XVII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Taken Prisoner</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xvii">139</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XVIII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Held Captive</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xviii">148</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XIX.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry’s Movements</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xix">156</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XX.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Back at Work</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xx">165</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXI.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry on the Watch</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxi">173</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Trapping a Thief</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxii">181</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXIII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Bad Money</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxiii">189</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr"><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi">vi</a></span> -XXIV.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">A Queer Capture</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxiv">197</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXV.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">A Big Robbery</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxv">205</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXVI.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">The Men in the Lot</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxvi">214</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXVII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry is Rewarded</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxvii">222</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXVIII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">The Renowned Doctor</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxviii">233</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXIX.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">The Operation</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxix">241</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXX.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">The Flood</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxx">249</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXXI.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Days of Terror</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxxi">257</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXXII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">The Flood Increases</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxxii">265</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXXIII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Dynamiting the Dam</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxxiii">273</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXXIV.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Under Water</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxxiv">281</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXXV.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">The Race</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxxv">290</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXXVI.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry Scores a Big Beat</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxxvi">298</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XXXVII.</td> -<td class="tdl smcap">Larry’s Advancement</td> -<td class="tdr2"><a href="#xxxvii">306</a></td> -</tr> -</table> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">1</a></span> -</div> - -<p class="center p180">FROM OFFICE BOY<br /> -TO REPORTER</p> - -<h2><a name="i" id="i"></a>CHAPTER I<br /> -<span>FORECLOSING THE MORTGAGE</span></h2> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Now</span> then,” began the shrill voice of the auctioneer, “we’ll start -these proceedin’s, if ye ain’t got no objections. Step right this way, -everybody, an’ let th’ biddin’ be lively!”</p> - -<p>“Hold on a minute!” called a big man in the crowd. “We want to know -what the terms are.”</p> - -<p>“I thought everybody knowed ’em,” spoke Simon Rollinson, deputy -sheriff, of the village of Campton, New York State. “This here farm, -belongin’ in fee-simple to Mrs. Elizabeth Dexter, widow of Robert -Dexter, containin’ in all some forty acres of tillable land, four acres -of pasture an’ ten of woods, is about to be sold, with all stock an’ -fixtures, consistin’ of seven cows an’ four horses, an’ other things, -to th’ highest bidder, t’ satisfy a mortgage of three thousand dollars.”</p> - -<p>“We know all that,” said the big man who had first spoken. “What’s the -terms of payment?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">2</a></span> -“Th’ terms is,” resumed Simon, “ten per cent. down, an’ the balance in -thirty days, an’ the buyer has t’ give a satisfactory bond or——”</p> - -<p>“That’ll do, go ahead,” called several.</p> - -<p>“Now then, this way, everybody,” went on Mr. Rollinson. “Give me your -attention. What am I bid to start this here farm, one of the finest in -Onondaga County? What am I bid?”</p> - -<p>There was a moment’s silence. A murmur went through the crowd of people -gathered in the farmyard in front of a big red barn. Several wanted to -bid, but did not like to be the first.</p> - -<p>As the deputy sheriff, who acted as the auctioneer, had said, the farm -was about to be sold. It was a fine one, and had belonged to Robert -Dexter. With his wife Elizabeth, his sons, Larry, aged fifteen, a -sturdy lad with bright blue eyes and brown hair, and James, aged eight, -his daughters, Lucy, a girl of twelve, afflicted with a bad disease of -the spine, and little Mary, just turned four, Mr. Dexter had lived on -the place, and had worked it successfully, for several years.</p> - -<p>Then he had become ill of consumption. He could not follow the hard -life. Crops failed, and in order to get cash to keep his family he was -obliged to borrow a large sum of money. He gave the farm as security, -and agreed, in case he could not pay the money back in a certain time, -that the farm should be forfeited.</p> - -<p>He was never able to get the funds together,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">3</a></span> and this worry, with -the ravages of the disease, soon caused his death. Mrs. Dexter, with -Larry’s help, made a brave effort to stand up against the misfortune, -but it was of no use. She could not pay the interest on the mortgage, -and, finally, the holder, Samuel Mortland, foreclosed.</p> - -<p>The matter was placed in the hands of the sheriff, whose duty it is to -foreclose mortgages, and that official, being a busy man, delegated -the unpleasant task to one of his deputies or assistants, who lived in -the town of Campton. The sale had been advertised for several miles -surrounding the village, and on the date set quite a crowd gathered.</p> - -<p>There were farmers from many hamlets, a number of whom brought their -wives and families, as a country auction is not unlike a fair or -circus as an attraction. There they were sure to meet friends and -acquaintances, and, besides, they might pick up some bargains.</p> - -<p>“Who’ll make the first offer?” called Mr. Rollinson. “The upset or -startin’ price is fifteen hundred dollars, an’ I’ll jest go ahead with -that. Now who’ll make it two thousand?”</p> - -<p>“I’ll go seventeen hundred,” called a short stout man in the front row.</p> - -<p>“Huh! I should think ye would, Nate Jackson. Why, seventeen hundred -dollars wouldn’t buy th’ house an’ barn. You’ll hev t’ do better than -that!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">4</a></span> -“I’ll say eighteen hundred,” cried a woman who seemed to mean business.</p> - -<p>“Now you’re talkin’!” cried Mr. Rollinson. “That’s sumthin’ like. Why, -jest think of th’ pasture, an’ woodland, an’ cows an’ horses an’——”</p> - -<p>“I’ll make it two thousand dollars,” said a third bidder.</p> - -<p>“I’m bid two thousand,” cried the deputy sheriff. “Who’ll make it -twenty-two hundred?”</p> - -<p>Then the auction was in full swing. The bidding became lively, though -the advances were of smaller amounts than at first. By degrees the -price crept up until it was twenty-nine hundred dollars.</p> - -<p>“I’ve got to git at least thirty-one hundred to pay th’ mortgage an’ -expenses,” the auctioneer explained. “If I don’t git more than this -last bid Mr. Mortland will take the property himself. Now’s your last -chance, neighbors.”</p> - -<p>This seemed to stimulate the people, and several offers came in at -once, until at last the bid was $3,090. There it seemed to stick, no -one caring to go any higher, and each one hoping he might, by adding -a few dollars more, get possession of the property, which was worth -considerable above the figure offered.</p> - -<p>While the auction was going on there sat, in the darkened parlor of the -farmhouse, Mrs. Dexter and her three younger children. With them<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">5</a></span> were -some sympathizing neighbors, who had called to tell her how sorry they -were that she had lost the farm.</p> - -<p>“What do you intend to do?” asked Mrs. Olney, winding her long -cork-screw curls about her fingers.</p> - -<p>“I’m sure I don’t know,” Mrs. Dexter said. “If we have to leave here, -and I suppose we will, I think the only thing to do is to go to my -sister. She lives in New York.”</p> - -<p>“Let’s see, she married a Jimson, didn’t she?” asked Mrs. Peterkins, -another neighbor.</p> - -<p>“No, her husband’s name is Edward Ralston,” replied Mrs. Dexter. “He is -a conductor on a street car, in New York. My sister wrote to me to come -to her if I could find no other place.”</p> - -<p>“That would be a wise thing to do,” spoke Mrs. Olney. “New York is such -a big place. Perhaps Larry could find some work there.”</p> - -<p>“I hope he can,” said Larry’s mother. “He is getting to be a strong -boy, but I would rather see him in school.”</p> - -<p>“Of course, knowledge is good for the young,” admitted Mrs. Peterkins, -“but you’ll need the money Larry can earn.”</p> - -<p>“I’m goin’ to earn money when I go to New York!” exclaimed James. “I’m -goin’ to the end of the rainbow, where there’s a pot of gold, an’ I’m -goin’ to dig it up an’ give it all to mommer.”</p> - -<p>“Good for you!” exclaimed Mrs. Olney, clasping<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">6</a></span> the little fellow to -her and kissing him. “You’ll be a great help to your mother when you -grow up.”</p> - -<p>“Kisses is for girls!” exclaimed James, struggling to free himself, -whereat even his mother, who had been saddened by the thought of -leaving her home, smiled.</p> - -<p>“Will—will you have any money left after the place is sold?” asked -Mrs. Peterkins.</p> - -<p>“I hope it will bring in at least a few hundred dollars above the -mortgage,” answered Mrs. Dexter. “If it does not I don’t know what I’ll -do. We would have to sell some of the house things to get money enough -to travel.”</p> - -<p>Outside, the shrill voice of the auctioneer could be heard, for it was -summer and the windows were open.</p> - -<p>“Third an’ last call!” cried Mr. Rollinson.</p> - -<p>“Oh, it’s going to be sold!” exclaimed Mrs. Dexter, with a sound that -seemed like a sob in her throat. “The dear old farm is going.”</p> - -<p>“Third an’ last call!” the deputy sheriff went on. “Last call! Last -call! Going! Going! Gone!”</p> - -<p>With a bang that sounded like the report of a rifle, Mr. Rollinson -brought his hammer down on the block.</p> - -<p>“I declare this farm sold to Jeptha Morrison fer th’ sum of thirty-two -hundred and seventy-five dollars,” he cried. “Step this way, Mr. -Morrison,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">7</a></span> an’ I’ll take yer money an’ give ye a receipt. Allers -willin’ t’ take money,”—at which sally the crowd laughed.</p> - -<p>“Only thirty-two hundred and seventy-five dollars,” repeated Mrs. -Dexter. “Why, that will leave scarcely anything for me. The sheriff’s -fees will have to be paid, and some back interest. I will have nothing.”</p> - -<p>She looked worried, and the two neighbors, knowing what it meant to be -a widow without money and with little children to support, felt keenly -for her.</p> - -<p>“Mother!” exclaimed a voice, and a lad came into the room somewhat -excitedly. “Mother, the farm’s sold!”</p> - -<p>“Yes, Larry, I heard Mr. Rollinson say so,” said Mrs. Dexter.</p> - -<p>“It wasn’t fair!” the boy went on. “We should have got more for it!”</p> - -<p>“Hush, Larry. Don’t say it wasn’t fair,” said his mother. “You should -accuse no one.”</p> - -<p>“But I heard Mr. Mortland going around and telling people not to bid on -it, as the title wasn’t good,” the boy declared. “He wanted to scare -them from bidding so he could get the property cheap.”</p> - -<p>“But he didn’t buy it,” said Mrs. Dexter. “It went to Mr. Morrison.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, and he bought it with the money Mr. Mortland supplied him,” Larry -cried. “I saw<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">8</a></span> through the whole game. It was a trick of Mr. Mortland’s -to get the farm, and he’ll have it in a few weeks. Oh, how I wish I was -a man! I’d show them something!”</p> - -<p>“Larry, dear,” said his mother reprovingly, and then the boy noticed, -for the first time, that others were in the room.</p> - -<p>“Of course I haven’t any proof,” Larry continued, “for I only saw Mr. -Mortland hand Mr. Morrison some money and heard him tell him to make -the last bid. But I have my suspicions, just the same. Why, mother, -there will be nothing left for us.”</p> - -<p>“That’s what I was telling Mrs. Olney and Mrs. Peterkins,” said Mrs. -Dexter with a sigh. “I don’t know how we can get to New York, when -railroad fares are so high.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll tell you what we must do, mother!” exclaimed Larry.</p> - -<p>“What, son?”</p> - -<p>“We must sell the furniture.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I could never do that.”</p> - -<p>“But we must,” the boy went on. “We cannot take it with us to New York, -and we may get money enough from it to help us out. It is the best -thing to do.”</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">9</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="ii" id="ii"></a>CHAPTER II<br /> -<span>BAD NEWS</span></h2> - - -<p>“<span class="smcap">I believe</span> Larry is right,” said Mrs. Olney. “The furniture would only -be a trouble to you, Mrs. Dexter. Now would be a good chance to sell -it, while the crowd is here. You ought to get pretty good prices, as -much of the stuff is new.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps you are right,” assented the widow, “though I hate to part -with the things. Suppose you tell Mr. Rollinson, Larry.”</p> - -<p>The boy hurried from the room to inform the auctioneer there was -more work for him, and Mrs. Dexter, with her two friends, came from -the parlor, for they knew the place would soon be overrun by curious -persons looking for bargains.</p> - -<p>Mr. Rollinson, anxious to make more commissions, readily undertook to -put the furniture up for auction. With the exception of a few articles -that she prized very highly, and laying aside only the clothes of -herself and children, Mrs. Dexter permitted all the contents of the -house to be offered for sale.</p> - -<p>Then, having reached this decision, she went off in a bedroom and cried -softly, for she could<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">10</a></span> not bear to think of her home being broken up, -and strangers using the chairs and tables which, with the other things, -had made such a nice place while Mr. Dexter was alive.</p> - -<p>Larry had hard work to keep back the tears when he saw some article of -furniture, with which were associated happy memories, bid for by some -farmer.</p> - -<p>When, at length, Mr. Rollinson reached the old armchair, in which Mr. -Dexter used to sit and tell his children stories, and where, during the -last days of his life he had rested with his little family gathered -about him, Larry could stand it no longer. He felt the hot scalding -tears come to his eyes, and ran out behind the big red barn, where he -sobbed out his grief all alone.</p> - -<p>He covered his face with his hands and, as he thought of the happy days -that seemed to be gone forever, his grief grew more intense. All at -once he heard a voice calling:</p> - -<p>“Hello, cry-baby!”</p> - -<p>At first Larry was too much occupied with his troubles to pay any -attention. Then someone called again:</p> - -<p>“Larry Dexter cries like a girl!”</p> - -<p>Larry looked up, to meet the laughing gaze of a boy about his own size -and age, with bright red hair and a face much covered with freckles.</p> - -<p>“I’m not a cry-baby!” Larry exclaimed.</p> - -<p>“You be, too! Didn’t I see you cryin’?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">11</a></span> -“I’ll make you cry on the other side of your mouth, Chot Ramsey!” Larry -exclaimed, making a spring for his tormentor.</p> - -<p>Chot doubled up his fists. To do him credit he had no idea that Larry -was crying because he felt so badly at the prospect of leaving the farm -that had been his home for many years. Chot was a good-hearted boy, but -thoughtless. So, when he saw one of his playmates weeping, which act -was considered only fit for girls, Chot could not resist the temptation -to taunt Larry.</p> - -<p>“Do you want t’ fight?” demanded Chot.</p> - -<p>“I’ll punch you for calling me names!” exclaimed Larry, his sorrow -at the sale of his father’s armchair dispersed at the idea of being -laughed at and called a cry-baby.</p> - -<p>“You will, hey?” asked Chot. “Well, I dare you to touch me!”</p> - -<p>“I’ll make you sing a different tune in a minute!” cried Larry, rushing -forward.</p> - -<p>Then, like two game roosters, both wishing to fight, yet neither -desiring to begin the battle, the boys faced each other. Their eyes -were angry and all tears had disappeared from Larry’s face.</p> - -<p>“Will you knock a chip off my shoulder?” demanded Chot.</p> - -<p>“Sure,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>Chot stooped down, found a little piece of wood and carefully balanced -it on the upper part of his arm.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">12</a></span> -“I dare you to!” he taunted.</p> - -<p>This time-honored method of starting hostilities was not ignored by -Larry. He sprang forward, and with a quick motion sent the fragment of -wood flying through the air. Then he doubled up his fists, imitating -the example Chot had earlier set, and stood ready for the fracas.</p> - -<p>But at that instant, when, in another second Chot and Larry would have -been involved in a rough-and-tumble encounter, James, Larry’s little -brother, came running around the corner of the barn. He seemed greatly -excited.</p> - -<p>“Larry! Larry!” he exclaimed. “They’re sellin’ my nice old rockin’ -horse, an’ my high chair what I used to have when I was a baby! Please -stop ’em, Larry!”</p> - -<p>Larry lost all desire to fight. He didn’t mind if all the boys in -Campton called him cry-baby. He had too many sorrows to mind that.</p> - -<p>“Don’t worry, Jimmie,” he said to the little fellow. “I’ll buy you some -new ones.”</p> - -<p>But little James was not to be comforted, and burst into a flood of -tears. Chot, who had looked on in some wonder at what it was all about, -for he did not understand that the household goods were being sold, -unclosed his clenched fists. Underneath a somewhat rough exterior he -had a warm heart.</p> - -<p>“Say,” he began, coming up awkwardly to Larry, “I didn’t know you was -bein’ sold out. I—I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">13</a></span> didn’t mean t’ make fun of ye. I—I was only -foolin’ when I said ye was a cry-baby. Ye can have my best fishhook, -honest ye can!”</p> - -<p>“Thanks, Chot,” replied Larry, quick to feel the change of feeling. “I -couldn’t help crying when I saw some of the things dad used to have -going under the hammer. But I feel worse for mother and the others. I -can stand it.”</p> - -<p>“Are ye goin’ away from here?” asked Chot, for that anyone should leave -Campton, where he had lived all his life, seemed too strange a thing to -be true.</p> - -<p>“I think we will go to New York,” replied Larry. “Mother’s sister lives -there. I expect to get some work, and help support the folks.”</p> - -<p>“I wish I was goin’ off like that!” exclaimed Chot. “They could sell -everything in my house, an’ everything I’ve got, except my dog, if -they’d let me go t’ New York.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t know when you’re well off,” spoke Larry, who, in the last -few months, under the stress of trouble, had become older than his -years indicated.</p> - -<p>By this time James, who saw a big yellow butterfly darting about -among the flowers which grew in an old-fashioned garden below the -barn, rushed to capture it, forgetting his troubles. Larry, whose -grief-stricken mood had passed, returned to the house, to find it a -place of confusion.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">14</a></span> -Men and women were in almost every room, going through and looking at -the different articles. The loud voice of the auctioneer rang out, and -Larry felt another pang in his heart as he saw piece after piece of -furniture being knocked down to the highest bidder.</p> - -<p>The boy found his mother in the bedroom, where she had sought a quiet -place to rest.</p> - -<p>“Have you really made up your mind to go to New York, mother?” Larry -asked.</p> - -<p>“I think it is the best thing to do,” was the answer. “We can stay with -your aunt Ellen until I can find some work to do.”</p> - -<p>“Are you going to work, mother? I hate to think of it. I’ll work for -you.”</p> - -<p>“I know you will do what you can,” replied Mrs. Dexter, “but I’m afraid -boys do not earn much in big cities, so we will need all we both can -get. It is going to be a hard struggle.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t worry!” exclaimed Larry, assuming a cheerfulness he did not -feel. “It will all come out right, somehow, you see if it doesn’t.”</p> - -<p>“I hope so,” sighed Mrs. Dexter.</p> - -<p>The auctioneering of the goods went on rapidly, and, toward the close -of the afternoon, all that were not to be kept were disposed of. Mr. -Rollinson cried his last “Going! Going! Gone!” brought his hammer down -for the last time with a loud bang, and then announced that the sale -was over.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">15</a></span> -“Where’s your mother, Larry?” he asked of the boy.</p> - -<p>“I’ll call her.”</p> - -<p>In a few minutes Larry had brought Mrs. Dexter to where the deputy -sheriff waited for her in the parlor.</p> - -<p>“Wa’al, everthing’s sold,” Mr. Rollinson began. “Didn’t bring as much -as I cal’lated on, but then ye never can git much at a forced sale.”</p> - -<p>“How much will I have left after all expenses are paid?” asked Mrs. -Dexter.</p> - -<p>“Allowin’ for everything,” said the auctioneer, figuring up on the back -of an envelope, “you’ll have jest four hundred and three dollars and -forty-five cents, the odd cents bein’ for some pictures.”</p> - -<p>“It is very little to begin life over again on,” said Mrs. Dexter.</p> - -<p>“But it’s better than nothin’,” said Mr. Rollinson, who seldom looked -on the dark side of things. “Now I made the sale of these household -things dependent on you. You can stay here two weeks if ye want t’, an’ -nothin’ will be taken away. Them as bought it understands it.”</p> - -<p>“I would like t’ get away as soon as possible,” said the widow.</p> - -<p>“Wa’al, there’s nothin’ t’ hinder ye.”</p> - -<p>“Then I shall start for New York day after to-morrow.”</p> - -<p>“All right, Mrs. Dexter. I’ll settle up th’ accounts an’ have all th’ -money ready by then.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">16</a></span> -Mr. Rollinson was as good as his word. On the third day after the sale, -having written to her sister that she was coming, but not waiting for a -reply, Mrs. Dexter, with Larry, Lucy, Mary and James, boarded a train -for the big city where they were all hoping their fortunes awaited -them. Little James was full of excitement. He was sure they were going -at last to the end of the rainbow. Mary was delighted with the new and -strange sights along the way. Larry was very thoughtful. As for Lucy -her spine hurt her so that she got very little enjoyment from the trip. -But she did not say anything about it, for fear of worrying her mother.</p> - -<p>It was a long journey, but it came to an end at last. The train reached -Hoboken, on the New Jersey side of the Hudson River, and, though -somewhat bewildered by the lights, the noise and confusion, Larry -managed to learn which ferryboat to take to land them nearest to his -aunt’s house, who lived on what is called the “East Side” of New York.</p> - -<p>The trip across the river on the big boat was a source of much delight -to the younger children, but Mrs. Dexter was too worried to be -interested. Lucy was very tired, but Larry kept up his spirits.</p> - -<p>Once landed in New York, in the evening, the confusion, the noise, the -shouts of the cabmen, the rattle of the cars, the clanging of gongs and -the ringing of bells, was so great that poor Mrs. Dexter,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">17</a></span> who had been -so long used to the quiet of the country, felt her head ache.</p> - -<p>By dint of many inquiries Larry found out which car to take and, -marshaling his mother and the children ahead of him, he directed them -where to go. A long ride brought them to the street where Mrs. Ralston -lived.</p> - -<p>Here was more confusion. The thoroughfare swarmed with children, and -the noise was almost as great as down at the ferry. A man directed -the travelers to the house, which was an apartment or tenement one, -inhabited by a number of families. Larry, his mother, and the children -climbed the stairs to the third floor, where Mrs. Ralston lived. A -knock on the door brought a woman who was surprised at her visitors.</p> - -<p>“Does Mrs. Ralston live here?” asked Larry, thinking he might have made -a mistake.</p> - -<p>“She did, but she moved away yesterday,” was the answer.</p> - -<p>“Moved away?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, didn’t you hear? Her husband was killed in a street-car accident -a few days ago, and after the funeral Mrs. Ralston said she could not -afford to keep these rooms. So she moved away. I came in last night. -Are you relatives of hers?”</p> - -<p>“I am her sister,” said Mrs. Dexter, and then, at the news of Mr. -Ralston’s death, coming on top of all the other troubles, the poor -woman burst into tears.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">18</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="iii" id="iii"></a>CHAPTER III<br /> -<span>LOOKING FOR WORK</span></h2> - - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Now</span> there, don’t you worry one mite,” said the woman who had come -to the door. “I know jest how you feel. Come right in. We haven’t -much room, but there’s only my husband, and he can sleep on the floor -to-night. I’ll take care of you until you can find some place to stay. -Bring the children in. Well, if there isn’t a little fellow who’s jest -the image of my little Eddie that died,” and the good woman clasped -James in her arms and hugged him tightly.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid we’ll be too much trouble for you,” spoke Larry, seeing -that his mother was too overcome to talk.</p> - -<p>“Not a bit of it,” was the hearty reply. “Come right along. I was jest -gittin’ supper, an’ there’s plenty for all of you. Come in!”</p> - -<p>Confused and alarmed at the sudden news, and hardly knowing what she -did, Mrs. Dexter entered the rooms where she had expected to find her -sister. She was almost stunned by the many troubles coming all at once, -and was glad enough to find any sort of temporary shelter.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">19</a></span> -“I’m Mrs. Jackson,” the woman went on. “We’re a little upset, but I -know you won’t mind that.”</p> - -<p>“No indeed,” replied Mrs. Dexter. “We are only too glad to come in.”</p> - -<p>The apartment, which consisted of four small rooms, was in considerable -confusion. Chairs and tables stood in all sorts of positions, and there -were two beds up.</p> - -<p>“We’ll manage somehow,” said Mrs. Jackson. “My goodness! The potatoes -are burning!” and she ran to the kitchen, where supper was cooking.</p> - -<p>While she was busy over the meal her husband came in, and, though he -was much surprised to see so many strangers in the house, he quickly -welcomed them when his wife explained the circumstances. Supper was -soon ready, and the travelers, except Mrs. Dexter, ate with good -appetites. Then, after she had told something of her troubles it was -decided that the two younger children should sleep in a bed with their -mother. Lucy shared Mrs. Jackson’s room, and Larry and Mr. Jackson had -beds made up on the floor in the parlor.</p> - -<p>“We’ll pretend we’re camping out,” said Mr. Jackson. “Did you ever -camp, Larry?”</p> - -<p>“Sometimes, with the boys in Campton,” was the reply. “But we never -stayed out all night.”</p> - -<p>“I have when I was a young man,” said Mr. Jackson. “I used to be quite -fond of hunting.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">20</a></span> -Larry was tired enough to fall off to sleep at once, but, for a time, -the many unusual noises bothered him. There was an elevated railroad -not far off, and the whistle of the trains, the buzz and hum of the -motors, kept him awake. Then, too, the streets were full of excitement, -boys shouting and men calling, for it was a warm night, and many stayed -out until late.</p> - -<p>At length, however, the country boy fell asleep, and dreamed that he -was engineer on a ferryboat which collided with an elevated train, and -the whole affair smashed into a balloon and came shooting earthward, -landing with a thump, which so startled Larry that he awoke with a -spring that would have rolled him out of bed had he not been sleeping -on the floor.</p> - -<p>It was just getting daylight, and Larry at first could not recall where -he was. Then he sat up, and his movement awakened Mr. Jackson.</p> - -<p>“Is it time to get up?” asked the latter.</p> - -<p>“I—I don’t know,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>Mr. Jackson reached under his pillow, drew out his watch, and looked at -the time.</p> - -<p>“Guess I’d better be stirring if I want to get to work to-day,” he -remarked. Then he began to dress and Larry did likewise. Mrs. Jackson -was already up, and breakfast was soon served.</p> - -<p>“Make yourselves at home,” was Mr. Jackson’s remark, as he left the -house to go to the office where he was employed.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">21</a></span> -Mrs. Dexter insisted on helping Mrs. Jackson with the housework, and, -while the two women were engaged Mary and James went down to the street -to see what, to them, were many wonderful sights. Lucy, whose spine -hurt her very much because of the long journey, remained in bed, and -Larry made himself useful by going to the store for Mrs. Jackson, after -receiving many cautions from his mother not to get lost in New York.</p> - -<p>Mrs. Dexter was worrying over what she should do. She wanted to find -her sister, but she realized that if Mr. Ralston was dead his widow -would not be in a position to give even temporary shelter to Mrs. -Dexter and her family. She knew her sister must have written to her, -but the letter had probably reached Campton after Mrs. Dexter had left.</p> - -<p>“Why don’t you take a few rooms in this house?” suggested Mrs. -Jackson. “There are some to be had cheap on the floor above, and it’s -a respectable place. Then you will have time to hunt up your sister. -Maybe the janitor knows where she moved to.”</p> - -<p>“I believe I will do that,” said the widow. She knew what little money -she had would not last long and she wanted to make a home for her -children where they could stay while she went out to work.</p> - -<p>When Larry returned Mrs. Dexter talked the matter over with him, for -she had come to depend<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">22</a></span> on her son very much of late. The matter was -decided by their engaging four rooms on the floor above. They were -unfurnished except for an attractive gas range on which cooking could -be done.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid I wouldn’t know how to work it,” said Mrs. Dexter.</p> - -<p>“I know,” said Larry. “Mrs. Jackson showed me this morning.”</p> - -<p>From a secondhand store some beds, a table, and a few chairs were -purchased, and thus, on a very modest scale, compared with their former -home, the Dexters began housekeeping in New York.</p> - -<p>They ate supper in their new rooms that night. The younger children -were delighted, but Mrs. Dexter could not but feel that it was a poor -home compared to the one she had been compelled to leave. Larry saw -what was troubling his mother.</p> - -<p>“Don’t worry,” he said. “I’ll soon be working and we will have a better -place.”</p> - -<p>“I wish I was strong enough to work,” said Lucy in a low tone, her eyes -filling with tears as she thought of her helplessness.</p> - -<p>“Don’t you wish anything of the kind!” exclaimed Larry. “I’m going to -work for all of us.”</p> - -<p>He made up his mind to start out the first thing in the morning and -hunt for a job. He carried this plan out. After a simple breakfast -which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">23</a></span> was added to by some nice potatoes and meat which Mrs. Jackson -sent up, Larry hurried off.</p> - -<p>“Be very careful,” cautioned his mother. “Don’t let anyone steal your -pocketbook.”</p> - -<p>Larry thought a thief would not make a very good haul, as he only had -twenty-five cents in it, but he did not say so to his mother.</p> - -<p>The boy did not know where to start to look for work. He had had no -experience except on a farm, and there is not much call for that sort -of labor in the city. Still he was strong, quick, and willing, and, -though he didn’t know it, those qualities go a great way in any kind of -work.</p> - -<p>Larry started out from the apartment house, and walked slowly. He had -the address of his new home written down, in case he got lost, but he -determined to walk slowly, note the direction of the streets, and so -acquaint himself with the “lay-out” of the big city.</p> - -<p>He had two plans in mind. One was to go along the streets looking for a -sign “Boy Wanted.” The other was to look at the advertisements in the -newspapers. He resolved to try both.</p> - -<p>Purchasing one of the big New York daily newspapers, which bore on -the front page the name <cite>The Leader</cite>, Larry turned to the page where -the dealer who sold it to him had said he would find plenty of want -advertisements. There were a number of boys wanted, from those to run -errands<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">24</a></span> to the variety who were expected to begin in a wholesale house -at a small salary and work their way up. In nearly every one were the -words “experience necessary.”</p> - -<p>Now Larry had had no experience, and he felt that it would -<a name="be" id="be"></a><ins title="Original has 'he'">be</ins> -useless to try the places where that qualification was required. He -marked several of the advertisements that he thought might provide an -opening for him, and asked the first policeman he met how to get to the -different addresses.</p> - -<p>The bluecoat was a friendly one, who had boys of his own at home, and -he kindly explained to Larry just how to get to the big wholesale and -retail places that needed lads.</p> - -<p>But luck seemed to be against Larry that day. At every place he went he -was told that he was just too late.</p> - -<p>“You’ll have to get up earlier in the morning if you want to get a -job,” said one man where he inquired. “There were ten boys here before -breakfast after this place. This is a city where you can’t go to sleep -for very long.”</p> - -<p>Larry was beginning to think so. He had tried a number of places that -advertised, without success, when he saw a sign hanging out in front of -a shoe store. It informed those who cared to know that a boy was needed.</p> - -<p>Larry made an application. Timidly he asked the proprietor of the store -for work.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">25</a></span> -“I hired a boy this morning about seven o’clock,” was the reply.</p> - -<p>“Your sign is out yet,” spoke Larry.</p> - -<p>“I forgot to bring it in,” said the man.</p> - -<p>He did not seem to think it minded that he had caused disappointment -to one lad, and might to others. Larry walked from the place much -discouraged.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">26</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="iv" id="iv"></a>CHAPTER IV<br /> -<span>LARRY AND THE REPORTER</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was now noon, and Larry, who had a healthy boy’s appetite, began to -feel hungry. He had never eaten in one of the big city restaurants, and -he felt somewhat timid about going in. Besides, he had only a quarter, -and he thought that he could get very little for that. He also felt -that he had better save some of the money for car-fare, and so he made -up his mind that fifteen cents was all he could afford for dinner.</p> - -<p>He walked down several streets before he saw a restaurant that seemed -quiet enough for him to venture in.</p> - -<p>The place was kept by an old German, and while it was neat and clean -did not seem to be very prosperous, as Larry was the only customer at -that particular hour.</p> - -<p>“Vat you want, boy?” asked the old man, as Larry entered. “I don’t -have noddings to gif away to beggars. I ain’t buying noddings. You had -better git out.”</p> - -<p>“I’m not selling anything and I’m not a beggar,” said Larry sharply. “I -came in here to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">27</a></span> buy a meal,—er—that is a small one,” he added as he -thought of his limited finances.</p> - -<p>“Ach! a meal, eh!” exclaimed the German, smiling instead of frowning. -“Dot’s different alretty yet! Sid down! I have fine meals!”</p> - -<p>“I guess I only want something plain,” spoke Larry. “A cup of coffee -and some bread and butter.”</p> - -<p>“We gif a plate of soup, a piece of meat, coffee und rolls yet by a -meal,” said the restaurant keeper, and Larry wondered how much such a -meal would cost. “It’s fifteen cents alretty,” the German went on, and -Larry breathed a sigh of relief, for he was very hungry.</p> - -<p>He had gone, by chance, into one of the cheap though good restaurants -of New York, where a few cents buys plenty of food, though it is not -served with as much style as in more expensive places.</p> - -<p>The restaurant keeper motioned Larry to sit down at one of the -oilcloth-covered tables, and then, having brought a glass of water, -hurried away. Soon his voice was heard giving orders, and in a little -while he came back, bringing a bowl of hot soup. Larry thought he had -never tasted anything so fine.</p> - -<p>By this time several other persons had come into the place and the -German was kept busy filling orders. A young woman came out from the -rear of the shop to help him and she served Larry<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">28</a></span> with the rest of his -meal. When he had finished he was given a red square of pasteboard, -with the figures “15” on it, and he guessed that this was his meal -check and that he was to pay at the desk, over which a fat woman -presided. It was near the door, and walking up to it Larry laid down -his quarter, getting his ten cents in change and going out.</p> - -<p>He felt that he was getting on in the world, since he had eaten all by -himself in a public restaurant, and he was encouraged now to go on with -his search for work. A meal often puts a strong heart into a man, or -boy either, for that matter.</p> - -<p>“Now for a job!” exclaimed Larry as he started off briskly.</p> - -<p>He consulted the paper which he still had and went to several -places that had advertised. But that day must have brought forth an -astonishing crop of boys out of work, or else all places were quickly -filled, for at every establishment where Larry called he was told that -there was no need for his services.</p> - -<p>Signs of “Boy Wanted” became “as scarce as hen’s teeth,” Larry said -afterward, which are very scarce indeed, as no one ever saw a hen with -teeth. About four o’clock in the afternoon he found himself at the -junction of Fifth Avenue and Broadway, where the big Flatiron Building, -as it is called, stands. Larry had walked several miles and he was -tired and discouraged.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">29</a></span> -The day, which had been pleasant when Larry started out, had become -cloudy, and a dark bank of clouds rolling up in the west indicated that -a thunderstorm was about to break. As Larry stood there, amid all the -bustle and excitement of the biggest city in the United States, he felt -so lonely and worried that he did not know what to do. He thought of -his mother and the children at home, and wondered whether he would ever -get work so that he could take care of them.</p> - -<p>Suddenly, from out of the western sky, there came a dazzling flash of -lightning. It was followed by a crashing peal of thunder, and then -the storm, which had been gathering for some time, burst. There was a -deluge of rain, and people began running for shelter.</p> - -<p>Larry looked about, and, seeing that many were making for the open -doorway of the Flatiron Building, on the Fifth Avenue side, ran in that -direction. He had hardly reached the friendly shelter when there came -a crash that sounded like the discharge of a thirteen-inch gun, and a -shock that seemed to make the very ground tremble.</p> - -<p>At the same time Larry felt a queer tingling in the ends of his -fingers, and several persons near him jumped.</p> - -<p>“That struck near here!” a man at his side exclaimed.</p> - -<p>“Guess you’re right,” another man said. “Lucky we’re in out of the -wet.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">30</a></span> -By this time the rain was coming down in torrents, and several more -persons crowded into the lobby of the big building. Larry stayed near -the door, for he liked to watch the storm and was not afraid.</p> - -<p>Suddenly, down the street, there sounded a shrill whistle, mingled with -a rumbling and a clang of bells.</p> - -<p>“It’s a fire!” cried several.</p> - -<p>“Lightning struck!” exclaimed one or two.</p> - -<p>“It was that last smash!” said the man Larry had noticed first. “I -thought it did some damage. Here come the engines!”</p> - -<p>Up Fifth Avenue dashed the steamers, hose carts, and hook-and-ladder -wagons.</p> - -<p>“There’s the fire! In that building across the street!” someone said.</p> - -<p>Larry looked and saw, coming out of the top story of a big piano -warehouse on the opposite side of Fifth Avenue, a volume of black -smoke. A number of men, unmindful of the rain, ran out to see the -firemen work, and after a little hesitation Larry, who did not mind a -wetting, followed.</p> - -<p>It was the first time he had ever seen a fire in a big city, and he -did not want to miss it. He worked his way through the crowds that -quickly gathered until he was almost in front. There he held his place, -not minding the rain, which was still falling hard, though not as -plentifully as at first.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">31</a></span> -He saw the firemen run out long lengths of hose, attach them to the -steamers, which had already started to pump, and watched the ladder men -run out the long runged affairs up which they swarmed to carry the hose -to the top stories, where the lightning had started the fire.</p> - -<p>Then the water tower was brought into play. Under the power of -compressed air the long slender pole of latticed ironwork rose high, -carrying several lengths of hose with it. Then the nozzle was pointed -toward the top windows, and soon a powerful stream of water was being -sent in on the flames, that were making great headway among wood and -shavings in the piano place.</p> - -<p>The street was filled with excited men who were running back and forth. -Many of them were persons who had come from near-by buildings to see -the fire. Some were from the burning building, trying to save their -possessions. The firemen themselves were the coolest of the lot, and -went about their tasks as if there was nothing unusual the matter. Soon -the police patrol dashed up and the blue-coats piled out and began to -establish fire lines. Larry, like many others, was forced to get back -from the middle of the street.</p> - -<p>The boy, however, managed to keep his position in the front rank. He -watched with eager eyes the firemen at work, and never thought how wet -he was.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">32</a></span> -“It’s going to be a bad blaze,” remarked a man near Larry. “The fire -department’s going to have its hands full this time.”</p> - -<p>It certainly seemed so, for flames were spouting from all the windows -on the top story and the one below it. More engines dashed up, and the -excitement, noise, and confusion grew.</p> - -<p>In front of Larry a big policeman was standing, placed there by the -sergeant in charge of the reserves to maintain the fire lines. The -officer had his back toward the crowd, and enjoyed a good vantage -point from which to watch the flames. A young fellow, with his coat -collar and trousers turned up, and carrying an umbrella, worked his way -through the crowd until he was beside Larry.</p> - -<p>“Let me pass, please,” he said, and then, slipping under the rope which -the police had stretched, he was about to pass the policeman and get -closer to the fire.</p> - -<p>“Here, come back, you!” the officer exclaimed.</p> - -<p>“It’s all right; I’m a reporter from the <cite>Leader</cite>,” said the young -fellow, and he turned, showing a big shining metal star on his coat.</p> - -<p>“Go ahead,” spoke the policeman. “You’ll have a good story, I’m -thinking.”</p> - -<p>“Anybody hurt?” asked the reporter, pausing to ask the first question -that a newspaper man puts when he gets to a fire.</p> - -<p>“Wouldn’t wonder. Saw the Roosevelt Hospital<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">33</a></span> ambulance taking a man -away when we came up. Jumped from the roof, I heard.”</p> - -<p>“Gee! I’ll have to get busy! Say, it ain’t doin’ a thing but rain, is -it? I can’t take notes and hold my umbrella too, and I certainly hate -to get wet. I wish I had a kid to manage the thing for me.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll hold the umbrella for you,” volunteered Larry, quick to take -advantage of the situation, and realizing that, by aiding the reporter, -who seemed to be a sort of favored person at fires, he might see more -of the blaze.</p> - -<p>“All right, kid, come along,” spoke the newspaper man, and, at a nod -from the policeman to show it was all right, Larry slipped under the -rope and followed the reporter, who made off on a run toward the -burning building. Many men wished they were in Larry’s place.</p> - -<p>“Come on, youngster. What’s your name?” asked the reporter of Larry.</p> - -<p>The boy told him.</p> - -<p>“Mine’s Harvey Newton,” volunteered the newspaper man. “We’ll have to -look lively. Here, you hold the umbrella over me, while I make a few -notes.”</p> - -<p>Larry did so, screening the paper which the reporter drew from his -pocket as much as possible from the rain. Mr. Newton, who, as Larry -looked at him more closely, appeared much older than he had at first, -made what looked like the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">34</a></span> tracks of a hen, but which were in reality -a few notes setting down the number of the building, the height, the -size, the location of the fire. Then the reporter jotted down the -number of engines present, a few facts about the crowd, the way the -police were handling it, and something of how the firemen were fighting -the blaze.</p> - -<p>“This is better than getting wet through,” Mr. Newton said, as he -returned his paper to his pocket and waited for new developments.</p> - -<p>“Say, why don’t you bring the city editor out with you when you cover -fires?” asked another reporter, from a different paper, addressing Mr. -Newton, and noticing Larry’s occupation.</p> - -<p>“I would if he’d come,” replied Mr. Newton. “Don’t you wish you had an -umbrella and a rain-shield bearer?”</p> - -<p>“Don’t know but what I do,” rejoined the other, who was soaking wet. -“Say, this is a corker, ain’t it? Got much?”</p> - -<p>“Not yet. Just arrived.”</p> - -<p>Suddenly, with a report like that of a dynamite blast, the whole top -of the building seemed to rise in the air. An explosion of oils and -varnishes used on pianos had occurred. For an instant there was deep -silence succeeding the report. Then came cries of fear and pain, -mingled with the shouts of men in the fiercely burning structure.</p> - -<p>“I’ll need help on this story!” exclaimed Mr.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">35</a></span> Newton. “I wonder—— -Say, Larry,” he went on, turning to the boy, “can you use a telephone?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Larry, who had used one several times at Campton.</p> - -<p>“Then call up the <cite>Leader</cite> office. The number’s seventeen hundred and -eighty-four. Ask for the city editor, and tell him Newton said to send -down a couple of men to help cover the fire. Run as if you were in a -race!”</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">36</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="v" id="v"></a>CHAPTER V<br /> -<span>LARRY SECURES WORK</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Larry</span> handed over the umbrella and darted toward the sidewalk. He -wiggled his way through the crowd, and went back to the lobby of the -Flatiron Building, where he had noticed a telephone booth. Dashing -inside he took off the receiver, and gave central the number of the -<cite>Leader</cite> office. Then the girl in the exchange, after making the -connection, told him to drop ten cents in the slot, for the telephone -was of the automatic kind. In a few seconds Larry, in a somewhat -breathless voice, was talking with the city editor of one of New York’s -biggest newspapers.</p> - -<p>“What’s that?” Larry heard the voice at the other end of the wire ask. -“Newton told you to call me up? Who are you? Larry Dexter, eh? Well, -what is it? Big fire, eh? Explosion? Fifth Avenue and Broadway? All -right. I’ll attend to it.”</p> - -<p>Then, before the city editor hung up the receiver of his instrument -Larry heard him call in sharp tones:</p> - -<p>“Smith, Robinson! Quick! Jump up to that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">37</a></span> fire and help Newton. -Telephone the stuff in! We’ll get out an extra if it’s worth it!”</p> - -<p>Then came a click that told that the connection was cut off, and Larry -knew that help for his friend, the reporter, was on the way.</p> - -<p>The boy hurried from the booth and ran again toward the crowd that -was watching the fire. There were more people than ever now on the -scene, but Larry managed to make his way through them to where the same -policeman stood that had let himself and the reporter through the lines -once before. Larry resolved to find his new friend. He slid close up to -the officer.</p> - -<p>“I’m helping Mr. Newton, the reporter for the <cite>Leader</cite>,” the boy said -to the bluecoat.</p> - -<p>The policeman looked down, recognized Larry, and said:</p> - -<p>“All right, youngster, go ahead. Only get a fire badge next time or -I’ll have to shut you out.”</p> - -<p>But Larry was not worrying about the next time. He was rejoicing that -he had gained admittance through the lines, and was close to the fire, -which was now burning furiously.</p> - -<p>More engines arrived with the sending in of the third alarm, and -several ambulances were on the scene, as a number of men had been hurt -in the explosion. Within the space made by the ropes there was plenty -of room to move about, but there was much confusion. Larry spied Mr. -Newton as close to the blaze as the reporter could get.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">38</a></span> Then he saw -him dart over to an ambulance to which they had carried a wounded man.</p> - -<p>Larry ran after his new friend, and found him getting the name of the -injured piano worker, who was badly burned. The poor fellow was being -swathed in cotton and oil by the ambulance surgeon, but the reporter -did not seem to think of this. He asked the man for his name and -address, got them, and jotted them down on his paper, which was now -quite wet, since he had furled the umbrella.</p> - -<p>“Back on the job, eh?” questioned Mr. Newton, stopping a moment in his -rush to notice Larry. “Did Mr. Emberg say he’d send me some help?”</p> - -<p>“Mr. Emberg?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Yes. The city editor you telephoned to?”</p> - -<p>“Oh yes, I heard him tell someone to ‘jump out on the fire.’”</p> - -<p>“Then they’ll come. Now, youngster, let’s see—what’s your name? Oh -yes,—Larry. Well, I’m going to have my hands full now. Never mind -about holding the umbrella. But drop in the <cite>Leader</cite> office and see -me some day, say about five o’clock in the afternoon, after we go to -press.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” said Larry, dimly wondering how he was to get home, since -he had spent his last ten cents for the telephone. But Mr. Newton was -thoughtful to remember that item, and taking a quarter from his pocket -he handed it to Larry.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">39</a></span> -“That’s for the message and your trouble,” he said.</p> - -<p>Larry was glad enough to take it, though he would have been satisfied -with ten cents.</p> - -<p>“Don’t forget to call and see me!” said Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>The next instant there came loud cries of warning, and looking up Larry -saw the whole upper front of the building toppling outward, and ready -to fall over.</p> - -<p>“Back! Back for your lives!” cried police and firemen in a shrill -chorus.</p> - -<p>Larry turned and ran, as did scores of others who were in the path of -the crumbling masonry. A moment later the crash came. Then followed a -rush of the frightened crowd, in which Larry was borne from his feet -and carried along, until he found himself two blocks from the fire.</p> - -<p>He turned to make his way back to within the fire lines, but found it -too hard a task, as the crowd was now enormous. Then he decided to give -it up as a bad job, and go home. Inquiry of a policeman showed him -which car to take, and an hour later he was in the small apartment, -where he was met by his mother and the children, who were much alarmed -over his absence.</p> - -<p>“No luck, mother,” Larry said, in answer to a look from Mrs. Dexter. -“But I earned fifteen cents, anyhow, by helping at a fire.”</p> - -<p>“Helping at a fire?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">40</a></span> -Then Larry told his experience to the no small wonderment of them all.</p> - -<p>“Maybe Mr. Newton will help me get a job,” he said hopefully.</p> - -<p>“I wish he would,” said Mrs. Dexter. “I have some work to do, Larry,” -she added.</p> - -<p>“You, mother?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, a lady on the floor above does sewing for a factory. It happened -that one of the women who works in the place is sick, and our neighbor -thought of me. I went to the shop, and I got something to do.”</p> - -<p>“But I don’t like to have you work in a shop, mother,” objected Larry.</p> - -<p>“I am to do the sewing at home,” went on Mrs. Dexter. “I cannot earn -much, but it is better than nothing, and it may improve in time.”</p> - -<p>“Maybe I can get a job diggin’ gold somewhere,” put in James. “If I do -I’ll give you a million dollars, mommer.”</p> - -<p>“I’m sure you will,” said his mother, giving him a hug.</p> - -<p>“Maybe I could sew some,” spoke Lucy, from the chair where she was -sitting, propped up in cushions.</p> - -<p>“I’d like to see us let you!” exclaimed Larry. “You just wait, I’ll get -a job somehow!”</p> - -<p>But, though he spoke boldly, the boy was not so certain of his success. -He was in a big city, where thousands are seeking work every hour,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">41</a></span> and -where opportunities to labor do not go long unappropriated. But Larry -was hopeful, and, though he worried somewhat over the prospect of the -little family coming to grief in New York, he had not given up yet, by -any means, for this was not his way.</p> - -<p>Late that night Larry went out and bought a copy of the <cite>Leader</cite>. On -the front page, set off by big headlines, was the story of the fire and -explosion. The boy felt something of a part ownership in the account, -and was proud to think he had helped, in some small measure, to provide -such a thrilling tale.</p> - -<p>For the fire proved a disastrous one, in which three men were killed -and a number seriously hurt. The papers, for two days thereafter, -had more stories about the blaze, and there was some talk of an -investigation to see who was responsible for having so much oil and -varnish stored in the place, which, it was decided by all, was the -cause of the worst features of the accident.</p> - -<p>During those two days Larry made a vain search for work. But there -never seemed to be such a small number of positions and so many boys to -fill them.</p> - -<p>The third day, after a fruitless tramp about the city, Larry found -himself down on Park Row, near the Post Office. He looked at one of the -many tall buildings in that locality, and there staring<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">42</a></span> him in the -face, from the tenth story of one, were the words:</p> - -<p class="center ornate">New York Leader.</p> - -<p>“That’s my paper,” Larry thought with a sense of pride. Then the idea -came to him to go up and see Mr. Newton, the reporter. It was nearly -five o’clock, and this was the hour Mr. Newton had mentioned. Larry did -not exactly know why he was going in to see the reporter. He had some -dim notion of asking if there was not some work he might get to do.</p> - -<p>At any rate, he reasoned, it would do no harm to try. Accordingly -he entered the elevator, and asked the attendant on what floor the -reporters of the <cite>Leader</cite> might be found.</p> - -<p>“Twelfth,” was the reply, and then, before Larry could get his breath, -he was shot upward, and the man called out:</p> - -<p>“Twelfth floor. This express makes no stop until the twenty-first now.”</p> - -<p>Larry managed to get out, somewhat dizzy by the rapid flight.</p> - -<p>Before him the boy saw a door, marked in gilt letters:</p> - -<p class="center"><em>City Room.</em></p> - -<p>“I wonder where the country room is,” mused Larry. “I guess I’d feel -more at home in a country room than I would in a city one.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">43</a></span> -Then the door opened and several young men came out.</p> - -<p>“Did you get any good stories to-day?” asked one.</p> - -<p>“Pretty fair suicide,” was the answer. “How’d you make out?”</p> - -<p>“Pretty decent murder, but they cleared it up too soon. No mystery in -it.”</p> - -<p>Rightly guessing that they were reporters, Larry approached them and -asked for Mr. Newton. He was directed to walk into the city room, and -there he saw his friend, with his feet perched upon a desk, smoking a -pipe.</p> - -<p>“Hello, youngster!” greeted Mr. Newton. “Been to any more fires?”</p> - -<p>“No,” said Larry with a smile. “That one was enough.”</p> - -<p>“I should say so. Well, you helped me considerable on that. We beat the -other papers.”</p> - -<p>“Beat them?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Yes, got out quicker, and had a heap better story, if I do say it -myself. You helped some. Want to go down and see the presses run?”</p> - -<p>“I came in to see if there was any chance of getting work,” answered -Larry, determined to plunge at once into the matter that most -interested him. “My mother and I and the rest of the family came to New -York a few days ago, and I need work. Is there any chance at all of a -job here?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">44</a></span> -“Well, if that isn’t luck!” exclaimed Mr. Newton, without any apparent -reference to Larry’s question. “Say,” he called to someone in the next -room, “weren’t you asking me if I knew of someone who wanted to run -copy, Mr. Emberg?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied the city editor, coming out into the reporter’s room. -“Why?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing, only here’s a friend of mine who wants the job, that’s all,” -said Mr. Newton, as if such coincidences happened every day.</p> - -<p>“Ever run copy?” asked the city editor, after a pause.</p> - -<p>“I—I don’t know,” replied Larry, wondering what sort of work it was.</p> - -<p>“It’s like being an office boy in any other establishment,” said Mr. -Newton. “You carry the stuff from the reporters’ desks to the editors’ -and copy readers’, and you carry it from them,—that is, what’s left of -it—to the tube that shoots it to the composing room.”</p> - -<p>“I guess I could do it, I’m pretty strong,” replied Larry, whereat the -two men laughed, though Larry could not see why.</p> - -<p>“You’ll do,” said the city editor pleasantly. “I’ll give you a trial, -anyhow. When can you come in?”</p> - -<p>“Right now!” exclaimed Larry, hardly believing the good news was true.</p> - -<p>“To-morrow will do,” said the editor with a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">45</a></span> smile. “We’re all through -for to-day. Come in at eight o’clock to-morrow morning.”</p> - -<p>“I will!” almost gasped Larry, and then, as the two men nodded a kind -good-night, he sped from the room.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">46</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="vi" id="vi"></a>CHAPTER VI<br /> -<span>LARRY MAKES AN ENEMY</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Larry</span> thought he would never get home that evening to tell the good -news. He fairly burst into the room where his mother was sewing and -cried out:</p> - -<p>“Hurrah, mother! I’ve got a job!”</p> - -<p>“Good, Larry!” exclaimed Mrs. Dexter. “I’m so glad. What is it?”</p> - -<p>Talking so rapidly he could hardly be understood, Larry narrated all -that had occurred on his visit to the newspaper office.</p> - -<p>“I’m to go to work to-morrow morning,” he finished.</p> - -<p>“Will they give you a thousand dollars, Larry?” asked little James, -coming up to his brother.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid not, Jimmy. I really forgot to ask how much they pay, but -it will be something for a start, anyhow.”</p> - -<p>“Maybe they’ll let you write stories for the paper,” went on James, who -was a great reader of fairy tales.</p> - -<p>“Oh, wouldn’t that be fine!” spoke Lucy.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">47</a></span> -“They don’t have many stories in newspapers,” said Larry, who had begun -to consider himself somewhat of an authority in the matter. “At least -they call the things they print stories, for I heard Mr. Newton say he -had a good story of the fire, but they’re not what we call stories. -I wish I could get to writing, though; but I’m afraid I don’t know -enough.”</p> - -<p>“Why don’t you study nights?” suggested Lucy. “I’ll help you.”</p> - -<p>“I believe I will,” replied Larry, for his sister had been very bright -in her studies before the spinal trouble took her from school. “But -first I want to see what sort of work I have to do. My, but I’m hungry!”</p> - -<p>“We were waiting with supper for you,” said Larry’s mother. “I’ll get -it right away.”</p> - -<p>Then, while Mrs. Dexter set the table and started to serve the meal, -Larry took little Mary on his knee and told her over again the story -of the big fire he had seen, a tale which James also listened to with -great delight. The little boy declared it was better than the best -fairy story he had ever read.</p> - -<p>Half an hour before the appointed time next morning Larry was at the -office of the <cite>Leader</cite>. Neither the city editor, the copy readers, -nor any of the reporters were on hand yet, but there were two boys in -the room. At first they paid no attention to Larry, but stood in one -corner, conversing.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">48</a></span> One of the boys, a rather thin chap, with a face -that seemed older than it should have on a boy of his size, took out a -cigarette and lighted it.</p> - -<p>“If Mr. Emberg catches you, Peter, you’ll get fired,” cautioned the -other fellow, who had a shock of light hair, blue eyes, and seemed a -good-natured sort of chap.</p> - -<p>“A heap I care for Emberg,” was Peter Manton’s reply. “I can get -another job easy. The <cite>Rocket</cite> needs a good copy boy. Besides Emberg -won’t be here for an hour,” and he began to puff on his cigarette.</p> - -<p>Larry advanced further into the room, and, at the sound of his steps, -the other boys turned quickly. Peter was the first to speak.</p> - -<p>“Hello, kid,” he said rather familiarly, considering Larry was as old -and about as large as himself. “What do you want?”</p> - -<p>“I’m waiting for Mr. Emberg,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>“Lookin’ for a job?” sneered Peter. “If you are you can fade away. We -got all the help we need. What right you got buttin’ in?”</p> - -<p>“Mr. Emberg told me to come here and see him,” said Larry quietly, and -then he sat down in a chair.</p> - -<p>“Look a-here,” began Peter, crossing the room quickly and coming close -to Larry, “if you think you can come in here and git a job over my head -you’re goin’ to get left. Do you hear?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">49</a></span> -Larry thought it best not to answer.</p> - -<p>“I’ve a good mind to punch your face,” went on Peter, doubling up his -fist. He seemed half inclined to put his threat into execution when the -door suddenly opened and Mr. Newton walked into the city room.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Larry!” he exclaimed cordially. “You’re on time, I see.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir,” replied the new copy boy.</p> - -<p>At the sight of the reporter Peter had dropped his cigarette to the -floor and stepped on it. At the same time he slunk away from Larry, -though the look in Peter’s face was not pleasant.</p> - -<p>“Who’s been smoking cigarettes?” asked Mr. Newton, sniffing the air -suspiciously. “Don’t you boys know the orders?”</p> - -<p>While it was permitted for the men in the room to smoke there were -stringent rules against the boys indulging in the habit.</p> - -<p>“There was a feller come in to see the editor,” replied Peter. “He was -smokin’ real hard. But he didn’t stay long. I guess that’s what you -smell.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Newton gave a quick look at Peter, and then at the still -smouldering cigarette end on the floor. However, if he had any -suspicions he did not mention them.</p> - -<p>Several other reporters came in now, and there was much laughter -and joking among them. Some had work to do on the stories they had -been<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">50</a></span> out on the night before, and soon half a dozen typewriters were -clicking merrily.</p> - -<p>Mr. Emberg arrived about half-past eight o’clock and began sending the -men out on their different duties, or assignments as they are called in -a newspaper office. He greeted Larry with a smile and told him to wait -until the morning’s rush was over, when the lad would be told what his -work was.</p> - -<p>Larry was much interested in watching and listening to all that went -on. He heard the men talking about fires, robberies, suicides, and -political matters. The place seemed like a hive full of busy bees -with men and boys constantly coming and going. Larry felt a thrill of -excitement when he realized that he was soon to have a part in this.</p> - -<p>In about half an hour, when most of the men had gone out to various -places, some to hospitals, some to police stations, some to the courts, -and some to fire headquarters, the room was comparatively quiet.</p> - -<p><a name="frontis" id="frontis"></a>“Now then, you new boy—what’s your name?” began Mr. Emberg, motioning -to Larry. “Oh yes, I remember it now, it’s Harry.”</p> - -<p>“No, sir, it’s Larry,” corrected the new boy.</p> - -<p>“Oh yes, Larry. Well, I’ll tell you what you are to do.”</p> - -<p>Thereupon the city editor instructed Larry how, whenever he heard -“Copy!” called, to hurry<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">51</a></span> to the desk, get the sheets of paper on which -the articles for the paper were written, and carry them to a room down -the hall. There he was to put them in a sort of brass tube, or carrier, -drop the carrier into a pipe, and pull a lever, which sent compressed -air into the pipe and shot the tube of copy to the composing room. -There it would be taken out and set up into type. But Larry’s duties, -for the time, ended when he had put the copy in the tube.</p> - -<p>There were many other little things to do, and errands to run, Mr. -Emberg said, but Larry would pick them up in time.</p> - -<p>“Now then, Peter,” called Mr. Emberg—“or never mind, I guess you had -better do it, Bud,” to the tow-headed office boy. “You show Larry -around a bit, so he’ll know where to go when I send him.”</p> - -<p>“Come ahead,” said Bud with a smile.</p> - -<p>As they passed Peter, who seemed to be sulking in a corner, Larry heard -him utter:</p> - -<p>“You wait, Larry, or whatever your name is, I’ll fix you for buttin’ in -here. You’ll wish you’d never come.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t mind him,” said Bud. “He’s afraid he’ll lose his job.”</p> - -<p>“Why?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Oh, he’s made two or three bad mistakes here lately, and I guess he’s -afraid they got you in his place. But don’t let that worry you, only -look<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">52</a></span> out for Pete, that’s all, or he may do something you won’t like.”</p> - -<p>“I will,” replied Larry, as he followed his friend to learn something -about the mysteries of a big newspaper office.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">53</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="vii" id="vii"></a>CHAPTER VII<br /> -<span>THE MISSING COPY</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Bud</span> first showed Larry how to work the pneumatic or compressed-air -tube. Around it stood several other boys who seemed to be quite -busy. Now and then one would dash in with a bunch of paper, grab a -tube, stuff the copy in, and yank the lever over. A hissing, as the -imprisoned air rushed into the pipe, told that the copy was on its way -to the composing room.</p> - -<p>“Where are those boys from; other papers?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Gosh, no!” exclaimed Bud. “No boy from another paper would dare come -in here; that is while he worked for another paper. We’d think he was -trying to get wind of some exclusive story we had. Those boys are from -the different departments. One carries copy from the state department, -another from the sporting room, and another from the telegraph desk.”</p> - -<p>Then Bud briefly explained that there were several editors on the -paper. One took charge of all the news in the city, and this was Mr. -Emberg. Another handled all the foreign news that came in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">54</a></span> over the -telegraph. Still another took charge of all matters that happened in -the state outside of the city and the immediate surrounding territory. -Then there was the sporting editor, who looked after all such things as -football and baseball games, racing, wrestling, and so on. Each editor -had a separate room, and there were one or two boys in each department -to carry copy to the tube room, whence it was sent up to the printers.</p> - -<p>“But our room’s the best,” finished Bud, with an air of conscious pride.</p> - -<p>Larry was shown where the offices of the different editors were, so -that he would know where to go if sent with messages to them. He was -also taken to the composing room.</p> - -<p>There he stood for a while bewildered by the noise and seeming -confusion. A score of typesetting machines were at work, clicking away -while the men sat at the keyboards, which were almost like those of -typewriters. Larry saw where the tubes with copy in them bounced from -the air pipe into a box. From that they were taken to a table by a boy, -whose face was liberally covered with printer’s ink.</p> - -<p>There a man rapidly numbered them with a blue pencil, and gave the -sheets out to the compositors.</p> - -<p>“Sometimes you have to come up here for proofs of a story,” Bud -explained. “Then go over to that man there,” pointing to a tall thin<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">55</a></span> -individual, “and repeat whatever Mr. Emberg or whoever sends you, says. -You see there are several different kinds of type in the heads of a -story and each story is called according to the kind of a head it has.”</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid I’ll never learn,” said Larry, who was beginning to feel -confused.</p> - -<p>“Oh yes, you will. I’ll explain it all to you. You probably won’t have -to go for proofs for several days. You’ll only have to carry copy.”</p> - -<p>They stayed up in the composing room for some time, and every second -Larry wondered more and more how out of so much seeming confusion any -order could ever come.</p> - -<p>Boys with long galleys, like narrow brass pans that corresponded in -size to columns of the newspaper, and set full of type, were hurrying -with them to a big machine where they were placed on a flat table, and -a roller covered with ink passed over them. Then a boy placed a long -narrow slip of paper on the inky type, passed another roller over it, -and lifted off the paper.</p> - -<p>“That’s what they calling pulling or taking a proof,” said Bud. “But -come on now, we’ll go back to the city room and rush copy. I guess -there’s some by this time.”</p> - -<p>There was quite a bit, for a number of stories had been handed in by -the reporters, had been looked over by Mr. Emberg, his assistant, or -the copy readers, and were ready for the compositors.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">56</a></span> Peter had been -kept busy running back and forth and was in no gentle humor.</p> - -<p>“I’ll fix you for this,” muttered Peter to Larry and Bud. “I’ll get -even for running off and letting me do all the work. You jest wait an’ -see wot I do!”</p> - -<p>He spoke in a low tone, for he did not want the city editor to hear.</p> - -<p>“Cut it out,” advised Bud with a grin. “I was sent to show Larry about -the plant and you know it. Besides, if you try any of your tricks I -know something I can do.”</p> - -<p>“What?” asked Peter.</p> - -<p>“Who was smoking cigarettes?” asked Bud in a whisper.</p> - -<p>“If you squeal on me I’ll—I’ll do you up brown,” threatened Peter.</p> - -<p>“It will take two like you,” boasted Bud.</p> - -<p>“Well, I can get somebody to help me,” sputtered Peter.</p> - -<p>“Copy!” called Mr. Emberg at that instant, and, at a nod from Bud, -Larry sprang forward to carry it to the tube. It was his first actual -work in the newspaper office, and quite proud he felt as he put the -story in the case and sent it up the pipe.</p> - -<p>From then on all three boys were kept busy, for as the morning wore -on several reporters came in with stories, long or short, that they -had gathered on their various assignments, and these<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">57</a></span> were quickly -corrected and edited, and ready for the typesetters.</p> - -<p>Back and forth, from the city room desk to the pneumatic tube, the -three boys ran. Larry noticed that Peter was in the sulks and that he -did not seem to care very much about doing the work. Once or twice he -lagged down the hall instead of hurrying back from the tube after more -copy as he should have done, once Mr. Emberg remarked sharply to him:</p> - -<p>“Peter, if you don’t want to work here, there are lots of other boys I -can get.”</p> - -<p>“My foot hurts me,” whined the boy, as he limped slightly.</p> - -<p>“Why didn’t you say so before?” inquired the city editor. “If it is -very bad you can go home and come in to-morrow.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, it’s not as bad as that,” replied Peter, fearing lest he should be -found out in his deceit. “I guess I can stand it.”</p> - -<p>Meanwhile Larry was kept on the jump. He soon got the knack of his -duties and resolved to make himself as useful as possible. With this -in view he kept close watch on the desk, and, as soon as he saw Mr. -Emberg, the assistant city editor, or any of the readers, fold up copy, -preparatory to handing it to one of the boys, Larry hurried up without -waiting for the cry “Copy!”</p> - -<p>“That’s the way to do it,” said Mr. Emberg<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">58</a></span> encouragingly, as he -noticed Larry’s remarkable quickness.</p> - -<p>“Don’t be so fresh,” muttered Peter on one of these occasions, as he -passed Larry in the long and deserted hall. “There’s no use rushin’ so, -and the union won’t stand for it. I’ll punch your head if you don’t -look out!”</p> - -<p>“I’m going to do my work right, and I don’t care what you say!” -exclaimed Larry. “And if there’s any head punching to be done, I can do -my share!”</p> - -<p>“Um,” grunted Peter. “I’ll get square with you all right!”</p> - -<p>It was now noon, and the paper went to press for the first edition -shortly after one o’clock. So there was considerable excitement and -hurry in all the departments, to get the important news set up and -ready to be printed.</p> - -<p>Reporters were hurrying in and out, the readers and editors were using -their pencils rapidly, correcting and changing copy, and the three boys -in the city room were kept on the jump all the time.</p> - -<p>Shortly before one o’clock a reporter came in all out of breath.</p> - -<p>“Man—killed—himself—in—the—Post Office just—now!” he gasped.</p> - -<p>“Quick!” shouted Mr. Emberg. “We’ve only got ten minutes to catch the -edition. Write as fast as you can. Short paragraphs. Here, one<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">59</a></span> of you -boys bring me the sheets as fast as Mr. Steifert finishes them.”</p> - -<p>The reporter sat down to a typewriter, rapidly inserted a piece of -paper and began to click out copy so fast that Larry wondered how he -could see the keys.</p> - -<p>“I’ll carry the sheets to Mr. Emberg,” said Bud to Larry, “and you get -ready to rush them to the tube.”</p> - -<p>This was done. As soon as Mr. Steifert had one paragraph written he -pulled it from the machine and handed it to Bud, who ran with it to the -city editor. The latter quickly glanced at it, corrected one or two -slight errors, and passed it over to Larry, who fairly raced down the -hall.</p> - -<p>When he came back another page was ready, and this was kept up until -the story was all upstairs. Then Mr. Emberg proceeded to write a head -for it and Larry carried that copy to the tube.</p> - -<p>“Just made that in time,” said the city editor, as Larry came back. -“Now, Mr. Steifert, get ready a better and longer story for the next -edition. You can take a little more time.”</p> - -<p>Matters became more quiet in the office after the first edition had -gone to press. There were to be two more editions, and there still -remained plenty of work to do. Once or twice Larry was sent to get -proofs from the composing room and luckily he made no errors.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">60</a></span> -It was getting on toward four o’clock when the last edition was getting -ready to close.</p> - -<p>“Copy!” called Mr. Emberg, holding out a bunch of paper and not looking -up to see who answered his summons.</p> - -<p>Larry ran and grabbed it and sped down the hall. Halfway down he was -met by Peter, who also had some papers in his hand.</p> - -<p>“I’ll put that in the tube for you,” said Peter. “I’ve got some more to -go in.”</p> - -<p>At first Larry hesitated. Then, thinking perhaps Peter wanted to make -up for his recent unkind remarks, Larry gave him the copy and returned -to the city room.</p> - -<p>A little later the big presses began thundering in the sub-cellar, and -soon the first copies of the last edition were off and a boy brought -several to the city room.</p> - -<p>“Here! What’s this?” cried Mr. Emberg suddenly, after a hasty glance -over the paper. “Where’s that story about Alderman Murphy?”</p> - -<p>“I handed it to you,” said one of the reporters.</p> - -<p>“I know you did, Reilly. I handled it and put a display head on it. -It went up in time, but it isn’t in. Who took that copy?” he asked, -turning to the three boys who stood to one side of the room. No one -answered for a second or two.</p> - -<p>“It was written on yellow paper,” went on Mr. Emberg.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">61</a></span> -“I—I did,” replied Larry, wondering what was going to happen.</p> - -<p>“What did you do with it?”</p> - -<p>“I—I gave it to Peter,” faltered Larry.</p> - -<p>“You did not!” cried the other office boy, in an angry voice.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">62</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="viii" id="viii"></a>CHAPTER VIII<br /> -<span>PETER IS DISCHARGED</span></h2> - - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Yes</span>, I did,” replied Larry firmly. “I started down the hall with it -as soon as Mr. Emberg gave it to me. You stood near the tube with some -other copy and you said you’d send mine up for me.”</p> - -<p>“How about that, Peter?” asked Mr. Emberg.</p> - -<p>“I—I don’t remember anything about it,” said Peter. “I sent up my own -copy; that’s all I’m supposed to do.”</p> - -<p>“No, it is not,” said the city editor. “You are supposed to do what we -are all doing here, work for the interests of the paper, no matter in -what way. Larry did wrong if he let anyone else take any copy that was -intrusted to him. Never do it again, Larry. When you get copy put it in -the tube yourself. Then you will be sure it goes upstairs.”</p> - -<p>“But he asked me for it,” said the new boy, feeling quite badly over -the matter.</p> - -<p>“No matter if he did.”</p> - -<p>“I didn’t do it. He’s just tryin’ to get out of it,” spoke Peter.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">63</a></span> -“We’ll soon see who’s to blame,” came from the city editor. “You boys -come with me.”</p> - -<p>Secure in the sense that he was right, Larry followed. As for Peter -he would a good deal rather not have gone, only he dared not disobey. -Up to the composing room Mr. Emberg led the two boys. There he asked -the boy whose duty it was to take copy from the tubes whether he had -received any on yellow paper, for it was on sheets of that hue that the -missing story was written.</p> - -<p>“No yellow copy came up this afternoon,” said the tube boy. “The last -batch I took out was a story about the new monument, and that was all.”</p> - -<p>“That’s the copy you took, Peter, about the same time I sent the story -about Alderman Murphy up,” said Mr. Emberg.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know nothin’ about no yellow copy,” said Peter sullenly.</p> - -<p>“I’ll inquire in the copy room downstairs,” said the city editor. With -the boys following him, he went to the apartment where the pipe was -located, in which the copy was sent upstairs. It was the duty of one -boy to remain here all the while the paper was going to press to see -that the machinery was in order.</p> - -<p>“Who sent up the last copy, Dudley?” asked Mr. Emberg.</p> - -<p>“Peter Manton,” replied Dudley. “There was some other fellow that ran -in the last minute, but<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">64</a></span> Peter took the copy from him and said he’d -send it up.”</p> - -<p>“What kind of copy was it?” asked the city editor.</p> - -<p>“On red—no—it was on yellow paper,” replied Dudley.</p> - -<p>“And did you see Peter put it in the pipe?” asked Mr. Emberg.</p> - -<p>“No, sir. I didn’t look at him closely. I had to turn on a little more -compressed air then, and I was too busy to take much notice.”</p> - -<p>“Peter, you never sent that copy up!” exclaimed the city editor -suddenly, turning to the sulking office boy. “You are up to some trick. -Tell me what you did with it.”</p> - -<p>“I didn’t——” began Peter.</p> - -<p>But Mr. Emberg, with a quick motion, leaned forward and tore open -Peter’s coat. Out on the floor -<a name="tumbled" id="tumbled"></a><ins title="Original has 'tumbed'">tumbled</ins> -a number of yellow -sheets of paper. Mr. Emberg picked some of them up.</p> - -<p>“There’s the missing copy,” he said. “Peter, you can go downstairs, get -what money is coming to you, and go. We don’t want you here any more.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” growled Peter sullenly.</p> - -<p>He turned to leave. As he passed Larry he muttered in a low turn:</p> - -<p>“This is all your fault. Wait until I get a chance! I’ll pay you back -all right, all right!”</p> - -<p>Then, before Larry could answer, Peter shuffled<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">65</a></span> down the hall. And -that was the end of Peter on the <cite>Leader</cite>, though it was by no means -the last Larry saw of him.</p> - -<p>Thus the first day of Larry’s life on a big newspaper came to a close -and it was with considerable pride that he started for home. He felt he -had done well, though he had made one or two mistakes. He was a little -worried about what pay he was going to get, and he had a little fear -lest he might be paid nothing while learning.</p> - -<p>His fears were set at rest, however, when, as he was going out of the -door, Mr. Emberg called to him.</p> - -<p>“Well, Larry, how do you like it?”</p> - -<p>“First-rate,” said Larry heartily.</p> - -<p>“I forgot to tell you about your money,” the city editor went on. “You -will get five dollars a week to start, and, as you improve, you will be -paid more. Perhaps you’ll become a reporter some day.”</p> - -<p>“I’d like to, but I’m afraid I never can,” said the boy wistfully.</p> - -<p>“Why not?”</p> - -<p>“I haven’t a good enough education.”</p> - -<p>“It doesn’t always take education to make a good reporter,” said Mr. -Emberg kindly. “Some of our best men would never take a prize at -school. Yet they have a nose for news that makes them more valuable -than the best college educated chaps.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">66</a></span> -“A nose for news?” asked Larry, wondering what sort of a nose that was.</p> - -<p>“Yes; to know a good story when they hear about it, and know how to go -about getting it. That’s what counts. I hope you’ll have a nose for -news, Larry.”</p> - -<p>“I hope so,” replied the boy, yet he did not have much anticipation.</p> - -<p>He was thinking more about the five dollars he was to earn every week -than about his prospects as a reporter. He knew the money would be much -needed, and he resolved to do all he could to merit a raise.</p> - -<p>There was much rejoicing in the humble home that night when Larry told -about his salary. Mrs. Dexter also had good news, for the firm for -which she sewed had given her a finer grade of work, at which she could -earn more money.</p> - -<p>“We’ll get along fine, mother,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“Ain’t you afraid that mean boy Peter will hurt you?” asked little -James, who had listened to Larry’s recital of the discharge of the -other office boy.</p> - -<p>“No, I guess I can take care of myself,” said Larry, feeling of the -muscles of his arm, which were not small for a lad of his age. “And how -are you, Lucy?” the boy went on, going over to where his sister was -propped up in a big chair.</p> - -<p>“I think I’m a little better,” the girl said with a brave attempt at -a smile. Yet a shadow of pain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">67</a></span> crossed her face, and Larry knew she -was suffering but did not want to tell, so as to keep her mother from -worrying.</p> - -<p>“You wait,” whispered Larry. “When I get money enough I’m going to get -you a big chair that you can wheel yourself around in. Then I’m going -to have some big doctor cure you. You just wait, Lucy,” and he gave her -hand a gentle pat.</p> - -<p>“Thank you, Larry,” said his sister. Somehow it made the pain a little -easier when her brother sympathized with her, and she resolved to be -brave and say nothing at all of how she suffered.</p> - -<p>That night, when all save Larry and his mother had gone to bed, Mrs. -Dexter brought out a box of papers and began sorting them over.</p> - -<p>“What are they, mother?” asked the boy.</p> - -<p>“Old documents that are of no use,” said his mother. “I thought I would -burn them up and get them out of the way. I need the box to keep my -thread and sewing materials in.”</p> - -<p>She began piling the papers up on the table, making two bundles; those -she intended to keep and those she wanted to put in the fire.</p> - -<p>“There’s a lot of old deeds,” she said. “I guess they might as well go, -since we no longer own the property.”</p> - -<p>Larry glanced at them. They were mostly for the farm up in Campton -which the sheriff had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">68</a></span> sold. One document, however, caught Larry’s eye.</p> - -<p>“Hello,” he said. “What’s this? ‘Property in the State of New York, in -the locality known as the Bronx.’ I say, mother, what’s this?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, that’s a deed to some land your father took a good many years ago -in settlement of some money a man owed him. It’s no good though.”</p> - -<p>“Why not?”</p> - -<p>“Because your father had it looked up. It’s nothing but a piece of -swamp land. He was swindled on that deal.”</p> - -<p>“Maybe it will be good some day,” said Larry. “I heard some of the -reporters talking in the office to-day about the Bronx. There’s a river -there. It’s quite a ways out, and the reporters hate to be sent there -on stories. But maybe some day, when New York grows bigger, the land -will be valuable.”</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid not,” said Mrs. Dexter with a sigh. “You might as well burn -the deed up.”</p> - -<p>“No, I’ll save it,” said Larry. “It will not take up much room, and I -may find a use for it.”</p> - -<p>“Very well,” spoke his mother. “But these other papers you had better -destroy.”</p> - -<p>Larry looked them over, and, seeing they all referred to the farm they -had recently left, and which they no longer had a claim on, he tossed -them into the fire. The other deed, however, he carefully put away. -Though he did not know it,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">69</a></span> the time was coming when it would prove of -great worth to him and his mother.</p> - -<p>Larry reported early for work the next morning. He was more busy than -the day before, and the calls of copy seemed constant. He ran back and -forth until it seemed that his feet were chunks of lead and his legs -like sticks of wood. Yet he did not flag, and more than once Mr. Emberg -nodded pleasantly to him to show that he appreciated the boy’s attempts -to please.</p> - -<p>Of course Larry made mistakes. He sometimes got the wrong proofs and -took the right ones to the wrong places. But he was good-natured when -told of his errors, and more than one man on the paper, busy as they -all were, took an interest in him, and did much to help him.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">70</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="ix" id="ix"></a>CHAPTER IX<br /> -<span>LARRY GETS A STORY</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">There</span> were few prouder boys in the big city of New York than Larry -when, at the end of his first week, he carried home his wages. The five -dollars seemed a small gold mine to him, and he handed the cash to his -mother with the remark that some day it would be more.</p> - -<p>“You’re doing very well,” said Mrs. Dexter. “I shall not worry now.”</p> - -<p>“I’m goin’ to work to-morrow,” spoke James. “I can sell papers. I seen -littler boys than me sellin’ ’em.”</p> - -<p>“I guess we will not have to start you in right away,” spoke Larry. -“There’s time enough.”</p> - -<p>“Couldn’t you get me some work to do?” asked Lucy with a smile, as -she sat propped up in the big chair. “I could direct envelopes or -something.”</p> - -<p>“You just get well and strong and maybe we’ll talk about work,” said -Larry, for he could not bear to think of his sister suffering.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid I’ll never be any better,” said the girl a little sadly.</p> - -<p>“Yes, you will!” exclaimed Larry, turning<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">71</a></span> away to hide the tears in -his eyes. “I read in our paper to-day of a big doctor that’s coming -from Europe to cure people that have the same kind of spinal disease -you have.”</p> - -<p>“But it costs an awful lot of money,” sighed Lucy.</p> - -<p>“I’ll earn it!” said Larry determinedly.</p> - -<p>During those days came a letter for Mrs. Dexter which had been sent -to Campton from New York and then returned to the metropolis. The -communication was from her sister and told about Mrs. Ralston’s -bereavement and stated that the widow had decided to pay an extended -visit to some of her husband’s folks who lived in another state.</p> - -<p>“I hope she finds a good home,” said Larry’s mother, and that evening -penned a letter to Mrs. Ralston, telling of the changes that had -occurred in the Dexter household.</p> - -<p>Larry began his second week of work with better spirits than he had the -first. He began to feel confidence in himself. Another boy had been -hired to take Peter’s place and Larry lost some of the feeling of being -the “cub” copy boy, as the newest arrival on a paper is called.</p> - -<p>He was rapidly learning many things that were destined to be useful to -him. He could go after proofs now and make no errors, for he had come -to distinguish the different kinds of type in which the headings of the -stories were printed. There<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">72</a></span> were the big “horse heads,” with three -lines of very black type. Then there were the ordinary “display heads,” -of two lines, of not quite such heavy letters. Then came “lap” heads, -smaller still, “twelve points,” or type about half an inch high, and so -on down to the small single-line heads, that were put on only the least -important articles.</p> - -<p>Larry began to have some idea of the necessity of being quick and -accurate. He saw that, even near last-edition time, when everything was -on the rush, the reporters and editors kept cool, and, though they had -to work fast, they made every motion count.</p> - -<p>The boy came to admire the coolness of the veteran reporter who could -write a story with a boy standing at his elbow grabbing each page -of copy as it was finished and rushing it to the editor, and thence -upstairs.</p> - -<p>“I’m going to be a reporter,” Larry decided one day, when he had been -on the paper three weeks. “I’m going to study and fix myself for a -place on the <cite>Leader</cite>.”</p> - -<p>He began to see the importance that a really good and conscientious -reporter holds in a community. He heard the newspaper men telling of -the well-known public men they interviewed, the events of the day -they took part in, and all this fired his ambition to be one of the -<cite>Leader’s</cite> reporters.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">73</a></span> -He spoke to his mother about it that evening and said he was going to -attend night school.</p> - -<p>“There’s a teacher in one of those schools who lives on the floor -above,” said Mrs. Dexter. “I heard his wife talking to Mrs. Jackson the -other day, and she mentioned it. His name is Professor Carlton.”</p> - -<p>“I’m going up and ask him about it,” decided Larry, who, of late, had -been getting in the habit of doing things quickly, as they did in the -newspaper office.</p> - -<p>Professor Carlton was at home, and Larry, after introducing himself, -stated the object of his call.</p> - -<p>“What do you want to study for?” asked the teacher.</p> - -<p>“To be a reporter,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid it will take more than study to make you that,” said Mr. -Carlton. “You have to have a ‘nose for news’ I’m told.”</p> - -<p>“I know,” said Larry, nodding gravely, “that’s what Mr. Emberg, the -city editor, says.”</p> - -<p>“Then you’re on a paper now?” asked Mr. Carlton.</p> - -<p>“Only a copy boy,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>“Many a copy boy has risen to be a reporter, though,” was the teacher’s -answer. “I hope you will. But about the evening schools. You see this -is summer, and the schools do not start until September. That’s two -months off.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">74</a></span> -“I don’t want to wait as long as that,” said Larry. “I want to be -earning more money as soon as I can.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps I can help you,” said the instructor, who had taken an -interest in the lad. “I have little to do nights, and we might make a -class of one, with you for the pupil and me for the teacher, say three -evenings a week. You would learn more rapidly then, and be ready when -the evening schools opened in the fall.”</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid I couldn’t pay for the lessons,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“Never mind about the pay,” said the professor. “I’ll be only -<a name="too" id="too"></a><ins title="Original has 'to'">too</ins> glad -to help a boy that wants to help himself.”</p> - -<p>So it was arranged. Larry had a good common school education, but -there were many things he was ignorant of that the boys of his age, in -the city, were instructed in. So, under the direction of Mr. Carlton -he applied himself to his books evenings, and made good progress, -everything considered.</p> - -<p>“If I can only develop that ‘nose for news,’” Larry thought with a -sigh. He imagined it was some magic gift that comes to only a favored -few. And so, in the main, it does, but at heart every boy is a -reporter, for if he doesn’t tell his chum or the family at home the -different things he sees during the day he’s only half a boy. And -telling the things one sees is, after all, the beginning of reporting,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">75</a></span> -for that’s all a newspaper does, only on a larger scale.</p> - -<p>Like many another thing that one wants very much and which often comes -unexpectedly, Larry’s chance came when he had no idea it was so close at -hand.</p> - -<p>He had been on the <cite>Leader</cite> a month now and was getting well acquainted -not only with the editors and men on the staff, but the different ways -of doing things, from the time a reporter brought a story in until it -came out in the paper.</p> - -<p>One hot August morning as Larry was on his way to work, he saw quite a -crowd at the entrance to the Brooklyn Bridge, caused by a breakdown on -one of the cars. He paused for a few minutes, as he was a little ahead -of time. As he did so he noticed, on the outer edge of the throng, a -handsomely dressed woman. In her hand she carried a large silver purse, -through the open meshes of which could be seen a green roll of bills.</p> - -<p>Suddenly a roughly dressed youth grabbed the purse, pulled it from the -lady’s hand with a savage yank, and bolted down a side street.</p> - -<p>“Thief! Robber! He’s stolen my money!” the woman cried.</p> - -<p>Instantly the crowd forgot all about the breakdown on the bridge and -raised a cry of:</p> - -<p>“Stop thief!”</p> - -<p>“There he goes!”</p> - -<p>“Catch him!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">76</a></span> -“Police!”</p> - -<p>“Which way did he go?” asked a policeman, coming up on the run.</p> - -<p>“Down there!” exclaimed Larry, pointing down a street that ran parallel -with the bridge abutments.</p> - -<p>The fleeing youth was running at top speed, but he made one mistake. He -looked behind to see if anyone was after him, and did not see an ash -barrel that stood in his path. He stumbled over this and went down in -a heap, covered with cinders. He got up, however, before the policeman -was near enough to grab him and started off again.</p> - -<p>At that moment, however, from a side street there came a small cart, in -charge of an Italian, and bearing a heap of peanuts and a roaster at -full steam.</p> - -<p>Before the thief could check his flight he had crashed, full tilt, into -the Italian’s cart. Right into the midst of the pile of peanuts he -went, upsetting the vehicle and landing with it on top of him in the -middle of the street.</p> - -<p>With a shrill cry the Italian threw himself upon the man he supposed -had purposely brought his wares to grief, and thief and peanut vendor -were in the midst of a fight when the policeman came rushing up, and -grabbed his prisoner. The youth still held the purse, an odd-shaped -affair, in his hand.</p> - -<div class="figcenter width400"> -<img src="images/p076.jpg" width="400" height="644" alt="" /> -<div class="caption clear-both">“I’VE GOT YOU! COME TO THE STATION HOUSE”</div> -<div class="float-left"><cite>From Office Boy to Reporter</cite></div> -<div class="float-right"><a href="#got">Page 77</a></div> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">77</a></span> -<a name="got" id="got"></a>“I’ve got you!” exclaimed the officer. “Come to the station house.”</p> - -<p>“Not without a fight!” exclaimed the youth, aiming a blow at the -officer.</p> - -<p>The policeman drew his club, and it looked as if there would be a -battle royal, when another officer came up and the two bluecoats soon -subdued the youth. As they started to march him to the station house, -in the basement of the city hall, which was near by, the Italian -demanded to know who was going to pay for his peanuts.</p> - -<p>“You can come to the sergeant and make a complaint against him if you -like,” spoke the officer who had made the capture.</p> - -<p>The Italian, leaving his cart in charge of a friend who happened along, -trailed after the policemen and their captive. A big crowd gathered, -and the woman whose purse had been stolen, and who was almost in -hysterics over her loss, was located and invited to go to the police -station to tell her story and make a charge against the thief.</p> - -<p>Larry had been in the van the whole time, as had a score of other boys -determined to see the thing through.</p> - -<p>“This will make a good story or I’m mistaken,” he thought. “I’ll get -all the particulars I can and tell Mr. Emberg. It’s something out of -the ordinary too,” and though the affair might have been tragic, he -could not help laughing as he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">78</a></span> thought of the fleeing youth covered -first with ashes and then with peanuts.</p> - -<p>A big throng trooped after the officers, and Larry was beginning to -wonder how he was going to get into the police station to learn the -names of the prisoner and the woman, for he knew the crowd would not be -allowed to enter.</p> - -<p>“I’ll run ahead and get in before they do,” thought Larry. “Then I’ll -be there when they come in.”</p> - -<p>So, taking a short cut, he reached the station house ahead of the -throng.</p> - -<p>“Well, what is it, boy?” asked the sergeant, looking over the desk.</p> - -<p>“I’m from the <cite>Leader</cite>,” announced Larry boldly as he had heard Mr. -Newton tell the policeman that day at the fire. “A thief has just been -arrested down the street. The officers are bringing him here, and I -want to get the story.”</p> - -<p>“Pretty young to be a police reporter, aren’t you?” asked the sergeant -with a smile.</p> - -<p>“Oh, I’m not a regular reporter yet,” said Larry, not wishing to sail -under false colors. “I’m just learning.”</p> - -<p>“I knew it,” replied the sergeant with a smile, for he was acquainted -with most of the <cite>Leader’s</cite> police reporters. “But make yourself at -home, and get all the story you want.”</p> - -<p>Then came a confusion of sound as the throng approached the outer doors -of the station house.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">79</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="x" id="x"></a>CHAPTER X<br /> -<span>LARRY MEETS HIS ENEMY</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Into</span> the main room of the police station came the two officers, their -prisoner, the woman, and the Italian. Some of the crowd tried to -follow, wild with excitement, but the doorman closed the heavy portal -in their faces and several policemen on reserve duty came from the -assembly room to aid in preserving order.</p> - -<p>“Now then,” said the sergeant briskly.</p> - -<p>The officers lined their man up in front of the brass railing and the -sergeant behind the desk began asking the prisoner’s name.</p> - -<p>“Ain’t got none,” was the laconic remark.</p> - -<p>“I know him,” put in one of the officers. “He’s Patsy Dolliver. Lives -down at Mulberry Bend and he’s a bad egg, if ever I knew one. Ain’t -you, Patsy?”</p> - -<p>Finding that it was useless to try and hide his identity, Patsy -admitted his name, and then his age, residence, and a few other facts -were noted down concerning him. The officer told his story.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">80</a></span> -The woman also related how Patsy had grabbed her purse, and the Italian -told in excited language about his lost peanuts.</p> - -<p>All the while Larry was making notes of names and residences, including -that of the woman whose purse had been so nearly lost.</p> - -<p>“I’ll hold you for a hearing before the judge,” the sergeant announced -to the prisoner. “You’ll have to come in the morning as witnesses,” -he added to the woman and the peanut man. “Lock him up, Jim,” to the -doorman, indicating Patsy; and the remarkable incident was closed for -the time being.</p> - -<p>But Larry, with the facts in his possession and a lively recollection -of what had taken place, hurried to the <cite>Leader</cite> office.</p> - -<p>“I just wish I could write it, but I don’t s’pose I can, yet,” he said. -“But I can tell one of the reporters and he can fix it up.”</p> - -<p>He found Mr. Newton there ahead of him, and to the reporter Larry in -breathless tones told what had happened.</p> - -<p>“Good!” exclaimed Mr. Newton. “You just tell that to Mr. Emberg -himself. He’ll be glad to know you are so wide-awake. One of the men -will write for you. Perhaps it will be a beat for us.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, but some of the other papers will be sure to hear of it,” said -Larry.</p> - -<p>“They may get something about it, but not<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">81</a></span> many reporters are around -that early. The cops who made the arrest will go off duty and there -will not be many to tell the details of the chase. That’s the best part -of it. We may not get a beat in one sense of the word, but we’ll have -the best story.”</p> - -<p>When Mr. Emberg came in, Larry, after a few minutes of hesitation, got -up courage enough to advance and tell the story.</p> - -<p>“Well, you certainly had your eyes open,” said the city editor.</p> - -<p>“I thought it would make a good story,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“So it will. You know what’s news all right, youngster!”</p> - -<p>And that was the best praise Larry had that day.</p> - -<p>“Here, Newton,” went on Mr. Emberg, “you fix Larry’s story up. Give it -plenty of space and throw in lots of fun.”</p> - -<p>Then Larry told his friend the story of the stolen pocketbook from -beginning to end. Mr. Newton became infused with Larry’s enthusiasm -at the description of the upsetting of the ash barrel and the peanut -stand. He made many notes and then sat down at a typewriter and began -to make his fingers fly as rapidly as he possibly could.</p> - -<p>Larry could hardly wait for the paper to come out that afternoon, so -anxious was he to see “his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">82</a></span> story,” as he called it. There it was, -right on the front page, under a display head:</p> - -<p class="center p140">THIEF MEETS WITH MISHAP</p> - -<hr class="short" /> - -<p class="center">Steals a Purse, Is Buried Beneath a<br /> -Shower of Ashes and Upsets a<br /> -Peanut Cart</p> - -<hr class="short" /> - -<p>Then came the story, almost as Larry had told it himself with all the -energy he could throw into it, but dressed up in true reportorial -style. Larry was as proud as if he had written it himself.</p> - -<p>“Who got the thief story?” he heard several reporters ask, after the -first edition came out.</p> - -<p>“Our new member, Larry Dexter,” said Mr. Newton, pointing toward the -copy boy. “Look out, fellows, or he’ll beat us at our own game.”</p> - -<p>“Well, it’s a good yarn all right,” said one of the men. “Wish I had -seen it.”</p> - -<p>None of the other papers had anything like the story. They all had a -mention of the occurrence, but most of them dismissed it with a few -lines, embodying the mere police report of the matter, for unless there -is the promise of something big in a police item some reporters content -themselves with what the sergeant gives them. This time Larry had been -instrumental in securing what was almost as good as an exclusive item.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">83</a></span> -At the end of that week Larry found an extra dollar in his pay -envelope. He went to Mr. Emberg, thinking a mistake had been made and -that he had been given too much.</p> - -<p>“That’s for bringing in that story,” said the city editor. “It was -worth that and more to us. You’ll get six dollars a week now instead of -five dollars. You’ll find it pays to keep your eyes and ears open in -this business.”</p> - -<p>“I’m going to be a reporter some day,” said Larry. “I’m studying nights -now.”</p> - -<p>“Good!” exclaimed Mr. Emberg. “I’ll help you all I can, and if there’s -a chance you shall have it. You have proved that you have a nose for -news, which is something a number who think they are real reporters -have not,” and Larry felt prouder than ever.</p> - -<p>It was several days after this that Mr. Emberg called Larry to him. -At first the boy feared he had made some blunder and was about to be -censured, but the smile on the city editor’s face soon reassured him.</p> - -<p>“I am going to give you a new line of work for to-day,” said Mr. -Emberg. “I hope you will make out as well as you did with your story.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll try,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“And I think you’ll succeed,” said Mr. Emberg. “I want you to go over -to the Aldermanic Chamber in the City Hall. There’s an important -hearing being held there to-day by the Legislative<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">84</a></span> Committee on life -insurance matters. Mr. Newton is covering it for us. You’ll find him -there at the reporters’ table, and as fast as he has any copy ready you -are to bring it over.”</p> - -<p>Larry thought this was rather easy work and wondered why the city -editor laid so much stress on it.</p> - -<p>“You’ll have to be very quick,” went on Mr. Emberg, “for we want to get -as much in the regular editions as possible. You must be very careful, -too, about the copy. There will probably be a number of boys from other -papers there, and sometimes they play tricks. If they could make you -lose your copy, or get it away from you so as to delay us, they would -do it and their papers would be glad of it. So be careful of the copy -Mr. Newton gives you.”</p> - -<p>“I will,” said Larry, and he made up his mind that if any rival tried -to interfere with him he would have a fight on his hands that would -make him wish he had not bothered our hero.</p> - -<p>The Aldermanic Chamber was filled with men when Larry reached it. He -could hardly wiggle his way to the door, and was stopped by several -policemen on guard who wanted to know what right he had to enter. But -Larry had but to mention that he was from the <cite>Leader</cite>, and show a card -with his name on, signed by Mr. Emberg, to gain admittance. Whereat -Larry felt that newspapers were of much importance, as far as<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">85</a></span> gaining -entrance into public place was concerned.</p> - -<p>He saw a number of men with pencils and paper in front of them -seated around a big table, and rightly guessed that they must be the -reporters. Then he caught a glimpse of Mr. Newton and managed to make -his way to a place behind his friend’s chair.</p> - -<p>“I’m glad you are going to chase copy to-day,” said Mr. Newton. -“There’s going to be a hot time, and I need a boy I can depend on.”</p> - -<p>Larry sat down on the steps which surrounded the platform where the -committee members were to take their places. The room was noisy with -talk and full of bustle and excitement. Men were coming and going, -their arms filled with books and papers. Uniformed messengers were -entering and leaving.</p> - -<p>Larry looked on either side of him and saw that he was not the only -boy present. There were scores of lads from other papers, each one -in attendance on some reporter and waiting to carry copy. The crowd -increased, and Larry was beginning to wonder how he could get in and -out of the doorway, which was choked with the throng.</p> - -<p>Just then he looked down at the end of the room near the entrance. He -saw someone regarding him with a malicious grin. It was Peter Manton, -the former copy boy of the <cite>Leader</cite>.</p> - -<p>Larry saw Peter lean over and whisper to a boy<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">86</a></span> who stood near him, and -then the two gazed at Larry. In a few minutes Larry saw Peter beginning -to work his way up toward him.</p> - -<p>“I wonder if he’s going to make trouble?” thought Larry. He found out a -second later.</p> - -<p>“Wait till I git you outside!” exclaimed Peter. “I’ll fix you for -having me discharged!”</p> - -<p>Larry was about to make reply when someone shouted “Silence!” The -meeting was about to start.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">87</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xi" id="xi"></a>CHAPTER XI<br /> -<span>LARRY HAS A FIGHT</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Larry</span> was too interested in the proceedings for a while to pay any more -attention to Peter. The latter had moved back to where he was at first, -and though he occasionally glared at Larry the latter did not look -his way more than once or twice. The reporters were all making their -pencils fly, there was no time to take notes, and they had to write out -the story as it went along.</p> - -<p>“I’ll have some copy in a minute,” Mr. Newton whispered to Larry.</p> - -<p>The boy stood up to stretch his legs, for he was stiff from sitting so -long. He buttoned his coat up ready for a struggle through the crowd to -reach the door.</p> - -<p>“There,” said Mr. Newton, folding up his papers, and handing a bunch to -Larry. “Come back as soon as you take them to the office.”</p> - -<p>Larry thrust them into his pocket and started to make his way to the -door. With a little feeling of uneasiness he noticed that Peter, also, -had started out, accompanied by the boy to whom he had been whispering. -Larry, after a somewhat<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">88</a></span> tight squeeze, managed to get out of the door. -He found himself in a long corridor, that was almost deserted, for the -usual loungers around the City Hall had crowded into the chamber to -hear what was going on. Remembering his orders to hurry, Larry started -on a run. He saw nothing of his enemy Peter and concluded the latter -had gone for good.</p> - -<p>Suddenly, as Larry was passing a particularly dark place in the -corridor, a foot was thrust out. He stumbled over it, tried to recover -his balance, and then went down in a heap.</p> - -<p>“Quick now!” he heard a voice exclaim, and he recognized Peter’s tones. -“Git the copy out of his pocket while I hold him!”</p> - -<p>“I will! Grab his hands!” another boy exclaimed, and then Larry felt -someone land on his back as he lay prostrate, and grasp his wrists. At -the same time a hand stole into his inside pocket.</p> - -<p>Though he was somewhat stunned by the fall, Larry rapidly regained his -senses. He realized that Peter and the other boy were trying to get the -copy, either to make him lose his job for his carelessness, or else to -have the <cite>Leader</cite> at a disadvantage. And Larry was inclined to believe -it was a spite against himself rather than a plot against the <cite>Leader</cite> -that Peter was carrying out.</p> - -<p>Recovering from the first shock there came a fierce desire to fight -Peter, to attack him and prevent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">89</a></span> him from carrying out his plan. -Though taken at a disadvantage Larry did not lose his presence of mind. -He was a lad of considerable strength, which his country life had -greatly increased.</p> - -<p>With a sudden motion Larry arched his back, wrenched free his hands -from the grip of Peter, and sent the latter rolling to one side.</p> - -<p>“Look out or he’ll git away!” he heard Peter cry.</p> - -<p>Larry rose, felt in his pocket to see that the copy was still safe, -and then sprang to the rear so as to get a wall at his back. Then he -waited for the attack, which he knew would soon begin. At first he -almost wished some help would come, but the corridor remained deserted. -In fact it was not the main one, and was seldom used. Then, as he got -his breath and recovered from the first surprise, Larry rejoiced in the -coming contest.</p> - -<p>That the two boys did not mean to let him go without a struggle was -evident. In the half light he could see them whispering together. Then -they advanced both at once, like the cowards that they were, to take an -unfair chance.</p> - -<p>Larry clenched his fists, spread his feet apart, braced himself, and -gritted his teeth.</p> - -<p>“Come on!” he cried.</p> - -<p>And come on the two lads did. They made a rush at Larry that almost -overwhelmed him for a few seconds. He felt blows all over him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">90</a></span> -With his right arm half crooked, as a guard, Larry let out with his -left. At first he struck blindly, for he could not see his antagonists -well. He felt his fist land on someone’s face, and, by the cry that -resulted, knew he -<a name="had" id="had"></a><ins title="Original has 'had had'">had</ins> -hit Peter.</p> - -<p>“Give it to him!” cried the former copy boy of the <cite>Leader</cite>.</p> - -<p>Larry was struck on the cheek and once on the nose. The blows seemed to -give him new strength. Striking out with both fists, he sailed at his -tormentors, landing several hard thumps on faces and bodies and getting -several in return.</p> - -<p>Then came numerous hard blows from the other boys, and Larry was almost -beaten to his knees. He began to feel a little weak from a heavy blow -in the stomach and his head was dizzy. He feared he would fall and that -the boys would steal his copy.</p> - -<p>The thought of this nerved him to double energy. Straightening up -through a shower of blows, he made a sudden dash forward, hitting out -with all his force. He felt his fist land on the chin of one of the -lads.</p> - -<p>An instant later there was the thud of a fall, and the boy with Peter -cried:</p> - -<p>“I’ve had enough! He knocked me down!”</p> - -<p>“I’ll fix him!” Peter cried, and he sailed into Larry harder than ever.</p> - -<p>But the fight was more even now. The other boy had received punishment -enough to last him<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">91</a></span> for a while and he sneaked off into a dark corner -to nurse his hurts. But Peter kept it up, for he felt he had a grudge -against Larry and intended to pay it off.</p> - -<p>Blows were struck in quick succession. Twice Larry received hard knocks -on the face, for Peter was no unscientific fighter, having been trained -in the school of the New York streets. On the other hand, Larry was -stout of arm, firm on his legs, and was long-winded. So, when our hero -saw that he had but one antagonist left his spirits rose and he was -almost glad of the chance to thrash Peter.</p> - -<p>Once, aiming a hard left-hander at Peter, Larry slipped and went down -in a heap. Without regard for the rules of sport Peter sprang on him -and began hitting the prostrate lad.</p> - -<p>This made Larry more than ever angry and exerting all his strength he -turned over and got Peter down. Then Larry struggled to his feet.</p> - -<p>“Get up!” he cried to Peter. “I’ll fight you fair!”</p> - -<p>“Come on, Jim!” called Peter to his friend. “We can do him now. He’s -winded.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I am, eh?” asked Larry. “I guess you’ll find I can use my fists a -bit yet!” and he waited for the oncoming of the two.</p> - -<p>All this while the fight had been conducted quietly though none the -less fiercely. Being in a seldom-used part of the building it was not<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">92</a></span> -heard or it would have been interrupted long before.</p> - -<p>Now the two advanced at Larry again. He braced himself for the blows -he knew would come. And come they did, for the two went at him again, -hot and heavy. An unexpected blow from Peter’s fist, landing on the -point of Larry’s jaw, made him feel dizzy. He felt as if he was going -to topple over. Yet before he fell he resolved to give something in -return. So, with a powerful half swing he struck out, straight at -Peter’s face.</p> - -<p>He felt the blow land, and saw Peter reel. Then Jim closed in on him -and Larry felt that the odds were too unequal. He was afraid his -precious copy would be taken from him.</p> - -<p>Suddenly there sounded a step on the marble floor of the corridor.</p> - -<p>“Here, you lads! What do you mean by fighting in the City Hall?” a -gruff voice asked.</p> - -<p>Larry looked up, to see a big policeman approaching. The boy conquered -his inclination to topple over and braced himself. Peter and Jim, at -the sight of the bluecoat, took to their heels.</p> - -<p>“Were they both goin’ at ye at once?” asked the officer, seeing that -Larry did not flee.</p> - -<p>“They tried to do me up,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“Ye didn’t make out so bad,” went on the policeman with a smile. “I saw -that last blow ye landed. It was a dandy. What was the trouble?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">93</a></span> -“Oh, one of ’em had a quarrel with me,” replied Larry, not caring to go -into details, “and he had a friend to help him.”</p> - -<p>“Well, run along now, an’ don’t let me catch ye fightin’ agin,” said -the officer, trying to speak severely. “If I do I’ll arrest ye. But,” -he added, his admiration of Larry’s powers overcoming his instincts of -duty, “that was a fine blow ye landed, all right.”</p> - -<p>Larry lost no time in hastening to the office of the <cite>Leader</cite>. He was -tired and panting from the fight and the excitement of it, but in spite -of this he ran all the way and reached the city room out of breath.</p> - -<p>At first he felt inclined to tell Mr. Emberg about the matter. Then he -thought better of it, determining to fight his own battles. So, having -delivered the copy, he hurried back for more, finding Mr. Newton had a -bunch of it ready for him.</p> - -<p>Larry was not molested on this trip, and he noticed that Peter was not -among the copy boys, nor was Jim. They evidently did not dare return, -fearing Larry would inform the policeman of their actions.</p> - -<p>All that day, until the last edition went to press, Larry rushed back -and forth with copy from the Aldermanic Chamber to the city room. He -was very tired when night came.</p> - -<p>“Why, Larry!” exclaimed his mother when he reached home. “How did you -get that big lump<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">94</a></span> over your eye? And your cheek is cut!” she added.</p> - -<p>“Oh, another boy and myself had a little difference of opinion,” said -Larry.</p> - -<p>“I hope you weren’t fighting,” came from Mrs. Dexter.</p> - -<p>“Well I—I—er had to defend myself against two of ’em,” said Larry. -“It wasn’t exactly a fight, I guess.”</p> - -<p>“I’m sure I’d worry if I knew you had fought.”</p> - -<p>Larry did not want to deceive his mother, but he knew that to tell her -the circumstances would only worry her, so he passed the matter over -lightly.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">95</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xii" id="xii"></a>CHAPTER XII<br /> -<span>A STRANGE ASSIGNMENT</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">The</span> insurance investigation lasted for several days and Larry was kept -busy carrying copy for Mr. Newton. On the second day Peter Manton -reappeared, with a large discolored spot over his right eye where Larry -had hit him. The former office boy on the <cite>Leader</cite> did not glance at -Larry, but, on the contrary, seemed anxious to escape observation. Jim -did not come back.</p> - -<p>“I’m not afraid of him,” thought Larry. But he decided it would be -better to run no risks of being late with his copy, so he determined to -avoid an encounter with Peter.</p> - -<p>With this end in view Larry used the main corridor in going and coming -from the chamber. That was filled with people on various errands and -Larry had no fear that Peter would try to stop him. In fact Larry was -not physically afraid at all, but he felt he owed the paper a duty to -avoid anything that would cause trouble.</p> - -<p>But Peter showed no desire to make any. He kept out of Larry’s way and -seemed to be content<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">96</a></span> with attending to his own work of rushing copy -for the reporter he was aiding.</p> - -<p>Larry was not sorry when the last day of the investigation came. The -novelty had worn off, and it was rather tiresome sitting and listening -to questions and answers. The only relief came when he went out with -copy and came back. The reporters, also, were weary of the grind.</p> - -<p>“Well, Larry,” remarked Mr. Newton on the afternoon of the final -hearing. “I think we’re entitled to a holiday. What do you say?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t believe we’ll get it,” said Larry with a smile.</p> - -<p>“Maybe not a day off, but any kind of work will be a holiday after what -I’ve been through. I’d like to report even a missionary meeting for a -change.”</p> - -<p>For some time thereafter Larry was kept busy in the office. He proved -himself very useful, and every day was learning more about the -business. Meanwhile he was not neglecting his studies at home, in -preparation for the night school.</p> - -<p>With the professor he plodded over the books, learning to become a -better reader, more proficient in arithmetic and in writing. Then too, -he began to study history, for the teacher told him it was necessary, -if he was to write about things modern, to know what had happened in -the past.</p> - -<p>So Larry not only dipped into the happenings of the past in this -country but what had taken<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">97</a></span> place in others. It was hard work. After -a long day at the office, to sit down and tackle dry subjects was -something few boys would care about. It would have been easier to go -off to a bowling alley or to the theater. But Larry, though he wanted -to do those things, felt that he owed it to himself and his mother to -try and advance himself. And advancement he realized could only come by -learning more than he already knew.</p> - -<p>One day, early in September, Mr. Emberg called Larry to him and looked -the boy over critically.</p> - -<p>“You seem pretty strong and healthy,” the city editor said.</p> - -<p>“I guess I am,” replied Larry, wondering what was coming next.</p> - -<p>“How would you like to take a trip under the Hudson River?” asked Mr. -Emberg.</p> - -<p>Larry did not know what to say. Occasionally the city editor joked, and -the boy thought this might be one of those times.</p> - -<p>“I don’t believe I could swim that far,” Larry said at length. “That -is, not under water.” On the surface, splashing about, Larry knew he -would be at home, though he had never thought of tackling the big -stream.</p> - -<p>“I guess you won’t have to swim,” went on the city editor.</p> - -<p>“What do you mean then?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“I’m going to send you on a trip with Mr.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">98</a></span> Newton,” Mr. Emberg went on. -“You’ll have to start in half an hour.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” responded Larry. He had formed the habit of not asking -many questions, for he had found in the newspaper business it was best -to follow orders and to hold oneself in readiness for anything that -might turn up. Larry had no idea where he was going, but Mr. Emberg -soon enlightened him.</p> - -<p>“You know they have been digging a tunnel beneath the Hudson River, so -as to bring passengers from Jersey City over to New York without using -the ferry,” the city editor went on. Larry did, for he had read of the -project in the paper. “Well,” resumed Mr. Emberg, “one of the tubes is -about finished. All that remains is to cut through a thin brick wall, -or bulkhead, as it is called, and one can walk from New York to New -Jersey under the bottom of the river.</p> - -<p>“The company in charge of the tunnel work has invited a number of -newspaper men to make the first trip to-day, when the bulkhead will be -cut through and the first complete passage under the historic river -will be made. Mr. Newton is to go along to represent the <cite>Leader</cite>.”</p> - -<p>“But what am I to do?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“You’re going to help us get a beat I hope,” said the city editor.</p> - -<p>Larry’s eyes brightened. He saw himself on the road to becoming a -reporter.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">99</a></span> -“You see,” Mr. Emberg went on, “the company in charge of the work is -not exactly sure that their plans will succeed. So they have asked a -number of newspaper men to go along on the trial trip. But they have -been very quiet about it and no other paper than ours—at least I hope -so—knows what the real purpose of the trip is. Most of the reporters -think it is only a jaunt to see how the work has progressed. There have -been a number -<a name="of" id="of"></a><ins title="Original has no 'of'">of</ins> such.</p> - -<p>“So carefully have the builders laid their plans that they think, once -all the reporters are down in the big tube, they cannot get out to -say whether the thing is a success or a failure, in time to reach the -afternoon papers. As for the morning papers, if the thing is a failure -it will be so covered up by the engineers, that the reporters will -never know it.</p> - -<p>“Now my plan is this! I want you to go along with Mr. Newton. You will -be his assistant, for each invitation admits two. If the thing should -succeed, which I think it will, we want to know it this afternoon; not -to-morrow. And if it does succeed, it will only be known to those down -in the tube.</p> - -<p>“The only way we could find out in the office would be to have some -word from those in the tube or tunnel. The only way we can get word is -for someone to come back from the tube. Mr. Newton could not leave, -for, if he did, after the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">100</a></span> wall had been cut through, his absence would -be noted, and other reporters would rush out. Then we would not score a -beat.</p> - -<p>“But if you could go along, note what takes place, and then, when -the chance offers, get away unnoticed and come out of the tube to a -telephone on the surface, we could get the news ahead of anyone else. -Do you think you can do it?”</p> - -<p>Larry hesitated. It was a pretty big contract for a small boy, but he -resolved to try it.</p> - -<p>“I’ll do it!” he said.</p> - -<p>“I knew you would,” said Mr. Emberg. “It’s almost time for you and Mr. -Newton to start.”</p> - -<p>The reporter came up a few minutes later, nodded to the city editor, -and said:</p> - -<p>“Well, are we going to try it?”</p> - -<p>“With Larry’s help we are,” was the answer.</p> - -<p>“Come along then,” said Mr. Newton, as though taking a trip under the -Hudson River was one of the most ordinary things in this busy world.</p> - -<p>Larry put on his hat and, after a friendly nod from Mr. Emberg, left -the office. The reporter and copy boy went down Broadway to the big -Trinity building, adjoining the church of that name, and went to -the office of the company that was building the tunnel. There they -found a crowd of reporters; one from almost every newspaper in New -York. The men were ushered into a finely fitted up room, and told to -make themselves<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">101</a></span> comfortable until the president of the company, Mr. -Lackadon, was ready to escort them.</p> - -<p>“Keep a quiet tongue,” advised Mr. Newton to Larry. “None of the others -know what is up.”</p> - -<p>Larry nodded. Then he listened to what the other newspaper men had -to say. Few of them knew what their assignment was, except that they -were to come and report something about the tunnel that had been in -construction for some time.</p> - -<p>“All ready, gentlemen!” announced a voice, and the president of the -concern appeared in the room.</p> - -<p>“Where are we going?” asked several reporters of evening papers. “We’d -like to send up a few lines about the story.”</p> - -<p>“It’s a sort of a secret,” said the president with a smile. “If any of -you want to back out, now’s your chance.”</p> - -<p>No one ever heard of a newspaper man backing out, so no one moved.</p> - -<p>“Come on,” said the president.</p> - -<p>He led the way to the big express elevators and soon the crowd of -reporters were on the ground floor. They went out the rear entrance -and, by way of a number of back streets, to a dock on the New York side -of the Hudson River where a steamer was in waiting.</p> - -<p>“Keep close to me,” said Mr. Newton to Larry.</p> - -<p>Once aboard the craft little time was lost. It steamed to the Jersey -City side of the river, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">102</a></span> there, disembarking, the reporters and the -officials of the company who accompanied them walked through the yards -of a railroad until they came to a group of small buildings.</p> - -<p>“This is the mouth of the shaft that leads down to the level of the -tunnel,” said the president, pointing to a small structure.</p> - -<p>Almost as if in a dream Larry followed Mr. Newton. Entering the -building he found himself in the midst of a lot of machinery.</p> - -<p>“Get on the elevator,” said a voice.</p> - -<p>Larry stepped on a wooden platform, which soon began to sink. The -others were crowded about him. In a few minutes they found themselves -at the bottom of a shaft fifty feet in diameter and sixty feet deep. As -they landed, right in front of them yawned a black hole.</p> - -<p>“The tunnel,” said the president, with a wave of his hand.</p> - -<p>There was a murmur of astonishment from most of the reporters, for they -had never seen the big tube before.</p> - -<p>“Now that I have you all here,” the president went on, “I want to tell -you that we propose, for the first time in the history of the world, to -walk under the Hudson River!”</p> - -<p>There was a chorus of remonstrances, for the reporters for the -afternoon papers did not like missing a chance for a story, and they -realized they could send no word now.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">103</a></span> -“If the trial succeeds,” went on the president, “we will cut through -the brick wall that separates the east from the west end of the tunnel. -I think it will succeed as all but a very thin portion of the wall is -gone. All that remains is to turn on a hydraulic jack that will cut -down the rest, and the tunnel will be an assured fact.”</p> - -<p>“Can’t we send word to our papers?” asked several reporters.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid not,” was the answer of the president. “Those on the -morning papers, of course, can tell what happens, but the evening ones -will have to wait until to-morrow.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll see about that,” whispered Mr. Newton to Larry. “Keep close to -me, and when I give you the word you skip back the way we came, tell -the man at the elevator you want to get out, and reach the surface as -soon as possible. When you do, ring up the office, and tell Mr. Emberg -all you have seen.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” whispered Larry.</p> - -<p>“Forward!” cried the president.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">104</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xiii" id="xiii"></a>CHAPTER XIII<br /> -<span>UNDER THE RIVER</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">The</span> tunnel under the Hudson River was begun several decades ago. It was -started from the New York side, a little south of Christopher Street, -and continued out under the bed of the river for some distance. Then -the company failed and they built a brick wall, twenty-four feet thick, -at the end of the tube they had dug. It remained in that condition for -many years, until a new company was formed. This concern took up the -work where the others left off.</p> - -<p>There were two tubes, each circular, and about twenty-four feet in -diameter, dug under the river. They were separated by a wall of earth, -and each tube was lined with heavy cast iron. In cutting the tube a -big thing like an exaggerated apple corer was pushed through the earth -sixty feet below the surface of the river bed by hydraulic force. To -prevent the water from rushing in, the shield was kept filled with -compressed air at a heavy pressure.</p> - -<p>Up to within a few days this compressed air had been used in the -tunnel, but when the reporters<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">105</a></span> started through the tunnel was near -enough completion to render it unnecessary. The heavy cast iron lining -was all in place, except where the brick wall was, and it only remained -to cut through the masonry, establish communication from one end to the -other, fit a few pieces of cast iron into place, and the tunnel would -be established. The cutting through of the wall was the event of great -importance, and really marked the completion of the first stage of the -work. Hence every reporter felt the need of getting a good story about -it.</p> - -<p>“We’ll try to beat ’em,” whispered Mr. Newton to Larry as the party -started forward.</p> - -<p>The tunnel was cut in a slanting or downward direction at first. It -began several hundred feet back from the edge of the river and, when it -was actually below the bed of the stream it was level.</p> - -<p>It was quite dark in the big tube, save here and there where electric -lights gleamed. Most of the party walked, but there were small cars, -hauled by a cable, for the use of the directors and officials of the -construction company.</p> - -<p>Through the tube they went. In spite of the heavy lining, sustaining -thousands of pounds of pressure, some water leaked in. It splashed down -in big drops, and felt like rain. Once a drop fell on Larry’s lips, and -it tasted salty, just as the lower Hudson River does. Then he began -to realize that he was in a queer place, under the bed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">106</a></span> of one of the -largest rivers in the United States. It hardly seemed possible that he -was walking under the historic stream that Henry Hudson, in the <i>Half -Moon</i>, discovered so many years ago.</p> - -<p>As the party progressed, the president explained the workings of the -machinery, and stated that when the concrete lining had been placed -over the iron, there would be no leakage.</p> - -<p>“Where are we now?” asked one of the reporters.</p> - -<p>“Right under the middle of the river,” was the president’s reply. -“Above us are the big ferryboats. The ocean steamers are sailing, and -the tug boats are darting to and fro.”</p> - -<p>“What if the tunnel should break?” asked the same newspaper man.</p> - -<p>“None of us would be left to tell what happened,” was the reply. “The -water would rush in and—that would be the end of us.”</p> - -<p>Larry shivered, though it was hot in the tube.</p> - -<p>“But we didn’t build this tunnel to break,” the president went on. “You -are as safe as if you were in your offices.”</p> - -<p>“I wish I could believe that,” a young reporter remarked, with -something like a shiver.</p> - -<p>Here and there the gloom was lighted by an incandescent lamp. The -cable, pulling small cars, in which the officers and directors of the -company rode, while the rest walked, slid along on the grooved wheels. -The way was obstructed by<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">107</a></span> huge pieces of iron, being some extra ones -of those that formed the inner lining of the tunnel.</p> - -<p>With occasional jokes, which a reporter makes even at a funeral, the -party proceeded. Now and than a halt would be made while the president -explained some technical point.</p> - -<p>Finally the party came to a stop. It was quite dark and the few lights -only seemed to make the gloom deeper.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” asked Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“We’ve come to some sort of a wall,” another reporter replied. “It -seems they have to cut through this before we can go any further. Gee! -But I wish I had time to send something about this to my paper. It will -be a dandy story.”</p> - -<p>“I guess there aren’t any telephones under the Hudson,” said Mr. -Newton, nudging Larry in the ribs.</p> - -<p>“No, but there may be some day. Well, I suppose I’ll have to make a -story for to-morrow, but the morning papers will have the best of it.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Newton did not reply, and Larry thought that perhaps the other -reporter might be mistaken. He began to see what a fine thing it would -be to beat the other papers. The whole party had now halted. There was -a sort of inclined platform of boards built from the floor close to the -roof of the tunnel.</p> - -<p>Up this the members of the party walked until they came to a level -place where they stood together.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">108</a></span> Overhead was the iron-ribbed lining -of the big tube. It had only recently been put in place and, as it was -not water tight, moisture from the river came through quite freely.</p> - -<p>Big drops splashed down almost like rain, and it was salt rain at that.</p> - -<p>“I guess I’ll have to get a new suit out of the office, for mine’s -spoiled,” said one of the newspaper men.</p> - -<p>“And my hat’s gone to grass,” remarked another, as he contemplated his -straw headgear.</p> - -<p>“You want to be ready to slip back soon now,” whispered Mr. Newton -to Larry. “They’re going to try the hydraulic ram on the brick wall. -As soon as they start it I’ll let you know. Then you can slip down -as quietly as possible, make your way back through the tunnel, go up -to the surface, and telephone to Mr. Emberg. He has the story almost -written, for he knows something about the tunnel. All he wants to know -are a few particulars which you can give him.”</p> - -<p>Larry nerved himself for the coming effort. There seemed to be a sort -of uneasiness in the crowd, for some of them did not know what was to -come. They were tired of being kept in the dark.</p> - -<p>“We are now going to start the hydraulic ram,” said the voice of the -president. “It will cut through the brick wall and then we will step -through the hole into the other part of the tunnel,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">109</a></span> thus completing -the trip from New Jersey to New York. Let me call your attention to the -fact that this trip is made, not like the partial one of a year ago, -through the northern tube under compressed air. We have so far advanced -that we do not need to maintain an air pressure any longer for safety.”</p> - -<p>“All ready,” called one of the engineers.</p> - -<p>There was a little shifting in the crowd. Men in red shirts and big -rubber boots began fumbling at some pipes and machinery.</p> - -<p>“Here she goes!” cried someone, and Larry prepared himself to start on -the back trip at a signal from Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>There was a rending, crashing, tearing sound. The brick wall began to -crumble under the powerful force of the plunger worked by water power. -Then came a dull thud, and silence.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” cried the president.</p> - -<p>“I’m sorry to say the ram’s broken,” replied the engineer.</p> - -<p>“Cut the wall down with crowbars and pickaxes then,” cried the -president.</p> - -<p>“I regret, gentlemen,” he went on, “that we will have a little delay. -The wall was thicker than we thought. We cut away as much as we dared -and we depended on the ram to do the rest. It has failed us. But we -will soon have a passageway through, and you will have been the first -party to walk under the river without the use of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">110</a></span> compressed air, which -is something of an achievement.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, for a chance to telephone the paper!” exclaimed several reporters. -But they knew there was no opportunity.</p> - -<p>“Now’s your time!” whispered Mr. Newton to Larry. “Hurry back, and as -soon as you can get to a telephone tell Mr. Emberg all that you have -seen and about the failure of the ram to work. I’d go, only if I leave -the other men will notice it and they’ll try the same trick.”</p> - -<p>Slipping through the crowd, Larry started back. He was not noticed -amid the excitement. He could hear the blows which the laborers were -beginning to rain on the brick wall and the thud of them sounded like -thunder in the tunnel. Down the sloping planks he went until he found -himself on the floor of the tube.</p> - -<p>Then he began to run as fast as possible on the uneven surface and -through the semi-darkness. Several times he stumbled over big sections -of the iron lining and once he fell into a puddle of water. He got up, -not minding the smart of his cut hands, and kept on.</p> - -<p>The tunnel made a slight turn a few hundred feet back from where the -wall was being cut through and this curve hid the throng from Larry. -Now he was all alone in the big shaft and he began to experience a -feeling of fear. Suppose some accident should happen? If the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">111</a></span> roof -should cave in? Or he should fall, strike his head, and be rendered -unconscious?</p> - -<p>All these things Larry thought of as he hurried on. But he tried to -forget them and to think only of getting to the surface and telephoning -the news. The fact that the hydraulic ram had failed to work made the -story all the better for newspaper purposes.</p> - -<p>Larry’s one real fear was lest he might not be able to get through the -air lock. This was a sort of double opening leading into the tube at -the western end. There was no air pressure in it however, but the lock -remained and had to be entered through small openings.</p> - -<p>When the party had reached this, in going through the tunnel, they -found the opening so narrow that but one could pass through at a time. -Workmen had been stationed there to help, as the doors which formerly -closed the lock were still in place and were heavy affairs. If one of -them should happen to be closed Larry felt that his mission would prove -a failure.</p> - -<p>He kept on as fast as he could walk. He was glad when he came to an -electric light, for it made the tube seem less lonesome. But the lights -were few and when he had left one behind Larry began to wish the next -one would gleam out.</p> - -<p>When he felt the floor of the tube beginning to take an upward turn -Larry knew he was approaching the end, and, also, the air lock.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">112</a></span> -“I hope the men have left it open,” he said to himself.</p> - -<p>He was almost running now. Suddenly something black loomed up in front -of him, as he could see by the glare from a near-by electric lamp. He -put out his hand and touched something cold and hard.</p> - -<p>“It’s the air lock!” he exclaimed. “And the door is shut!”</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">113</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xiv" id="xiv"></a>CHAPTER XIV<br /> -<span>LARRY’S SUCCESS</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">For</span> a little while Larry felt a sense of bitter disappointment. After -all his effort and the plans of Mr. Emberg and Mr. Newton, to have -the venture fail was, he thought, a hard thing. And fail it seemed -the scheme must, since unless he could soon get to the surface and -telephone the news, it would be too late for the day’s paper and the -others would have it to-morrow. Then the <cite>Leader</cite> would not score “a -beat.”</p> - -<p>The boy went close to the big iron door and examined it as well as he -could in the dim light. It was a massive affair with ribs of steel and -swung on heavy hinges. It was built to withstand heavy pressure, though -there was none on it now. It was fastened by means of a peculiar catch -that was operated from within.</p> - -<p>Larry passed his fingers around the edge. He began on the side where -the hinges were, since he could not see very well. Not a crack was to -be felt. Then, as his hand came around on the other side, he gave a -start. He was aware of a slight opening.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">114</a></span> -“The door is not shut tight!” he cried. “Maybe I can open it!”</p> - -<p>He felt around until he came to a place where the opening was widest. -As he had discovered the door was not quite shut tight. He put his -fingers into the crack and pulled with all his force.</p> - -<p>The big plate of iron never moved. He might as well have tried to pull -down the side of the tunnel. The door was rusty on the hinges, and, -even had it swung freely the very weight of it was too much for a boy.</p> - -<p>“I guess I’ll have to give up!” thought Larry.</p> - -<p>He moved back a bit, rubbing his hands where the edges of the iron had -cut them slightly. As he did so his foot hit against something and he -nearly stumbled to the floor. He saved himself by putting out his hand, -which came in contact with something cold.</p> - -<p>By the touch of it Larry knew it was a crowbar. He grasped it with both -hands and pulled it from the crack in the wall where some workman had -left it.</p> - -<p>“Maybe I can pry the door open with this,” he said. “Luck seems to be -coming my way after all.”</p> - -<p>The bar was heavy, but Larry strained at it until he had inserted the -wedge-like edge in the crack between the door and the side of the air -lock.</p> - -<p>“Here goes!” he exclaimed.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">115</a></span> -He pressed on the bar with all his strength. It did not budge.</p> - -<p>“I guess it’s tighter than I thought,” gasped the boy.</p> - -<p>Once again he pushed until his arms trembled with the strain. Again and -again, throwing himself forward, he forced the bar away from him.</p> - -<p>Then, just when he was ready to give up in despair, he felt the iron -lever give slightly. So little was the movement he half doubted whether -it had moved. But as he pressed harder and harder he felt it sway, and -then he knew he had started the door to swinging.</p> - -<p>“I must keep at it!” he panted, “or it will get stuck again.”</p> - -<p>Then with all his strength he pushed until, in the half-light, he saw -the crack opening wider and wider until the door was half open and -there was space enough for him to slip through.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah!” cried Larry faintly. “Now to see if the other door is open,” -for the air lock had two portals.</p> - -<p>He dragged the bar with him as he stooped to go through the small -opening. The air lock was about ten feet long, constructed entirely -of steel and iron, and was about as big around as a hoisting engine -boiler. Larry had to bend almost double as he went through it. -Fortunately he found the other door open, and a few seconds later he -was out in the tunnel again.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">116</a></span> -“Now for a telephone,” he cried as he sprang forward on the run.</p> - -<p>Just ahead he could see a big patch of light that indicated where the -round shaft led from the surface of the earth down to the floor of the -tunnel. The going was easier now and the air was better. Larry soon -reached the foot of the shaft.</p> - -<p>He found a number of workmen there. They were covered with dirt and -water and Larry knew they had been working in the tunnel.</p> - -<p>“Where’d ye come from, boy?” asked one of them.</p> - -<p>“I was with the party that went through a little while ago,” Larry -answered. “One of the men sent me back for something.”</p> - -<p>He did not say what it was, for fear some of the men might not think it -proper for him to telephone the news to his paper.</p> - -<p>“Want to go up?” asked the man in charge of the elevator.</p> - -<p>Larry nodded. The man motioned for him to get on the movable platform -which was about all the hoist was, and then gave the signal to start.</p> - -<p>In a few moments the boy was at the surface. He made his way out of -the engine room at the mouth of the upright shaft and hurried across -the railroad yards in the direction he had come. On the way in he had -noticed an office where there was a telephone and he made for this.</p> - -<p>The man in charge gave permission for the boy<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">117</a></span> to use the instrument, -though he stared somewhat in surprise at Larry, who was covered with -dirt and water.</p> - -<p>“Fall in the river?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“No, I came through the tunnel,” replied the boy.</p> - -<p>Then he rang up central, was soon connected with the <cite>Leader</cite> office, -and a few seconds later was telling Mr. Emberg what had happened. -The city editor, who was familiar with the work, and the prospective -battering down of the brick wall, could easily understand the situation -from Larry’s description. A few details sufficed and then, with a -hurried “Good-bye,” Mr. Emberg rang off, having told Larry to come back -to the office.</p> - -<p>“Are you a reporter?” asked the man in the railroad office, as Larry -hung up the receiver.</p> - -<p>“No, I’m only a copy boy,” was the answer. “But I’m going to be a -reporter some day. I am helping one of our men to-day.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I should say you would be a reporter,” the man went on, for he -had listened to what Larry was saying over the wire. “That was pretty -slick on your part. The <cite>Leader’s</cite> an all-right paper!”</p> - -<p>“Glad you think so,” replied Larry. “How much for the telephone charge?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing,” replied the man. “Glad to have you use it for such a big -piece of news. So the tunnel is really cut through, eh?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">118</a></span> -“It will be in a few minutes, I guess,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>Then he started for the <cite>Leader</cite> office, first having borrowed a brush -from the railroad man, and cleaned some of the mud from his clothes. -Before he got back to his office Larry heard the boys on the streets -crying:</p> - -<p>“Extra! Extra! Full account of the opening of the big Hudson River -tunnel!”</p> - -<p>Larry bought a <cite>Leader</cite> and there, on the front page, under a big -heading, was an account of the trip he, Mr. Newton, and the others had -made that afternoon, and which was not yet finished. This time the -press was a little ahead of -<a name="the" id="the"></a><ins title="Original has no 'the'">the</ins> -happening and the <cite>Leader</cite>, through Larry’s -success, had scored a big beat.</p> - -<p>Arriving at the office Larry found everyone but Mr. Emberg had gone -home, for it was quite some time past the regular edition hour.</p> - -<p>“You’re all right, Larry!” the city editor exclaimed. “It’s a fine -story. Have any trouble?”</p> - -<p>“Only a little,” said Larry modestly, for he did not want to boast of -opening the door that had given him so much trouble.</p> - -<p>“It’s a good story! It’s a beat!” said the city editor half to himself. -“They tried to keep it quiet, but we beat ’em at their own game. That -fact about the hydraulic ram breaking was a fine feature.”</p> - -<p>Larry sat down in a chair, for he was tired.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">119</a></span> Then Mr. Emberg, who -seemed for a time to have forgotten that he was present, noticed him.</p> - -<p>“You can go home, Larry,” he added. “You’ve done enough to-day.”</p> - -<p>“I thought I’d stay until Mr. Newton came in,” said the boy. “I’d like -to hear how the thing ended.”</p> - -<p>“All right, I’m going to stay myself,” said the city editor. He began -looking over some proofs on his desk in readiness for the next day’s -paper. In half an hour Mr. Newton arrived.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Larry!” the reporter exclaimed. “Did we do ’em? Well, I guess -yes! How about it, Mr. Emberg?”</p> - -<p>“You and Larry certainly covered yourselves with glory,” spoke the city -editor. “First thing we know Larry will be out getting news himself.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I guess the other papers will sit up and take notice,” went on -Mr. Newton. “Not one of the other men got a line in to-day and they’re -half wild. It took quite a while for the men to cut through the wall. -Then there was a lot of speech-making over the importance of the affair -and we finished the journey, walking all the way from New Jersey to -New York, under the river, though I can’t exactly say it was without -getting wet, for the tunnel leaked like a sieve after we got through -the wall.”</p> - -<p>“It was a good piece of work,” commented Mr. Emberg. Then with a nod to -Larry and Mr.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">120</a></span> Newton he went out. The reporter and the copy boy soon -followed and, that night, Larry astonished his mother, sisters, and -brother with the wonderful tale of going under the river.</p> - -<p>“It’s dess like a fairy ’tory,” said little Mary.</p> - -<p>“Did you find any gold?” asked Jimmy, his eyes big with astonishment.</p> - -<p>“No,” said Larry with a laugh, “I wish I had.”</p> - -<p>“And didn’t you see any goblins?” asked Lucy with a smile.</p> - -<p>“Nary a one,” was Larry’s reply. “Though some of the workmen looked -like ’em in the darkness with their rough clothes and big boots on.”</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid it was a dangerous place,” spoke Mrs. Dexter. “I don’t -believe I want you to be a reporter, Larry, if they have to take such -risks.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, it isn’t often they have to go into such places,” replied Larry. -“There was no danger. And think of being able to say you have been -under the Hudson River! It’s like being a discoverer.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I’m glad you’re home safe,” said his mother. “Now we’ll have -supper.”</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">121</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xv" id="xv"></a>CHAPTER XV<br /> -<span>LARRY GOES TO SCHOOL</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was with some surprise that Larry found a dollar extra in his pay -envelope Friday afternoon, for it was on that day that the assistant -cashier used to come around with the salaries. There was a five-dollar -bill and two one-dollar bills, and Larry, who since his first raise had -been getting six dollars a week, thought a mistake had been made.</p> - -<p>He went to Mr. Newton at the first opportunity and told him about it, -asking his advice.</p> - -<p>“You’d better speak to Mr. Emberg about it before you hand the extra -money back,” said the reporter, with a smile.</p> - -<p>“Eh? What’s that?” asked Mr. Emberg, when Larry, in hesitating tone, -mentioned the matter. “An extra dollar, eh? Well, that’s all right, -Larry. That’s a reward for your good work in the tunnel. I heard -yesterday about you opening the door. Some of the workmen who knew it -was closed found it opened, and knew you must have done it. I want to -say that the <cite>Leader</cite> appreciates such efforts. And the only way we<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">122</a></span> -can show appreciation is by giving people more money. So you’ll get -seven dollars a week now. I hope it will be much more in time.”</p> - -<p>Larry glowed with pleasure, more at the kind words than at the increase -in wages, though, of course, that was very welcome.</p> - -<p>“My, you’re getting rich,” said Lucy that night when, at the supper -table, he told of his good fortune.</p> - -<p>“I mean to be, some day,” spoke Larry confidently. “I want to be rich -enough to hire that big doctor that’s coming to New York soon, so he -can cure you.”</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid there’s no hope for me,” replied Lucy, turning her head so -as to hide her tears. Her pain had been worse lately, though she had -not complained.</p> - -<p>Mrs. Dexter was much rejoiced over her son’s advancement, for every bit -of money was needed. She could not earn a great deal, and there was -much food to buy as well as clothing for the children. She had saved -about one hundred dollars of the money she had had when she came to New -York, but this she had put away in case of sickness.</p> - -<p>It was now about the middle of September. Larry had kept up his studies -with the professor and had made good progress.</p> - -<p>“The night schools open next week,” said Mr. Carlton one evening, after -he and Larry had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">123</a></span> closed the books. “I suppose you are going to start -in.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir,” said Larry, “and I’m very much obliged for the help you -have given me.”</p> - -<p>“I was only too glad to do it,” replied the professor. “I hope you will -get on well in your classes. If you need help come to me.”</p> - -<p>Larry learned from the professor the proper night school to apply at on -the evening the term opened. It was some distance from the house where -Larry lived. He started off with well wishes from his mother.</p> - -<p>He found quite a crowd of boys around the doors, for the school had not -yet opened. The youngsters were skylarking, laughing, shouting, and -playing tricks. It was almost like a day school, Larry thought, except -that the boys were bigger, for all of them worked in the daytime. Some -came from a desire to educate themselves, but a number were obliged to -attend under the factory laws. These laws provided that if a boy went -to work too young he must make up for it by attending night school.</p> - -<p>It was these latter lads who seemed to be making the most fun. They -evidently did not care much about the lessons.</p> - -<p>“Here comes another!” cried a voice, as Larry walked down the street -toward the school. “Let’s make him run the gauntlet!”</p> - -<p>“Line up!” shouted several, and they formed a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">124</a></span> narrow path, with boys -on either edge of the sidewalk, making a lane which Larry would have to -pass through. At first he did not appreciate what was up, but when he -saw the lads raise bundles of books or papers, and prepare to hit him -as he passed along, he knew what was coming.</p> - -<p>It was fashioned after the gauntlet the Indians used to force their -prisoners to run through, only in the olden days death was often the -end of the game. Here it was mainly for fun, though sometimes very -rough.</p> - -<p>“Soak him now!” cried several as Larry reached the head of the line and -started through the lane of boys.</p> - -<p>At first Larry hesitated. Then he realized that if he turned back the -boys might call him a coward. And he felt that if he was to go to -school with them it would be an unpleasant thing to bear that name. So -he resolved to run the gauntlet, come what might.</p> - -<p>Shielding his head with his upraised arms he entered the lane. Thick -and fast the blows rained on him. Most of them came from bundles of -paper and did not hurt much. As books, however, came down on Larry’s -head they made him wince. But he only joined in the shouts of glee and -made up his mind not to care.</p> - -<p>“He’s game all right!” cried several of the older lads. “Soak him, -fellers!”</p> - -<p>“Whoop!” yelled the crowd, with as much vim<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">125</a></span> as did ever the Indians -shout over the discomfiture of a captive.</p> - -<p>Larry was halfway down the line. He got some pretty hard knocks there, -as the bigger lads were at that point. One blow sent his hat sailing -from his head. He was about to stoop and pick it up, but someone yelled:</p> - -<p>“Go ahead; we’ll save it for you!”</p> - -<p>On he ran. He began to wish he was at the end of the lane, which seemed -to be getting longer instead of shorter. The blows came thicker and -were harder. In fact they all seemed to be from bundles of books now, -as few of the remaining boys had paper. But Larry was not going to back -out.</p> - -<p>The excitement was growing, as several other luckless ones had been -made to take the dreaded journey. This took some attention away from -Larry, for which he was thankful. Now he was within a few lads from the -end of the line. Several vigorous blows were given, making Larry’s arms -and head sting with pain. Then, just as he was about to emerge from the -gauntlet, someone put out a foot and tripped him. Larry threw out his -hands and saved his head from hitting the pavement, but his palms were -cut by the fall.</p> - -<p>He staggered to his feet, anger in his heart, and a desire to tackle -the boy who had tripped him so unfeelingly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">126</a></span> -“That’s a mean trick!” exclaimed several of the boys.</p> - -<p>“Who did it?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“I did!” exclaimed a boy on the end of the line. “What of it?”</p> - -<p>Larry turned and saw grinning at him Peter Manton, the rival office boy.</p> - -<p>“If you want to fight say so,” sneered Peter, advancing toward Larry.</p> - -<p>Larry was nothing of a coward. He was not afraid of Peter, and felt -that if he gave him a good drubbing, which he was confident he could, -from his experience in the City Hall, it would only be what Peter -deserved.</p> - -<p>A crowd of boys, scenting what always is an attraction, regardless of -the right or wrong of it, made a circle about the two. The gauntlet was -forgotten in the prospect of something more exciting. Larry clenched -his fists and advanced with firm footsteps.</p> - -<p>At that instant the school bell rang and the doors were thrown open. -Several teachers came out to form the boys in line, and a policeman, -one being always on duty at the evening schools, made his appearance.</p> - -<p>“Come now, steady! No scrappin’!” exclaimed the officer. “Yez’ll all go -in quiet an’ orderly like or I’ll tap yez one or two wid me sthick!” -and he swung his night baton with a suggestive air.</p> - -<p>“Form in line!” exclaimed the teachers.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">127</a></span> -The crowd about Larry and Peter dispersed. The boys had no desire to be -caught aiding a fight the first night of school, since many of them had -their fathers to reckon with and did not want to be expelled.</p> - -<p>As for Larry he felt that he had a just cause for a battle with Peter. -The latter, however, did not stay to see the outcome of his challenge. -As soon as there was an excuse he broke away from the encircling crowd -and made for the open door. Perhaps he had too good a recollection of -Larry’s sturdy fists the time they had met in the City Hall corridor.</p> - -<p>At any rate the fight was off for that night, though Larry determined -he would pay Peter back the first chance he got. Into the different -rooms the boys crowded. The teachers, with a skill born of long -experience, soon separated them into classes.</p> - -<p>Larry was somewhat surprised, when, with a number of other boys, he had -marched into a room, to see, seated in it, half a score of men. He then -learned for the first time, that a number of grown persons, who had had -no chance to study when they were young, attended the night schools. -They were trying to learn more so as to get better positions. There -were quite a few foreigners also, whose main object was to learn the -English language.</p> - -<p>The teacher in Larry’s class put the boys<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">128</a></span> through a rough and ready -examination. To Larry’s delight he found he was able to answer with -ease the test questions. This was because of his preliminary study with -the professor.</p> - -<p>The teacher, seeing he was a bright boy and well grounded in the -rudiments, passed him on to a higher class, where Larry settled down -for the term.</p> - -<p>Thus began his first night at evening school, a strange experience for -him. There was little studying done at the initial session. The boys -were enrolled and then, after a short lecture by the teacher, who urged -the lads to study, the class was given a lesson to prepare for the next -night and then dismissed.</p> - -<p>Tired and aching from his experience, with somewhat of a feeling of -anger against his old enemy Peter, and with his head filled with -thoughts of the new life opening before him, Larry went home. He found -his mother and Lucy still up, anxious to hear how he had made out.</p> - -<p>Larry related to them his experiences, telling of the gauntlet only as -a game and making light of his hurts.</p> - -<p>“Aren’t they pretty rough boys, Larry?” asked his mother.</p> - -<p>“No rougher than many others,” replied Larry, bound to stick up for -those with whom he was to associate.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">129</a></span> -He studied some of his lessons that night. Then he took his spelling -book with him to the office, thinking he would get a chance during the -spare hours of the day, or at lunch time, to go over the exercises.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">130</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xvi" id="xvi"></a>CHAPTER XVI<br /> -<span>LARRY AT A STRIKE</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Larry</span>’s desire to get a little study in during his spare moments was -the cause of some trouble between him and the office boy who had taken -Peter’s place. This lad’s name was Tom Mead, and he was much the same -type of a youngster as Peter was. Not that he was bad, but he was up to -sharp tricks, and he did not like to work when he could get out of it.</p> - -<p>Bud Nelson was, by right of long service, the head office boy in the -city room. Larry came next, and then Tom.</p> - -<p>Things had been pretty lively in the <cite>Leader</cite> office for the past -week, as there was an election on and there were many stories for the -reporters. This made much more copy than usual, and, consequently, more -trips from the city room to the pneumatic tube.</p> - -<p>The boys had fallen into the habit of taking turns with rushing the -copy, which went up in batches, so that the work would be more evenly -divided. At Larry’s suggestion there were three chairs in a row. When -one boy took some copy,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">131</a></span> to the tube he came back and took the end -seat. The boy who had been immediately behind him had, in the meanwhile -moved up one seat to be ready for the next batch. Thus they had to run -only a third as often as before, and the work was shared evenly.</p> - -<p>When it came his turn to take the rear seat, which insured him several -minutes of quietness, Larry would take out his lesson book and study. -This did not seem to meet with the approval of Tom, who had a dislike -for “book-worms” as he called them.</p> - -<p>“Regular sissy-boy,” he said of Larry, though he did not venture to -call our hero that to his face.</p> - -<p>One afternoon, when Larry had hurried to the tube with a bunch of copy -he came back, expecting to take the last seat, which had been occupied -by Tom. He found the latter still in the end chair, and the boy showed -no signs of moving up.</p> - -<p>“Move ahead,” said Larry, in a low tone.</p> - -<p>“Move yourself!” exclaimed Tom. “I’ve got as good a right here as you. -I’m tired of chasing copy while you read books. I’m going to take a -rest.”</p> - -<p>“I’m studying, not reading,” said Larry. “Besides I carry my share of -copy. It will be your turn in a minute.”</p> - -<p>“Copy!” called Mr. Emberg, and Bud, who had moved to the first chair, -jumped up and ran for it.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">132</a></span> -“It’s your turn next,” said Larry to Tom.</p> - -<p>“I don’t care if it is,” was the answer.</p> - -<p>“Copy!” cried Mr. Emberg’s assistant.</p> - -<p>Tom did not leave his seat.</p> - -<p>“It’s your turn,” repeated Larry.</p> - -<p>“I don’t care if it is!” exclaimed Tom. “Go with it yourself if you’re -in such a hurry.”</p> - -<p>“Copy here!” was the cry. “Come, what’s the matter with you boys? Going -to sleep?”</p> - -<p>Mr. Emberg, wondering at the delay, looked up. He saw Bud returning to -the room, and, being aware of the understanding among the boys about -their turns, looked to see what the hitch was between Larry and Tom.</p> - -<p>“Whose turn is it?” asked the city editor. “Be quick about it. Don’t -stand there all day. The paper has to come out.”</p> - -<p>“It’s his turn!” exclaimed Larry.</p> - -<p>“Well, he’s always readin’,” growled Tom. “I’m tired of runnin’ with -his copy.”</p> - -<p>“I’m not always reading!” declared Larry, determined to have justice -done. “It was my turn to take the last seat, but he wouldn’t move up -for me.”</p> - -<p>“He’s always got a book in his pocket,” growled Tom.</p> - -<p>“Whose turn is it?” demanded Mr. Emberg, coming over to where the boys -were and addressing Bud.</p> - -<p>“I think it was Tom’s,” said Bud.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">133</a></span> -“Well, then I’ll go,” growled the newest office boy, with no very good -grace.</p> - -<p>“What book are you reading?” asked Mr. Emberg of Larry.</p> - -<p>“I wasn’t reading, I was studying,” was Larry’s answer as he produced -his speller and handed it to the city editor.</p> - -<p>“Um!” remarked Mr. Emberg. “Spelling, eh? Well, you’ll need it in the -newspaper business. But don’t neglect your work to study, Larry.”</p> - -<p>“No, sir,” replied the boy, yet he felt that Mr. Emberg was not -displeased with him. “And I want you boys to stop quarreling about this -carrying of copy,” the city editor said. “Each one must take his turn.”</p> - -<p>“Squealer!” whispered Tom when he came back, and he slyly shook his -fist at Larry. “I’ll fix you!”</p> - -<p>So Larry seemed to have made two enemies in a short time. But he knew -that he had done no wrong and he felt that it was not his fault. As for -being afraid of either Peter or Tom, such a thought never entered his -head.</p> - -<p>Larry was beginning to be of much service around the <cite>Leader</cite> office. -He was quick to understand what was wanted, and none of the other boys -could go to the composing room and get a proof as rapidly as he could. -He took a pleasure in his work, and never shirked the carrying of copy.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">134</a></span> -Occasionally he was sent out with the reporters who had to go some -distance away to cover stories, to bring back their copy. He liked this -sort of work. Best of all he liked to go with Mr. Newton, for this -reporter, being one of the oldest and most valuable men, had important -assignments, and usually went to some interesting place.</p> - -<p>It happened that there was a strike on one of the lines of electric -cabs operated by a private company in the upper part of the city. From -a small affair the matter grew to be a large one, since the strikers -would not work themselves, nor did they want to let men called in to -fill their places take out the vehicles.</p> - -<p>The result was a war between the union and non-union factions. Matters -grew so hot that the police had to be called out several times, for -a cab operated by a “scab,” as the non-unionists were called by the -strikers, was likely to be stoned, upset, and the occupants injured. -The strike grew in size until the whole electric cab system was -involved.</p> - -<p>Most of the trouble centered around the headquarters of the cab -concern, pretty well uptown, and there were several rows between the -strikers, the non-unionists, and the police.</p> - -<p>“I think you had better cover that strike,” said Mr. Emberg to Mr. -Newton one day. “You’ll have to remain on the scene all day. I’ll -send a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">135</a></span> boy up with you and you can send your copy down. Telephone if -anything big happens, otherwise write the story as it goes along and -send it in. Make it interesting, for the people like to read about such -things. What boy do you want?”</p> - -<p>“I’ll take Larry,” said Mr. Newton. “He’s quick and smart.”</p> - -<p>“That’s the reason I like to have him in the office,” said the city -editor. “But go ahead, take him with you. And you’ll have to keep an -eye out for him and yourself too. The strikers are in an ugly mood, and -they have little use for the papers.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll look out,” said Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>Larry went uptown to the office of the cab concern. In order to have a -headquarters near the scene of battle Mr. Newton arranged to have the -use of a little store near the cab stables. There was a telephone in -it, and a small table where the reporter could write.</p> - -<p>Larry and Mr. Newton reached the place about nine o’clock in the -morning. No sooner had they arrived than there was a fight between the -union and non-union forces. Several of the former attacked a cab taken -out by a new man. They pulled him from the seat and then, turning on -the power full, allowed the motor vehicle to run wild about the streets.</p> - -<p>Several persons had narrow escapes from being<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">136</a></span> injured and two horses -were knocked down by the big cab with no one to guide it. Another horse -ran away from fright. The police reserves were sent for, and altogether -there was considerable excitement.</p> - -<p>Mr. Newton wrote a lively story of the happening, and sent Larry -back to the office with it. Then he sat down in the store to await -developments. They were not long in coming, for, pretty soon, the -strikers upset a cab. So, when Larry got back, there was another batch -of copy waiting for him.</p> - -<p>“Plenty of stories!” cried Mr. Emberg.</p> - -<p>Newsboys brought several copies of the <cite>Leader</cite> around to the -headquarters of the cab firm that afternoon, and the story of the -morning’s happenings was eagerly read by the strikers.</p> - -<p>They did not seem to like the frank manner in which Mr. Newton had -described their doings and there were several murmurs against the -“capitalistic press.”</p> - -<p>“There’s the reporter what done it!” exclaimed a big striker, pointing -to Mr. Newton, who had stepped from the store to see how matters were -coming on.</p> - -<p>“Let’s soak him!” cried several.</p> - -<p>There was a movement in the crowd, but the police were on the lookout -for trouble and made the men disperse, at which there was more -grumbling.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">137</a></span> -“Aren’t you afraid?” asked Larry of the reporter.</p> - -<p>“Not a bit,” was the reply. “I’m used to having trouble. I’m not afraid -of them.”</p> - -<p>The strike was worse the next day, and so many violent acts -were committed that extra policemen had to be sent for. Several -strike-breakers were attacked as they tried to run the electric cabs -and were quite badly hurt. Mr. Newton wrote vivid stories about the -occurrences, and the <cite>Leader</cite> had a strong editorial, condemning the -strikers.</p> - -<p>This made the union men more angry than ever at the <cite>Leader</cite>, and they -seemed to think Mr. Newton was the chief one on whom they could vent -their ill feeling. They shook their fists at him whenever he appeared, -and once a stone was hurled through the air at him, narrowly missing -his head.</p> - -<p>“You’d better look out,” some of the policemen advised him.</p> - -<p>Larry had plenty of copy to take down that day, and made three trips. -The last two times he noticed as he was going up the stairs of the -elevated road, where he took a train that brought him close to the -<cite>Leader</cite> office, three men regarding him closely. Once he heard one of -the trio say:</p> - -<p>“That’s him!”</p> - -<p>However, he did not think they meant him,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">138</a></span> and so he gave the matter -no more consideration. He took the story to the office and came back -for more. There was quite a bunch of copy waiting, as several incidents -had occurred that Mr. Newton had preferred writing about instead of -telephoning.</p> - -<p>As Larry was going up the stairs to the train with this last batch of -copy he saw the three men again.</p> - -<p>“Now’s our chance!” one of them cried.</p> - -<p>Two of them made a grab for the boy, for the stairs were screened in -from observation, and no one was in sight.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">139</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xvii" id="xvii"></a>CHAPTER XVII<br /> -<span>TAKEN PRISONER</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">At</span> first Larry thought they were perhaps only trying to play a joke -on him. He involuntarily moved to one side, but, as he did so, one of -the men grasped him by the coat collar. Larry began to struggle, but -another of the men clasped him about the arms, and a hand was placed -over the boy’s mouth to prevent any cry issuing.</p> - -<p>“Whistle for the cab!” the shortest of the men whispered, and a shrill -note came from the lips of someone.</p> - -<p>Larry felt himself lifted up and borne down the stairs. He heard a -confused noise and then a loud explosion. It subsequently developed -that some of the strikers set off a bomb at that time. This drew a big -crowd near the scene of the explosion and the vicinity of the elevated -railroad steps was almost deserted.</p> - -<p>A carriage drove rapidly up to the foot of the steps. Larry, struggling -against he knew not what, was unable to free himself. He was bundled -into the cab, two of the men followed, and the door was slammed shut. -Then the driver<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">140</a></span> cracked his whip and the horses started off at a -gallop.</p> - -<p>Even then Larry could not believe that the men meant to take him. A -number of explanations came into his mind. He thought he was mistaken -for another person, and again he imagined it might be some prank of -college students, though the men did not look like youths who attended -a university.</p> - -<p>One man had kept his hand over Larry’s mouth, but once they were in -the cab he removed his palm and substituted for it a cloth gag which -effectually prevented the boy from calling out.</p> - -<p>Larry strained his ears to catch anything the men might say, in order -to learn what their purpose was regarding him. In this, however, he was -disappointed, as the men maintained silence. The only sound was the -rumbling of the carriage over the cobblestones. Occasionally this would -cease as an asphalt stretch would be reached.</p> - -<p>“They’ll release me as soon as they find they have the wrong person,” -thought Larry. “It would make a good story if I could find out all -about it and what their real object is.”</p> - -<p>Even in his somewhat perilous position Larry had a thought for his -paper, as all good reporters should have. Now the cab seemed to be -in a less thickly settled part of the city. By glancing through a -small crack in the window shade, Larry could see stretches of field -instead of solid blocks<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">141</a></span> of houses. The men, too, seemed to be less -apprehensive of pursuit, for they began to talk in low tones, though -Larry could not hear what they said.</p> - -<p>At length, however, Larry heard one ask the other:</p> - -<p>“Has he got the papers with him?”</p> - -<p>“Sure,” was the answer from the other man. “I saw him put them in his -pocket. Shall I take them out?”</p> - -<p>“No, we’ll wait for the boss,” was the answer.</p> - -<p>Larry heard and wondered. What papers could the men be referring to? -Clearly they had made a mistake, and must have expected to capture some -other person.</p> - -<p>“I haven’t any valuable papers,” thought the youth.</p> - -<p>Then, with a start, he remembered the bunch of copy with which he had -started for the <cite>Leader</cite> office when he was caught. He realized that -if it was not soon delivered it would be too late. The thought of this -made him half wild, for he did not want to fail in his mission.</p> - -<p>He began to struggle to free himself with a strength that, for a -moment, took all the power of the men to subdue. Larry kicked with his -feet and struck out with his arms. He tried to get rid of the gag to -call for help, but it was too tightly fastened on.</p> - -<p>For a few minutes there was a lively time in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">142</a></span> carriage, but the -driver did not appear to notice it, for he kept his horses going. At -length the men succeeded in getting hold of Larry’s arms and legs and -holding them firmly.</p> - -<p>“Shall I tie him?” asked the shorter of the two men.</p> - -<p>“No, we’re almost there now,” was the answer from the other. “We can -easily hold him until then.”</p> - -<p>“He certainly put up a good fight,” was the other’s comment. “I never -saw such a lad. I hope he doesn’t make another row.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll fix him if he does,” said the tall man.</p> - -<p>Larry was exhausted from his efforts. He saw that it would be of no -use to fight the two men, and so he resolved to remain quiet until he -found a better chance of escaping. At the same time he could not help -wondering what in the world it was all about, and why any men should -want him. He was also much alarmed over his failure to get back to the -office with the copy, but he did not see how he could help himself.</p> - -<p>The carriage containing the boy and his captors now began traveling -over more uneven roads, and Larry rightly guessed that they were in the -upper part of the city, in the section known as the Bronx.</p> - -<p>For perhaps an hour longer the vehicle moved on. Then it came to a -stop. One of the men raised a curtain and peered out.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">143</a></span> -“Here we are!” he exclaimed. “We’ll carry him in. Is anyone looking?”</p> - -<p>“Not a person in sight,” was the reply as the other man gazed up and -down the street. “Go ahead.”</p> - -<p>Larry was picked up as if he was a baby and carried from the carriage, -across the sidewalk, and into a dark hallway. During the short trip -across the pavement the boy noticed that it was getting dusk. He knew -then that the last edition of the <cite>Leader</cite> had gone to press and that -the copy he had in his pocket had not reached the office on time. He -felt like crying, for fear Mr. Emberg and Mr. Newton would think it -was his fault he had failed in his work. They might believe he had -deliberately stayed away.</p> - -<p>But Larry’s regrets at what might have happened were soon dispersed by -what was taking place right around him. He felt himself being carried -upstairs, and he made up his mind that it was useless to struggle any -more. He was in the hands of strong men and it would be better to use -cunning rather than force. He realized that he was near a big city and -that there were plenty of police to ferret out crime of any description -whatever.</p> - -<p>Larry believed that his absence would soon be noticed and that a search -would be made for him. So, though he was much frightened, he resolved -to be as brave as possible and to wait with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">144</a></span> patience until he was -released. He had no fear that the men would do him any real harm.</p> - -<p>The man carrying him went up four flights of stairs, and Larry knew, -from that, that he must be in some sort of tenement house or some large -factory. The places seemed quiet, and Larry thought if it was a house -it must be a deserted one.</p> - -<p>At this he began to have a little fear. He was afraid of being left -all alone somewhere far from home, for he knew New York was a big -place, and one might be within the city limits, yet miles from any real -population. But the boy did not have long to indulge in fancies.</p> - -<p>The man carrying him set him down rather roughly, and Larry staggered -and would have fallen had not another man, who had followed the first -one, caught him.</p> - -<p>“Easy,” said the second individual. “What are you trying to do to him? -He’s only a boy.”</p> - -<p>“I didn’t mean any harm,” growled the other.</p> - -<p>“Now look here,” began the man who had pleaded for gentler treatment, -turning toward Larry, “we’re going to take that gag out of your mouth. -But mind you if you holler or make a fuss we’ll put it in again. Will -you promise?”</p> - -<p>Larry would have done almost anything in reason to get rid of the rag -that was nearly choking him, so he nodded an assent.</p> - -<p>“That’s the way to behave,” said the man, evidently<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">145</a></span> pleased. “We’ll be -as decent as we can with you, even though the boss did say to give you -all you deserved.”</p> - -<p>He removed the gag, and Larry breathed a long breath of relief. At the -same time he wondered what the man meant by saying he was to be given -all he deserved.</p> - -<p>What did he deserve, anyhow? And who would want to harm him? It was too -much for Larry. He began to think it was all a bad dream and that he -would presently wake up and start for the office.</p> - -<p>“It won’t do you much good if you do holler,” the man went on. “There’s -no one in this old factory and there’s not a house within half a mile. -So if you want to use your lungs, why, go ahead.”</p> - -<p>Larry’s mouth was sore and stiff from the gag. His lips were swollen -and he could hardly speak. Yet he wanted to question the men.</p> - -<p>“Why have you brought me here? What do you want? I never did anything -to you,” he said brokenly.</p> - -<p>“No, I don’t know’s you did,” said the shorter of the two men. “You’re -brought here because the boss told us to, and you’re here because -you’ve been doing harm to our cause.”</p> - -<p>“Harm to your cause? What cause?” asked Larry, feeling sure he must -have been taken for the wrong person.</p> - -<p>“You know well enough,” the man answered.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">146</a></span> “I have orders not to talk -to you for fear you’ll find out more than would be good for us, so -you’ll have to keep quiet now.</p> - -<p>“We’re going to lock you in this room. You can try and get out if you -want to, only I wouldn’t advise you to try. It’s a good ways from the -ground. We’ll be on hand to stop any attempt. You’ll be well taken care -of for a while until this matter is all settled. If you’re hungry we’ll -get you something to eat.”</p> - -<p>“I’m not hungry,” said Larry, “but what do you mean by bringing me -here? You haven’t any right to do this.”</p> - -<p>“That’s all right,” said the tall man calmly. “You are here, and here’s -where you’re going to stay for a while. The boss will be here, pretty -soon, and you can make some arrangements with him, maybe.”</p> - -<p>“Can I have a drink of water?” asked Larry, whose throat was parched -and dry from the gag.</p> - -<p>“Sure,” said one of the men. “I’ll get you some, and a couple of -sandwiches.”</p> - -<p>He was as good as his word, and presently came back with food and -drink. The water made Larry feel better and he thought he had better -eat something to keep his strength up.</p> - -<p>The two men watched him as he munched the bread and meat. Suddenly -there sounded from below a sharp noise as if a heavy door had been -shut.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">147</a></span> -“Hark!” exclaimed one of the men. “What’s that?”</p> - -<p>“Someone’s coming,” said the other.</p> - -<p>Footsteps were heard ascending the stairs. The men looked at each other -and seemed alarmed.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">148</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xviii" id="xviii"></a>CHAPTER XVIII<br /> -<span>HELD CAPTIVE</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">There</span> came a peculiar rap at the door. First two blows, then a pause, -then three light taps, followed by three raps at long intervals.</p> - -<p>“It’s——” began the tall man.</p> - -<p>“Shh-h!” cautioned his companion. “No names, remember. Let him in.”</p> - -<p>The other opened the door. A well-dressed man entered.</p> - -<p>“Have you got him?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Sure,” replied the two men at once. They had stood in front of Larry, -so that the new-comer could not see him at first. At this, however, -they moved aside and the well-dressed man got a glimpse of the boy. He -gave a start.</p> - -<p>“That’s not the one!” he exclaimed.</p> - -<p>“Not the one!” cried the tall man. “Sure he’s the one. He’s the one -that was pointed out to us. Besides he has the papers in his pocket. I -saw him put ’em in.”</p> - -<p>“Are you sure?”</p> - -<p>“Of course.” The tall man with a sudden motion plunged his hand into -Larry’s inside<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">149</a></span> pocket and pulled out the bunch of copy. The new-comer -glanced hurriedly at it.</p> - -<p>“It’s the stuff,” he said, “but, all the same, you have the wrong one. -You got the messenger boy. The one we wanted is the reporter who has -been writing all this stuff about the strikers. He’s the one we want to -get even with.”</p> - -<p>At last Larry understood why he had been kidnapped.</p> - -<p>The heads of the strikers, incensed at the articles Mr. Newton had been -writing about them, had determined on revenge. Whether they thought -that by capturing a reporter they could stop the articles from going -into the paper Larry could not guess. It was more likely, he thought, -that the men merely wanted to scare Mr. Newton and make him tone down -the descriptions of the acts committed by the strikers.</p> - -<p>Persons who thought it to their advantage to keep out of the public -notice, Larry knew, often tried to intimidate the reporters assigned to -write them and their doings up, but he had never heard of such a bold -attempt to bring about silence.</p> - -<p>He realized that a plot must have been formed to capture Mr. Newton. -But the men detailed to carry it out had mistaken Larry for the -reporter.</p> - -<p>“What shall we do? Turn him loose?” asked the short man with a nod at -Larry.</p> - -<p>“It’s a bad blunder to make,” spoke the well-dressed man, who seemed to -be in charge. “I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">150</a></span> don’t see how you came to make it. But we dare not -turn him out yet.”</p> - -<p>“Why not?”</p> - -<p>“Why, he’d give the whole thing away, and the strike’s not half won. As -soon as he got out of here the police would come.”</p> - -<p>“I will not tell on you if you only let me go,” said Larry. “I must get -the copy to the paper. They’ll think I’ve run away.”</p> - -<p>“They’ll have to think it then,” rejoined the leader.</p> - -<p>“I promise I will not tell,” repeated the boy.</p> - -<p>“We can’t trust you,” replied the short man, in hard tones.</p> - -<p>“We’ll have to keep him here for some time,” went on the well-dressed -man. “Then we’ll have to make another try for the real one.”</p> - -<p>Larry felt his heart beating fast at the thought that perhaps Mr. -Newton, all unconscious of danger, might be caught by the men. How he -longed for a chance to warn the reporter!</p> - -<p>“It’s going to be a ticklish job,” rejoined the tall man.</p> - -<p>“Can’t help it,” went on the leader. “We’ll do the best we can. This -place is far enough away. You two men will have to stay on guard. Give -him all he wants to eat, but if he tries to escape—well, you know what -to do.”</p> - -<p>“I guess so,” muttered the short man, with an ugly look at Larry.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">151</a></span> -The three men left the room then, but Larry could hear them talking -in low tones in the hall. He stole to a window, hoping there might be -a chance to get away. He found it tightly shut. Besides the casement -was five stories from the ground, and to leap that distance would have -meant death.</p> - -<p>By pressing his face closely against the window pane Larry could see -that, about three windows over, on a line with the one he was looking -from, was a fire escape. If he could only reach that, he thought, he -could get away. But to reach it seemed out of the question. As he stood -looking the two men who had captured him re-entered the room.</p> - -<p>“What were you doing?” the tall one asked him.</p> - -<p>“Looking out of the window,” replied Larry boldly.</p> - -<p>“Be careful you don’t try to get out,” was the rejoinder. “The windows -are all protected by burglar alarm wires. If you open one it will give -the signal, and we’ll catch you before you can go ten feet, so be -careful.”</p> - -<p>Larry said nothing. There was a chair in the room, and he sat down on -it. The tall man made a careful examination of the window. As he had -said there were wires around the frame, but they seemed old and rusty -and Larry half believed they did not work.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">152</a></span> -While one of the men remained in the room, the other went out. He came -back shortly with a pile of rags and blankets which he threw in the -middle of the floor.</p> - -<p>“There’s your bed,” he said to Larry.</p> - -<p>It was getting dusk, but Larry had no desire to go to sleep. He was too -worried and anxious over his position and too full of wonder at what -his mother and those on the <cite>Leader</cite> might think about him.</p> - -<p>The two men left the room, locking the door after them, and Larry was -left alone. He was more frightened than he cared to admit. He half -wished the men would remain with him.</p> - -<p>He went to the window and looked out again. There was nothing to be -seen except a wide expanse of open lots, and there was not a house -within hailing distance. The glass in the windows seemed unusually -thick, and Larry thought that if he tried to break it he might be badly -cut. Besides, smashing the pane would give as loud an alarm as the -ringing of the electric bell.</p> - -<p>Then, tired with his work, and worn out with anxiety, Larry threw -himself down on the blankets, wondering what would happen on the morrow.</p> - -<p>Meanwhile, Mr. Newton was waiting in vain for Larry’s return. He had -quite a bunch of copy ready for the last edition, and, when he knew it -was nearly time to go to press, he went to a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">153</a></span> telephone and asked what -had become of the boy.</p> - -<p>“Why, he hasn’t been here since the third batch of stuff brought in,” -replied Mr. Emberg. “We thought you might have him up there. What’s the -trouble?”</p> - -<p>Then Mr. Newton told how he had started Larry for the office with an -important part of the story.</p> - -<p>“He’s been hurt in an accident,” said Mr. Newton, “that’s what’s -happened.”</p> - -<p>“Maybe be got tired of the work and left without notice,” suggested the -city editor over the wire.</p> - -<p>“Larry’s not that kind,” spoke Mr. Newton firmly. “You’ll see that -something has happened to him. But say, let someone take the rest of -this story over the wire, and I’ll soon be in.”</p> - -<p>With grave wonder as to what had befallen Larry, Mr. Newton dictated -the story of the strike and the bomb explosion. Then he took a car for -the office, as the strikers had temporarily dispersed.</p> - -<p>On the way down he thought of all sorts of conjectures. The most -reasonable supposition was that Larry had met with an accident—been -hit by a car or cab—knocked unconscious and hurried off to some -hospital. Reaching the office Mr. Newton inquired from the police -whether any such accident had happened. He was told there was none.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">154</a></span> -“That’s queer,” he muttered. If he had only known where Larry was -he would have thought it more strange. “I must get out on this case -myself. But first I’ll go to Larry’s home.”</p> - -<p>Mrs. Dexter, who was beginning to be a little worried over the -non-appearance of her son, was more alarmed when Mr. Newton arrived. At -first she thought the reporter had come to bring bad news, but she was -soon told there had been no accident.</p> - -<p>“Maybe a bad man took him off,” said little James. “There’s lots of ’em -in New York.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I guess it isn’t as bad as that,” said Mr. Newton. “We’ll find -him, don’t worry. He’s probably lost his way, and maybe he doesn’t like -to ask, thinking he should be able to find it himself.”</p> - -<p>But, in his own mind, Mr. Newton was satisfied that Larry was not -so foolish. He began to be alarmed. This alarm grew when, the next -morning, no word had been received from the missing boy. Mrs. Dexter -was sure he had been killed, and she worried so that Mr. Newton, who -paid a second visit to the humble home, was afraid lest she should make -herself ill.</p> - -<p>“I’ll find Larry for you!” he said. “I’ve found lots of missing people, -and I’ll get Larry!”</p> - -<p>But, though he spoke confidently, Mr. Newton did not know where to -begin. He made a report of the missing lad to the police, and a -general<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">155</a></span> alarm was sent out. But there are so many of these in the -course of the day, and so little attention is paid to a hunt for -missing persons, in New York, that Mr. Newton had not much hope in this -respect.</p> - -<p>The reporter went back to where Larry had parted from him, and made -careful inquiries. He found one or two who remembered having seen -several boys, more or less like Larry, about the time he disappeared. -But the bomb had exploded that same time, and the attention of everyone -had centered on that.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">156</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xix" id="xix"></a>CHAPTER XIX<br /> -<span>LARRY’S MOVEMENTS</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Larry</span> passed a restless night. He slept but little and frequently he -got up to peer from the darkened window. Sometimes he heard voices in -the next room, and he knew the men were on guard.</p> - -<p>“I must keep up my courage,” thought the boy, “someone will surely come -for me. This is New York, and they have lots of police.”</p> - -<p>But Larry forgot that the very size of the city was a factor against -his being found very soon.</p> - -<p>Toward morning he fell into a doze and got a little sleep on the pile -of blankets. He was awakened by one of the men coming into the room. -The fellow had a plate of bread and butter and a cup of coffee.</p> - -<p>“We ain’t going to starve you,” he said, in not an unkind tone. “We -don’t want to hurt you any, but we’ve got to protect ourselves.”</p> - -<p>Larry did not answer. He took the food, of which he was beginning to -feel the need. The coffee warmed him and he felt better after drinking -it.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">157</a></span> -“Remember now, no tricks,” the man warned as he prepared to leave. “The -windows are guarded.”</p> - -<p>Left to himself once more, Larry walked over to the window and examined -it. As the man had said there were several wires near the casement, and -they seemed to run into the next room.</p> - -<p>“I don’t believe it is an electric alarm at all,” thought the boy. -“What would they want of a burglar alarm on a window so far from the -ground? I’m going to try and see, anyhow.”</p> - -<p>At first he thought he would raise the window and see if the men rushed -in.</p> - -<p>“No, I have a better plan,” said Larry after a moment’s thought.</p> - -<p>He took from his pocket a bunch of string. He had not yet gotten over -that habit he formed while in the country, for a boy there doesn’t have -as many chances to get cord as does a city chap, so they generally -carry some with them.</p> - -<p>Larry fastened one end of the cord to the lowest wire. Then, unwinding -the string, Larry went to the farthest side of the room, pulling the -twine taut after him.</p> - -<p>“We’ll see if the alarm goes off when I break the wire,” he said. He -knew burglar alarms were constructed on the principle that if one wire -in the circuit was broken by the opening of a door or window, it would -cause a bell to ring. He was now going to break the wire and see what<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">158</a></span> -happened. He thought that by doing it at long distance, by means of the -string, he could fool the men. If the bell did ring, and they rushed -into the room he would be far away from the window, and they would -wonder who had severed the copper conductor of electricity.</p> - -<p>Larry was a little nervous over the outcome of the experiment. He did -not just know what would happen, and he was somewhat afraid of what the -men might do.</p> - -<p>“Well, here goes,” he said in a whisper.</p> - -<p>He gave the cord a sudden jerk, his heart beating so fast and hard that -he could almost hear it. He strained on the cord. It began to stretch -and then, with a suddenness that startled him, it broke in the middle.</p> - -<p>“That wire’s pretty strong,” thought the boy.</p> - -<p>He repaired the break, went back to the far side of the room, and began -to pull steadily on the cord. This time it held and, a few seconds -later, with a sudden and loud snap the electric wire broke.</p> - -<p>For a moment Larry stood in breathless anxiety, waiting to see what -would happen. He half feared that, after all, the electric wire -might lead to an alarm. But, as the seconds passed, and no one came, -Larry realized that the men had been deceiving him. There was no -<a name="burglar" id="burglar"></a><ins title="Original has 'burgular'">burglar</ins> -attachment to the window and he could raise it and -not be discovered.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">159</a></span> -“I’d better wait until dusk, however,” the boy thought. “They can’t see -me so well then.”</p> - -<p>Several times during the day the men came back to the room. The tall -one brought Larry his dinner, but had little to say. The boy had tied -the broken wire together, and removed the string, so that no evidences -remained of what he had done.</p> - -<p>He could tell, by the occasional conversation in the room next to him, -that the men were still there, and he knew it would not do to try to -escape while they were so close. His only hope was that they would go -out. And this happened shortly after one of them had brought in a plate -of sandwiches and a glass of milk for the prisoner.</p> - -<p>Larry heard them going down the stairs, and the lad could hardly wait -for them to get all the way down, so anxious was he to open the window.</p> - -<p>Raising the sash proved a harder job than he anticipated and it was -quite a feat for even his sturdy muscles. The window had evidently not -been opened in some time, and stuck. At last, however, Larry raised it. -It was a relief to breathe the fresh air, for the room had been close, -but it was better to feel that he had now a chance to get away.</p> - -<p>Looking cautiously forth from the window -<a name="Larry" id="Larry"></a><ins title="Original has 'Harry'">Larry</ins> -could not see anyone. -The ground below<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">160</a></span> was deserted. It was quite dusk now, and he resolved -to make his attempt.</p> - -<p>But now that he had the sash up and could look out, a new difficulty -presented itself. This was the fact that the fire escape platform was -three windows away from the one where Larry was. He did not see how -he was to reach it. There was just one way, he figured, but it was so -dangerous that he hesitated considerably about taking it.</p> - -<p>This was to edge along on the window sills until he had reached the -platform. Once there it would be easy to get to the ground. But the -trip across would be risky.</p> - -<p>Carefully Larry examined the ledges. They were broad and substantial, -and by some chance of architecture the sill of one window nearly met -that of the next. One would need to be very careful in edging along the -narrow ledge. To a fireman the feat would probably have presented few -difficulties, but to an untrained lad it was very great.</p> - -<p>“I’m going to try,” said Larry determinedly. “I must get away from -here, now that I have the chance.”</p> - -<p>He crawled out on the ledge and looked down. Through the half-darkness -he could make out the ground below and a feeling of dizziness caused -him to reel.</p> - -<p>“I mustn’t do that again,” he said to himself,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">161</a></span> for he remembered the -ill effects of looking down from great heights. “I must keep my eyes in -front of me.”</p> - -<p>Carefully and cautiously he stood erect on the narrow ledge. He found -that the window casings gave a fairly good hold for his fingers as he -edged his way along. Then he began to travel over the dangerous path. -He went a few inches at a time, feeling to make sure that each forward -step was firm before trusting his whole weight on his foot.</p> - -<p>Nearer and nearer he came to the fire escape platform. Now but five -feet separated him, and a few seconds later he was able to leap down on -it.</p> - -<p>He felt that he had now fully regained his liberty, and with a feeling -of thankfulness he began the descent of the iron ladders. Past the -second and third floor windows he made his way and was on the last -ladder when a voice from below cried:</p> - -<p>“Stay where you are! If you come down any further I’ll shoot!”</p> - -<p>Caught! The men, Larry thought, had returned just as he was about to -jump to the ground and run away. Three minutes more and he would have -been safely off.</p> - -<p>“I’ve caught you!” the voice went on. “You will go around trying to rob -places, will you! Didn’t think anyone would see you, I s’pose, but<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">162</a></span> I -happened along, though I can’t see what you could steal in that old -factory.”</p> - -<p>By these words Larry knew he had been stopped by someone other than -the two men. He looked down and saw a short stout figure, in the fast -growing darkness, standing at the foot of the ladder.</p> - -<p>“I’m not a burglar!” ventured Larry mildly.</p> - -<p>“Bless my soul, it’s a boy!” the voice went on. “Well, well, what is -the world coming to when mere lads go out burglarizing!”</p> - -<p>“I’m not a burglar,” said Larry with some spirit.</p> - -<p>“Don’t tell stories, boy!” the man below said.</p> - -<p>“I’m not.”</p> - -<p>“But can’t I see that you are a burglar?”</p> - -<p>“I’m escaping from this building,” Larry went on.</p> - -<p>“Of course, I can see that easy enough,” the man said. “That’s what all -burglars want to do—escape. But I’ve caught you!”</p> - -<p>“Well, I’m coming down,” Larry continued. “If you think I’m a burglar -you can take me to a police station.”</p> - -<p>Indeed Larry would have asked nothing better just then than to be taken -before some friendly bluecoats.</p> - -<p>“All right,” the man continued. “But mind, don’t try any tricks on me! -I’m strong, and I’ll tackle you if you start to fight.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">163</a></span> -“I won’t fight,” spoke Larry mildly.</p> - -<p>Then he continued on down the ladder and finally reached the ground. He -confronted the man, who thought he had effected an important capture. -That individual was a mild appearing, short, stout old gentleman with -white hair and whiskers. He looked at Larry as well as he could in the -darkness.</p> - -<p>“Stand still until I strike a match,” he said. “I want to have a good -look at you.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t look like a very bad burglar,” he said after a close -examination. “But you never can tell nowadays about burglars. Some of -the best looking are the worst thieves. You come along with me.”</p> - -<p>“We’d better hurry,” said Larry, “or the two men might come back and -catch me again.”</p> - -<p>“What two men?”</p> - -<p>Thereupon the boy told his story briefly.</p> - -<p>“Why, you astonish me!” the old gentlemen exclaimed. “To think that -such things can go on in New York. I must write a letter to the papers -about it to-morrow. Come along, young man. We’ll find a policeman at -once and he’ll arrest the gang.”</p> - -<p>This was easier said than done, for the building where Larry had been -held captive was in a lonely and unfrequented suburb of the city. The -old gentleman, who seemed to have forgotten that Larry might possibly -be a burglar, explained that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">164</a></span> he had been taking a long walk, as was -his custom, when he espied the boy descending the ladder. The two -walked on for some time, more than a mile, in fact, before they saw, -standing under a solitary gas light, a policeman.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">165</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xx" id="xx"></a>CHAPTER XX<br /> -<span>BACK AT WORK</span></h2> - - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Here</span>’s a case for you, officer!” exclaimed Mr. Randall, for the old -gentleman had said that was his name.</p> - -<p>“What sort of a case?” asked the policeman, continuing to munch some -peanuts, the shells of which were scattered about him.</p> - -<p>“A most extraordinary case!”</p> - -<p>“All cases are alike to me,” returned the blue coat calmly. “What is -it?”</p> - -<p>“This boy is a burglar I just captured, only he isn’t a burglar at all, -but he’s kidnapped and I saved him!”</p> - -<p>“What?” almost shouted the officer. “Are you crazy or am I?”</p> - -<p>“I guess you and all the policemen in New York must be, to have such -goings-on,” said Mr. Randall. “This boy is kidnapped, I tell you.”</p> - -<p>“Kidnapped, is it?” murmured the officer; “wait a minute, I have some -sort of a report about a kidnapped lad.”</p> - -<p>From his helmet the policeman drew out a paper. He began reading over -a description of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">166</a></span> a number of missing persons whom the police had been -asked, by their relatives, to help locate. Larry’s case having been -reported by Mr. Newton, had, in the course of the routine, been related -to every officer in the city, from their different station houses.</p> - -<p>“Here we are,” the policeman exclaimed. “Fox terrier, answers to the -name—no, that’s about a lost dog. Oh, this is it—Larry Dexter, -fifteen years old, rather tall, blue eyes, brown hair, etc.”</p> - -<p>“That’s me!” cried Larry. “How can I get home quickest?”</p> - -<p>“Come with me,” the officer said.</p> - -<p>He led the way through a number of streets, until they came to a lonely -trolley car that had reached the end of its route. Into this the -officer, Larry, and the old gentleman got, and soon they were under -full speed.</p> - -<p>“I’ll take you to the station house, so I can make a report of you -having been found,” said the officer, “and then you can go home. Well, -this is a good piece of work.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t think I’m a burglar now, do you?” asked Larry of Mr. Randall.</p> - -<p>“No, no,” said the old man hastily. “That was all a mistake.”</p> - -<p>“What’s that about burglars?” asked the officer.</p> - -<p>Whereupon Larry told how Mr. Randall had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">167</a></span> mistaken him for a robber as -he was escaping from the factory.</p> - -<p>“We’ll raid that place,” said the policeman, “but I guess they’ll skip -out as soon as they find you’re gone.”</p> - -<p>And this proved to be so. When, after Larry’s arrival at the station, a -note of his having been found was telephoned to police headquarters, a -squad of bluecoats started for the old factory. They found it deserted.</p> - -<p>“I suppose I can go home now?” said Larry, when he had complied with -all formalities.</p> - -<p>The sergeant behind the desk nodded and smiled at the lad.</p> - -<p>“I’ll take you,” spoke Mr. Randall. “I don’t want to see you kidnapped -again before your mother has a chance to look at you.”</p> - -<p>He insisted on going all the way with the boy, and into the Dexters’ -rooms. Such excitement as there was when Larry burst in on them! Mrs. -Dexter was in despair, and Mr. Newton, who was trying to comfort her -with the hope that her son would soon be found, was not succeeding very -well.</p> - -<p>Mrs. Dexter threw her arms about Larry, and hugged him and kissed him -as only a mother can. James and Mary capered about their brother and -Lucy fairly cried for joy.</p> - -<p>“Bless my soul! What a cold I have!” Mr. Randall said, blowing his nose -with unnecessary<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">168</a></span> violence, and, under pretense of it, wiping the tears -from his eyes, which flowed at the sight of Mrs. Dexter’s joy. “Most -extraordinary weather for colds I ever saw, isn’t it?” appealing to Mr. -Newton.</p> - -<p>“It certainly is,” agreed the reporter.</p> - -<p>Larry had to tell his story all over again, and then Mr. Randall had to -relate his share in it. Then Larry had to be told all that had happened -since he was kidnapped, and the clock was striking midnight when they -all got through.</p> - -<p>“Do you think they’ll ever arrest those men?” asked Mr. Randall of Mr. -Newton.</p> - -<p>“I hardly think so,” was the answer. “They are probably far enough off -now. Besides they were only tools in the hand of someone else. The real -criminal is the well-dressed man Larry describes. We may be able to -catch him.”</p> - -<p>“Young man, you’re quite a hero,” the old gentleman exclaimed suddenly, -turning to Larry. “I wouldn’t have climbed across those window sills -for a pile of money.”</p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t have done it for money, either,” said Larry. “But I wanted -to get away. Besides, it was dark and I couldn’t see how far it was to -fall if I had looked down, which I didn’t dare do.”</p> - -<p>“I guess your picture’ll be in the papers to-morrow,” said Lucy to her -brother.</p> - -<p>“I think it would be better to keep all mention<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">169</a></span> of the details of the -matter out of the press,” said Mr. Newton. “That’s a strange thing -for a reporter to say, but this case is different, and concerns the -<cite>Leader</cite> more than any other papers. The unions are fighting us, and -we must fight them. We can do it best by keeping quiet in this case. -I think I can manage so that little of this will get into the other -papers.</p> - -<p>“The police station you went to is in a lonely part of the city, and -reporters are seldom sent there. The headquarters men will not bother -much with the story, and beyond the mere fact that Larry has been found -I think we will not go into details.”</p> - -<p>This plan was followed and the next day small items appeared in all the -papers, to the effect that the missing boy was at home.</p> - -<p>Larry went back to work that morning, and was warmly commended by Mr. -Emberg for the manner in which he had acted.</p> - -<p>“You not only get news, but you do what is even harder,” said the city -editor, smiling, “you make it.”</p> - -<p>Larry was a real hero in the eyes of the other copy boys, and he had -to tell the story over at least a dozen times before they would be -satisfied. The other reporters, also, were interested in hearing the -details from Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>Larry was glad enough to be chasing copy again, for he remembered how, -when shut up<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">170</a></span> alone in the room, he had feared he might never more have -a chance at it.</p> - -<p>The cab strike was over three days later, the strikers giving up. Mr. -Newton tried to learn who was back of them, hoping thus to discover the -man responsible for Larry’s kidnapping, but he could not, though he -got several clews that pointed to a certain person. However, proof was -lacking, and without this the reporter could not proceed and cause an -arrest.</p> - -<p>Several days passed. Larry was kept busy, for there was plenty of news, -and there was no lack of copy to run with, proofs to get, and other -errands to do around the office. But Larry was getting to like it more -and more, and was counting on the day coming when he could write a -story.</p> - -<p>He continued at night school. The first feeling of strangeness had worn -off, and the classes had settled down to study. The boys, after the -first night of fun and excitement, did not play any more tricks, and -Larry found them easy to get on with.</p> - -<p>He feared he would have more trouble with Peter Manton, but the latter -did not come near him. He saw his old enemy occasionally, but, as they -were in different classes they did not meet inside the school, and only -once or twice outside, and in the company of crowds of other boys.</p> - -<p>Larry was studying writing, arithmetic, reading,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">171</a></span> and spelling. He also -took history and geography, and these kept him busy enough. However, he -was bright and quick, and the teacher complimented him on the progress -he was making. He got permission to take his books to the office, and -at odd moments he conned his lessons.</p> - -<p>One night, as Larry was returning from the school, and going up the -stairs that led to his home, he saw, standing in the hallway, beneath -the gas jet that illuminated it, a short man, rather roughly dressed. -The stranger started on seeing the boy, and went quickly into a room -the door of which someone on the inside opened.</p> - -<p>“I wonder what that means,” Larry thought. “That apartment was vacant -yesterday. I wonder if it’s been rented. If it has I don’t like the -looks of the tenants. However, it’s on the floor below us, so I don’t -suppose it makes much difference.”</p> - -<p>Larry asked his mother, before going to bed that night, if she knew -anything about the people in the rooms below.</p> - -<p>“I did not know they had been rented,” said Mrs. Dexter.</p> - -<p>“Maybe they are sneak thieves,” said Larry. There had been a number -of cases of late of men sneaking into tenement houses, and, while the -people were temporarily away from their apartments, ransacking the -places.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">172</a></span> -“I think I’ll speak to the janitor about it,” said Larry. “He’ll know -if they have rented the rooms or not.”</p> - -<p>The janitor lived in rooms in the basement, and Larry, after cautioning -his mother to keep her door locked, went downstairs.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I rented the rooms to three men, late this afternoon,” the -janitor told Larry. “They said they were bachelors and didn’t have much -furniture. I didn’t like the looks of the fellows, but I couldn’t say -anything, as they paid cash in advance.”</p> - -<p>“Did they move their stuff in?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Not that I saw,” replied the janitor. “If they did they must have -brought it in hand satchels, for there have been no trucks bringing any -furniture.”</p> - -<p>“Some of them are in the rooms now,” Larry went on.</p> - -<p>“They are, eh!” spoke the janitor. “I don’t like that, but I s’pose -they’ve got a right to go in and out when they please, even if they -haven’t any furniture. Maybe they’re looking the rooms over. It looks -suspicious. I guess they’ll bear watching.”</p> - -<p>“I think so myself,” replied Larry, as he went back upstairs.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">173</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxi" id="xxi"></a>CHAPTER XXI<br /> -<span>LARRY ON THE WATCH</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">As</span> he passed the door of the room which he had seen the stranger enter -Larry paused. He saw a light under the portal where there was a crack -between the sill and the edge of the door. He also heard voices in low -conversation.</p> - -<p>“I’d like to know what you’re up to,” thought the boy. “I’ll bet it’s -no good, from the looks of that one chap.”</p> - -<p>Larry noticed that the room occupied by the men was directly under his -own bedroom.</p> - -<p>“Maybe I can hear something from my room,” Larry thought.</p> - -<p>He returned to his mother’s apartments to tell her what the janitor -had said. He did not mention his own suspicions, for he did not want -to cause any unnecessary alarm. When the others had retired that night -Larry got out of bed, lay down on the floor of his room, and pressed -his ear to the boards. At first he could distinguish nothing.</p> - -<p>Then he heard a low, curious humming sound, like the roar of a railroad -train going through a tunnel, only much fainter. Now and then he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">174</a></span> could -hear blows struck as though the men were pounding a hammer on a block -of wood. Occasionally he could distinguish the sound of voices, though -the words were a mere jumble.</p> - -<p>“They’re not ordinary lodgers, at any rate,” the boy thought.</p> - -<p>He decided it was useless to listen any more, so he got into bed. He -wished he had a hole or opening from his room to the one below, that -he might see what was going on, and he fell into a doze with half a -determination to make an aperture.</p> - -<p>Larry’s duties at the office the next day kept him very busy. There -was a big fire uptown and several murders and suicides. In fact it was -a “great day for news,” as Mr. Emberg put it. Everyone was busy, from -the reporters to the managing editor. There was much copy to carry, -scores of extra proofs to bring from the composing room, and enough to -keep Larry running so often that by the time afternoon came he was very -tired.</p> - -<p>He did not feel very much like going to night school when evening came, -but he thought that if he did not he might fall behind in his studies, -and this he did not want to do. So he made up his mind he would go to -his class.</p> - -<p>Coming home, as Larry was passing through the almost deserted streets -in the neighborhood of the school, he heard loud shouts. He thought<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">175</a></span> -someone might be chasing a thief, but a few seconds later he heard the -cry:</p> - -<p>“Fire! Fire! Fire!”</p> - -<p>Larry looked around. He saw a man running toward him. Back of him there -was a lurid glow in the sky and a cloud of black smoke was rising.</p> - -<p>“Pull the box!” the man cried to Larry, at the same time pointing to a -red one halfway down the block.</p> - -<p>“All right!” shouted Larry. “I will!”</p> - -<p>He saw that the man, who was quite fat, was hardly able to run any -further. The boy speeded off to the box. The key was in the door, and -the next instant Larry had yanked it open and pulled down the hook. -This was sufficient to set the mechanism inside the box at work, and -send the signal to fire headquarters. Thence it was repeated to every -engine and hook-and-ladder apparatus that was to answer, and, almost -before Larry could run back to where he had seen the blaze, he heard -the rattle of the steamers as they dashed up, the clanging of bells, -the tooting of whistles, the ringing of the horses’ iron-shod feet on -the stones, and the hoarse shouts of men.</p> - -<p>The blaze proved to be a bad one in a big warehouse. Quite a crowd -gathered and Larry stayed to watch the sights. He felt that his mother -would not worry if he did not come right home from school, as she had -often told him he could remain out until ten o’clock if he so desired.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">176</a></span> -Soon the streets were filled with trucks and steamers and several -streams of water were spouting out on the blaze. With fascinated eyes -Larry watched the men at work. He saw a number of reporters for the -morning papers chasing here and there.</p> - -<p>Though the blaze was a bad one it had been taken in time, thanks to the -prompt pulling of the box, and so the firemen after considerable hard -work succeeded in getting control of the fire. Thinking he had seen -enough, though he would have liked to remain until the finish, Larry -started for home.</p> - -<p>Pretty soon he left the crowd behind him, and entered a quiet street. -In fact it was so quiet that Larry soon became aware that some person -was walking behind him. He could hear the echo of the footsteps after -his own, and, naturally, he turned to see who was following him. He -could just make out the dark figure of a man.</p> - -<p>At first the boy was a little nervous, fearing someone might be dogging -him for no good purpose. He had heard that men would commit robbery for -a small sum, and, though he only had a little change in his pockets, he -was a little afraid that the man had an object in keeping so closely -behind him.</p> - -<p>“I wish I’d meet a policeman,” thought Larry.</p> - -<p>But, like many other things, officers are not on hand when you want one -most.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">177</a></span> -“I wish I could see who it is,” murmured the boy.</p> - -<p>He turned around again, and caught sight of the man just as the latter -came under a street lamp. Larry gave a start.</p> - -<p>“It’s the man who has the rooms under us!” said Larry. “He isn’t -following me; he’s just going home, the same as I am.”</p> - -<p>He felt a sense of relief at this and quickened his pace. He turned a -corner, near a dark building, where the shadows were gloomy, and, as he -did so, a man stepped from the doorway.</p> - -<p>“Is that you?” the stranger asked in a low tone. Larry did not know -what to reply. At that moment the man caught a glimpse of him, and -muttering a hasty “Beg pardon,” he slunk back into the darkness. Larry -hurried on, and, a few seconds later, looking back, he saw the man -again come from the shadows and join the fellow who lived below the -Dexter apartments, and who had been following our hero.</p> - -<p>“Two of ’em,” murmured the boy. “I think they must be up to something, -but I hope they’re not after me.”</p> - -<p>Almost unconsciously Larry quickened his pace, and a little later he -found himself at the apartment house where he lived. The men were -nowhere in sight, and Larry concluded they had either delayed on the -road or else that he had walked much faster than they had.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">178</a></span> -No one was up as he let himself into the small flat with his latchkey. -His mother called to him from her bedroom to tell him there were some -crackers and milk in the cupboard, as Larry was often hungry when he -came in.</p> - -<p>“And look out for tacks in your room, Larry,” his mother went on. “I -took the carpet up in there to-day to clean it.”</p> - -<p>“All right, mother,” replied the boy.</p> - -<p>He ate a light lunch, and prepared for bed. He heard the persons living -on the floor below enter their apartment, and then began that curious -roaring sound again.</p> - -<p>“I’d like to know what that is,” Larry murmured to himself. “It’s queer -they should be carrying on some sort of business and only at night.”</p> - -<p>He went on into his bedroom, thinking over the problem. He was recalled -to earth very suddenly as, in his bare feet, he stepped on a loose tack.</p> - -<p>“Ouch!” the boy exclaimed in a whisper as he grabbed his wounded toe in -his hand. “I forgot about the carpet being up. Hello! What’s that?”</p> - -<p>His attention was attracted from the pain of his foot to a streak of -light on the floor of the room. It showed plainly, now that the carpet -was up and the room in darkness, for Larry did not need a lamp to -undress by.</p> - -<p>“That comes from the room below—the room<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">179</a></span> where the strange men are,” -thought Larry. “There must be a hole in the plaster of the ceiling -right under where the hole in my floor is. That’s the reason the light -shines through. I wonder if I can see down.”</p> - -<p>For an instant Larry hesitated. He did not like the idea of spying -on people, but, in this case, he felt that he was justified. There -was something suspicious about the men. The janitor had said they had -brought no furniture, yet they were constantly in the place at night, -and often during the day.</p> - -<p>True, their business might be legitimate and honest, but the -indications were to the contrary, and Larry felt that he owed it to his -mother and himself to see that there was no harm in what the men were -doing.</p> - -<p>So the boy kneeled down on the bare floor, and put his eye to the -crack. At first he could make out nothing, as the space between the -boards in the floor of his room was so small that little of what -was going on in the room down below showed. Larry soon fixed this, -however, by softly cutting away a portion of the board. The hole in the -plaster of the ceiling on the room below was big enough to disclose -considerable.</p> - -<p>When he had the hole made larger, Larry again applied his eye. This -time what he saw startled him.</p> - -<p>There, just below him, and seeming quite close,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">180</a></span> by reason of a bright -light, were three men. One of them Larry recognized as the man he had -so frequently seen, and the same one who had followed him that evening. -All three were in their shirt sleeves and seemed to be working hard. -They hurried back and forth, carrying something in small pots over to a -long table. All the while came that curious roaring sound.</p> - -<p>Larry wiggled around until he had found a spot where he could get the -best view of all that was going on in the apartment below. Suddenly -there came the sound of a slight explosion.</p> - -<p>“Turn off the gas! It’s getting too hot!” Larry heard one of the men -exclaim.</p> - -<p>He kept a close watch. He saw one of the men dart forward. Then the -fellow came to a stop in front of a small gray object. He seemed to -pull open a little door and, all at once, the room was flooded with a -golden glow of a small gas furnace, the brick lining of which was at -white heat.</p> - -<p>The men pulled something from the interior of the furnace with a -long-handled affair like a rake.</p> - -<p>“Get ready to pour,” he heard one man say.</p> - -<p>“I guess they’re nothing but chemists,” thought Larry. “They probably -have a new invention, and want to get it in working order secretly to -keep it from other people. I guess there’s no mystery about this.” But -Larry did not know what the next development was to be.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">181</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxii" id="xxii"></a>CHAPTER XXII<br /> -<span>TRAPPING A THIEF</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">As</span> he watched he heard the men moving quickly about in the room below. -Then a brighter glow suffused the apartment and Larry, looking through -the crack, saw that one man had what seemed to be an iron pot filled -with a gleaming mass.</p> - -<p>“Steady now!” said someone in a low tone.</p> - -<p>Larry was all impatience to observe what would come next. He strained -his eyes to see better. He drew himself along the floor.</p> - -<p>This last move was an unfortunate one. Larry’s foot scraped along on -the bare boards and his hand moved a chair slightly. In the silence it -sounded quite loud.</p> - -<p>“What’s that?” the boy heard one of the men ask.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” was the reply.</p> - -<p>“We’d better cut it out, for to-night,” said another. “I believe -someone is watching us.”</p> - -<p>“Nonsense! who can it be?” remarked a voice.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know, but I have a feeling that we are being observed. -Besides, there are some persons<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">182</a></span> in this house who I firmly believe are -suspicious of us.”</p> - -<p>“You’re getting nervous, old man,” was the remark of one who, from the -peculiar voice, had not before spoken. “But perhaps we had better stop -work for to-night.”</p> - -<p>Then the light died out, and Larry could see no more. He could hear the -men moving about, but, in a few minutes it all became quiet, and there -were no further sounds from below.</p> - -<p>“I wonder what they can be up to, that they don’t want anyone to see; -that they are afraid of having known,” mused Larry.</p> - -<p>Puzzling over these things, Larry finally went to bed. He could not get -to sleep for some time, thinking over what he had seen. He wondered -if he ought to tell Mr. Newton or someone about the matter, and half -resolved to inform his reporter friend of what had taken place. Then -he recollected that he had no proof of anything wrong, and he realized -that to make charges without this, or even a good idea of what the men -were up to, would be foolish.</p> - -<p>“I’ll say nothing about it,” thought Larry, “but I’ll keep my eyes -open. I’m glad there’s a crack in my floor.”</p> - -<p>Then he fell asleep, to dream that he had been captured by the men on -the floor below, who were about to cast him into a fiery furnace for -spying on them. He thought they grasped him by his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">183</a></span> head and his heels -and were swinging him to cast him into the flames, when he woke up to -find his mother shaking him and saying:</p> - -<p>“Come, come, Larry. It’s almost breakfast time. You’ve overslept -yourself.”</p> - -<p>He got up with a jump and began dressing, glad enough that he was not -going to be burned to death. He ate his breakfast in a hurry and had to -run downstairs and halfway to the car, for fear of being behindhand.</p> - -<p>However, he reached the office just in time. He had to put in another -busy day. In the afternoon he was sent to a hall uptown, where a -meeting was in progress and where one of the <cite>Leader</cite> reporters was on -an assignment. Larry had to bring back some copy, but as the meeting -was not very important only one trip was necessary.</p> - -<p>The car Larry rode on in coming back to the office was quite crowded, -and he stood on the rear platform. Near him were several rather -flashily dressed young men, who were laughing and joking in loud tones. -Occasionally they would playfully shove one another.</p> - -<p>At first Larry paid no attention to them, but finally he noticed that -the young men seemed to be directing their attentions to an elderly -gentleman who stood in the corner, smoking a cigar. He was well -dressed, and his vest was adorned with a heavy gold watch chain.</p> - -<p>Suddenly one of the young men gave his companion<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">184</a></span> such a hard push as -to send him violently against the elderly gentleman. The latter’s face -flushed.</p> - -<p>“Can’t you chaps stand up straight?” he demanded.</p> - -<p>The one who had collided with him seemed to be unable to regain his -balance for a moment, and leaned heavily against the old man. Finally, -however, he straightened up. Then, turning to the elderly gentleman, -and making a bow as he removed his hat he said:</p> - -<p>“I humbly beg your pardon, sir. I was not aware that I had hurt you. It -was my companion’s fault. I am sure he’ll apologize also.”</p> - -<p>“Certainly, certainly,” exclaimed the other somewhat flippantly. “It -was all my fault, I do assure you, and I am very sorry.”</p> - -<p>“That’s all right,” said the elderly man, much mollified at the polite -manner of the young men. “I suppose it was an accident. The car -sometimes lurches considerably.”</p> - -<p>“No, no, it was not an accident, it was all my fault, and I insist -on apologizing,” went on the man who had first spoken. “I shall feel -offended if you do not let me apologize.”</p> - -<p>All this while Larry noticed that the young man’s hands seemed to -be busy in the neighborhood of the old gentleman’s watch chain. His -companion was crowding close to the latter, while a third man, who did -not seem to be in company<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">185</a></span> of the other two, but who was apparently -engaged in reading a newspaper, held the sheet close under the elderly -man’s chin.</p> - -<p>“Then I’ll accept your apology,” the gentleman remarked, in good humor -again.</p> - -<p>“By Jove! This is my street!” the first young man exclaimed suddenly, -as he made a jump from the still moving car.</p> - -<p>“And mine also,” remarked his companion.</p> - -<p>Larry’s suspicions were aroused, particularly as the two men had seemed -to be handing something to the one who was so industriously reading -the paper. Still he did not like to say anything, though he was almost -certain that the men were pickpockets. He had heard Mr. Newton describe -how such criminals worked on street cars.</p> - -<p>Suddenly the elderly gentleman put his hand into his pocket and gave a -cry:</p> - -<p>“I’ve been robbed! Those fellows took my gold watch! I wondered what -they were up to. Stop the car! I must chase them! My watch is worth -five hundred dollars!”</p> - -<p>He would have leaped from the now swiftly moving vehicle and given -chase to the two thieves, who were now some distance away, had not -Larry, who was watching, put out his hand to detain the old man.</p> - -<p>“Wait until the car stops,” said Larry, at the same time pulling the -bell rope. “You’ll be hurt if you jump off now.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">186</a></span> -“But the thieves will get away!” cried the man. “Police! Help!”</p> - -<p>By this time the car was in an uproar, and the conductor and several -passengers came running out on the back platform. At the same time -the motorman, in response to the signal Larry had given, brought the -electric car to a rather sudden stop.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” asked the conductor.</p> - -<p>“I’ve been robbed! I must chase the thieves!” panted the old gentleman.</p> - -<p>“I’ll help you!” exclaimed the man who had been reading the paper. “I -saw which way they went!”</p> - -<p>He started to leave the car, but Larry, who had a plan in mind, had no -idea of letting this man, whom he supposed to be a companion of the -pickpockets, escape so easily. So the boy slyly put out his foot, and, -as the fellow was about to leap from the platform he tripped, and came -down on his hands.</p> - -<p>“Who did that?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“I did,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>“What for? I’d give you a good thrashing only I want to catch those -thieves that took this old man’s watch!”</p> - -<p>By this time quite a crowd had gathered, and the man, as well as Larry -and the old gentleman, were hemmed in. At the same time a policeman -sauntered up to see what the trouble was, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">187</a></span> Larry felt that he could -now put his plan into execution.</p> - -<p>“I guess you won’t have to chase the thieves very far,” the boy said to -the chap who had been reading the paper.</p> - -<p>“Well, I like your impudence! What do you mean?” demanded the fellow.</p> - -<p>“I think you know something about this robbery,” spoke Larry boldly.</p> - -<p>“I’ll have you arrested for that!” exclaimed the fellow. “Here, -officer, just hold this boy until to-morrow and I’ll make a charge -against him. I shouldn’t be surprised if he took the watch himself. -I’ll be back in a little while.”</p> - -<p>“Just wait a minute,” put in the man who had been robbed. “I don’t -believe this boy took my watch. You may know something of it. If you do -not you’ll not object to being searched.”</p> - -<p>“Search me? Well, I guess not!” the man cried. “I’m going to chase -after those thieves.”</p> - -<p>“Not so fast, my gay bird,” said the officer, coming up through the -crowd. “Let’s see what you have in your pocket, anyhow. I’ve seen you -before. You hang out over on the Bowery.”</p> - -<p>With a quick motion the policeman put his hand in the fellow’s outside -coat pocket.</p> - -<p>“I thought so!” exclaimed the officer.</p> - -<p>He brought to light a gold watch and chain.</p> - -<p>“That’s mine!” cried the old gentleman. “You had it all the while, you -thief!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">188</a></span> -The pickpocket, seeing he was caught, said nothing. He made a sudden -effort to dart through the crowd and get away, but the officer was too -quick for him.</p> - -<p>“No, you don’t!” exclaimed the bluecoat. He blew his whistle and -several other policemen came running up. They soon handcuffed the -thief, and after telling Larry and the old gentleman to follow to the -police station led their prisoner away.</p> - -<p>“Will you come and be a witness?” asked the man who had been robbed, of -Larry.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir, but first I have to take this copy to the <cite>Leader</cite> office.”</p> - -<p>“All right, my boy, run along. You have done me a good service to-day, -and I’ll not forget it. I prize that watch very highly. Here is my -card,” and he handed Larry a bit of pasteboard, which the boy was too -confused to look at. “Come to the police station as soon as you can,” -said the old man as he prepared to follow the officers, who were being -trailed by a big crowd of curious persons.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">189</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxiii" id="xxiii"></a>CHAPTER XXIII<br /> -<span>BAD MONEY</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Larry</span> was in such a hurry to get to the office with the copy, for -he had been delayed some time, that he did not look at the card the -elderly gentleman had given him until some time later, when he had -explained the news to Mr. Emberg. The city editor sent a reporter to -get the story from the police station.</p> - -<p>“Who was the man whose watch they took?” asked Mr. Emberg.</p> - -<p>“I forgot to look,” replied Larry, pulling out the card and reading it. -“He—was Dr. James Carrolton,” he added.</p> - -<p>“What?” cried Mr. Emberg.</p> - -<p>Larry repeated his remark.</p> - -<p>“Say, this is a big story!” exclaimed the city editor. “We must have a -display on this. Dr. Carrolton robbed the second day he is in New York.”</p> - -<p>He hurried to the telephone, to call up the police station where he -had sent the reporter, and, getting him on the wire, held a hurried -conversation with him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">190</a></span> -“You’re always stumbling on big stories,” said the city editor, coming -back to where Larry stood, wondering what it was all about.</p> - -<p>“How do you mean?”</p> - -<p>“Don’t you know who Dr. Carrolton is?”</p> - -<p>Then a light dawned on Larry.</p> - -<p>“Why—why,” the boy began, “he’s the great English surgeon on hip and -spine diseases that we’ve had so many stories about, and he came over -here to cure a millionaire’s daughter.”</p> - -<p>“Of course,” said Mr. Emberg with a laugh. “I think it will be a good -thing for you, also.”</p> - -<p>“How?”</p> - -<p>“Well, Dr. Carrolton is not only noted for his skill as a surgeon, but -he is one of the most liberal men in the world. He appreciates whatever -is done for him. The way you saved his watch from being stolen——”</p> - -<p>“I didn’t do that for pay!” exclaimed Larry.</p> - -<p>“Of course not,” resumed the city editor. “He knows you didn’t. But -that need not stop him from rewarding you. You’re a lucky boy. He may -give you a hundred dollars.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t want it,” spoke Larry suddenly.</p> - -<p>“What’s that! Let me tell you, a hundred dollars is not to be sneezed -at.”</p> - -<p>“I’d rather he’d cure my sister,” said the boy.</p> - -<p>“Your sister?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, she has a spine disease, just like some of those persons Dr. -Carrolton has cured.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">191</a></span> -“Perhaps he will cure her,” said Mr. Emberg. “Only if he does it will -be worth several thousand dollars, for he charges big fees.”</p> - -<p>“If I had the money no fee would be too big if my sister could be -cured,” said Larry, blinking to keep back the tears.</p> - -<p>“If you get a chance, speak to him about it,” said Mr. Emberg. “Great -men are apt to overlook little things like a fee.”</p> - -<p>“Shall I go to the police station now?” asked Larry, as he remembered -that the physician had told him to be present.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps you had better,” said the city editor. “Don’t be afraid to -speak up, and tell what you know about the case.”</p> - -<p>But there was no need of Larry’s testimony. The police magistrate, -after hearing the story of the officer and the physician, decided to -hold the prisoner for the grand jury. Larry, who was on hand, was told -to be at the courthouse when he was sent for. So he did not have to -give any testimony.</p> - -<p>As he was passing out of the courtroom with a number of other persons, -Larry was spied by Dr. Carrolton.</p> - -<p>“Hi, boy!” the physician exclaimed. “Don’t forget to come and see me. -That was a valuable watch you saved for me!”</p> - -<p>“I’ll come,” promised Larry, anxious to escape from the gathering -crowd.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">192</a></span> -Larry watched the famous physician enter a big automobile and dart up -the street in the care of several friends who had come to court, as -soon as they heard the news of his plight. Then the boy left the police -station and made his way home, as there was no further need of his -services at the newspaper office that afternoon.</p> - -<p>“I wonder if I could get him to doctor Lucy,” thought Larry. “If I -could, and she should be cured, I’d be the happiest boy in New York. If -I get a chance I’ll surely speak to Dr. Carrolton about it.”</p> - -<p>When Larry got home that evening he found his mother in much distress. -She had just been out to the store to make a few purchases, and, -returning, still had her hat on.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” asked Larry, as he saw by his mother’s face that -something was wrong.</p> - -<p>“The groceryman said I had tried to pass bad money on him!” exclaimed -Mrs. Dexter.</p> - -<p>“What kind?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“A half-dollar.”</p> - -<p>“Tell me about it, mother.”</p> - -<p>“I had considerable change in my pocketbook,” went on Mrs. Dexter. “I -went out to get a small steak for supper and, when I came to pay the -man where we deal, who sells meat as well as groceries, I thought I had -a bill to give him. Instead the largest piece of money I could find was -a half-dollar.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">193</a></span> -“I gave it to the clerk and he took it to the desk. In a little while -he came back and said the money was not good. I insisted that it was, -but he said he would call in a policeman to prove it. Then, rather than -have a scene, I said I would pay some other money, and I did so.”</p> - -<p>“Where is the money he said was bad?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Here,” said his mother, taking a coin from her pocketbook and giving -it to Larry. The boy looked at the half-dollar. It seemed bright and -shiny, and had a good ring to it.</p> - -<p>“That seems good,” said Larry. “Maybe the man in the store was too -particular.”</p> - -<p>“He asked the advice of several other men before he said the money was -no good,” said Mrs. Dexter. “So I’m afraid he is right.”</p> - -<p>“It’s too bad,” said Larry. “We work hard enough for our money and it -ought to be good when we get it.”</p> - -<p>“The man said there had been a number of counterfeit pieces in -circulation of late,” went on Mrs. Dexter. “That’s why they have to be -so careful.”</p> - -<p>“But this don’t look like a counterfeit,” spoke Larry. “I’ve seen -several of that kind which the reporters have, and all of them are -worse than this.”</p> - -<p>“Well, the man wouldn’t take it, so I guess it’s no good,” said the -woman.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">194</a></span> -“Where did you get it?” asked Larry. “Perhaps that might give us a -clew.”</p> - -<p>“I got it in a peculiar way,” replied Larry’s mother. “Yesterday one -of the men on the floor below us asked me for some change. He said he -had a large bill and wanted very much to get it broken. I had no spare -change and I told him so.</p> - -<p>“Then the man asked me to give him what I had, and he gave me a -ten-dollar bill as security. He asked me to go out and get that -changed, which I did. When I came back he said he had got the change in -the meanwhile from someone else in the house. So there was no necessity -for me giving him any. He paid me what money was due me, and, among the -other pieces, was this half-dollar.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll soon see if it’s good,” said Larry, taking the coin. “I’ll go -around with it to some big place, and they’ll soon let me know whether -it is counterfeit or not.”</p> - -<p>Larry took the money and went to a near-by pawnshop, the proprietor of -which he had done a favor for some time since. The man was a German -Hebrew, and was well acquainted with gold and silver.</p> - -<p>“Is that good?” asked Larry, laying the coin down on the counter.</p> - -<p>“For why you vant to know?” asked the pawnbroker with a smile. He was -always careful<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">195</a></span> what he said and nearly always asked a question before -he answered one.</p> - -<p>“Someone gave it to my mother, and the storekeeper said it was a bad -piece,” replied Larry anxiously.</p> - -<p>“Vich storekeeper?”</p> - -<p>“Mr. Smith on the corner.”</p> - -<p>“And he said it vas bad?”</p> - -<p>“That’s what he did,” replied Larry. “But I’m in a hurry, Mr. Moses. -Can you tell me what I want to know?”</p> - -<p>“For sure I can, mein frient. I only vant to know vat I’m talking -about.”</p> - -<p>He took the half-dollar, bit it between his teeth, and rang it on the -counter. Then he took from a shelf a small bottle.</p> - -<p>“I vill give it the acid test,” he said.</p> - -<p>He dropped a small quantity of liquid on the coin. The metal seemed to -boil where the acid touched it.</p> - -<p>“Well?” asked Larry, rather anxiously.</p> - -<p>“I vouldn’t give you two cents on dis half-dollar,” said the pawnbroker.</p> - -<p>“Then it’s bad?”</p> - -<p>“Like a rotten egg!” exclaimed Mr. Moses. “Don’t let your mudder take -any more of ’em, mein frient.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” replied Larry. “I’ll tell her to be more careful in the -future. I suppose we’ll have to lose this money.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">196</a></span> -“Vere did you got it?” asked Mr. Moses with a cunning look.</p> - -<p>“A man—” began Larry, and then he hesitated. He did not know what -might come from the affair, and he thought it might be better to keep -quiet about it for a while.</p> - -<p>“Yes—yes!” exclaimed Mr. Moses eagerly.</p> - -<p>“A man gave it to her,” replied Larry, and then he went out of the -pawnshop quickly to prevent the proprietor asking any more questions.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">197</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxiv" id="xxiv"></a>CHAPTER XXIV<br /> -<span>A QUEER CAPTURE</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Many</span> thoughts occupied Larry’s mind. For some time he had been -suspicious of the men on the floor below him. That they were up to no -good seemed evident, yet he felt that it was wrong to say, without more -proof, that they were up to something bad. They were seldom seen in the -daytime, and, though they moved about rather lively at night, Larry -could see nothing through the crack that he could say was criminal, or -that would bring the men under the law.</p> - -<p>Now, however, that the pawnbroker had told him the money one of the men -had given Mrs. Dexter was bad, Larry began to have new suspicions.</p> - -<p>They were hardly definite enough to warrant his speaking to anyone -concerning them, so he resolved to keep a closer watch.</p> - -<p>“Maybe they have friends who make counterfeit money,” thought Larry, -“and they are trying to dispose of it for them. Maybe—” then he -stopped in his train of thought suddenly.</p> - -<p>“I’ll bet they’re the counterfeiters themselves!”<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">198</a></span> he exclaimed. -“That’s what that strange light meant. That’s what they were doing the -night I watched them. They melt the metal up and pour it into moulds. -Then they try to pass it off for good coins.”</p> - -<p>Larry was so excited by his idea that he walked faster than usual, and, -the first thing he knew, he was nearly two blocks past his house. He -retraced his steps, and found his mother awaiting his return.</p> - -<p>“Well?” asked Mrs. Dexter, “is the money bad?”</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid so,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>“Then we’ll have to lose it,” said Mrs. Dexter. “I don’t want to ask -the man to take it back. He might say I got it somewhere else.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right, mother,” spoke Larry. “Say nothing about it to the man. -If he offers you any more money, or asks for change, don’t take any or -give any.”</p> - -<p>“Why, Larry? What’s the matter?”</p> - -<p>“I can’t say yet,” replied the boy. “I’ve had my suspicions for some -time, but I want to be sure. I’ll speak to Mr. Newton about it.”</p> - -<p>That night Larry kept a close watch, through the crack in the floor, -on the men below, but their place remained in darkness. None of them -seemed to be at home, and Larry was wishing there was some way of -getting into their apartments so he could see what they were making.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">199</a></span> -“Never mind, my chance may come yet,” the boy thought, as he went to -bed, to dream of being captured by a band of counterfeiters who were -about to melt him into a big half-dollar to get rid of him, when he -awoke with a start.</p> - -<p>The sun was shining in his eyes through his window and it was time to -get up and go to work. He found plenty of things to do at the office -that day, and so had no chance to speak to Mr. Newton about the money -matter. He was somewhat surprised to read an item in the paper bearing -on the very subject that was uppermost in his mind.</p> - -<p>There was an account of an investigation that the United States -authorities had started, to discover the source whence a number of bad -coins seemed to be circulating about New York.</p> - -<p>A number of detectives had been detailed on the work of running the -counterfeiters to earth, the article said, and, in the meanwhile, the -public was cautioned to be careful what money was accepted in change. -Bad half-dollars were especially numerous, it was stated.</p> - -<p>Larry felt sure that the men, in the room below his, were the -counterfeiters. He was confirmed in this belief that same day when he -had gone on an errand for Mr. Emberg to police headquarters.</p> - -<p>As he was standing in the main room, waiting for Mr. Newton, to whom -he had been sent with a note, he saw two detectives, whom he knew by -sight, talking earnestly together in a corner.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">200</a></span> -Larry did not want to listen to a private conversation, but he could -not help overhearing what the men were saying. He caught the words, -“counterfeiters,” “bad half-dollars,” and then the men mentioned the -number of the house and the street where Larry lived.</p> - -<p>“They’re after the men below our apartment!” thought Larry. “Those men -are counterfeiters, just as I suspected. This will make a fine story -for the paper. I hope it will be a beat!”</p> - -<p>He saw that the detectives were two who were in the habit of figuring -rather prominently in the police reports of the papers. Larry -recollected that Mr. Newton had once said that both the officers were -not as good as some others who did not get half the publicity they -deserved.</p> - -<p>“And they’re the same ones that treated Mr. Newton so mean on that -robbery story,” reflected Larry, referring to the officers in -conversation. “They wouldn’t give him the story. I wish they were not -going to capture the counterfeiters. It’s too good a job for them. They -don’t deserve it.”</p> - -<p>He hardly knew how to act. He knew he must not interfere with the -course of the law, yet he would have been glad to see some other -detectives, who were more friendly to the newspaper men than the two -he heard conversing were, make the capture. Larry realized that to -catch the counterfeiters would mean quite a feather in the caps of the -officers.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">201</a></span> -That night Larry kept a closer watch than usual. He could not see -enough to enable him to tell exactly what the men were doing, but he -noticed the golden glow flood the apartment, and he knew the men were -melting something, for he could hear them talking about whether or not -it was hot enough.</p> - -<p>The number of counterfeit coins continued to increase, and the -government inspectors redoubled their efforts to land the gang they -were convinced was working in New York.</p> - -<p>One afternoon, as he was coming from the office, Larry was met in the -hall, just outside the apartment of the men under suspicion, by one of -them. The man regarded Larry for a few seconds and then said:</p> - -<p>“Would you mind doing me a favor?”</p> - -<p>“What is it?” asked Larry, thinking the man might want some more money -changed. In such an event the lad was prepared to refuse. He did not -propose to have bad coins passed on him.</p> - -<p>“Will you come in here and give me your opinion?” asked the man, -holding the door open.</p> - -<p>For a few seconds Larry hesitated. He thought the man might be one of -the counterfeiters who had discovered he was being watched and who had -determined to capture the spy. In such an event Larry felt he would be -safer on the outside.</p> - -<p>Yet he had a boy’s curiosity to see what was in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">202</a></span> the room about which -the men were so secretive. If he could get a look he felt it might help -him to know what to do.</p> - -<p>The man noticed Larry’s hesitation.</p> - -<p>“You needn’t be afraid,” the stranger remarked. “I know some of the -neighbors regard us a little suspiciously, but our work is such that it -has to be done where no one can see us.”</p> - -<p>“What do you want me to do?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Merely give us your opinion,” spoke the man. “We have an article we -want you to look at and tell us if you think it is good, and will be -generally acceptable.”</p> - -<p>Larry was just going to remark that he was not a very good judge of -counterfeit money, when he happened to think that would not be a wise -remark to make. He saw that the man held the door wide open. There did -not seem to be any other persons in the apartment. Larry resolved to -risk going in. He thought if the men attempted to harm him he could -call loudly enough to bring help.</p> - -<p>“We want to get the idea of a real American boy on the quality of the -work we have done,” the man went on. “Will you please come in?”</p> - -<p>Then Larry resolved to enter. He nerved himself for an ordeal as he -crossed the threshold.</p> - -<p>“This way,” remarked the man, preceding him, and, going into an inner -room, Larry saw before him a pile of bright shining objects.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">203</a></span> -He gave a sudden start. The man noticed it and said quickly:</p> - -<p>“Now don’t say a word about it. We don’t want anyone to know we are -doing this. What do you think of them?”</p> - -<p>Larry was much surprised at what he saw. He talked for some time with -the man, and, when he emerged from the apartment, the boy’s face bore a -queer look.</p> - -<p>“I must tell Mr. Newton about this,” he said. “He will be glad to know -of it, and then it will be a chance to do those detectives a turn.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Newton was much excited over what Larry told him next day.</p> - -<p>“Are you sure Detectives Jones and Douglass are on the case?” he asked.</p> - -<p>Larry told what he had overheard at police headquarters.</p> - -<p>“Then I guess they are,” remarked the reporter. “Well, this will be -quite a surprise for them. It will kill two birds with one stone.”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“We’ll get a story for the paper out of it and fool the officers -besides.”</p> - -<p>“It will be a queer story,” said Larry, and Mr. Newton nodded.</p> - -<p>For several days after that, the men in the rooms below the Dexter -apartment were busily engaged. Larry no longer kept watch of them. -Instead he kept a careful lookout on persons who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">204</a></span> loitered about in the -street near the house. One evening at dusk he saw two rather poorly -dressed men who walked up and down several times, and then ventured -into the hallway of the house.</p> - -<p>“I guess they are the detectives in disguise,” thought Larry. “It is -almost time to spring the trap.”</p> - -<p>In accordance with an arrangement he had made he telephoned to Mr. -Newton.</p> - -<p>“So you think it’s time, eh?” asked the reporter. “I’ll come right -over.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Newton joined Larry half an hour later, and the pair went to the -boy’s room, above where the strange men had been working for some time.</p> - -<p>“Are they downstairs?” whispered Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Larry, “and the detectives are hidden in a room across the -hall. I guess they’ll break in any minute now. We can hear them through -the crack. I have made it bigger so we can see well.”</p> - -<p>Larry and the reporter knelt down and applied their eyes to the hole in -the floor. They could observe the men moving about, and could see the -golden glow that filled the apartment.</p> - -<p>Suddenly, as they watched, they heard the sound of crashing wood.</p> - -<p>“They are breaking in the door!” exclaimed Larry. “The detectives are -after them!”</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">205</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxv" id="xxv"></a>CHAPTER XXV<br /> -<span>A BIG ROBBERY</span></h2> - - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Now</span> for some fun!” exclaimed Mr. Newton. “Those detectives will get -the biggest surprise of their lives.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, and it will give you a chance to get back at them for the way -they treated you,” remarked Larry.</p> - -<p>“There goes the door!” cried the reporter, as a louder crash betokened -that the portal had given way. “This will bring everyone in the house -out to see what is going on.”</p> - -<p>Following the crash there came a series of shrill cries from the -apartment below.</p> - -<p>“Come on down!” called Mr. Newton to Larry. “We can see better. Besides -I want Jones and Douglass to notice that I’m on the job when they get -fooled.”</p> - -<p>Larry and the reporter raced downstairs. They saw a number of other -tenants in the building making their way toward the scene of the -disturbance, and the stairway was well crowded.</p> - -<p>“Here we go!” cried Mr. Newton as he passed through the burst-in door. -“Come on, Larry!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">206</a></span> -A strange sight met the gaze of the reporter. On the floor were two of -the men who had been in the habit of working in the rooms. On top of -each of them sat a detective; Jones on one and Douglass on the other. -The men were trying to get up, but the detectives prevented them by -holding their heads close to the floor.</p> - -<p>In the corner was the third man, and in front of him was a third -detective, who had a short club in his hand. Every now and again the -detective would jab the man in the stomach with the billy, causing the -man to double up like a jumping-jack.</p> - -<p>“Keep still!” cried the detective.</p> - -<p>“How can I when you keep tickling me with that club!” exclaimed the man.</p> - -<p>“I don’t care how you do it, only keep still!” the officer repeated, -giving the man another jab. “We’ll show you counterfeiters how to -behave!”</p> - -<p>“Counterfeiters?” the man repeated, apparently in great astonishment.</p> - -<p>“Yes, counterfeiters. You can’t fool us any longer. We’ve got you dead -to rights. We’ll seize your whole plant, and confiscate all the bad -half-dollars you’ve been making. We’ve been watching you for some time. -We know how you melt the metal up and then pour it into moulds!”</p> - -<p>“Counterfeiters! You are crazy!” cried the man. “That boy there,” -pointing to Larry, whom<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">207</a></span> he just then saw, “he knows better than that. -He knows what we make!”</p> - -<p>“I guess you’ve made a mistake this time,” remarked Mr. Newton, coming -forward. “How are you, Jones, and you too, Douglass?”</p> - -<p>“Um!” grunted the detectives, still sitting on their prisoners. “I -guess we know a counterfeiting plant when we see one. You can’t fool -us!”</p> - -<p>“Lift up that sheet,” said the man in the corner, nodding to Larry to -raise a cloth that covered a long table. The boy did so.</p> - -<p>“That’s what we’ve been making, out of melted lead!” the man in -the corner went on, dodging another jab from the detective’s club. -“They’re only toy soldiers for the holiday trade. We make them of old -lead which we melt up, and then we color them. We didn’t want the -other manufacturers to know about it. It’s getting near Christmas -and we’re making up an extra lot to sell on the streets. We’re not -counterfeiters. You’ve made a mistake. I asked Larry to come in the -rooms the other day to get his opinion on whether or not they were -good-looking soldiers, and he said they were fine ones; didn’t you, -Larry?” asked the man.</p> - -<p>Larry nodded in assent. The detectives looked rather foolish. Someone -in the crowd, that had gathered outside the door, began to laugh. Soon -there were several titters.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">208</a></span> -“Would you mind letting me up now?” asked the man on whom Detective -Jones was sitting.</p> - -<p>“Me too,” said the other prostrate one.</p> - -<p>“Get up!” growled the detectives, much disgusted at the outcome of the -affair.</p> - -<p>They had expected to discover a counterfeiting plant and had only -succeeded in unearthing an improvised toy shop. Larry’s suspicions had -been dispelled as soon as he entered the place, a few days previous, -but he and Mr. Newton had decided to say nothing of this, as they -wished to play a trick on the officers who had gone out of their way -once to treat the reporter in rather a shabby fashion.</p> - -<p>“This will make a good story,” remarked Mr. Newton so the detectives -would hear.</p> - -<p>“You’re not going to print this, are you?” asked the officers, looking -more foolish than ever.</p> - -<p>“Of course,” replied the reporter. “It isn’t often that you fellows -make mistakes, but when you do it’s only fair to tell of them. I’ll -make a good story out of it.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll get even with you if you do,” growled Jones. “We’ll fix you for -this.”</p> - -<p>“I’m only paying you for what you did to me some time ago,” said Mr. -Newton, as the detectives released their prisoners. The soldier-makers -brushed the dirt from their clothes as the detectives left.</p> - -<p>“I couldn’t imagine what was up,” said one of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">209</a></span> the toy-men. “The -first I knew those detectives burst the door in. I thought perhaps -they were thieves, but when they threw us down and sat on us, I knew -there must be something strange the matter. The idea to take us for -counterfeiters!”</p> - -<p>“I thought you were myself,” said Larry, “especially when you gave my -mother that bad fifty-cent piece.”</p> - -<p>“That’s so, I nearly forgot about that,” one of the men exclaimed. -“That was an old pocket-piece of mine. I gave it to her by mistake. I -will give her a good one for it right away.”</p> - -<p>“Here it is,” Larry remarked, producing the bad coin, and receiving a -good one.</p> - -<p>“Now that the excitement is over I guess we can go on making lead -soldiers,” remarked the head workman, as he propped up the broken door -and started the furnace.</p> - -<p>“Yes, and we must get to work on the story,” the reporter said.</p> - -<p>“I wonder if the other papers will have it in the morning,” came from -Larry.</p> - -<p>“Not much danger,” replied Mr. Newton. “Jones and Douglass will keep -very quiet about it, since they were fooled.”</p> - -<p>None of the morning sheets had an account of the affair, and that -afternoon the <cite>Leader</cite> came out with a big display story, telling how -the detectives, hoping for much credit from their performance, had -planned to raid a counterfeiters’<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">210</a></span> den. Mr. Newton set forth in lively -sentences how the officers had kept watch, and had, with a great show -of authority, burst into the place, only to find that it was merely a -temporary toy shop.</p> - -<p>The story made a hit, and Mr. Emberg was warm in his praise of Mr. -Newton and Larry as well. He said they had conducted the case well.</p> - -<p>“You are doing good work, Larry,” said the city editor. “Keep it up!”</p> - -<p>Whereat Larry blushed like a girl, though he felt ashamed of it. -However, he need not have been, for not a reporter on the paper, from -the oldest down, but who would have liked to have had such a beat to -his credit.</p> - -<p>Larry went home to supper, and then prepared to attend night school. -His mind was in such a whirl over the events of the day that he did -what seldom happened to him; he missed in his lessons. The teacher, who -had taken quite a notion to Larry, was much surprised, but Larry did -not think it wise to tell what made him so careless. He promised to do -better the next night.</p> - -<p>When Larry reached the <cite>Leader</cite> office a few mornings later he found -considerable confusion evident. A number of reporters were talking -in one corner, and Mr. Newton was conversing with someone over the -telephone in the enclosed booth.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” asked Larry of Bud.</p> - -<p>“Big robbery in some millionaire’s house,” replied Bud. “They just -discovered it. None of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">211</a></span> the morning papers have it. Lot of gold, -silver, and diamonds taken.”</p> - -<p>“That’ll be a good story,” commented Larry.</p> - -<p>A few minutes later Mr. Emberg came in. In a little while Mr. Newton -had acquainted the city editor with the robbery, a “tip” concerning -which had been received from police headquarters a short time before.</p> - -<p>“It’s Mr. Reynolds’s house,” said Mr. Newton. “The family slept late. -Police think chloroform was used. They found the place ransacked, a -small safe forced, and about twenty-five thousand dollars’ worth of -stuff taken, including the famous Reynolds diamonds.”</p> - -<p>“You’d better jump out on the story,” said the city editor to Mr. -Newton. “Do you want any help?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know. I guess I can handle it alone. But I might take Larry -along,” he added in a lower tone. “There may be something he can do.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” responded Mr. Emberg. “Get the story in early, and -interview the people. Might get a picture of Mrs. Reynolds, and I’ll -send a photographer to take a snap of the house. Hurry up, now.”</p> - -<p>“Come along, Larry,” said Mr. Newton. “We’ll see if we can solve this -mystery and recover the diamonds.”</p> - -<p>The two started off, followed by the rather<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">212</a></span> envious eyes of some of -the other reporters. It was considered an honor to be assigned to cover -a big story, though professional etiquette forbade any reporter from -saying anything.</p> - -<p>At the Reynolds house they found a number of policemen on guard, to -keep away the curious persons that had gathered as soon as the robbery -became known in the neighborhood. One of the bluecoats attempted to bar -the progress of Larry and Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“From the <cite>Leader</cite>,” announced the reporter, as he nodded to another -policeman whom he knew.</p> - -<p>“It’s all right, Jim,” said the latter to the officer who had stopped -Mr. Newton, whereat the reporter and Larry were allowed to enter the -house. Inside they found a number of “plain clothes men,” as detectives -are sometimes called, from the fact that they wear no uniform.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Patsy!” called Mr. Newton familiarly to a short, stout, -bald-headed detective, “what sort of a job have you been letting ’em -pull off on you now.”</p> - -<p>“Looks like a second-story one,” replied the detective.</p> - -<p>“No more a second-story one than you are,” retorted another detective -who stood near, making some notes in a book. “It’s an inside job.”</p> - -<p>“Anyhow, the stuff’s gone I s’pose,” remarked Mr. Newton with a smile.</p> - -<p>“Sure thing,” replied the fat man.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">213</a></span> -“What’s a second-story job?” asked Larry of his friend.</p> - -<p>“The police call it that when the thief climbs up on the porch, or, in -some way, enters the second-story windows.”</p> - -<p>“And what’s an inside one?”</p> - -<p>“That’s where some of the servants in the house either take the -valuables or help the thieves by letting them in, or by leaving a -window conveniently open. But come on, we’ll take a look for ourselves. -It’s all right, Patsy, I s’pose,” went on Mr. Newton, speaking to the -short detective.</p> - -<p>“Sure, go ahead, investigate as much as you like,” was the answer.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">214</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxvi" id="xxvi"></a>CHAPTER XXVI<br /> -<span>THE MEN IN THE LOT</span></h2> - - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Come</span> ahead, Larry,” said Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“Will the people in the house let us?” asked the boy, to whom the idea -of anyone going through a private residence in this free and easy -fashion seemed strange.</p> - -<p>“I guess they won’t mind,” replied the reporter. “You see we newspaper -men have to go ahead and do things. If we waited every time for someone -to give us permission we’d never get any stories.”</p> - -<p>“But maybe they’ll stop us,” objected Larry.</p> - -<p>“You leave that to me,” spoke Mr. Newton. “I’ll make it all right if -anyone objects.”</p> - -<p>With Larry following, he started upstairs, where, as one of the -detectives had informed him, the thieves had made an entrance. As they -were going up they were met by a well-dressed man.</p> - -<p>“Here! Where are you going?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“I’m a reporter from the <cite>Leader</cite>,” said Mr. Newton. “I want to get a -correct account of this robbery.”</p> - -<p>“We don’t want any reporters in here,” said the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">215</a></span> man sharply. “We don’t -want this thing in the papers at all. You have no right in here. I -order you out!”</p> - -<p>Larry was beginning to get frightened. He had yet to see how a seasoned -reporter meets a rebuff of this kind.</p> - -<p>“I’m very sorry,” began Mr. Newton in a smooth tone. “I’m sure the -<cite>Leader</cite> doesn’t want to annoy anyone. We are just as sorry as you are -about this robbery, but we are only doing you a service.”</p> - -<p>“How doing us a service?” replied the man. “If you call blazing a lot -of untruths about the matter all over, why I suppose it is.”</p> - -<p>“Pardon me,” interposed Mr. Newton, “but the <cite>Leader</cite> is not a yellow -journal. It does not publish fakes. It always tries to get at the -truth. Sometimes, as in a case of this sort, where we are refused -information, we have to get it from the next best source. Sometimes, I -admit, we may be given the wrong information.</p> - -<p>“But I’ll tell you how we can help you. You want to recover the -jewelry, of course?”</p> - -<p>“Seeing that we are going to offer a reward for it you might guess so,” -replied the man sarcastically.</p> - -<p>“So much the better,” resumed Mr. Newton. “Now if we publish an account -of the robbery in the paper, and give a description of the jewelry, it -will aid you in recovering it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">216</a></span> -“I don’t see how.”</p> - -<p>“Because the <cite>Leader</cite> is read by a large number of persons. They will -see an account of this; they will look over the list of jewelry stolen. -Among others who will see it are pawnbrokers, to whom the thieves, it -is most likely, will offer the stuff for sale.”</p> - -<p>“Well?”</p> - -<p>“No one who reads an account of the crime and a description of the -jewelry will be willing to lend any money on it. They will be on the -lookout, and as soon as any of the stuff is offered them they will -notify the police. Then the officers will come, arrest the men, and -your jewelry will be recovered.”</p> - -<p>“Of course, I didn’t think of that,” said the man. “In that case -perhaps we might give you an account of the affair.”</p> - -<p>“I think it would be best to,” remarked Mr. Newton, with a wink at -Larry.</p> - -<p>“You may follow me,” said the man who had at first objected to the -reporter getting any information. “I’ll show you where the thieves got -in, and then I’ll give you a list of the things that are missing.”</p> - -<p>Larry and Mr. Newton followed the man’s lead. He took them through a -long hall and to the rear of the house. He stopped at a small window -over a porch and said:</p> - -<p>“There’s where they got in. At least so the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">217</a></span> police think. There are -marks on the window sill.”</p> - -<p>“So there are,” observed Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“The thieves evidently climbed up the porch pillars,” said the man.</p> - -<p>“I hardly think so,” returned Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“But the police say so,” spoke the man.</p> - -<p>“They’re not always right,” responded the reporter. “I would say they -climbed that tree and, from the low branch dropped on the roof. Then -they opened the window. You can see where the limb has been freshly -broken and where leaves and twigs from the branch have fallen on the -roof.”</p> - -<p>“That’s so, I’d never have noticed that,” said the man. “You ought to -be a detective.”</p> - -<p>“I’d rather be a reporter,” said Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“Well, at any rate, they got in,” went on Mr. Robertson, as he said -his name was. “Then they proceeded to help themselves and they got -considerable. Some of the officers think the thieves had help from the -servants or else they would not have gotten in so easily.”</p> - -<p>“This was not an inside job,” said Mr. Newton thoughtfully.</p> - -<p>“What makes you think it wasn’t?”</p> - -<p>“Because if it was the thieves would not go to all the trouble of -climbing a tree to drop on a roof, and then force a window. They would -have it arranged so they could get in easily. This<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">218</a></span> was an outside job, -and the servants knew nothing of it.”</p> - -<p>“I’m glad to hear you say so,” said Mr. Robertson. “I would not like to -think we have dishonest servants. Now, if you will come with me I will -give you a list of what is missing.”</p> - -<p>With a much different manner from that with which he had greeted them -Mr. Robertson led the way to a small study. There he gave Mr. Newton a -list of all the stolen articles and their value.</p> - -<p>“We think the men, or man, must have chloroformed us,” Mr. Robertson -added.</p> - -<p>“Why so?”</p> - -<p>“Because we all slept so late this morning. We all woke up drowsy and -stupid, as if some drug had been used.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps there was,” said Mr. Newton. “It has been done before.”</p> - -<p>“Now don’t write up too much,” was Mr. Robertson’s parting injunction.</p> - -<p>“No more than is necessary,” replied the reporter. “We’ll have a true -account and a description of the missing jewels.”</p> - -<p>Then, having secured all the information he wanted, Mr. Newton, -beckoning Larry to follow him, went out of the house.</p> - -<p>“I wish you’d go to police headquarters and get a list of the jewelry -as the police have it,” said Mr. Newton to Larry. “I want to compare it -with the one Mr. Robertson gave me.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">219</a></span> -“Will they give it to me?” asked the boy.</p> - -<p>“Just tell them I sent you and it will be all right,” spoke Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>Larry accomplished his errand successfully, and reported back to the -office of the Leader, where Mr. Newton had said he would meet him. -Larry’s list was somewhat different from that furnished by the family, -as the people had not told the police all of their loss.</p> - -<p>Mr. Newton made a good story of the big robbery. He gave a picturesque -account of how the family awoke, to find themselves in a stupor, and -how, finally, they were roused up and discovered the big robbery.</p> - -<p>Then there was a picture of the robbed house, and several views of the -celebrated Reynolds diamonds, as well as cuts of the more prominent -members of the family. Altogether it made a stirring story, and Larry -wished he could have taken a more active part than he did. However, he -consoled himself with the reflection that, some day, he might be a real -reporter.</p> - -<p>No other paper had as good an account as did the <cite>Leader</cite>, which -statement Mr. Emberg made after the first edition came out.</p> - -<p>“You and Larry deserve credit,” said the city editor to Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“I didn’t do much,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“You helped all right,” put in Mr. Newton. “You did all right.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">220</a></span> -The Reynolds story was the biggest one of the day and there was enough -news in it to carry it on the front page of most of the papers for two -succeeding days. There seemed to be no clew to the thieves, though all -the detectives were working on the case.</p> - -<p>One thing was certain, the jewels, which formed the largest part of the -booty, were gone. They were more prized than anything else that was -taken, according to the family, and a reward of one thousand dollars -was offered for their return.</p> - -<p>A most careful supervision of all the pawnshops in New York and the -immediate vicinity showed that the diamonds and other precious stones -had not been pledged.</p> - -<p>“The thieves are hiding them until this trouble blows over,” said Mr. -Newton.</p> - -<p>“Whereabouts do you suppose they have put them?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know. If I did I’d go there and get the stuff and claim the -reward,” answered the reporter.</p> - -<p>For several days little was talked of but the robbery. Then other, -newer, and more important news of various kinds came in, and the theft -was, for the time being, forgotten.</p> - -<p>One night, when Larry was coming from evening school, he took a -short cut. It was through a broad field on which had stood a large -warehouse,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">221</a></span> but which had been burned, leaving a sort of hole in the -ground, filled with rubbish.</p> - -<p>As Larry was picking his way through this, for it was a dark and rainy -night, he thought he saw, off to the left, a moving light.</p> - -<p>“I wonder what that can be,” he thought.</p> - -<p>He looked at the tiny flame, and saw that it had now ceased its motion.</p> - -<p>“Guess I’d better take a look,” he said. “You never can tell what’s -going to happen.”</p> - -<p>He walked cautiously toward the glow. As he drew nearer Larry saw that -there were several men grouped about a lantern that stood on the ground.</p> - -<p>“About here’ll do,” one man said in a low tone.</p> - -<p>“Anywhere so’s we can find it again,” joined in another voice.</p> - -<p>Then Larry could hear the sound of picks and shovels striking the -ground.</p> - -<p>“I wonder what’s up?” he asked himself.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">222</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxvii" id="xxvii"></a>CHAPTER XXVII<br /> -<span>LARRY IS REWARDED</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Walking</span> softly Larry approached closer to where the men were at work. -He could not see what they were doing, except that they were making -a hole in the ground. One man stood a little distance back from the -others and held what seemed to be a small box in his arms.</p> - -<p>“Maybe there’s been a murder committed and they’re burying the corpse,” -thought Larry. Then he laughed at his thought. The box the man had -would hardly hold a dead cat.</p> - -<p>The men were working fast now, and seemed anxious to get through.</p> - -<p>“That’s deep enough,” said one. “Get a flat stone to put on top.”</p> - -<p>In his curiosity Larry forgot the caution he had hitherto used. His -foot touched a piece of wood, dislodged it, and rattled it against a -stone. It made quite a noise.</p> - -<p>“What’s that?” exclaimed the man with the box.</p> - -<p>“Someone’s coming,” replied the one with the pick.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">223</a></span> -“I’ll see what it is,” the third man said, as he started toward Larry. -But the boy did not wait to note what would happen when the man got -to him. He sped off softly through the darkness, and when he saw a -part of a wall just ahead of him he dropped down behind it. The man -passed him on the run, but did not think of looking behind the masonry. -After looking about him, as well as he could in the darkness, the man -returned.</p> - -<p>“What was it?” asked his companions.</p> - -<p>“A cat or a dog, I guess,” was the reply. “Nobody after us, anyhow. Go -ahead and bury the stuff or, first thing we know, someone will spot us, -and that would never do.”</p> - -<p>“They evidently don’t want whatever they are doing known,” thought -Larry in his hiding place.</p> - -<p>The men worked a little while longer, and then the boy could hear them -throwing back the dirt and packing it down. Soon they finished and -then, blowing out the light, they departed. Waiting a few minutes to be -sure they were out of the way Larry crept cautiously over to where he -judged the men had been digging.</p> - -<p>But, in the darkness he could not find the place. It would have done -him little good if he had, he thought, as he had nothing with which to -throw out the dirt again.</p> - -<p>He resolved, however, to come back the first chance he had next day, -and see if there was anything mysterious in the actions of the three -men.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">224</a></span> In order to better locate the spot Larry took his handkerchief -and weighted it down on the ground by a stone.</p> - -<p>“This is somewhere near the place,” the boy thought. “I guess I can -easily find it in the daytime.”</p> - -<p>Then he went home. His mother and the others in the family had gone to -bed, and Larry was glad of it, for he did not want to be questioned as -to why he was so late coming from night school.</p> - -<p>Larry hardly slept for wondering what the men had buried. He thought -they might be hiding the evidences of some crime, and then again he -reasoned that perhaps, after all, it might turn out to be nothing more -than a pet dog or bird that had died.</p> - -<p>“I’ll find out though,” Larry thought. “Don’t I wish it was a big -treasure like gold or diamonds! But it’s foolish to think such things -as that.”</p> - -<p>Larry thought the next day would never come to an end. Though he was -very busy at his duties in the <cite>Leader</cite> office he kept watching the -clock, for he had determined upon a plan of action.</p> - -<p>He made up his mind he would go home as usual to supper, and prepare -to go to his night class. On his way there he would purchase a small -shovel at a nearby hardware store. This<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">225</a></span> he could conceal under his -coat until he got to the lot, and he could then hide it under the -fence. He also got a small lantern that burned a candle, and this he -intended hiding with the shovel.</p> - -<p>Once these two important things were hidden away Larry meant to walk -across the lot just at dusk, before going to school, and see if he -could not locate the place where the men had dug. If he could he would -mark the spot more accurately with his handkerchief and then, coming -home from his class, he could dig in the darkness and no one would be -likely to observe him, as the spot was lonesome and people seldom went -there except in daylight.</p> - -<p>Larry’s plan worked out well. He got the shovel and lantern and hid -them under a fallen wall, in a convenient place. Then he strolled -across the big field, just at nightfall, when it was difficult to -distinguish forms fifty feet away. There was no moon and the sky was -cloudy.</p> - -<p>Larry pretended to be idly walking across the lot. Occasionally he -would stoop, pick up a stone and cast it into the air, as boys have a -habit of doing. He thought if anyone noticed him, they would not attach -any importance to his presence.</p> - -<p>He found his handkerchief where he had left it, but it was not near any -place where the earth seemed to have been recently dug up.</p> - -<p>“I guess I must be a little off the track,” the boy thought. “Let’s -see. If I can find the wall I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">226</a></span> hid behind, I think I can locate the -place where the men were.”</p> - -<p>After looking about a little Larry found the fallen wall. He recalled -that, as he had stooped down behind it he had seen, over the top, the -spire of a church. And he recalled that the three men were in a direct -line between the stone and the church steeple.</p> - -<p>“Then if I walk out in a straight line from the stone, toward the -church, I ought to come across the place,” said Larry to himself.</p> - -<p>Taking an observation from behind the stone he located the church -spire. Then, walking as straight as possible, he passed out from the -fallen wall.</p> - -<p>“It ought to be about here,” he said. As he spoke his foot sank down -into a soft spot in the ground. Larry lighted the candle and flashed -his lantern on the place.</p> - -<p>“I’ll <a name="bet" id="bet"></a><ins title="Original has 'bet’s'">bet</ins> -this is it,” he remarked. “Anyway, I’ll mark it.”</p> - -<p>He had prepared a short stake with a piece of white cloth on it as a -guide, and this he stuck in the earth. Then he hurried from the lot to -go to school.</p> - -<div class="figcenter width400"> -<img src="images/p226.jpg" width="400" height="636" alt="" /> -<div class="caption clear-both">AT THE BOTTOM HE COULD SEE, IN THE DIM LIGHT OF THE -LANTERN, A SMALL BLACK BOX</div> -<div class="float-left"><cite>From Office Boy to Reporter</cite></div> -<div class="float-right"><a href="#from">Page 228</a></div> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">227</a></span></p> -<p>It would have been better for Larry’s lessons if he had not been -thinking so much of what was buried in the lot. He did not pay proper -attention to what was going on in the class. When he answered questions -with statements such as that Columbus was President of the United -States, that Balboa discovered the Hudson River and that New York was -the capital of Indian Territory, the teacher remarked:</p> - -<p>“Well, Larry, I guess you are still dreaming. You had better wake up.”</p> - -<p>The class laughed and Larry with an effort took his mind from what he -was about to do. Then he made a better record in his studies for that -evening.</p> - -<p>When school was dismissed Larry did not stop, as he sometimes was in -the habit of doing, to chat with his acquaintances. He hurried off to -the lot. As he approached it he took a careful observation. There was -no one in the big field, which seemed dark, gloomy, and lonesome to the -boy.</p> - -<p>He had half a mind to give the whole thing up. He was afraid he would -discover nothing and would have his trouble for his pains. Then, too, -he thought, if there should be something buried there, and the men came -along and discovered him, they might harm him.</p> - -<p>“Well, there’s nothing like trying,” he reasoned.</p> - -<p>Then he crawled under the fence, got his spade and lantern, and walked -to where he had placed the marking stake. It had not been disturbed. -Larry lighted the candle in the lantern, and, placing it where it would -throw an illumination on the spot to be dug up, and would not be likely -to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">228</a></span> be seen from the street, the boy stuck the spade into the ground.</p> - -<p>It was not easy digging, and before he had gone down two feet his back -began to ache. The men had packed the lower layers of dirt in quite -hard, and there were many small stones encountered.</p> - -<p>With a strong shove from his foot Larry sent the spade down quite a -distance. The sharp edge struck something unyielding and stopped. -Pushing with all his force, Larry could not get it beyond the -obstruction.</p> - -<p>“Maybe that’s the stone they put on top of whatever they buried,” the -boy thought. “I must be getting close now.”</p> - -<p>He enlarged the hole, so as to get his spade under the edge of the -obstruction. When he had done this he placed a corner of his shovel -under the edge of the stone, and pried upward with all his strength.</p> - -<p>Slowly the flat stone began to move. It pried the dirt up with it, and -the boy was almost trembling in his eagerness. Then, with a suddenness -that sent him sprawling on his back, the stone flew out of the hole, -and a shower of dirt fell on Larry.</p> - -<p><a name="from" id="from"></a>He scrambled to his feet and looked into the hole. At the bottom he -could see, in the dim light of the lantern, a small black box. He -grabbed it up, and, only stopping to blow out the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">229</a></span> candle, he ran at -top speed, leaving the lantern and spade behind him. He wanted to get -home as quickly as possible, and cast aside everything that could -hinder him.</p> - -<p>He never remembered how he passed through the various streets leading -to the apartment. He seemed to be treading on air. Now and then a -sickening dread would come to him that, perhaps after all, the box -contained nothing of value.</p> - -<p>“Is that you, Larry?” his mother asked from her bedroom as he entered.</p> - -<p>“Yes, mother,” he replied, in so strange a voice that Mrs. Dexter came -out in a hurry to see what had happened. When she saw Larry, covered -with dirt, his face pale, and holding in his arms the black box, she -exclaimed:</p> - -<p>“Are you hurt, Larry?”</p> - -<p>“No,” he answered, much excited. “But I want to find out what’s in this -box.”</p> - -<p>It was tied with several stout cords, which Larry cut with his knife. -Then he wrenched off the cover. As he did so he almost leaped back in -astonishment.</p> - -<p>There, in the box, was a blazing pile of jewels. Diamonds there were, -nearly a score, some loose, some set in rings, and, most beautiful, -a large necklace of the sparkling stones. Then there were rubies, -sapphires, and other precious jewels.</p> - -<p>“Larry! Where in the world did you get them?” gasped his mother.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">230</a></span> -“I found them!” cried Larry, hardly able to speak, so great was his -emotion. “Some men buried them in a lot and I dug them up!”</p> - -<p>“But whose are they?”</p> - -<p>“I’m not sure,” replied the boy, “but I think they are part of the -jewels stolen from Mr. Reynolds’s house. If they are I’ll get a reward -of one thousand dollars!”</p> - -<p>“Oh, Larry!”</p> - -<p>By this time Lucy, who had been awakened from her sleep, had slipped on -a dressing gown and entered the room.</p> - -<p>“Those are the Reynolds diamonds!” she exclaimed. “That necklace is -just like the one the paper had a picture of.” She caught up the string -of jewels that sparkled like fire in the lamplight.</p> - -<p>“What are you going to do with them?” asked Mrs. Dexter.</p> - -<p>“I think I’ll let Mr. Newton know,” said Larry. “He’ll be able to -advise me.”</p> - -<p>“How can you reach him?” asked Larry’s mother.</p> - -<p>“I can call him up on the telephone. He has one in his house. I’ll ask -him to come right over. This will be a big story for the paper.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Newton was somewhat surprised when Larry called him on the wire. He -wanted to know what it was all about, but Larry did not think it wise -to tell them over the ’phone.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">231</a></span> -“You’ll see when you get here,” he said. “It’s a good story.”</p> - -<p>“Then I’ll come at once,” replied the reporter.</p> - -<p>He was soon at Larry’s house, and to say that he was surprised at the -sight of the diamonds is putting it mildly.</p> - -<p>“What will you do next, youngster?” he asked of Larry, with a laugh. -“This is the biggest thing yet. Every detective in the city is wearing -his eyes out looking for these, and here you stumble across them. Well, -I should say it was a story!”</p> - -<p>The reporter agreed to take charge of the jewels over night, as he had -a safe at home.</p> - -<p>“I suppose we ought to return them at once,” he said, “but if we do the -morning papers will have the story ahead of us, and that would never -do. We must get a beat out of this.”</p> - -<p>And they did. The next day the <cite>Leader</cite> had a big story of the find, -giving Larry due credit. It did not mention, however, that the boy was -working for the paper. The story was held back until the last edition, -and none of the other afternoon sheets had a line about it.</p> - -<p>The jewels were taken to Mr. Reynolds, who, true to his promise, made -out a check for one thousand dollars, which was given to Larry. It was -a long while before the thieves were caught, and their capture was -brought about in a peculiar manner.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">232</a></span> -“What will I ever do with the money?” Larry asked.</p> - -<p>“Put it in the bank as the start for another thousand,” said Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“I have a better plan than that,” replied the boy.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">233</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxviii" id="xxviii"></a>CHAPTER XXVIII<br /> -<span>THE RENOWNED DOCTOR</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Larry</span>’s mother could scarcely believe the good news that the boy -brought her when he showed the thousand-dollar check. It seemed almost -like a dream to all of them, and several times Larry pinched himself to -see if he would not wake up.</p> - -<p>But the check remained firm, and, the next day at the suggestion of Mr. -Newton, the lad deposited it in a savings bank, and received a book -with his name on it, and one thousand dollars on the credit side.</p> - -<p>“What are you going to do with it?” his mother asked Larry several -times. “I hope you will not spend it foolishly.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t worry,” replied Larry. “I’m not going to spend it right away, -but when I do it will be for something worth while,” and he smiled over -some pleasant thought.</p> - -<p>Many persons, on receiving such a large sum, would, if they were as -poor as the Dexters, have at once moved into a better house, bought a -lot of new furniture, and begun to live better. But this<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">234</a></span> did not enter -Larry’s head, though his mother wondered if that was what his plan was.</p> - -<p>She would have liked to have moved into a better house, though they -were fairly well off where they were. True, they had not many articles -of luxury, and sometimes their comforts were few. But Larry was now -earning good wages, and, with what Mrs. Dexter got from her sewing, -they had enough to eat, good substantial clothing, and did not need to -worry over the coal supply, even though winter was coming on. But Larry -was not yet ready to disclose his plans.</p> - -<p>There was much wonder in the vicinity of the apartment where the -Dexters lived over the fact that with so much money they did not move -to better quarters, and several of their neighbors mentioned this.</p> - -<p>“It’s Larry’s money,” said Mrs. Dexter, in answer to these questions. -“He can do what he likes with it, in reason. Of course I would not let -him spend it foolishly, and I know he will not. When he gets ready he -will let me know what he is going to do with it.”</p> - -<p>Then Mrs. Dexter would close the conversation, or turn it into some -other channel. But the neighbors did not cease from wondering and -talking.</p> - -<p>At the office Larry was the envy of all the other boys, and not a few -of the reporters.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">235</a></span> -“If I had that money I’d never work again,” said Bud.</p> - -<p>“It wouldn’t last long if you began to spend it,” said Larry. “I’ve got -a special use for that thousand dollars.”</p> - -<p>That afternoon Mr. Newton had to go out on a story. As he was leaving -the city room Mr. Emberg said:</p> - -<p>“While you’re out you might get a picture of Dr. Carrolton. We’ll -run it to-morrow, with the story of that big operation he’s going to -perform.”</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid I will not have time to go there,” said Mr. Newton. “It’s -’way uptown. Perhaps one of the boys or Larry could go.”</p> - -<p>“I guess Larry can get it all right,” said the city editor. “I didn’t -think of him.”</p> - -<p>“Let him come part of the way with me,” suggested Mr. Newton. “I’ll -tell him what to do.”</p> - -<p>So Larry was told to get on his hat and coat, give up carrying copy for -the rest of the day, and go after a photograph of the celebrated doctor.</p> - -<p>“Is he going to perform one of those operations on lame children?” -asked Larry of Mr. Newton, as they were in the elevated train going -uptown.</p> - -<p>“Yes, he’s going to try and cure a bad spinal trouble that a daughter -of Mr. Smyington, the millionaire, is afflicted with,” said the -reporter. “He has been very successful in all the cases he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">236</a></span> has -undertaken, and he was brought over to this country especially to -operate on this one case.”</p> - -<p>“It must cost a lot of money,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Smyington is paying ten thousand dollars,” said Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>Larry said nothing, but he sighed in a way that made Mr. Newton wonder -what the boy was worrying about.</p> - -<p>“Ten thousand dollars,” said Larry softly to himself. “That’s an awful -lot of money, and I have only one thousand.”</p> - -<p>“Here’s where you get off and change cars,” said Mr. Newton, after -about half an hour’s riding. “Just go right in the house where Dr. -Carrolton is staying, and if any one asks you what you want, say you’re -from the <cite>Leader</cite>. The physician is partial to newspaper men and I -guess you’ll have little trouble getting a photograph.”</p> - -<p>Larry experienced no difficulty in reaching the rooms of the great -doctor. But there he was met by a secretary, who seemed to be in bad -temper.</p> - -<p>“Tell your business by me,” he said to Larry. “The doctor cannot bother -mit every boy what comes along.”</p> - -<p>Larry explained his errand.</p> - -<p>“Ach! No! No! The doctor will gif out no more photographs,” said the -secretary, who was a German. “He has alretty gif out ten thousand. You -must go away!”</p> - -<p>“But I was told to get a picture,” persisted<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">237</a></span> Larry, who knew that it -is part of a reporter’s duty never to give up.</p> - -<p>“Go away! Go away!” exclaimed the secretary.</p> - -<p>“What’s the trouble?” asked a voice, and, from an inner room came the -great doctor himself. He was smiling kindly, and seemed good-natured.</p> - -<p>“It is one pest of a newspaper poy,” explained the secretary. “He must -have a photograph.”</p> - -<p>“I want one for the <cite>Leader</cite>,” broke in Larry.</p> - -<p>“Ha! Who is this?” exclaimed the physician as he heard the sound of -Larry’s voice. “I seem to have seen you before, my boy.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir, I guess you did,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>“Ha! I remember now, you are the boy who helped to catch the pickpocket -that stole my watch,” the doctor went on. “I was wondering why you -never came to see me.”</p> - -<p>“I have been too busy,” said Larry, which was the truth, though -another reason was that he felt a little bashful about calling on the -celebrated physician.</p> - -<p>“Well, my boy, I owe you considerable for what you did. I prize that -watch very highly. What can I do for you?”</p> - -<p>“I would like to get your picture for the paper,” spoke Larry. “The -city editor told me to be sure and get it.”</p> - -<p>“And you shall have it,” said Dr. Carrolton, in spite of the grumbling -of the secretary. “Here<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">238</a></span> it is, and besides one for the paper I give -you one for yourself,” and the physician took two fine photographs from -the mantle.</p> - -<p>“They are the last you have, Herr Doctor,” objected the secretary.</p> - -<p>“Never mind, Emile,” was the answer. “We can get more. I would do more -than that for this boy.”</p> - -<p>“How—how much do you charge for operations?” blurted out Larry, with -almost a gasp. It was what he had been nerving himself up to ever since -he heard he was to see the doctor.</p> - -<p>“Well, it all depends,” replied the physician, thinking it might be -a boy’s curiosity that prompted the question. “I do nothing else but -these operations, and so I have to charge more than other doctors do -for ordinary cases. Mine are very complicated cures and it sometimes -takes a long time to perfect them. So I have to charge high fees. But I -try to make my charges in accordance with what people can pay.”</p> - -<p>“Could you do one for a thousand dollars?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“I suppose so,” said the physician with a smile at Larry’s bluntness. -“Why?”</p> - -<p>“Because that’s all I have,” exclaimed the boy. “I got it as a reward -for finding the Reynolds diamonds. My sister has spine disease and -she suffers very much. I would give the thousand dollars if you could -cure her, and then I could owe<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">239</a></span> the rest of the money to you and pay -you when I earned it. Will you? Please, Dr. Carrolton, please cure my -sister!”</p> - -<p>“Tell me all about it,” said the physician kindly, taking a chair and -drawing up one for Larry. “Where is your sister?”</p> - -<p>Then the boy told him all about Lucy, and how much pain she had, -telling how patient she was. He related the experience with the -diamonds and told about getting the thousand dollars.</p> - -<p>“Please come and cure my sister,” he ended up with. “I know I can’t pay -you what it is worth, but I’ll work hard until I can make it up,” and -he paused to regard the doctor anxiously.</p> - -<p>“I—er—ahem!” said the physician, who seemed to find it hard to -proceed. “I don’t want your money, my boy,” he said at length.</p> - -<p>“Isn’t it enough?” asked Larry in a disappointed tone.</p> - -<p>“It is far too much,” replied Dr. Carrolton. “I have wanted to do -something for you ever since you saved my watch for me. I would rather -have lost ten thousand dollars than that watch, which I prize for the -memories it brings. So you can consider me in your debt to a large -amount. As for your sister, I will come and examine her.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you,” exclaimed Larry.</p> - -<p>“I don’t say I can cure her,” the physician went on, “but I will try, -and, if I can, I will be only too<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">240</a></span> glad to do so in return for what you -have done for me, also because I like you, and I am sure I shall like -your sister, if she is anything like you.”</p> - -<p>“She’s a lot better,” said Larry, hardly knowing whether to laugh or -cry.</p> - -<p>“All right, I’ll write you a letter soon, and tell you when I can come -and see your sister. Now you had better run along, for the paper might -want the picture,” and, shaking hands with Larry, the great doctor -went back to his room, while the boy, almost in a daze over his good -fortune, started back for the office.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">241</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxix" id="xxix"></a>CHAPTER XXIX<br /> -<span>THE OPERATION</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">The</span> next day all the papers told of the impending operation on the -millionaire’s daughter by the distinguished surgeon. His picture was -in many of the publications, including the <cite>Leader</cite>. The operation was -performed that day, and was a success as far as the first stages went. -It would be some time, the stories said, before the plaster casts could -be removed, and then it would be known whether or not the little girl -would ever walk again.</p> - -<p>Larry read every line that was published about the eminent physician -and the operation, for he felt that his sister’s case might be similar -to that of the millionaire’s daughter. He said nothing at home of the -hope he had that Lucy might be made well and strong, for he did not -want to raise expectations that might later be dispelled. When he heard -from Dr. Carrolton he thought that would be time enough to tell his -mother, and to prepare Lucy for the operation and ordeal which she must -go through.</p> - -<p>There were anxious days of waiting for Larry.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">242</a></span> As he performed his -work at the <cite>Leader</cite> office he kept track, by means of the various -papers, of Dr. Carrolton’s progress. The physician was traveling over -the country, making cures that were almost marvelous. Larry began to -fear the doctor had forgotten his promise, and was almost beginning -to despair when, one day, there came a letter addressed to “Mr. Larry -Dexter,” with his street number and all on it. Up in one corner was the -eminent doctor’s name.</p> - -<p>Larry’s fingers trembled so much he could scarcely open the envelope, -but he managed to take out the single sheet of paper it contained and -read this message:</p> - -<blockquote> - -<p>“My Dear Boy: I have not forgotten you, your sister, or the -promise I made. If nothing happens to prevent I shall call at -your house a week from to-day and see the little girl. I hope I -may be able to cure her.”</p></blockquote> - -<p>Then Larry decided to tell his mother. At first Mrs. Dexter was too -surprised to know what to say. Then, as the full realization of what -the doctor’s visit might mean,—the cure of her daughter,—she could -not help weeping, but the tears were those of joy.</p> - -<p>“Oh, Larry, Larry!” she exclaimed softly. “It is too good to be true!”</p> - -<p>“We must break the news gently to Lucy,” said<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">243</a></span> the boy. “We don’t want -to get her excited, for it might have a bad effect on her nerves.”</p> - -<p>Poor Lucy was frightened and pleased by turns when they told her. She -had long before given up hope of ever being able to walk like other -girls, and had resigned herself to her fate. Now that there seemed to -be a ray of hope she hardly dared indulge in the pleasant thoughts that -came to her.</p> - -<p>“Oh, if I ever could walk right again!” she exclaimed, and her eyes -filled with tears.</p> - -<p>“Oh, Dr. Carrolton can cure you,” said Larry with confidence in his -tone. “I’ve read all about the cases in the papers, and most of them -are lots worse than yours is.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, if I could only walk again, like other girls, and run and play, -and—and go to work,” sighed Lucy, “I would be the happiest girl in all -the world.”</p> - -<p>“You will,” said Larry, and he prayed that what he hoped would come to -pass.</p> - -<p>That week was full of excitement. In the first place, all unexpectedly, -a trained nurse came to the house one day, and said she had been sent -by Dr. Carrolton to prepare Lucy for the operation.</p> - -<p>“Will I have to go to the hospital?” asked Lucy, with fright in her -tone.</p> - -<p>“No, dear,” said the nurse. “Dr. Carrolton has decided that you will be -better off at home. I am going to get you ready.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">244</a></span> -“Will you—will you stay with me when—when he operates?” asked the -girl in a pleading tone.</p> - -<p>“Of course I will, dearest,” said the kind-hearted nurse, putting her -arms around the girl. “Your mother will be here too, and we will take -good care of you, never fear.”</p> - -<p>“Will it hurt very much?” asked Lucy.</p> - -<p>“Not much, dear. It may, a little. Will you mind?”</p> - -<p>“Not—if it makes me well,” replied Lucy.</p> - -<p>The Dexter household was much upset for the next few days. A room had -to be prepared for Lucy, and this the trained nurse arranged. Then came -a man, bringing a strange sort of folding table on which the little -girl was to lie while the great doctor operated on her. Larry could -hardly do his work for thinking of what was to happen, and Mrs. Dexter -was so nervous that she did not know what to do.</p> - -<p>But Lucy proved herself a brave girl. She was cheerful, and even joked -at times, telling Larry she would soon be running races with him. The -younger children did not know what was going on. Kind neighbors cared -for them at times, when there was too much for Mrs. Dexter to do.</p> - -<p>At last came the day for the operation; Dr. Carrolton came in his -carriage, with another physician to help him. All save the nurse and -the doctors were banished from the room where Lucy was taken.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">245</a></span> -Mr. Emberg, who had heard of what was going on, excused Larry from work -that day, for he knew the copy boy’s heart would be at home with his -sister. Mrs. Dexter wept at times, and several women friends came in to -comfort her.</p> - -<p>There was an hour of anxious waiting. Then from the room where the -operation had been performed came Dr. Carrolton.</p> - -<p>“Will she—is it—can—” began Larry, but he was excited and stammered -so he could not talk.</p> - -<p>“We hope it will be a success,” said the physician in kind tones. “It -was a bad case. Much worse than I had supposed. But if we can make her -walk again, Larry, my boy, if we can have her run around like other -little girls, we’ll do it!”</p> - -<p>Larry gritted his teeth to keep back the tears that were all too ready -to flow. But he put on a brave front.</p> - -<p>“Thank you, doctor,” was all he could say.</p> - -<p>“Now she must be kept very quiet,” the surgeon said. “The nurse will -stay with her, but she must not be disturbed. I will stop in again this -evening. Now good-bye, and don’t worry.”</p> - -<p>He went out, followed by his assistant, leaving Larry in a sort of -daze. The boy tiptoed to the sick room, and knelt down by the door. -He tried to listen to hear what was going on inside, but there was a -strange ringing in his ears that prevented him. Once he thought he -heard his sister<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">246</a></span> groan, and this so frightened him that he ran away.</p> - -<p>His mother, who had been cared for by the neighbors, who also looked -after James and Mary, came back now, her eyes red from weeping. The -nurse came out of the operating room.</p> - -<p>“She’s sleeping quietly,” she said. “Everything is favorable. Don’t -worry. I think she will get well.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I’m so glad!” exclaimed Mrs. Dexter.</p> - -<p>Larry went outdoors. In the street he found quite a crowd of persons -who lived in the apartment house, and who, having heard about the -operation, were anxious to know how it had come out.</p> - -<p>They were full of sympathy for the sick girl, and almost overwhelmed -Larry with questions, several women surrounding him and wanting to know -all about how “the poor dear child was coming on.”</p> - -<p>Larry told them as best he could. It would be some time, he said, -before it would be known whether the operation was a success or not, -but they hoped for the best.</p> - -<p>“We’ll all pray for her,” said a motherly old German woman. “We want to -see her runnin’ about with the other children.”</p> - -<p>The days that followed were full of anxiety. The doctor came every day, -bringing words of cheer and comfort. The nurse was very kind,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">247</a></span> and the -neighbors could not seem to do enough for the family.</p> - -<p>Larry went back to work, as Dr. Carrolton told him there was no -immediate danger nor chance of a change. Lucy had to wear a plaster -cast for several weeks, and not until this could be taken off would it -be known whether she was better. In the meanwhile they could only hope.</p> - -<p>One afternoon, about two weeks later, when the last edition of the -<cite>Leader</cite> was about to go to press, there came a telegram from a small -village called Stoneville, about fifty miles from New York, to the -effect that the rising waters, caused by a long period of rain, had so -swollen the rivers and streams that a large dam, just above the town, -threatened to break.</p> - -<p>“If that goes there’ll be lots of damage done, and maybe people -killed,” said Mr. Newton, who was in the office at the time.</p> - -<p>“How do you know?” asked Mr. Emberg.</p> - -<p>“Because I spent my vacation in that town once,” replied the reporter. -“It’s in a valley surrounded by hills. The dam is at the upper end. It -is used to make a reservoir for several large mills. If the dam breaks -it’s going to wipe out the village of Stoneville.”</p> - -<p>“Hum,” said the city editor, in a thoughtful tone. “I guess we’d better -cover that. You haven’t anything special on now, have you, Newton?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">248</a></span> -“No, I guess not.”</p> - -<p>“Then I think you had better go there. Start to-night, and wire us back -all the stuff you can. Don’t let the other fellows beat you.”</p> - -<p>“Not if I can help it.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps you’d better take someone with you. I can send one of the men.”</p> - -<p>“If I take anyone I think I’d rather have Larry,” said Mr. Newton. -“He can run the copy to the telegraph office, he knows how to use the -telephone, and he’ll keep his ears and eyes open for news. Larry will -do first-rate.”</p> - -<p>“Then you can take him,” said the city editor. “I guess his sister is -in no danger now. I’ll find out.”</p> - -<p>Larry hardly knew what to say when the city editor proposed that he -accompany Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“I’d like to go,” he said, “if I only knew——”</p> - -<p>“I’ll send you word about your sister every day,” said Mr. Emberg, -guessing what bothered Larry.</p> - -<p>“Then I’ll go,” said the boy.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">249</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxx" id="xxx"></a>CHAPTER XXX<br /> -<span>THE FLOOD</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Larry</span> went home, all excited over the prospects of his trip. It was the -biggest thing he had yet been assigned to do in newspaper work, and he -felt that it might be the stepping stone to a larger field.</p> - -<p>“You’ll be careful now, won’t you, Larry?” his mother pleaded as she -packed a valise of clothes for him, since Mr. Emberg had said the trip -would probably last several days.</p> - -<p>“I will, mother,” promised the boy.</p> - -<p>“Write every day,” Mrs. Dexter continued, “and let us know how you are -getting on.”</p> - -<p>“Do you think Lucy will be all right?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“I think so,” said the nurse, who had come into the room. “Her general -health is much better, though of course we cannot tell about the main -thing; that is, whether she will walk again.”</p> - -<p>Larry went into the room to bid his sister good-bye. Lucy was stretched -out in bed, her limbs and back held rigid by the heavy plaster cast. -She smiled at her brother.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">250</a></span> -“So you’re going to run away and leave me?” she said in a joking tone.</p> - -<p>“I’ll come back whenever you send for me,” spoke Larry.</p> - -<p>“When you come back perhaps I’ll be walking around,” said the girl with -a smile.</p> - -<p>Larry bade his mother, sisters, and brother, as well as the nurse, -good-bye, and then went to the railroad station where he was to meet -Mr. Newton. It was raining hard, as it had been for a week past.</p> - -<p>“If this keeps up I’m afraid there’ll be trouble at the dam,” thought -Larry, as he splashed through a big puddle.</p> - -<p>He found the reporter waiting for him. Mr. Newton was attired in a long -rain coat, and he had a big dress-suit case with him, that seemed well -filled.</p> - -<p>“Got any rubber boots?” he asked Larry, as soon as the latter greeted -him.</p> - -<p>“No. Why?”</p> - -<p>“Because you’ll need ’em if this sort of weather keeps up. You wait -here and I’ll go and buy you a pair. What size do you wear?”</p> - -<p>“About six, I guess,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>Mr. Newton hurried out and returned, bearing a bundle.</p> - -<p>“There you are,” said the reporter. “They’ll keep your feet dry, -anyhow.”</p> - -<p>A few minutes later their train was called and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">251</a></span> the two went out on the -long platform along which the cars stood.</p> - -<p>“It’s hardly worth while taking a sleeper,” said Mr. Newton. “We’ll get -there about midnight, and I’ve wired for rooms at the only hotel in the -village. Can’t tell whether we’ll get ’em, or not, the way things are.”</p> - -<p>It was a good deal like being a soldier, Larry thought, to be a -reporter on a big paper. You never knew where you were going, nor -when. At one minute you might be engaged in writing up a peaceful bit -of news, and the next be sent far away to report raging floods or big -fires. But Larry liked the excitement, and he felt that there was no -finer or more responsible calling.</p> - -<p>To be a reporter on a big paper meant to be able to command much power, -which, if rightly used, proved of great value. A reporter is, in a way, -his own master, serving only his paper.</p> - -<p>Through the storm splashed the train. The wind howled around it and the -rain beat upon it, but those inside were comfortable and warm.</p> - -<p>Larry and Mr. Newton found seats together and they settled down into -them, to listen to the roar of the storm, and the puffing of the engine -until they came to their destination. Progress was slow, because the -railroad line was not as safe as usual. Once they were delayed an hour -by a lot of sand washing down on the track. The train crew had to get -out and shovel it off.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">252</a></span> -Again they came to so sudden a stop that several of the passengers were -thrown from their seats.</p> - -<p>“We hit something that time,” exclaimed Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“Felt so,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>Nearly everyone in the cars piled out in spite of the rain. Larry and -Mr. Newton followed their example. They found that the locomotive had -struck a big rock that had been loosened from a bluff by the rain, and -had fallen down on the track. But for the fact that the engineer saw it -in time, and put on brakes, there might have been a serious accident. -As it was, the pilot of the locomotive was smashed.</p> - -<p>There was a delay of two hours this time before the rock could be -removed, and when the train at last got under way, and pulled into -Stoneville, they were more than three hours behind time.</p> - -<p>“It’s after four o’clock,” said Mr. Newton as he got off the coach and -looked at his watch. “Hardly worth while to go to bed.”</p> - -<p>They found a number of people gathered at the station.</p> - -<p>“What’s going on?” asked Mr. Newton, of a man who was walking up and -down the platform. “Everybody get up early to catch a train?”</p> - -<p>“We haven’t been to bed,” was the answer. “The dam’s liable to give -way any minute, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253">253</a></span> we’re a sort of guard watch. As soon as she -breaks there’s a man up there near it, who’s going to let us know by -telegraph, so we can get our folks out of the way. There’s a telegraph -instrument in the depot here, and so we’re hanging around for news. -Say, but it’s rainin’ cats an’ dogs, ain’t it?”</p> - -<p>“It certainly is,” replied Mr. Newton. “Where’s the hotel?”</p> - -<p>“Right up that street,” replied the man. “Guess you’ll have trouble -getting rooms, though. Lots of people have gone there for fear their -houses’ll be washed away.”</p> - -<p>“Is it as bad as that?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, and it’ll be worse before many hours. The dam can’t stand much -longer.”</p> - -<p>Protecting themselves as best they could from the storm, Larry and Mr. -Newton made their way to the hotel. As the man had said, they found it -crowded, but a small room had been reserved for them on the strength of -Mr. Newton’s message.</p> - -<p>“You’ll have to put up with what you find,” said the clerk of the -hotel. “We’re crowded for room, and we’ll be more so shortly.”</p> - -<p>“We don’t mind,” spoke Mr. Newton. “We’ll not be in very much, I guess. -The most we’ll want will be meals.”</p> - -<p>“I can promise you them at any rate,” said the clerk.</p> - -<p>They registered, and were shown to their room.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254">254</a></span> The rain was coming -down harder than ever, but in spite of that Larry and his friend lay -down and managed to get a few hours’ sleep. After breakfast, which they -ate in a crowded dining room, where the only conversation was about -the rain and the danger from the dam, they donned their rain coats and -rubber boots and, with umbrellas, went out.</p> - -<p>“Will you tell us where the dam is?” asked Mr. Newton of the first man -he met.</p> - -<p>“Right straight up that street,” was the answer. “Don’t you hear a sort -of roar?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, what is it?” asked the reporter.</p> - -<p>“The water coming through the emergency outlets,” was the answer. “The -flood has not yet risen above the dam, but it will soon.”</p> - -<p>Larry and his friend went in the direction pointed out. They were -not the only ones on the street, for in spite of the downpour scores -of persons were on their way to the dam, to see what had happened -overnight.</p> - -<p>As they came nearer the roar became louder, until as they turned down a -side street leading to the river, they could hear the flood of waters -tearing its way along like a miniature Niagara. Then, a few minutes -later, they came in sight of the big reservoir, fed by a comparatively -small stream in ordinary times, but which had now become a raging -torrent from the overabundance of rain.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255">255</a></span> -In front of them, in a sort of hollow of the hills, was a vast body of -water. It was about half a mile wide, and backed up for several miles. -The dam was about two thousand feet in length, strongly constructed. In -ordinary seasons the water hardly came to within half-way of the top, -but now only two feet separated the spill-way from the surface of the -muddy swirling water.</p> - -<p>In order to relieve the pressure on the big pile of stone and cement -the men at the dam had opened three emergency outlets. These were big -openings in the face of the dam, considerably below the top.</p> - -<p>Through these the water was rushing with the strength of ten thousand -horses. It spurted out in solid streams and shot into the bed of the -stream below like a geyser. The little river, that ordinarily sufficed -to carry off the overflow of water, was now a vast torrent and was -rushing along with terrific speed.</p> - -<p>Many houses were along its banks and some of these were already in -danger of the flood. The water had reached nearly to the first floors, -after flooding the cellars, and the people had deserted their homes.</p> - -<p>“Well, I would say this was something of a flood,” spoke Mr. Newton -after looking the scene over. “There’s going to be some news here or -I’m mistaken. I must get to work and write a descriptive story.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_256" id="Page_256">256</a></span> -“What can I do?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“There’ll be plenty of work for both of us, or I’ll miss my guess. -First you can find out where the nearest telegraph station is, and then -make arrangements to send copy by wire.”</p> - -<p>“There’s a telegraph in the railroad office,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“That will hardly do for us. It is probably for railroad messages only. -You must find a regular place, where they will take press copy. When -you do, come back to the hotel and I’ll meet you there.”</p> - -<p>After spending a little while looking at the river and reservoir Larry -went on his errand. By inquiring he located a Western Union office, and -made arrangements with the operator.</p> - -<p>“Only I’ll not guarantee anything,” said the man in charge. “No telling -when the wires may go down and out of business. I’ll send stuff as long -as I can, and then I’ll have to quit.”</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_257" id="Page_257">257</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxxi" id="xxxi"></a>CHAPTER XXXI<br /> -<span>DAYS OF TERROR</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Larry</span> went back to the hotel to report to Mr. Newton. He did not find -him there, and so walked around in the corridor. The men were gathered -in groups, talking of nothing but the storm and the danger.</p> - -<p>“Worst I ever see in fifty years,” said one old man. “I remember the -year Deacon Stout’s old gray mare died the waters riz so high they -floated my barn, by gosh, but that wa’n’t nothin’ to this.”</p> - -<p>“She’s goin’ t’ rage an’ tear things apart,” said his neighbor.</p> - -<p>Other men were saying much the same thing. In one corner Larry saw a -woman crying, while others were trying to comfort her.</p> - -<p>“I can’t help it,” said the weeping one. “The waters washed away our -house and we’ve lost everything we had in the world.”</p> - -<p>“Never mind, it’s lucky you and the children were saved,” spoke some of -those about her.</p> - -<p>“When did the house wash away?” asked Larry, thinking this might be -some news for Mr. Newton to put in his story.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_258" id="Page_258">258</a></span> -“A little while ago,” replied one of the women. “It was down quite -close to the river, and these people wouldn’t move out when their -neighbors did. They came near being drowned when the waters rose -suddenly. Men had to rescue them in boats.”</p> - -<p>Larry asked several more questions, getting the name of the rescued -ones, and the location of the house. He wrote the incident up as well -as he could on some paper he procured from the hotel clerk.</p> - -<p>“What’s this?” asked Mr. Newton, when he came in half an hour later, -and Larry handed him the sheets.</p> - -<p>“Just a little something I picked up around the hotel, and thought -might go in the story,” replied the boy.</p> - -<p>“Good for you!” exclaimed the reporter. “You’re the kind of a helper to -have. Did you arrange about the telegraph?”</p> - -<p>Larry repeated what the operator had said, and then Mr. Newton started -to write his story. He used what Larry had given him, fixing it up -a bit, and soon had quite a batch of stuff ready to be telegraphed. -Larry took it over to the office, and, while he was gone, Mr. Newton -continued to write. By the time Larry returned the reporter had another -batch ready.</p> - -<p>“There,” he said as he rubbed his aching fingers, “I guess that will be -enough for to-day<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_259" id="Page_259">259</a></span> unless something breaks loose. Now, after you come -back from the office, we’ll have dinner.”</p> - -<p>During the afternoon Mr. Newton and Larry walked about the town. The -reporter wanted to familiarize himself with the location of various -buildings so if the place was swept away he would be able to write -intelligently about it.</p> - -<p>Toward evening they paid another visit to the dam. They found a bigger -crowd than ever at it, and there was a group of men with lanterns -walking about.</p> - -<p>“What’s going on?” asked Mr. Newton of a man who stood near.</p> - -<p>“Going to try dynamite,” said the man.</p> - -<p>“Not to blow up the dam?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, my, no! Going to try and blow a hole in the side of the hill quite -a ways up the reservoir to see if they can let some of the water out -and relieve the pressure on the dam.”</p> - -<p>“When will they do that?”</p> - -<p>“First thing in the morning.”</p> - -<p>“That will be more news for us, Larry,” spoke Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“Are you newspaper men?” inquired the man.</p> - -<p>“Yes, from the New York <cite>Leader</cite>,” replied the reporter and Larry was -proud to be in the same class with Mr. Newton, though he knew he had -not gotten there yet.</p> - -<p>“Well, you’ll have plenty of news soon,” the man continued.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_260" id="Page_260">260</a></span> -“How so?”</p> - -<p>“Why, the water’s risen six inches this afternoon. It’s only a foot and -a half from the top of the dam now. Then we just got word that a small -dam up at a place called Meadeville is liable to burst any minute. It -won’t do much damage up there, but the water feeds into this reservoir -and if it gets here, which it’s liable to do to-morrow, why, this whole -thing will go.”</p> - -<p>“I wonder if our hotel’s in any danger?” asked the reporter.</p> - -<p>“No,” replied the man. “That’s on high ground, but the part of the town -to the west of it is in a very dangerous position, if the dam gives -way.”</p> - -<p>“Well, it’s a comfort to know you have a safe place to sleep, at any -rate,” Mr. Newton remarked, “but I’m sorry for the others.”</p> - -<p>Larry and his friend spent some more time looking around, and then -decided to go back to the hotel. The whole town was full of excitement. -Few persons dared go to bed, for fear the calamity would overtake them. -They preferred to sit up and wait for it. A large force of men were -stationed at the dam to give warning in all directions at the first -sign of a break of any kind.</p> - -<p>Larry managed to get a few winks of sleep, but he was too anxious about -the flood, and also worried about his sister, to rest well. As for Mr.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_261" id="Page_261">261</a></span> -Newton, nothing seemed to worry him, and he slept as well as though at -home.</p> - -<p>The rain let up a bit toward morning, but the heavy clouds and the -unchanged wind showed that the storm was not over. The first thing -after breakfast and getting their mail, including a letter with fair -news for Larry, Mr. Newton went out to the dam. The waters had risen -slightly, and some engineers who had been summoned said that the -pressure on the stone wall was now enormous, and must, unless the flood -went down, burst it.</p> - -<p>“We’ll go and take a look at the place where they’re going to -dynamite,” said Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>They found a corps of men busy. Red flags placed here and there warned -the people to keep back from the danger zone. The place where the -explosive was going to be set off was near a deep gully, and the men -hoped to drive the waters into it and away from the town and dam.</p> - -<p>“How soon are they going to set it off?” Mr. Newton asked of a man who -had one of the red flags.</p> - -<p>“In about an hour,” was the reply.</p> - -<p>“Then we’ll stay and watch it,” said Mr. Newton to Larry. “I can send -an account of it to the paper. It will make good reading.”</p> - -<p>The preparations went busily on. It began to rain again, but the men -working at the dynamite explosion did not seem to mind it. They were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_262" id="Page_262">262</a></span> -too interested in the result of the experiment which might mean so much -to all of them.</p> - -<p>At last those bearing the red flags, at a signal from someone in -charge, warned the onlookers farther back.</p> - -<p>“I guess it’s going off now!” said Mr. Newton. “We’d better get away a -bit.”</p> - -<p>They retreated several hundred feet. While they were wondering whether -they were far enough off there came a dull rumble and roar. The ground -seemed to tremble and then, as they looked, they saw a mass of earth -and rocks rise high in the air.</p> - -<p>“There she goes!” exclaimed Larry.</p> - -<p>“Now let’s see if it does any good,” said Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>They looked to see if the big lake of water would become less as a new -outlet was provided, but it did not. Either the dynamite had not been -placed right, or the men had calculated too much on its power. At any -rate, though a big hole was blown in the hill, near the ravine, there -was still a large piece of earth between the gully and the imprisoned -water. The dynamite had failed to do its work.</p> - -<p>“Come on,” said Mr. Newton to Larry. “We’ll get some stuff off to the -paper and then we can come back.”</p> - -<p>Through the mud and rain they splashed to the hotel. There the reporter -wrote up his story and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_263" id="Page_263">263</a></span> sent Larry to the telegraph office with it, -about a mile and a half away.</p> - -<p>“I tell you what it is,” said Mr. Newton on Larry’s return, “we’ll have -to get up a new scheme. It takes too long to go from the hotel to the -telegraph office. I wonder how we can save time.”</p> - -<p>“I might run faster,” suggested Larry.</p> - -<p>“No, you run fast enough now. I’m not finding fault with you.”</p> - -<p>“I might hire a bicycle.”</p> - -<p>“How do you mean?”</p> - -<p>“Why, I mean I could get a wheel here, and take the copy in on that. -I could also get out to the dam, and you could follow. Then you could -write the stuff there and I could rush it to the telegraph office right -from the scene.”</p> - -<p>“Good idea!” exclaimed Mr. Newton. “We’ll do it. But can you ride a -bicycle in this weather?”</p> - -<p>“I guess so,” said Larry. “I’m pretty good on one. Besides the roads -are hard, and the rain hasn’t hurt them much.”</p> - -<p>That afternoon Larry made arrangements to hire a wheel, which he -brought around to the hotel. He found that, though it was a trifle -awkward to ride it with a rubber coat and big boots on, he could -manage, but he did not make as fast time as he would have done -otherwise.</p> - -<p>“But it’s better than walking,” said Larry.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_264" id="Page_264">264</a></span> -That day, and the one which followed, were anxious ones. The water rose -steadily, but so slowly that it could scarcely be noticed, on account -of being spread over such a large surface. The engineers reported that -the strain on the dam was increasing.</p> - -<p>Many more people whose houses were nearest to the rising waters began -moving out. Appeals for help were sent to nearby towns, and several -boats were brought over to be used in case of emergency. Several small -gasolene boats also came, and one man offered to bring his steam launch -over if the flood continued.</p> - -<p>In the meanwhile the people were filled with anxiety. They could do no -work, and stood around waiting for what they feared would happen.</p> - -<p>Mr. Newton sent off a good account to his paper. That evening he went -down to the railroad station. On the last train in came several young -men, and a number of boys with them.</p> - -<p>“I thought they’d be soon here,” said Mr. Newton to Larry.</p> - -<p>“Who are they?”</p> - -<p>“Reporters from other New York papers. Now we’ll have to hustle for -beats.”</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_265" id="Page_265">265</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxxii" id="xxxii"></a>CHAPTER XXXII<br /> -<span>THE FLOOD INCREASES</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Late</span> that night, after Larry and Mr. Newton had gone to bed, they were -awakened by a noise and excitement in the street. The rain had let up a -little, and they got out of bed and went to a window.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” called Mr. Newton to a man down in the street.</p> - -<p>“The dam at Meadeville has burst,” was the reply. “Ours will go in -about ten hours!”</p> - -<p>“That means work for to-morrow,” commented the reporter.</p> - -<p>“Hadn’t we better get out now and see what’s going on?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“No, it wouldn’t do any good. There’s no immediate danger, or they -would have told us. So we might as well stay in bed and rest up. The -chances are we’ll not get to bed at all to-morrow night.”</p> - -<p>“Not get to bed?”</p> - -<p>“No,” replied the reporter. “When you get to be a real newspaper man, -Larry, you’ll find that your time is the paper’s you work for. You<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_266" id="Page_266">266</a></span> -mustn’t sleep or be awake except in the interests of the sheet. But -when there’s nothing doing, get all the rest you can. You’ll need it -sometimes. Working all night is nothing. That’s fun. It’s being up six -nights out of seven that makes it hard. But we don’t have to do that. -So go back to bed and sleep as well as you can.”</p> - -<p>Larry tried to but he found it hard work. He listened to the rain drops -and thought of what would happen when the big dam burst. This made him -so wide awake that he tried to count the number of drops that fell on a -tin roof, thinking the monotony of this might send him to slumber.</p> - -<p>Finally, after admiring the calm and peaceful manner in which Mr. -Newton dropped off to sleep, Larry found his eyes growing heavy. He -began to dream he was swimming in a flood of waters, and trying to -climb to the top of a big dam, from which he fell back with a shock -that woke him up.</p> - -<p>He aroused himself with a suddenness that startled him, to find Mr. -Newton shaking him vigorously.</p> - -<p>“I didn’t mean for you to sleep so sound you couldn’t wake up,” said -the reporter with a smile. “It’s time to hustle out and see what’s -doing, I guess.”</p> - -<p>“Is it raining yet?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Like cats and dogs. We’re going to have a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_267" id="Page_267">267</a></span> bad day. But never mind. -There’ll be lots of news.”</p> - -<p>And news there was in plenty. In anticipation of the danger the people -knew would result when the waters from the broken dam at Meadeville -reached them, many inhabitants that had not hitherto moved from their -houses did so now.</p> - -<p>Boats were at a premium, as they were needed to convey the people and -their most valued possessions to high ground. There was a range of -hills back of the town, and there most of those who left their homes -were going.</p> - -<p>By reason of its position about half of the town was in danger of -inundation should the dam break. It was the people living in that -section who were getting out. The others were in comparatively no -danger. Some of these latter gave shelter to those who deserted their -homes, but as it was the better and wealthier section of Stoneville -that was in danger, the inhabitants of the poorer part could not offer -much in the way of accommodations.</p> - -<p>Some got tents which, in spite of the rain, they erected on the hill -tops, and there, with what few things they could take away in boats, -they set up camps.</p> - -<p>Business was suspended. All the men who could joined in and helped -to care for the unfortunates or transport their household goods and -valuables. As soon as he had sent off a story<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_268" id="Page_268">268</a></span> Mr. Newton joined in -this work, and Larry helped him.</p> - -<p>There were many other reporters on the scene now, and some had brought -copy boys or office assistants along to help them. For once in its -history Stoneville found itself of much importance to the outside -world, for the news of the flood was eagerly read.</p> - -<p>When Larry was coming back from the telegraph office with his second -batch of copy, pedaling his wheel along the muddy street, he heard a -voice call:</p> - -<p>“Hello, kid! What you doing here?”</p> - -<p>He looked up to behold his old enemy Peter Manton.</p> - -<p>“I’m working for Mr. Newton,” replied Larry, not feeling any too -friendly.</p> - -<p>“I’m working too,” volunteered Peter, seemingly forgetting that there -was an old score between him and Larry. “I’m on the <cite>Scorcher</cite>. I’ll -bet we beat you fellows all hollow. The <cite>Scorcher</cite> plays up news in red -type on the front page. It’s a dandy paper.”</p> - -<p>Larry did not reply, but Peter called after him:</p> - -<p>“Where you stopping?”</p> - -<p>“At the hotel,” replied Larry, not caring to be impolite.</p> - -<p>“See you later,” called Peter as he kept on toward the telegraph -office. “Yes, I’ll see you later, and I guess you’ll wish you hadn’t -seen<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_269" id="Page_269">269</a></span> me,” muttered Peter, shaking his fist at Larry’s back. If Larry -could have seen this he might have worried a little, but, as it was, he -did not.</p> - -<p>Getting back to the hotel, Larry found the place filled with excited -men. They all seemed to be talking at once, but all Larry could -distinguish was “dynamite,” “blow it up,” and “save our lives.”</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” he asked of Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“They are talking of a plan to lower dynamite to the foot of the dam, -and blow a big hole in it to relieve the pressure,” said the reporter.</p> - -<p>“But wouldn’t that be as dangerous as if the dam broke of its own -weakness?”</p> - -<p>“That’s what I think, but some of the others seem to believe the hole, -if they could make it, would serve as a big outlet.”</p> - -<p>“What are they going to do about it?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing. In the first place they haven’t the dynamite, and if they had -it, they couldn’t get anyone to go out on the dam and lower it, for the -thing may give way any minute.”</p> - -<p>“What makes such a crowd here?”</p> - -<p>“A lot more people have deserted their homes, and have come here for -shelter.”</p> - -<p>“Is the danger greater?”</p> - -<p>“They say the dam will go in about an hour.”</p> - -<p>“What are you going to do?”</p> - -<p>“I have a plan,” said Mr. Newton, “and I want you to help me carry it -out.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_270" id="Page_270">270</a></span> -“What is it?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“We’ll both go out to the dam,” said the reporter. “We’ll wait there -until it gives way, which it must do now in the course of an hour or -two. I’ll be there and I’ll write up a short account. You’ll jump on -your wheel and hurry to the telegraph office with the copy. We’ll get -it to the office in time for the last edition and beat all the other -papers unless some of them are smart enough to play the same trick, and -I don’t think they will.”</p> - -<p>“That’s a good idea,” commented Larry. “I’ll get my wheel ready.”</p> - -<p>In a little while he and Mr. Newton were starting for the dam. The -storm was only a drizzle now, but it was unpleasant enough. Larry -thought he would never get dried out again, so long had he been wet -through. Mr. Newton said he thought they could both qualify as fishes.</p> - -<p>At the dam they found an immense crowd of people. The angry waters were -a little higher than before, but were still several inches from the top -of the dam. Only the wonderful strength of the masonry saved it. As it -was the engineers said there was an indication of a slight crack which, -if it increased, would mean that the whole thing would go to pieces.</p> - -<p>Raising his umbrella Mr. Newton sat down under it in a place where he -could watch developments. He was well out of harm’s way in case<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_271" id="Page_271">271</a></span> the -dam should break, and the people, also, kept well back. With pencil and -paper ready the reporter waited for what seemed must happen almost any -second.</p> - -<p>“She’s beginning to rise faster!” a man on watch cried. “We’re -beginning to get some of the water from the broken dam above!”</p> - -<p>As he spoke there sounded a dull boom through the vast pile of masonry, -that seemed to indicate it was about to give way. The crowd started as -though shocked by a current of electricity.</p> - -<p>“Is it going?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid so,” said Mr. Newton. “Get ready!”</p> - -<p>There was a moment of suspense. The waters swirled and hissed about the -solid wall, as though enraged at not being able to batter it down. Then -the clouds opened and a flood came out of the sky.</p> - -<p>There was a stir in the crowd and several young men came up on the run, -heading for the umbrella over Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Harvey!” they shouted. “Anything doing?”</p> - -<p>“There will be in a little while,” replied Mr. Newton. “Where have you -fellows been?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, we weren’t sent out until yesterday,” said one. “They thought this -didn’t amount to anything.”</p> - -<p>“I guess they read the <cite>Leader</cite> then, eh?” asked Mr. Newton, with a -smile.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_272" id="Page_272">272</a></span> -“That’s right, throw it into us,” said several. “But we’re here now, -and there won’t be any more beats.”</p> - -<p>“That’s what you think,” said the <cite>Leader</cite> reporter.</p> - -<p>“Who are they?” asked Larry in a low tone.</p> - -<p>“Men from the other papers,” said Mr. Newton. “Look out for them. They -may be up to some trick.”</p> - -<p>There was a sudden movement in the crowd, and from the midst of the -people a man emerged. He carried a bundle in his hands, and the men -seemed to want to get as far from him as possible.</p> - -<p>“I wonder what’s going on?” said Larry.</p> - -<p>Then a man went past on the run.</p> - -<p>“What’s up?” asked one of the reporters.</p> - -<p>“A fellow has agreed to try and dynamite the dam!” was the answer. -“He’s going to try and blow a hole in the bottom to let the water out.”</p> - -<p>“Gee whiz! That’ll make a story!” said several.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_273" id="Page_273">273</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxxiii" id="xxxiii"></a>CHAPTER XXXIII<br /> -<span>DYNAMITING THE DAM</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">The</span> reporters got out their pencils and paper and began to interview -the man. They wanted to know who was going to set off the dynamite, how -many pounds he would use, where he got it, how he was going to use it, -how he would lower it, and what would happen when he had it in place.</p> - -<p>“If you want to know, go ask him,” the man exclaimed at length. “I’m -not going to stay around here. It’s bad enough if the dam breaks, let -alone the dynamite going up!”</p> - -<p>Then he started off on a run, while the reporters, with the exception -of Mr. Newton, stood with pencils poised.</p> - -<p>But it seemed that something was going on in the crowd down at the -western end of the dam. There were men running to and fro, and -preparations seemed to be under way for some undertaking.</p> - -<p>As the reporters and others watched they saw a man run out on the broad -coping on top of the dam. In his hands he carried a package which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_274" id="Page_274">274</a></span> they -guessed to be dynamite. He seemed to have no fear of the deep waters on -one side of him or the big gully on the other, to which he might fall -and be dashed to death on the rocks.</p> - -<p>With a long rope, around which was a fuse, he lowered the explosive to -the bottom of the big wall of masonry. The idea was to blow a hole in -the rocks under it, and not to injure the dam itself, but to make a -place where the water could escape, in addition to the regular exits. -It was a task of peril and few would have liked to undertake it.</p> - -<p>The crowd almost in breathless silence watched the man lower the -powerful explosive to the bottom of the wall inch by inch. He seemed -like a fly out there on the narrow coping of the dam, and likely to be -swept to his death any minute.</p> - -<p>Mr. Newton, who had learned the brave man’s name from a bystander, -was busy writing a story about him which he intended to send to the -paper. He was on a little hill where he could have a good view of the -operation and yet be out of danger.</p> - -<p>Suddenly the man raised his hand. It was a signal that the dynamite -was in place and that he was about to touch off the fuse. Hundreds ran -back, for, though they were in no danger, they imagined they were.</p> - -<p>The man was seen to stoop over and strike a match. A little puff of -smoke arose. The crowd watched to see him run back and regain solid<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_275" id="Page_275">275</a></span> -ground. But, as it happened, the first match went out. He had to light -another. This time he managed to kindle the fuse. A little puff of -smoke arose on the damp air. The rain came down harder.</p> - -<p>“It may put the fuse out,” said Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>The man was bending over, watching it. He seemed to be fanning the fuse -to a blaze. Then, all at once, he started on a run toward shore.</p> - -<p>“I guess he’s lighted it,” observed Mr. Newton, looking at his watch.</p> - -<p>There were several anxious minutes of waiting. A thin wreath of smoke -arose from the fuse. The other reporters were scribbling away.</p> - -<p>Suddenly a dull boom sounded. A cloud of rocks and dirt arose from the -bottom of the dam. The waters in the reservoir seemed tremendously -agitated.</p> - -<p>“There’s a hole in the dam!” cried several.</p> - -<p>“No, there isn’t!” said Mr. Newton to Larry. “Here! Take this copy. -It’s another failure! I’ve wired ’em to hold back for an extra. The dam -is liable to go any second now. The explosion only weakened it along -the whole length. Hurry back, Larry.”</p> - -<p>He gave the boy a bundle of copy and Larry, jumping on his wheel, -pedaled off as fast as he could. Several of the other reporters, who -had not thought to provide messengers, started for the telegraph office -on the run.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_276" id="Page_276">276</a></span> -“You’re a foxy one, Newton,” they said. “But you wait! We’ll beat you -yet.”</p> - -<p>“You’re welcome to try,” was Mr. Newton’s answer.</p> - -<p>Larry was making good time, in spite of the rain-soaked roads. He -reached the telegraph office some minutes in advance of the other -reporters, and, as the rule is in regard to press dispatches, the first -to come is the first to be served, Mr. Newton’s stuff went over the -wire ahead of the other dispatches.</p> - -<p>“I can’t promise to send much more,” said the operator, as several of -the reporters came into the office. “Just got word that the waters just -above here are worse than ever. Guess I’ll have to vacate here soon.”</p> - -<p>“Where will you go?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“I’ll take some of the instruments and set up a temporary office on -the high hill back of the town,” was the answer. “The water can’t get -there, and if you’ll get a boat you may be able to bring me your copy.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll get a boat,” said Larry, with a laugh. “But perhaps it will not -be as bad as you think.”</p> - -<p>“It will be worse,” replied the operator, clicking away at his key.</p> - -<p>Larry started back to where Mr. Newton was. On the way he met Peter -Manton, his old rival, bringing some copy from the reporter for whom he -was working.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_277" id="Page_277">277</a></span> -“You think you’re smart with your wheel,” said Peter. “But you can’t -use it much longer. The dam is breaking and you will have to swim.”</p> - -<p>At this news, that the dam was about to give way, Larry put on extra -speed. He wanted to be back in time to get some more copy from Mr. -Newton, who, he knew, would want to send word for the extra.</p> - -<p>As he sped along, and hard enough going it was, he heard a dull boom -over toward the dam. This was followed by excited shouts. Then came a -subdued roar.</p> - -<p>“The dam has gone!” Larry exclaimed.</p> - -<p>An instant later he saw a number of people running toward him, and he -came to a halt.</p> - -<p>“I guess I can’t get down there,” thought the boy. “I wonder where Mr. -Newton is?”</p> - -<p>At that moment he saw the reporter coming toward him on the run.</p> - -<p>“Go back! Go back!” cried Mr. Newton. “The waters are rising fast!”</p> - -<p>“Did the dam break?” asked Larry, wanting to make sure.</p> - -<p>“Of course. A big hole right in the middle. Fortunately a part of it -held, or the flood would be so sudden that we would have had trouble in -getting away. But come on.”</p> - -<p>“Where are we going?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Back to the hotel,” replied Mr. Newton.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_278" id="Page_278">278</a></span> “We’ll be safe there. I want -to get a line off to the paper.”</p> - -<p>“You’ll have to hurry,” said the boy. “The telegraph operator said if -the dam broke he’d have to leave.”</p> - -<p>“Wait, and I’ll scribble a line now,” said the reporter. He hastily -wrote something on a piece of paper, addressed it to the <cite>Leader</cite>, and -gave it to Larry.</p> - -<p>“Take it on a jump now, Larry, my boy!” he cried, and Larry rushed off -on his wheel. “I’ll meet you at the hotel,” called Mr. Newton after him.</p> - -<p>Larry reached the telegraph office just as the operator was leaving it.</p> - -<p>“Wait a minute!” called the boy. “I have some copy for you.”</p> - -<p>“Can’t wait!” exclaimed the telegraph man. “The water’s rising and I’m -going to get out while there’s time.”</p> - -<p>“This will only take you a second,” said Larry. “It’s got to get to the -<cite>Leader</cite>. It tells about the dam breaking. They’re going to get out an -extra!”</p> - -<p>“Well, I wouldn’t do it for anyone else,” said the operator, “but -you’re a plucky boy to come here with the copy when everyone else is -thinking of getting away, so I’ll send the dispatch for you. After this -you may find me in a temporary office in a tent up on the hill.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_279" id="Page_279">279</a></span> -“I’m much obliged to you,” said Larry, handing over the copy. He waited -until he saw the operator send it off, and then the man, taking some of -his instruments with him, left the office.</p> - -<p>As he did so a small stream of water began to run down the middle of -the street.</p> - -<p>“Flood’s coming!” exclaimed the telegrapher. “You were just in time!”</p> - -<p>Then he began to run, and Larry, abandoning his wheel, did likewise, -for he knew because of the formation of the ground that there might be -deep water there soon.</p> - -<p>The rain had stopped once more, and this time it seemed as if it might -let up for some time, as the clouds grew lighter. But that was too late -to prevent the damage by the rising waters, which continued to increase -in depth. Fortunately most of the people in that section of the town -had been given plenty of warning and had left their homes, taking all -their most valued possessions with them.</p> - -<p>However, there were some who lingered too late, and they were now -fleeing with only a few necessaries. They made for the other side of -the place, where the high ground around the hotel offered a chance for -safety.</p> - -<p>Larry and the operator hurried along, the former aiming to reach the -hotel, and the telegrapher to make arrangements to set up a temporary -office. At the hotel Larry found Mr.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_280" id="Page_280">280</a></span> Newton, surrounded by a number of -newspaper men, waiting for him.</p> - -<p>“Did you make it?” asked Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“Just in time. It was the last message,” said the boy.</p> - -<p>“What’s that, Newton?” asked some of his acquaintances.</p> - -<p>“I just sent a wire about the dam bursting,” was the answer.</p> - -<p>“You don’t mean you’ve got another beat on us?”</p> - -<p>“Well, I guess Larry did the biggest part of it,” replied Mr. Newton.</p> - -<p>“Well, you two are a great team,” said some of the other reporters, -disgusted at being beaten again.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_281" id="Page_281">281</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxxiv" id="xxxiv"></a>CHAPTER XXXIV<br /> -<span>UNDER WATER</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">The</span> town was now a scene of wild confusion. The people were nearly out -of their senses with fear, for they were alarmed lest the waters reach -even the high places. Cooler heads did their best to quiet the excited -ones, but it was hard work.</p> - -<p>Boats were plying everywhere, taking people from the second stories -of their houses in some cases, and saving some from possible death by -drowning. The waters, which were now turned into a raging torrent, were -filled with débris brought down from up country.</p> - -<p>Sometimes whole houses or barns would be borne along, and when they -struck a building in Stoneville there was a crash that could be heard -for some distance and the stationary residence would be knocked from -its foundation and carried away.</p> - -<p>The houses of those whom the flood had not reached were thrown open -to the unfortunates. The hotel took in all it could hold, but the -proprietor was obliged to put everyone on short rations, for food was -getting scarce, and the railroad<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_282" id="Page_282">282</a></span> was under water, so no more could be -brought in that way.</p> - -<p>There was plenty of material for newspaper copy now. The reporters, Mr. -Newton included, went out on a tour of investigation, making notes of -what they saw. The men who worked on morning papers were in a quandary -how to get their news off until someone said there was a telegraph -office in the next town, about five miles away over the hills.</p> - -<p>Several of them clubbed together, hired a horse and carriage, and drove -over with their copy.</p> - -<p>“I wonder if I’ll have to do that in the morning,” Mr. Newton said to -Larry.</p> - -<p>“I think I have a better plan,” said the boy.</p> - -<p>“What is it?”</p> - -<p>Then Larry told of how the Stoneville operator was going to open a -temporary office on the hill in a tent.</p> - -<p>“If he does that, in time for us, it will be just the thing,” said Mr. -Newton. “Keep quiet concerning it. Don’t say anything about it to the -other fellows.”</p> - -<p>“Why not?”</p> - -<p>“Because we don’t want them to know it. If they find it out they’ll go -there and file stuff, and ours may be delayed. You must learn, in the -newspaper business, to know everything and tell nothing, especially to -the fellow on the other paper.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_283" id="Page_283">283</a></span> -“I’ll go over the first thing in the morning and find out if he’s -opened his place,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>That night was one of terror. Fortunately there was enough warning -about the bursting of the dam so that most of the people were out -of the way in time, and none was killed. But the property loss was -tremendous. About midnight the waters ceased to rise, but they still -inundated most of the town, and would for some time, since the country -for quite a distance above was covered with the flood.</p> - -<p>Early the next morning Larry got up, dressed, and went downstairs. He -was surprised to find the corridor of the hotel partly filled with -water.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” he asked the clerk.</p> - -<p>“Oh, they tried to drown us out last night,” was the reply.</p> - -<p>“Has the flood reached here?” asked the boy.</p> - -<p>“Take a look out front and you’ll think so,” the man went on.</p> - -<p>Larry looked from the windows. He saw that the street was inundated, -the water being about four feet deep.</p> - -<p>“How am I going to get out?” he asked in dismay.</p> - -<p>“Swim,” said the clerk with a laugh, in spite of the gravity of the -situation. “It’s not very cold. Or you might wait for the flood to go -down.”</p> - -<p>“I haven’t time for that,” said Larry, “and I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_284" id="Page_284">284</a></span> don’t believe I could -swim as far as I intend to go.”</p> - -<p>“There are some fellows outside with boats, and they may take you where -you want to go,” the clerk said.</p> - -<p>“That’s a good idea,” said the boy. “I’ll try it.”</p> - -<p>He went out on the front steps, through the corridor, which contained -about an inch of water. As he reached the front door a rowboat, -propelled by a big man, shot up.</p> - -<p>“Boat?” asked the man, in the manner of one inquiring whether one would -have a cab. “Take you anywhere for half a dollar.”</p> - -<p>Larry mentioned where he wanted to be landed, and got in the boat. The -oarsman said he would take him as near the place on the hill as he -could go.</p> - -<p>“You’ll have to walk the rest of the way,” the improvised ferryman said.</p> - -<p>“I’m willing,” replied the boy.</p> - -<p>He found that the operator had set up a small tent, and was busy over -his instruments, which he had attached to the telegraph line that -passed over the brow of the hill.</p> - -<p>“How soon can you take messages?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Oh, it’s you, eh?” asked the operator. “You were my last customer in -the old place, and you’re the first one in the new.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_285" id="Page_285">285</a></span> -“Will you soon be ready?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“In about an hour,” was the reply.</p> - -<p>The man busied himself over his instruments, connecting them to -batteries he had procured and then adjusting them. Next he climbed a -telegraph pole and “cut in” as it is called on the main line, fastening -the wire from his machines to the regular line. Larry watched him with -interest.</p> - -<p>“I’ll soon be ready for you,” said the man.</p> - -<p>“Then I’ll go back and get some copy,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>He went down to the boat which was waiting for him, and in a little -while found himself back at the hotel. By this time nearly all the -guests were up and the women, especially, were much frightened when -they saw that the place was in the middle of a miniature lake, and that -there was water in the corridor.</p> - -<p>“Don’t be alarmed,” the clerk was saying. “The water is not rising, -and, though it will probably stay here for some time, there is no -danger. We’ll make you as comfortable as we can, but you can’t expect -many comforts.”</p> - -<p>“Have the fires gone out?” asked one man. “My room is cold.”</p> - -<p>“The water has put the fire out in the furnace down in the cellar,” was -the reply, “but we’ve sent for oil stoves, and we’ll be able to give -you a little heat.”</p> - -<p>The clerk’s assurances did much to quiet the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_286" id="Page_286">286</a></span> excited throng, and -then breakfast was announced, though it was not a very liberal meal. -However, there was plenty of good hot coffee and bread and butter.</p> - -<p>“Where have you been?” asked Mr. Newton of Larry.</p> - -<p>“Looking for a telegraph office,” replied the boy in a low tone, for -there were other newspaper men near by.</p> - -<p>“Did you find one?”</p> - -<p>“I did,” and then Larry whispered that the man would take messages -soon. “Get some stuff ready,” he went on, “and I’ll take it to him -before the other fellows locate him.”</p> - -<p>“Good idea,” said Mr. Newton. “I’ll have a bunch of copy ready in about -an hour.”</p> - -<p>He hurried through the meal and went over to a table, where he began -writing at a rapid rate.</p> - -<p>“How you going to get your stuff off?” asked some of the other -reporters.</p> - -<p>“That’s a secret,” replied Mr. Newton good-naturedly as he went on -describing in vigorous language the scenes in the flooded district, for -much more of the town was under water than had been expected would be -covered.</p> - -<p>All about were men plying here and there in boats, saving household -goods, carrying people hither and yon, and taking provisions from the -centers where food had been collected to the different places where the -people were congregated.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_287" id="Page_287">287</a></span> There were one or two naphtha launches, and -any number of rowboats.</p> - -<p>Altogether it made a lively and unusual story. Fortunately there was -no loss of life, though there were many narrow escapes. Many head of -stock, and hundreds of horses and pigs in the country section had been -drowned.</p> - -<p>The breaking of the dam Mr. Newton described more fully than in his -first hasty dispatch, and putting in many exciting incidents he had a -story that he felt sure would be read with interest when it was printed -in the <cite>Leader</cite>.</p> - -<p>“Now to get it on the wire ahead of the other fellows,” he remarked to -himself, as he folded up the copy and gave it to Larry.</p> - -<p>“Now don’t let any of the others find out where you are going,” -cautioned Mr. Newton to the boy. “Try and fool them. Have the man row -you in a different direction, and then circle about and get to the -telegraph tent. Do you think you can do it?”</p> - -<p>“I guess so,” replied Larry. “I don’t believe the other reporters know -where the tent is. You can’t see it from the hotel, and they haven’t -gone out very far.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” replied Mr. Newton. “Come back as soon as you can. Here is -some money to pay the boatman with.”</p> - -<p>Larry had donned his rubber boots, but, as it was not raining, he had -no need to hoist his umbrella.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_288" id="Page_288">288</a></span> It seemed at last that the storm had -ceased, though the waters had not yet begun to recede.</p> - -<p>Larry walked through the damp corridor, trying not to seem in a hurry -or as if he was going anywhere. He thought he had succeeded, but, just -as he was about to get into the same boat he had hired before, he saw -Peter Manton come hurrying out. Peter had a bundle of copy in his hand, -and was, evidently, going to look for a telegraph office. He glared at -Larry.</p> - -<p>“Here’s where we beat you,” sneered Peter.</p> - -<p>Larry wondered whether Peter had discovered where the telegraph office -was. If he knew, Larry thought there would be no use in trying to fool -him by taking a round-about course. If he did not, then there was a -chance of Larry reaching it first and getting Mr. Newton’s copy on the -wire.</p> - -<p>“Row me to the telegraph office,” was the order Larry heard Peter give -to a boatman he had engaged.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know where there is one,” the man said.</p> - -<p>“Well, row about until you find one,” said Peter, with as much airs as -though he was a reporter instead of a copy boy. “When you find it I’ll -send this stuff.”</p> - -<p>The man started off, rowing at random. Larry waited a while, and then, -telling his boatman<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_289" id="Page_289">289</a></span> to send the craft in the opposite direction from -that in which the telegraph tent was, he too started away.</p> - -<p>“We mustn’t let them find out where we’re going,” said Larry. “I must -get to the office first.”</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_290" id="Page_290">290</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxxv" id="xxxv"></a>CHAPTER XXXV<br /> -<span>THE RACE</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">In</span> a little while the boat containing Peter was out of sight around the -corner of the street. Larry thought it would be a good time to start in -the right direction toward the telegraph office. Accordingly he told -the man at the oars to head the craft the other way.</p> - -<p>“I’ll bet they’re up to some trick,” the man said. “The fellow rowing -that boat is a foxy chap. I think he suspects something.”</p> - -<p>“Well, we’ll give him a race if we have to,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>If Larry had not been so intent on his errand he would have been -interested in the strange sights all about him. The flooded city was -alive with boats rowed or being propelled in all directions.</p> - -<p>The people seemed to have gotten over their first fear, and, though -there was much discomfort, they were making the best of circumstances. -A large number of houses were under water to the second stories, and -the families were living on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_291" id="Page_291">291</a></span> upper floors. A corps of men brought -them food and supplies.</p> - -<p>Fortunately the weather was mild for November, and there was little -real suffering. There was not much food, but, now that the waters had -ceased rising, trains were being sent over the railroad bearing goods -of various sorts for the relief of the homeless ones.</p> - -<p>On and on Larry’s boatman rowed him. It was quite a distance to the -foot of the hill on which the telegraph tent was located, and progress -was slow while they were threading their way in and out among the -inundated streets. Care had to be taken, also, not to be struck with -the floating débris that was swirling along on the current.</p> - -<p>“Look behind you,” said the boatman suddenly to Larry, who was in the -stern, facing the oarsman. The boy turned.</p> - -<p>There, coming after them, as fast as the man could bend to the sweeps, -was the boat containing Peter. The craft was forging through the water -at a rapid pace and would be up to them in a short time.</p> - -<p>“They’re following us!” exclaimed Larry’s rower.</p> - -<p>“I guess they’ve found out where the telegraph office is,” said Larry, -“and they’re going to try and get there first.”</p> - -<p>“Then it’s to be a race,” replied Tony, Larry’s man. “Well, Jim Dexter -will find I’m as good a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_292" id="Page_292">292</a></span> hand at the oars as he is!” With this Tony -braced himself and began taking long strokes that sent the boat through -the water at a good clip.</p> - -<p>“Mind where you steer now,” cautioned Tony to Larry. “Don’t run us on a -log or a floating house and I’ll get you to the telegraph place first.”</p> - -<p>“I hope you do,” replied Larry, as he took a firm grasp of the rudder. -“If the <cite>Scorcher</cite> beats the <cite>Leader</cite> I’m liable to lose my job, and so -is Mr. Newton.”</p> - -<p>The other boat was almost up to them now. Larry could hear Peter urging -Jim to greater exertion as the boy sat in the sternsheets and steered, -as Larry was doing.</p> - -<p>“Ten dollars if you beat ’em!” Peter exclaimed as his boat crept up -inch by inch, until it was almost even with Larry’s craft.</p> - -<p>“I don’t need any ten dollars to beat him,” said Tony, with a nod at -Jim. “He and I aren’t any too friendly and I’d like to wallop him, just -for the looks of the thing, to say nothing of helping you out.”</p> - -<p>“Thanks,” spoke Larry. “I haven’t ten dollars to offer you, but I’ve -no doubt Mr. Newton will pay you well if you get me to the telegraph -office first.”</p> - -<p>The race was now on in earnest. The boats were side by side, and not -far apart. Both were headed for the hill, on the summit of which could -be seen the white tent where the telegraph office<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_293" id="Page_293">293</a></span> was located. Peter -had played a trick on Larry, by pretending to be hunting for the place. -As a matter of fact he merely had Jim row about until they saw in which -direction Larry’s boat went. Then he followed.</p> - -<p>They were now pretty well clear of the town, and were going over -flooded fields. The water was filled with logs and stumps of trees, -planks, -<a name="bits" id="bits"></a><ins title="Original has 'pits'">bits</ins> -of barnyard wreckage, and occasionally the dead body of -a horse or cow. It required careful steerage to avoid hitting these -objects, and in consequence the speed was not as great as it might -otherwise have been.</p> - -<p>The two men, who were old-time rivals, bent to the oars until the stout -ash handles almost broke. The blades swirled through the water and the -bows made ripples and foam as both craft forged ahead.</p> - -<p>For a while the two boats were almost on even terms. They raced along -not ten feet apart, and so nearly alike did Jim and Tony row that it -looked as if the two were but one craft. But, little by little Tony -began to pull ahead. He put a little more force into his strokes and -took longer ones, while Jim was rowing in a rather ragged fashion.</p> - -<p>Once Jim caught a “crab,” and nearly went overboard. This gave Tony a -big advantage, and he got almost a length ahead. However, he lost this -lead in a little while, for Larry, by some mischance,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_294" id="Page_294">294</a></span> hit a log a -glancing blow and Tony had to stop rowing in order not to upset.</p> - -<p>“Be careful,” cautioned Tony. “Another one like that and we’ll lose the -race.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll be careful,” replied Larry, ashamed of his error.</p> - -<p>Once again the two boats were about in line. The rowers were tiring, -however, and could not go so fast. Tony, who was an old hand at the -oars, stuck to his task with grim determination, and soon he was half a -length ahead of his rival.</p> - -<p>By this time a crowd of people on the shore, which they were fast -approaching, were aware that something unusual was under way. They came -down close to the water’s edge to see the outcome of the race. The -boats were now a little over a quarter of a mile away from the land.</p> - -<p>“They’re beating us!” exclaimed Peter, as he saw Larry’s boat pulling -steadily ahead. “Can’t you row faster, Jim?”</p> - -<p>“I’m doing the best I can,” was the reply, but Jim gritted his teeth -and tried to get a little more power out of his strokes. It was -seemingly useless, however, for Tony with the regularity of clockwork -was sending his boat through the water at a good clip.</p> - -<p>“I can’t let him beat me!” exclaimed Peter, while an ugly look stole -over his face. “If I don’t get my copy there first I’ll be discharged. -I’ve got to beat him, by fair means or foul.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_295" id="Page_295">295</a></span> -The distance between the boats was fast widening. Larry’s was -three-quarters of a length ahead now.</p> - -<p>“I’ve got to do it!” exclaimed Peter in a low tone.</p> - -<p>Then, with a sudden yank on the tiller ropes, he shifted the rudder so -that the bow of his boat was pointed straight at Larry’s craft.</p> - -<p>“Look out!” cried Tony, who saw the movement. “You’ll upset us!”</p> - -<p>Larry, hearing the shout, turned to see Peter’s boat racing toward him. -He tried to steer out of the way, but there was no chance. An instant -later the two boats came together with a crash. The gunwale of Larry’s -boat was cracked, and the force of the impact was so heavy that his -craft careened until the water came over the other rail.</p> - -<p>“We’re upsetting!” cried Tony, throwing himself to one side in an -endeavor to prevent what seemed certain to happen.</p> - -<p>Nor could he avoid it, for a second later the boat turned turtle, -throwing the two occupants into the water.</p> - -<p>“You did that on purpose!” cried Tony, as he began to strike out -vigorously toward Peter’s boat.</p> - -<p>“It was an accident!” cried Peter, somewhat alarmed at the outcome of -his mean trick.</p> - -<p>“Can you swim?” asked Tony of Larry, who had sunk once, but who soon -bobbed up again.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_296" id="Page_296">296</a></span> -“Yes—I—can!” gasped the boy. “I -had—to—kick—my—rubber—boots—off—though!”</p> - -<p>They both struck out for Peter’s boat, expecting that the occupants -would stop and assist them. But this was not Peter’s idea. Jim would -have stopped rowing and gone to the rescue of those in the water, -but Peter steered the boat to one side and the momentum carried it a -considerable distance away.</p> - -<p>“Aren’t you going to help them?” asked Jim.</p> - -<p>“No!” snapped Peter. “You keep on rowing. We must get to the telegraph -office first! I’ve got to beat them!”</p> - -<p>“But they may drown!”</p> - -<p>“No danger. They can both swim, and they can cling to their boat until -we come back. Someone will come out from shore for them. See, some -boats are starting already.”</p> - -<p>This was so, several small craft putting out as soon as those on shore -saw the accident happen.</p> - -<p>“Now you row on!” commanded Peter. “I hired you to take me to the -telegraph office and we haven’t time to stop and rescue people.”</p> - -<p>“Well, of all the mean—” began Jim, and then he stopped. He realized -that Larry and Tony were in no particular danger, but he felt that -they should be taken into his boat. However, he wanted to earn the ten -dollars Peter had promised him.</p> - -<p>“Are you going to leave us?” called Tony.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_297" id="Page_297">297</a></span> -“It ain’t my doings,” called back Jim. “He won’t let me stop.”</p> - -<p>“Then he’ll get his stuff to the telegraph office first,” said Larry. -“He’ll beat me!”</p> - -<p>He and Tony were clinging to the keel of their overturned boat.</p> - -<p>“Maybe we can get this right side up and catch them,” suggested Tony.</p> - -<p>“No, it’s too late,” said Larry sorrowfully. “They have too much of a -start.”</p> - -<p>It seemed so, for Peter’s boat was now about a quarter of a mile from -shore, and Jim was rowing fast.</p> - -<p>“Shall we swim in or wait until someone comes out and picks us up?” -asked Tony.</p> - -<p>“Might as well stay here,” replied Larry. “It’s hard swimming in your -clothes.”</p> - -<p>His heart was full of bitterness, both at the mean trick Peter had -played, and at the thought of being beaten, for he knew that there -would not be time for the telegraph operator to send both Peter’s copy -and his also in time for the afternoon paper. The <cite>Leader</cite> would be -beaten.</p> - -<p>“Hark! What’s that?” asked Tony, as they moved about to get better -positions in grasping the overturned boat.</p> - -<p>“Sounded like a whistle,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“It was a whistle! A motor boat is coming toward us!” cried Tony.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_298" id="Page_298">298</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxxvi" id="xxxvi"></a>CHAPTER XXXVI<br /> -<span>LARRY SCORES A BIG BEAT</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Larry</span> looked up. There, bearing down on them, was a swift gasolene -launch, one of several that had been doing rescue work about the -flooded town. The man at the wheel had her headed for the upset rowboat.</p> - -<p>“They’re going to pick us up!” cried Tony.</p> - -<p>“But it will be too late,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“Maybe not, that’s a powerful craft, and maybe they’ll get you to shore -ahead of that little skunk!” spoke Tony.</p> - -<p>“Stand by to be taken off!” cried the captain of the motor boat.</p> - -<p>With a graceful curve the craft swung up to where Larry and Tony clung -to the keel of their boat. The man at the wheel pulled a lever and the -screw reversed, though the engines did not stop. The motor boat slowed -up, and, as it slowly passed by, the two in the water grasped the -gunwale, which was low, and pulled themselves aboard, before the craft -had come to a stop.</p> - -<p>“Saw you upset,” said the motor boat’s captain, “and I headed right for -you.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_299" id="Page_299">299</a></span> -“We didn’t upset, we were run down,” said Tony, “and there goes the -mean chap that did it,” he added, pointing to Peter’s boat.</p> - -<p>“Can you put us ashore in a hurry?” asked Larry. “I must get some press -dispatches to the telegraph office. I want to beat the boy in that -boat. We were beating him, but he ran his boat into ours and upset us. -Then he wouldn’t stop to pick us up.”</p> - -<p>“So you want to get ashore first, eh?” asked the owner of the motor -craft. “What paper are you from?”</p> - -<p>“I’m with Mr. Newton of the <cite>Leader</cite>,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“What, Harvey Newton?” asked the man.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Larry.</p> - -<p>“Well, I’d do a good bit for Harvey Newton,” the captain went on. “He -was at our motor boat races in New York bay last summer, and I found -him a good friend.”</p> - -<p>“Do you think you can get me ashore first?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Well, he’s got a pretty good start,” said the captain, “but I never -saw anything that could beat the <i>Porpoise</i> if you gave her half a -show. We’ll see what we can do. Can you steer while I attend to the -engines?”</p> - -<p>“I guess so,” replied Larry.</p> - -<p>“Better let me,” put in Tony. “I know the lay of the land better than -you do.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_300" id="Page_300">300</a></span> -“Go ahead then,” said the captain. “I’ll speed her up for all she’s -worth.”</p> - -<p>He went back to the stern. The steady chug-chug of the motor, which had -not ceased, was now increased threefold as the captain shifted various -levers, let more gasolene into the cylinders and advanced the spark. -Then, with Tony at the wheel, the <i>Porpoise</i> shot ahead, in an attempt -to beat Peter to the shore.</p> - -<p>How the swift craft cut through the water! A big wave arose on either -side of the bow. The motors were exploding like a battery of gatling -guns as the captain, in the role of engineer, opened the exhaust to -clean out the cylinders. Then, shutting it down, the engine throbbed -like a big turbine wheel under heavy pressure.</p> - -<p>Nearer and nearer to the shore the craft forged. Peter, looking back, -saw that Larry and Tony had been rescued and, in the fast boat, were -bearing down on him.</p> - -<p><a name="row" id="row"></a>“Row! Row!” he cried to Jim. “They’re going to run us down!”</p> - -<p>“Don’t worry, they’re not as mean as you are,” said Jim.</p> - -<p>“Then they’ll beat us ashore!” yelled Peter.</p> - -<p>“I shouldn’t wonder if they did,” was Jim’s cool reply. “I’m doing my -best, but I can’t beat the <i>Porpoise</i>. She’s the fastest boat around -here.”</p> - -<p>Peter’s craft was now about three hundred feet from the shore. There -was a big crowd waiting to see the outcome of the affair.</p> - -<div class="figcenter width400"> -<img src="images/p300.jpg" width="400" height="623" alt="" /> -<div class="caption clear-both">“ROW! ROW! THEY ARE GOING TO RUN US DOWN”</div> -<div class="float-left"><cite>From Office Boy to Reporter</cite></div> -<div class="float-right"><a href="#row">Page 300</a></div> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_301" id="Page_301">301</a></span></p> -<p>On came the <i>Porpoise</i>, going like a race horse. Larry stood behind -Tony, who grasped the spokes of the steering wheel with a firm grip, -and kept the craft in a straight course.</p> - -<p>“Will we beat ’em?” asked Larry in a strained voice.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know! I hope so,” said Tony as he shook his head to get the -water, that was dripping from his hair, out of his eyes.</p> - -<p>The engines seemed to increase their speed. They throbbed like the -heart of an athlete at the end of a two-mile run. Then, as the muffler -was cut out, the explosions came with deafening power.</p> - -<p>Closer and closer to the rowboat came the motor craft. Jim was pulling -with all his strength at the oars. Now his boat was but a hundred feet -from shore. But, like an eagle swooping down, the <i>Porpoise</i> was after -him.</p> - -<p>“Get ready to jump!” called the captain. “Put her broadside to the -shore,” he added to Tony. “We can’t stop without ramming the mud unless -you do.”</p> - -<p>“Aye, aye, sir!” called Tony tersely.</p> - -<p>Then, in a smother of foam, and passing so close that the wash rocked, -and nearly upset the rowboat, the motor craft passed her, and shot up -along shore.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_302" id="Page_302">302</a></span> -The captain reversed the screw, and the blades churned up the water -until it seemed that a small volcano was beneath the waves.</p> - -<p>“Jump and run for it!” the owner of the <i>Porpoise</i> called to Larry.</p> - -<p>The boy needed no second bidding. Over the side he went, while the -craft was still moving at good speed. He jumped into about two feet of -water and then, reaching into his pocket to see if his precious copy -was safe, he started on a run up the hill toward the telegraph office. -The crowd set up a cheer, though they did not know what for, except -that there had been a race and someone had won.</p> - -<p>The waves created by the passage of the <i>Porpoise</i> prevented Jim from -rowing steadily, and it was several minutes later before he was able to -land Peter. The boy jumped ashore and started to run after Larry.</p> - -<p>“Here!” cried Jim, catching hold of him. “Where’s my ten dollars?”</p> - -<p>“Pay you when I come back,” said Peter.</p> - -<p>“You’ll pay me now,” said Jim, taking a firm grip on the boy’s -shoulder. “I’ve earned my money and I want it.”</p> - -<p>“There you go!” exclaimed Peter, throwing down a bill and wrenching -himself free. Then he started up the hill after his rival.</p> - -<p>But Larry had too good a start to be beaten now. Straight toward the -tent he dashed, giving<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_303" id="Page_303">303</a></span> but one glance behind to see that Peter was far -in the rear. All he needed to do, he knew, was to get his copy into the -hands of the operator first. The rule of precedence would then prevail.</p> - -<p>“There!” gasped Larry, a few minutes later, as, panting from his run, -he dashed into the tent. “There’s some copy. Rush it!”</p> - -<p>“Looks as if you’d been rushing it,” commented the man, with a glance -at Larry. “Why, what in the world is the matter with it? It’s all wet.”</p> - -<p>“I fell overboard,” said Larry. “But you can read it, can’t you?”</p> - -<p>“I reckon so. Lucky it’s in pencil instead of ink. If it was ink, it -would have run in the water.”</p> - -<p>Fortunately Mr. Newton had used tough and heavy paper to write on, -and Larry had folded the copy tightly and placed it inside a leather -pocketbook, so that, though the sheets were pretty damp, their short -immersion in the water had not harmed them.</p> - -<p>Three minutes after Larry had “filed” his copy Peter came dashing in. -He flung down a package of paper.</p> - -<p>“Here! Get that right on the wire!” he ordered in an insolent tone.</p> - -<p>“You’ll have to wait,” said the operator coolly. “This gentleman had -his in ahead of you, and the rule here is ‘first come first served.’”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_304" id="Page_304">304</a></span> -“I’ll give you five dollars if you send mine first,” said Peter.</p> - -<p>“Look here, you little whipper-snapper!” the operator exclaimed. “I -want you to understand you can’t bribe me. I wouldn’t send yours first -for fifty dollars. Now you get out of this tent. You can leave your -copy, and I’ll send it after I get this batch off. But the <cite>Leader</cite> -stuff goes first!”</p> - -<p>Peter, with an angry glance at Larry, slunk out.</p> - -<p>“I’d like to give him a good switching,” muttered the operator, as he -began to work his telegraph instruments preparatory to getting Larry’s -copy off. “The idea of trying to bribe me!”</p> - -<p>Larry, after seeing that Mr. Newton’s story was safe, turned to go back.</p> - -<p>“What’s your hurry?” asked the operator. “Tell me what happened. I’ll -have to wait a little while until I get a clear wire.”</p> - -<p>Then Larry related the story of the race with Peter, and told of the -latter’s mean trick.</p> - -<p>“Well, I’m mighty glad you beat him,” said the operator. “This story -will set New York by the ears, and your paper will be the only one to -get it. All the wires are down but mine, and it will take me nearly -all the morning to get this stuff off. That will make it too late for -any of the <cite>Scorcher’s</cite> copy to get to the office in time for to-day. -You’ll score a big beat all right.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_305" id="Page_305">305</a></span> -And so Larry did. He did not learn of it until some days later, -however, as they did not hear from the <cite>Leader</cite> office until that time, -because of the difficulty in getting messages and mail through.</p> - -<p>That night, in their room at the hotel, Larry told Mr. Newton the story -of the race.</p> - -<p>“You’re too modest,” the reporter declared. “I heard all about it from -my friend of the <i>Porpoise</i>. If this don’t result in something nice for -you when we get back I’ll miss my guess. By the way, there’s a letter -for you.”</p> - -<p>“I hope it’s from mother,” exclaimed Larry. “She hasn’t written in two -days.”</p> - -<p>It was a letter from home, and contained good news, for it said that -Lucy was doing finely, and the doctor expected she would soon be well -and able to walk.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah!” cried Larry. “This is better than getting a beat!”</p> - -<p>“They’re both good,” said Mr. Newton, smiling.</p> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="divider" /> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_306" id="Page_306">306</a></span> -</div> - -<h2><a name="xxxvii" id="xxxvii"></a>CHAPTER XXXVII<br /> -<span>LARRY’S ADVANCEMENT</span></h2> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Almost</span> as rapidly as it had risen the flood went down. The storm -ceased and the waters, finding many places to run to, soon disposed of -themselves. The day after Larry won the race that was to mean so much -to him the part of the town around the hotel was almost free from the -flood.</p> - -<p>“The worst is over,” said Mr. Newton. “We’ll be going back home soon.”</p> - -<p>“We can’t go any too soon to suit me,” said Larry. “I want to see my -mother and Lucy and the others.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t blame you,” spoke the reporter. “I’ll be glad to get back to -New York myself.”</p> - -<p>They remained in Stoneville two days longer, and each day Mr. Newton -sent a graphic story of the flood. The townspeople were returning to -the homes they had deserted. Much damage had been done, but help came -pouring in from every side.</p> - -<p>Trains began to run, and the mails, that had been interrupted, resumed -their service. Larry<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_307" id="Page_307">307</a></span> and Mr. Newton received several copies of the -<cite>Leader</cite>, containing the story which Larry had so successfully raced -to get to the telegraph office. Copies of other New York papers, of -the same date were also received, but none of them had more than a few -lines about the flood and burst dam, while the <cite>Leader’s</cite> story covered -a whole page under big headlines.</p> - -<p>On the evening of the second day, after the big beat, Mr. Newton -received a telegram from Mr. Emberg. It read:</p> - -<blockquote> - -<p>“Congratulations to you and Larry. Come home. Associated press -will cover remainder of the story.”</p></blockquote> - -<p>“Get ready!” exclaimed Mr. Newton to Larry. “We’re going home -to-morrow!”</p> - -<p>Several of the other special correspondents had already left -Stoneville. Some accompanied Mr. Newton and Larry the next morning.</p> - -<p>“Well, you put it all over us,” said one of them to the <cite>Leader</cite> -reporter.</p> - -<p>“With Larry’s help I did,” replied Mr. Newton. “If I hadn’t had him -along, I never could have done it.”</p> - -<p>“Larry’s all right,” was the immediate and hearty response.</p> - -<p>Larry thought he had never been on a train that moved so slowly. It -seemed to crawl along.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_308" id="Page_308">308</a></span> A flying machine would have been too slow for -him, so eager was he to get home.</p> - -<p>But at last he arrived in New York. It seemed good to get away from the -sight of dirty brown water, sorrowful people, and the constant rain -that had been his portion for a week.</p> - -<p>“I’ll see you at the office in the morning,” said Mr. Newton. -“Good-night.”</p> - -<p>“Good-night,” called Larry as he ran after a car.</p> - -<p>He reached home. Into the house he burst with:</p> - -<p>“Here I am, mother! How are you? How’s Lucy? How are Mary and Jimmy?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, Larry, Larry!” exclaimed his mother, throwing her arms around him.</p> - -<p>Mary and Jimmy crowded around their brother, clamoring for kisses, -while Jimmy wanted to hear all about the flood.</p> - -<p>“How’s Lucy?” asked Larry again, as soon as he could quiet the -youngster.</p> - -<p>“Doing finely,” replied the nurse, coming into the room. “We have a -surprise for you.”</p> - -<p>“What is it?” asked Larry.</p> - -<p>“Come and show him, Lucy,” said the nurse.</p> - -<p>Then, from her room, came the girl. Not as she had used to walk, -hobbling along like a cripple, but straight and upright. With firm, -though slow step, she approached her brother.</p> - -<p>“Lucy! Lucy!” cried Larry.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_309" id="Page_309">309</a></span> -“Oh, Larry!” the girl exclaimed. “Aren’t you glad? I’m well again! I -can walk like other girls! Soon I’ll be able to run!”</p> - -<p>“Really?” asked Larry, hardly able to believe the good news, and trying -hard to keep back the tears.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” the nurse said. “She did much better than we expected. Dr. -Carrolton took the plaster cast off three days ago, but we didn’t send -you any word, for fear of a disappointment. Lucy is entirely cured.”</p> - -<p>There was a happy household in the Dexter apartment that night. Several -neighbors, who had heard the good news, called, and there was general -rejoicing that the sick girl was well.</p> - -<p>“Now tell us all about yourself,” said Mrs. Dexter to Larry. “Your -letters were only notes.”</p> - -<p>“I didn’t have time to write much,” the boy said.</p> - -<p>Then he told them the main things that had occurred since he had been -away.</p> - -<p>“We read all about it in the paper,” said Lucy. “I was proud of you, -Larry.”</p> - -<p>Larry reached the office early the next morning. He found Mr. Newton at -his desk.</p> - -<p>“Want to go off on some more assignments?” asked the reporter.</p> - -<p>“I shouldn’t mind,” replied Larry with a smile.</p> - -<p>One by one the other reporters came in. They<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_310" id="Page_310">310</a></span> laughed and joked with -Mr. Newton. Some of them talked with Larry.</p> - -<p>“Gee! But you had a swell time,” said Bud, gazing at Larry with envious -eyes.</p> - -<p>Mr. Emberg was a little late that morning, and none of the reporters -went out until he came in. When he did arrive he nodded a greeting to -all in general.</p> - -<p>“Glad to see you, Newton,” the city editor said. “Get back all right?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> - -<p>“You and Larry did good work. Where’s Larry?”</p> - -<p>“Here,” replied the copy boy.</p> - -<p>“Oh!” said Mr. Emberg, with a queer little smile playing over his -features. Then, taking Larry by the hand, the city editor said:</p> - -<p>“Gentlemen of the staff of the <cite>Leader</cite>, let me introduce you to our -latest member, Mr. Larry Dexter.”</p> - -<p>For a moment there was a silence. Larry looked all around on a circle -of smiling faces.</p> - -<p>“What does it mean?” he asked of the city editor.</p> - -<p>“It means that from now on you’re a regular reporter on this paper,” -replied Mr. Emberg. “We’re proud of you, Larry, and this is the only -way we can show it. You’ve earned your advance if anyone ever did. The -work you did at the flood, particularly in scoring the big beat, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_311" id="Page_311">311</a></span> -the other things you’ve done, prove that you are a real newspaper man, -which is a rare sort of an individual. Let me congratulate you.”</p> - -<p>He shook hands with Larry, who was blushing like a girl.</p> - -<p>And that was how Larry Dexter rose from a copy boy to be a regular -reporter. Of his further adventures, and he had many, you may read in -the next volume of this series which will be called “Larry Dexter, -Reporter; Or, Strange Adventures in a Great City.” There will be told -of how he went on in his chosen field, and how he made a name and fame -for himself and his paper, and also of how he again brought to light -the old deed for land in the Bronx and found it of great value.</p> - -<p>“Let’s all shake hands with Larry,” called one of the reporters, and -they filed up and gave their best wishes to the former copy boy.</p> - -<p>And here we will leave Larry for the present, wishing him well.</p> - - -<p class="center p120 mt3">THE END</p> - - - - -<div class="section"> -<hr class="divider" /> -</div> -<div class="container"> -<p class="center p160">The Famous Rover Boys Series</p> - -<p class="center">By ARTHUR -<a name="M" id="M"></a><ins title="Original has 'W'">M.</ins> WINFIELD</p> - -<p class="center">Each volume is hailed with delight by boys and girls everywhere. -12mo. Cloth. Handsomely printed and illustrated.</p> - -<p class="center"><strong>Price, 60 Cents per Volume. Postpaid.</strong></p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS DOWN EAST</p> -<p class="nmt nmb">Or, The Struggle for the Stanhope Fortune</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">Old enemies try again to injure our friends.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS AT COLLEGE</p> -<p class="nmt nmb">Or, The Right Road and the Wrong</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">Brimming over with good nature and excitement.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS ON TREASURE ISLE</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, The Strange Cruise of the -Steam Yacht</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">A search for treasure; a particularly fascinating -volume.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS ON THE FARM</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, The Last Days at Putnam Hall</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">The boys find a mysterious cave used -by freight thieves.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS IN SOUTHERN WATERS</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, The Deserted Steam Yacht</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">A trip to the coast of Florida.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS ON THE PLAINS</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, The Mystery of Red Rock Ranch</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">Relates adventures on the mighty Mississippi River.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS ON THE RIVER</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, The Search for the Missing</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">Houseboat The Ohio River is the theme of this spirited story.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS IN CAMP</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, The Rivals of Pine Island</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">At the annual school encampment.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS ON LAND AND SEA</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, The Crusoes of Seven Islands</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">Full of strange and surprising adventures.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS IN THE MOUNTAINS</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, A Hunt for Fame and Fortune</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">The boys in the Adirondacks at a Winter camp.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS ON THE GREAT LAKES</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, The Secret of the Island -Cave</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">A story of a remarkable Summer outing; full of fun.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS OUT WEST</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, The Search for a Lost Mine</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">A graphic description of the mines of the -great Rockies.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS IN THE JUNGLE</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, Stirring Adventures in Africa</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">The boys journey to the Dark Continent in search -of their father.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS ON THE OCEAN</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, A Chase for a Fortune</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">From school to the Atlantic Ocean.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE ROVER BOYS AT SCHOOL</p> -<p class="nmt nmb"> Or, The Cadets of Putnam Hall</p> -<p class="nmt indent2">The doings of Dick, Tom, and Sam Rover.</p> - -<hr class="full" /> -<p class="center p120"><strong>GROSSET & DUNLAP—NEW YORK</strong></p> -<hr class="double" /> -</div> - - -<div class="section"> -</div> -<div class="container"> -<p class="center p160">The Putnam Hall Series</p> - -<p class="center">Companion Stories to the Famous Rover Boys Series</p> - -<p class="center">By ARTHUR M. WINFIELD</p> - -<p>Open-air pastimes have always been popular with boys, and should always -be encouraged, as they provide healthy recreation both for the body and -the mind. These books mingle adventure and fact, and will appeal to -every manly boy.</p> - -<p class="center">12mo. Handsomely printed and illustrated.</p> - -<p class="center"><strong>Price, 60 Cents Per Volume, Postpaid.</strong></p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE PUTNAM HALL ENCAMPMENT</p> -<p class="nmt">Or, The Secret of the Old Mill</p> - -<p>A story full of vim and vigor, telling what the cadets did during -the summer encampment. * * * and among other things their visit to -a mysterious old mill, said to be haunted. The book has a wealth of -healthy fun in it.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE PUTNAM HALL REBELLION</p> -<p class="nmt">Or, The Rival Runaways</p> - -<p>The boys had good reasons for running away during Captain Putnam’s -absence. They had plenty of fun, and several queer adventures.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE PUTNAM HALL CHAMPIONS</p> -<p class="nmt">Or, Bound to Win Out</p> - -<p>In this new tale the Putnam Hall Cadets show what they can do in -various keen rivalries on the athletic field and elsewhere. There is -one victory which leads to a most unlooked-for discovery.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE PUTNAM HALL CADETS</p> -<p class="nmt">Or, Good Times in School and Out</p> - -<p>The cadets are lively, flesh-and-blood fellows, bound to make friends -from the start. There are some keen rivalries, in school and out, and -something is told of a remarkable midnight feast and a hazing that had -an unlooked for ending.</p> - -<p class="noi nmb">THE PUTNAM HALL RIVALS</p> -<p class="nmt">Or, Fun and Sport Afloat and Ashore</p> - -<p>It is a lively, rattling, breezy story of school life in this country, -written by one who knows all about its ways, its snowball fights, its -baseball matches, its pleasures and its perplexities, its glorious -excitements, its rivalries, and its chilling disappointments.</p> - -<p class="center p110"><strong>Other Volumes in Preparation.</strong></p> - -<hr class="full" /> -<p class="center p120"><strong>GROSSET & DUNLAP—NEW YORK</strong></p> -<hr class="double" /> -</div> - - - - -<div class="section"> -<div class="tn"> -<p class="center">Transcriber’s Note:</p> - -<p class="noi">Punctuation has been standardised. Hyphenation and spelling have been -retained as they appear in the original publication. Changes have been -made as follows:</p> - -<ul> -<li>Page 24<br /> -that it would he useless to try <i>changed to</i><br /> -that it would <a href="#be">be</a> useless to try</li> - -<li>Page 64<br /> -floor tumbed a number of yellow sheets <i>changed to</i><br /> -floor <a href="#tumbled">tumbled</a> a number of yellow sheets</li> - -<li>Page 74<br /> -be only to glad <i>changed to</i><br /> -be only <a href="#too">too</a> glad</li> - -<li>Page 90<br /> -knew he had had hit Peter <i>changed to</i><br /> -knew he <a href="#had">had</a> hit Peter</li> - -<li>Page 99<br /> -been a number such <i>changed to</i><br /> -been a number <a href="#of">of</a> such</li> - -<li>Page 118<br /> -little ahead of happening <i>changed to</i><br /> -little ahead of <a href="#the">the</a> happening</li> - -<li>Page 158<br /> -was no burgular attachment <i>changed to</i><br /> -was no <a href="#burglar">burglar</a> attachment</li> - -<li>Page 159<br /> -forth from the window Harry <i>changed to</i><br /> -forth from the window <a href="#Larry">Larry</a></li> - -<li>Page 226<br /> -I’ll bet’s this is it <i>changed to</i><br /> -I’ll <a href="#bet">bet</a> this is it</li> - -<li>Page 293<br /> -pits of barnyard wreckage <i>changed to</i><br /> -<a href="#bits">bits</a> of barnyard wreckage</li> - -<li>First page of book advertisements<br /> -By ARTHUR W. WINFIELD <i>changed to</i><br /> -By ARTHUR <a href="#M">M.</a> WINFIELD</li> -</ul> -</div> -</div> - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's From Office Boy to Reporter, by Howard R. Garis - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FROM OFFICE BOY TO REPORTER *** - -***** This file should be named 60456-h.htm or 60456-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/6/0/4/5/60456/ - -Produced by David Edwards and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions -will be renamed. - -Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no -one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation -(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without -permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, -set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to -copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to -protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project -Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you -charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you -do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the -rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose -such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and -research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do -practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is -subject to the trademark license, especially commercial -redistribution. - - - -*** START: FULL LICENSE *** - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project -Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at -http://gutenberg.org/license). - - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy -all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. -If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the -terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or -entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement -and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" -or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the -collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an -individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are -located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from -copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative -works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg -are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project -Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by -freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of -this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with -the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by -keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project -Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in -a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check -the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement -before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or -creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project -Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning -the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United -States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate -access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently -whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, -copied or distributed: - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org/license - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived -from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is -posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied -and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees -or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work -with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the -work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 -through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the -Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or -1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional -terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked -to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the -permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any -word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or -distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than -"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version -posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), -you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a -copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon -request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other -form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided -that - -- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is - owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he - has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the - Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments - must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you - prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax - returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and - sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the - address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to - the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." - -- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or - destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium - and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of - Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any - money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days - of receipt of the work. - -- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set -forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from -both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael -Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the -Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm -collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain -"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or -corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual -property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a -computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by -your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with -your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with -the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a -refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity -providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to -receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy -is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further -opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER -WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO -WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. -If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the -law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be -interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by -the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any -provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance -with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, -promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, -harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, -that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do -or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm -work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any -Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. - - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers -including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists -because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from -people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. -To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 -and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive -Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at -http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent -permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. -Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered -throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at -809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email -business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact -information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official -page at http://pglaf.org - -For additional contact information: - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To -SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any -particular state visit http://pglaf.org - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. -To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate - - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm -concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared -with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project -Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. - - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. -unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily -keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. - - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: - - http://www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/60456-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/60456-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0902f3f..0000000 --- a/old/60456-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/60456-h/images/cover2.jpg b/old/60456-h/images/cover2.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fa67561..0000000 --- a/old/60456-h/images/cover2.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/60456-h/images/frontis.jpg b/old/60456-h/images/frontis.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 04d0915..0000000 --- a/old/60456-h/images/frontis.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/60456-h/images/p076.jpg b/old/60456-h/images/p076.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7cb8fe4..0000000 --- a/old/60456-h/images/p076.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/60456-h/images/p226.jpg b/old/60456-h/images/p226.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fb38e12..0000000 --- a/old/60456-h/images/p226.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/60456-h/images/p300.jpg b/old/60456-h/images/p300.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 54f14bc..0000000 --- a/old/60456-h/images/p300.jpg +++ /dev/null |
